Sustainability Guide

blank page
Terms
Terms and conditions
Disclaimer
This scheme document is the property of BRE Global Limited and is made publicly available for information purposes only. Any
testing, assessment, certification or approval activity related to this scheme document must be conducted in accordance with
BRE Global Limited's approved processes, and such activity may only be undertaken by authorised employees, agents, and
associates of the Building Research Establishment Limited and BRE Global Limited, or approved parties. Any party wishing to
use or reproduce this scheme document to offer testing, assessment, certification or approval must apply to BRE Global
Limited for training, assessment and an associated licence, to qualify as an approved party; a fee will normally be charged. BRE
Global Limited will not unreasonably refuse such applications. BRE Global Limited accepts no responsibility for any
unauthorised use or distribution by others of this scheme document and may take legal action to prevent such unauthorised
use or distribution.
Copyright
The information and images contained in this document are the property of BRE Global Limited unless explicitly stated to the
contrary, and are protected by copyright laws. The information and images contained in this document may be downloaded
and printed without requiring specific permission but remains the intellectual property, technical know-how and copyrighted
material of BRE Global Limited. Such material is not to be used in a derogatory manner, in a misleading context or for
commercial purposes. Where such material is being issued to others, the source including the web address and copyright
status must be acknowledged. We may require you to register your details before downloading certain information or
documents.
Trade marks
BRE, BRE Global, BREEAM, Smartwaste and the Green Guide are all trademarks owned by either BRE or BRE Global Limited and
may not be used without written permission from BRE or BRE Global Limited.
Acknowledgements
BREEAM New Construction: Infrastructure (pilot) has been made possible through the continued efforts of many dedicated
BRE Group staff members, the BRE Global Limited governing body, the BRE Global Limited standing panel of experts, BREEAM
Assessors and those who have responded to our consultation calls and meetings or provided feedback in other ways. BRE
Global Limited also extends its gratitude to those who support BREEAM by continuing to specify and apply the method and
contribute towards a sustainable built environment.
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only.
BRE Global Ltd Pilot.
Technical Manual: Version: SD219 Issue: 2.0 Issue Date: 12/11/2015 i

Table of contents BREEAM New Construction: Infrastructure (International pilot)
Table of contents
Table of contents ii
List of tables v
List of figures vii
About BRE Global Limited 1
About this scheme document 2
Introduction to BREEAM 3
Scope of BREEAM New Construction Infrastructure (pilot) scheme 12
Scoring and rating BREEAM assessed infrastructure 19
BREEAM evidential requirements 26
Integrated design 34
ID 01 Option appraisal and objectives 36
ID 02 Project team collaboration 44
ID 03 Handover and aftercare 49
ID 04 Ecosystem services 53
ID 05 Whole life costing 58
ID 06 Whole life environmental impacts 64
Resilience 73
Res 01 Business continuity 76
Res 02 Risk assessment and mitigation 79
Res 03 Designing for future needs 93
Res 04 Surface water run-off 98
Res 05 Durability 104
Stakeholders 107
ST 01 Consultation plan 109
ST 02 Consultation and engagement 114
ST 03 Responsible construction practices 120
ST 04 Owner operator requirements 125
Local wellbeing 128
LW 01 Economic impact 129
LW 02 Social impact 137
Transport 146
Tra 01 Transport impact assessment 147
Tra 02 Travel and logistics plan 153
ii Technical Manual: Version: SD219 Issue: 2.0 Issue Date: 12/11/2015

Table of contents
Tra 03 Transport connectivity 159
Land use and ecology 162
LUE 01 Land use and value 164
LUE 02 Soil and vegetation management 169
LUE 03 Remediation of land contamination 172
LUE 04 Ecological impact assessment and action plan 177
LUE 05 Protection of biodiversity 183
LUE 06 Enhancement of biodiversity 187
LUE 07 Land use changes 192
Landscape and heritage 197
LSH 01 Landscape and visual impact 198
LSH 02 Heritage assets 204
Pollution 209
Pol 01 Air quality 211
Pol 02 Water pollution 218
Pol 03 Noise and vibration 228
Pol 04 Light pollution 237
Materials 242
Mat 01 Environmental life cycle impacts 244
Mat 02 Responsible sourcing of materials 253
Mat 03 Materials efficiency 264
Mat 04 Reuse and recycling 273
Carbon and energy 281
CE 01 Carbon and energy strategy 282
CE 02 Construction site carbon and energy 287
CE 03 Operational carbon and energy 294
Waste 300
Wst 01 Construction waste management 301
Water 310
Wat 01 Water efficiency planning and implementation 311
Wat 02 Water monitoring 316
Innovation 319
Appendices 321
Appendix A - Strategic and project detail stages links 322
Appendix B - The Approved Standards and Weightings List (ASWL) 327
Technical Manual: Version: SD219 Issue: 2.0 Issue Date: 12/11/2015 iii
Table of contents BREEAM New Construction: Infrastructure (International pilot)
Appendix C 329
Appendix D 336
Endnotes 347
Index 349
Glossary 351
iv Technical Manual: Version: SD219 Issue: 2.0 Issue Date: 12/11/2015

List of tables
List of tables
Table 1: BREEAM New Construction: Infrastructure (pilot) sections and assessment issues 6
Table 2List of infrastructure asset types covered under : BREEAM New Construction: Infrastructure (pilot) 12
Table 3: BREEAM rating benchmarks 19
Table 4: Minimum standards for BREEAM in Infrastructure 20
Table 5: Example calculation for BREEAM Infrastructure rating 23
Table 6: Minimum standards for a BREEAM 'Very Good' rating 24
Table 7BREEAM evidence principles 28
Table 8Document and evidence types 30
Table 9: Strategic BREEAM objectives 38
Table 10: 'Likelihood of impact' scoring system 54
Table 11: The Millennium Ecosystem Assessment classification of ecosystem services 55
Table 12: Standards and data used to inform the carbon footprint (criterion 4 only) 65
Table 13: Approach to risk assessment and mitigation 81
Table 14: Allowance for climate change according to annual probability of flooding 99
Table 15: Environmental factors and material degradation effects to consider 105
Table 16: Credits associated with implementation of measures that create local positive economic impact 130
Table 17: Measures for creating positive local economic impact and examples of their implementation 131
Table 18: Credits associated with implementation of measures that enhance local social impact 138
Table 19: Examples of measures that could be implemented to enhance local social impact 139
Table 20: Credits associated with implementation of measures that enhance local social impact for projects of a
simple nature 143
Table 21: Considerations for mitigation measures to be included as part of the transport impact assessment for the
construction of the asset 148
operation of the asset 149
Table 23: Aspects of enhanced transport connectivity 160
Table 24: Sizes of quadrat for higher plant weighted area average species richness 188
Table 25: Expected change in land type areas 194
Table 26: Factors associated with changes in carbon stock as a result of land use changes 195
Table 27: Credits associated with the landscape character and visual impact recommendations implemented 199
Table 28: Construction stage implementation of good practice surface water and groundwater pollution prevention
measures 220
Table 29: Operational stage implementation of good practice surface water and groundwater pollution prevention
measures 221
Table 30 : Credits associated with reduction in operational noise and vibration 230
Technical Manual: Version: SD219 Issue: 2.0 Issue Date: 12/11/2015 v

List of tables BREEAM New Construction: Infrastructure (International pilot)
Table 31: The Noise Exposure Hierarchy 230
Table 32: Recommendations for maximum luminance (CD/[m2]) 238
Table 33: Environmental zone descriptions 238
Table 34: Indicators to be reported on a full life cycle assessment 246
Table 35: Standards and data used to inform the carbon footprint (criterion 4 only) 247
Table 36: Key elements of an infrastructure asset 247
Table 37: Credits available based on percentage RSM points achieved 254
Table 38: Components and material categories 254
Table 39: Credits available based on percentage RSM points achieved 257
Table 40: Example calculation for Route 1 - point allocation and award of credits 258
Table 41: Example calculation for Route 2 for permanent stone or aggregate materials 259
Table 42: Example calculation for combining Route 1 & 2 - point allocation and award of credits 259
Table 43: Minimum levels (by weight and volume) of high grade aggregate specified per application (where present)
that is recycled or secondary aggregate 275
Table 44: Reporting total carbon equivalent and primary energy consumption in reference to the asset's capacity 283
Table 45: Credits associated with energy and carbon savings from construction activities 288
Table 46: Construction activities energy efficiency and carbon saving considerations 288
Table 47: Construction stage light fitting efficiencies 293
Table 48: Credits associated with energy and carbon savings as a result of the operation of the asset 295
Table 49: Operational energy saving considerations 295
Table 50: Operational light fitting efficiencies 299
Table 51: Diversion of non-hazardous waste from landfill benchmarks 303
Table 52: On-site waste minimisation features 303
Table 53: Construction waste groups 304
Table 54: Strategy and project detail links 322
Table 55: Safe and adequate access requirements 329
Table 56: Good neighbour requirements 330
Table 57: Environmentally aware requirements 332
Table 58: Safe and considerate working environment requirements 334
Table 59: Fleet operator management requirements 336
Table 60: Fleet operator vehicle requirements 338
Table 61: Fleet operator driver requirements 340
Table 62: Fleet operator health, safety and wellbeing requirements 341
Table 63: Fleet operator operation requirements 344
vi Technical Manual: Version: SD219 Issue: 2.0 Issue Date: 12/11/2015

Figures
List of figures
Figure 1 The BREEAM Certification mark 4
Figure 2 BREEAM assessment and certification stages and the UK BIM Task Groups Digital Plan of Work (DPoW) 9
Figure 3 Structure and scope of BREEAM New Construction: Infrastructure (pilot) scheme 17
Figure 4 Life cycle stages as defined in EN 15978 71
Figure 5 Assessment linkage between ID 06 Whole life environmental impacts and Mat 01 Environmental life cycle
impacts and available credits 252
Figure 6 Examples of lean tools and activities and where they can add value 267
Technical Manual: Version: SD219 Issue: 2.0 Issue Date: 12/11/2015 vii
blank page
About
About BRE Global Limited

BRE Global Limited (part of the BRE (Building Research Establishment) Group) is an independent third party approvals body
offering certification of fire, security and sustainability products and services to an international market.
BRE Global Limited's mission is to 'Protect People, Property and the Planet'.
We aim to achieve this by:
1. Researching and writing standards

2. Testing and certification in the areas of fire, electronics, security and sustainability
3. Developing world leading sustainability assessment methods
4. Undertaking research and consultancy for clients and regulators
5. Promulgating standards and knowledge throughout the industry through publications and events
6. Developing and delivering training.
BRE Global Limited's product testing and approvals are carried out by recognised experts in our world renowned testing
laboratories.
BRE Global Limited is custodian of a number of world leading brands including:
1. Building Research Establishment's Environmental Assessment Method (BREEAM) - the world's leading environmental
assessment method for buildings
2. Loss Prevention Certification Board (LPCB) for approval of fire and security products and services.
BRE Global Limited is a trading subsidiary of the BRE Trust, the registered research and education charity which owns the BRE
Group.
BRE Global Limited

Bucknalls Lane
Watford
Hertfordshire
WD25 9XX
T +44 (0)333 321 8811
F +44 (0)1923 664 910
E enquiries@breglobal.com
www.breglobal.comwww.greenbooklive.com
Technical Manual: Version: SD219 Issue: 2.0 Issue Date: 12/11/2015 1

About this document BREEAM New Construction: Infrastructure (International pilot)
About this scheme document

This document is the technical manual for the BREEAM New Construction: Infrastructure (pilot) scheme. It describes an
environmental performance standard against which new, infrastructure assets can be assessed and achieve a BREEAM New
Construction: Infrastructure (pilot) rating.
The Scheme Document and the information detailed within is intended for use by trained, qualified and licensed BREEAM
Infrastructure Assessors in accordance with the procedural and operational requirements of BREEAM (as described in the
BREEAM and CSH: Operational Guidance, SD5070) under the terms and conditions of a BREEAM Infrastructure licence. This
document should be used by non-BREEAM Infrastructure Assessors for reference purposes only.
This document is the international (i.e. for projects outside of the UK) technical manual for the BREEAM New Construction:
Infrastructure (pilot) scheme. It describes an environmental performance standard against which new, infrastructure assets in
this territory can be assessed and achieve a BREEAM rating.
Changes to this BREEAM scheme document

This scheme document is subject to revision and can be reissued from time to time by BRE Global Limited. A schedule of the
publication date for each issue of this document is provided below.
Any additions to this document that necessitate its reissue (from version 2.0 onwards) will be made available within an
appendix in this document. Additions to earlier reissues have been issued to pilot projects current at the time.
Fundamental changes to assessment criteria are typically made as part of a formal scheme update, resulting in a new BREEAM
scheme version.
Scheme Doc. Issue no. Date of issue
SD219 2.0 (current) 12/11/2015
2 Technical Manual: Version: SD219 Issue: 2.0 Issue Date: 12/11/2015

Introduction
Introduction to BREEAM
BREEAM (Building Research Establishment's Environmental Assessment Method) is the world's first sustainability rating
scheme for the built environment and has contributed much to the strong focus in the UK on sustainability in design,
construction and use. BREEAM is now an international standard that is locally adapted, operated and applied through a
network of international operators, assessors and industry professionals. Through its application and use BREEAM helps
clients measure and reduce their environmental impacts and in doing so create higher value, lower risk assets.
To date, BREEAM has been used to certify over 425,000 building and master planning assessments across the life cycle of
these projects and it is being applied in over 60 countries. This methodology is now being applied to infrastructure assets.
Aims of BREEAM
To mitigate the life cycle impacts of infrastructure assets on the environment
To enable infrastructure assets to be recognised according to their sustainability benefits
To provide a credible, environmental label for infrastructure assets
To stimulate demand and create value for sustainable infrastructure assets, products and supply chains.
Objectives of BREEAM
To provide market recognition of infrastructure assets with a low environmental impact
To ensure best environmental practice is incorporated in the planning, design, construction and operation of
infrastructure assets and the wider built environment
To define a robust, cost effective performance standard surpassing that required by regulations
To challenge the market to provide innovative, cost effective solutions that minimise the environmental impact of
infrastructure assets
To raise awareness amongst owners, occupants, designers and operators of the benefits and value of infrastructure
assets with a reduced life cycle impact on the environment
To allow organisations to demonstrate progress towards corporate sustainability objectives.
BREEAM is developed and operated to meet the following underlying principles:
Ensure environmental quality through an accessible, holistic and balanced measure of environmental impacts
Use quantified measures for determining environmental quality
Adopt a flexible approach that encourages and rewards positive outcomes, avoiding prescribed solutions
Use robust science and best practice as the basis for quantifying and calibrating a cost effective and rigorous
performance standard for defining environmental quality
Reflect the social and economic benefits of meeting the environmental objectives covered
Provide a common international framework of assessment that is tailored to meet the 'local' context including
regulation, climate and sector
Integrate construction professionals in the development and operational processes to ensure wide understanding
and accessibility
Adopt third party certification to ensure independence, credibility and consistency of the label
Adopt existing industry tools, practices and other standards wherever possible to support developments in policy
and technology, build on existing skills and understanding and minimise costs
Align technically and operationally with relevant international standards, including the suite of standards on the
'Sustainability of Construction Works' prepared by the European Committee for Standardisation Technical
Committee CEN/TC 350
Engage with a representative range of stakeholders to inform ongoing development in accordance with the
underlying principles and the pace of change in performance standards (accounting for policy, regulation and market
capability).

Introduction BREEAM New Construction: Infrastructure (International pilot)
The aims, objectives and principles of BREEAM are embodied within a Core Technical Standard owned and managed by BRE
Global Limited. This is applied through a suite of BREEAM Schemes covering aspects of the built environment life cycle. These
schemes are locally developed and operated by a number of different organisations, called National Scheme Operators
(NSOs), across a range of countries.
For a full list of BREEAM National Scheme Operators and Schemes visit www.breeam.org.
The UK BREEAM Schemes

BRE Global Limited is the National Scheme Operator of BREEAM in the UK. BRE Global also develops and manages the pan-
country BREEAM International schemes. We develop and operate a number of BREEAM schemes, each designed to assess the
environmental performance of different project types at various stages in the life cycle, and these include:
BREEAM Communities for the master-planning of a larger community of buildings

BREEAM International New Construction for new build, domestic and non-domestic buildings
BREEAM International In-Use for existing non-domestic buildings in-use
BREEAM International Refurbishment and Fit-out for non-domestic building refurbishments and fit-outs
BREEAM Infrastructure for infrastructure projects.
Independent BREEAM Assessors, trained, qualified and licensed by BRE Global Limited can undertake a BREEAM assessment
using this Scheme Document and associated reporting and calculation tools.
Once an assessment is complete and quality assured BRE Global Limited will issue a BREEAM certificate. The BREEAM certificate
provides formal verification that the assessor has completed an assessment in accordance with the requirements of the
scheme and its quality standards and procedures.
A BREEAM certificate provides assurance to any interested party that a BREEAM rating, at the time of certification, accurately
reflects an asset's performance against the BREEAM standard.
Anyone wishing to verify the BREEAM rating of an asset can do so by either checking its BREEAM certificate, which will contain
the certification mark, as shown in Figure 1 , or by searching the BREEAM listings on www.greenbooklive.com.
Figure 1 The BREEAM Certification mark

Introduction
Ensuring quality and consistency

All BREEAM Schemes are developed and operated by National Scheme Operators in accordance with the Code for a
Sustainable Built Environment. The Code for a Sustainable Built Environment is a set of strategic principles and requirements
which define an integrated approach to the design, management, evaluation and certification of the environmental, social
and economic impacts of the built environment.
The Code is interpreted through the BREEAM Core Process and Technical Standards. These linked documents set out the
requirements that a compliant scheme must meet in order to be affiliated with the Code. The Standards ensure that a
common scientific and performance basis is used by all compliant schemes operated by National Scheme Operators, while
ensuring that these are relevant to local demands, standards and practices.
The Code and associated standards are developed and maintained by BRE Global Limited with direction from the BREEAM
Strategy Board, under the auspices of the BRE Global Governing Board.
To ensure independence, competence and impartiality, all National Scheme Operators are required to maintain scheme
operations accredited to International Standards. In the UK and pan-country international schemes, current BRE Global Limited
BREEAM schemes are accredited by the United Kingdom Accreditation Service (UKAS) to:
BS EN ISO 17024 (Conformity assessment - General requirements for bodies operating certification of persons) for
BREEAM Assessors
BS EN 45011 (General requirements for bodies operating product certification systems) for the complete BREEAM
assessment process.
BRE Global Limited will operate this infrastructure pilot scheme in accordance with the same procedures and will achieve
accreditation in due course.
BRE Global Limited is also certified to ISO 9001 for all its BREEAM related activities.
As a certification body accredited by UKAS, BRE Global Limited maintains an open and accountable governance structure. The
operation of BREEAM is overseen by an independent Governing Body and a Standing Panel for Peer & Market Review.
The Governing Body represents stakeholder interests to ensure, amongst other things, that we at BRE Global Limited are
acting independently and impartially, operating our processes correctly, and treating our customers fairly.
The Standing Panel provides BRE Global Limited with access to a range of experts that can review BRE Global Limited's
standards and schemes to ensure their robustness from a scientific, technical and market perspective as well as ensuring the
development of the standards and schemes is open to greater external and independent scrutiny.

BREEAM Infrastructure
The BREEAM New Construction: Infrastructure (pilot) scheme is a performance based assessment method and certification
scheme for new infrastructure assets.
The primary aim of BREEAM New Construction: Infrastructure (pilot) is to mitigate the life cycle impacts of new infrastructure
assets on the environment and improve positive social and economic impacts. This is achieved through integration and use of
the scheme by clients and their project teams at key stages in the design and construction process.
This enables the client, through the BREEAM Assessor and the BRE Global certification process, to measure, evaluate and
reflect the performance of their new infrastructure asset against best practice in an independent and robust manner.
This performance is quantified by a number of individual measures and associated criteria stretching across a range of
economic, social and environmental issues, refer to Table 1, which is ultimately expressed as a single certified BREEAM rating.
Table 1: BREEAM New Construction: Infrastructure (pilot) sections and assessment issues
Issue title Issue title
Integrated Design Resilience
ID 01 Option appraisal and objectives Res 01 Business continuity
ID 02 Project team collaboration Res 02 Risk assessment and mitigation
ID 03 Handover and aftercare Res 03 Designing for future needs
ID 04 Ecosystem services Res 04 Surface water run-off
ID 05 Whole life costing Res 05 Durability
ID 06 Whole life environmental impacts Local wellbeing
Stakeholders LW 01 Economic impact
ST 01 Consultation plan LW 02 Social impact
ST 02 Consultation and engagement Transport
ST 03 Responsible construction practices Tra 01 Transport impact assessment
ST 04 Owner operator requirements Tra 02 Travel and logistics plan
Land use and ecology Tra 03 Transport connectivity
LUE 01 Land use and value Landscape and heritage
LUE 02 Soil and vegetation management LSH 01 Landscape and visual impact

Introduction
LUE 03 Remediation of land contamination LSH 02 Heritage assets
LUE 04 Ecological impact assessment and action plan Materials
LUE 05 Protection of biodiversity Mat 01 Environmental life cycle impacts
LUE 06 Enhancement of biodiversity Mat 02 Responsible sourcing of materials
LUE 07 Land use changes Mat 03 Materials efficiency
Pollution Mat 04 Reuse and recycling
Pol 01 Air quality Waste
Pol 02 Water pollution Wst 01 Construction waste management
Pol 03 Noise and vibration Water
Pol 04 Light pollution Wat 01 Water efficiency planning and implementation
Carbon and energy Wat 02 Water monitoring
CE 01 Carbon and energy strategy
CE 02 Construction site carbon and energy
CE 03 Operational carbon and energy

Engagement with BREEAM New Construction: Infrastructure (International pilot)
BREEAM
When and how to engage with the BREEAM New Construction:

Infrastructure (pilot) scheme
Timing the engagement with and use of the BREEAM New Construction: Infrastructure (pilot) scheme via the BREEAM Assessor
is essential for ensuring seamless integration of the methodology in the new construction process. Without this, the ability to
optimise the infrastructure assets environmental performance while ensuring the cost effectiveness of achieving the desired
BREEAM rating will be compromised. Appointing a BREEAM Assessor early in the project will help in achieving the target rating
without undue impacts on the flexibility of design decisions, budgets and the potential to influence solutions.
Figure 2 serves to highlight the link between the BREEAM New Construction: Infrastructure (pilot) assessment and certification
stages and the project work stage. The numbers in the diagram refer to UK Building Information Model (BIM) Task Group's
Digital Plan of Work (DPoW), which is in alignment with ISO 12006 (Part 2 Framework for classification - Organization of
information about construction works).
This figure can assist clients in timing their engagement with BREEAM and the appointment of a BREEAM Assessor.
It is important to recognise that BREEAM primarily reflects the overall performance of the asset rather than just the
opportunities or limitations placed on specific stakeholders involved in the project. This means that the client, design team,
principal contractor and BREEAM Assessor, as well as other specialist disciplines, have an important role to play throughout
the new construction process, if the desired performance level is to be achieved and reflected through the certified BREEAM
rating.
The onus of orientating the brief towards sustainability needs is to come first and foremost from the client. To facilitate this,
BRE Global recommends that clients and their project teams engage with a BREEAM Assessor no later than the briefing stage.
This will ensure that realistic targets are set and can be met, appropriate responsibilities can be defined and understood and
low or no cost solutions to create positive environmental, social and economic impacts can be sought and applied wherever
possible.

Engagement with
BREEAM
Figure 2 BREEAM assessment and certification stages and the UK BIM Task Groups Digital Plan of Work (DPoW)

How to use the BREEAM New Construction Infrastructure Scheme

This BREEAM Scheme Document is a technical document which has been created to:
1. Enable qualified and licensed BREEAM Assessors to complete BREEAM assessments and determine a rating
2. Enable BRE Global Ltd to complete quality assurance reviews of a BREEAM Assessor's assessment report, in accordance
with the standards to which BRE Global Ltd is accredited
3. Act as a reference for clients and members of the project team whose proposed asset is being BREEAM assessed.
The scheme document is split into six parts:
1. Introduction to BREEAM
2. Scope of BREEAM New Construction Infrastructure (pilot) scheme
3. Scoring and rating BREEAM assessed infrastructure, including minimum standards
4. BREEAM evidential requirements
5. Assessment criteria
6. Appendices.
The Scope section describes the types of asset and stages of assessment that this version of the BREEAM New Construction:
Infrastructure (pilot) scheme can be applied to. The Scope section can be used by clients and BREEAM Assessors to check
whether this is the correct BREEAM scheme to use for their project.
The Scoring and rating section illustrates how an asset's assessed performance is measured and rated. It outlines the BREEAM
rating level benchmarks, the minimum BREEAM standards for each rating level and the BREEAM environmental section
weightings. It also includes a description of the BREEAM assessment issues and 'credits', including BREEAM 'Innovation credits',
and how performance against these is calculated and expressed as a BREEAM rating.
Please note that, for the purpose of formal assessment and certification, the asset's BREEAM performance must be
determined by the BREEAM Assessor using the relevant BREEAM reporting and calculation tools.
The BREEAM evidential requirements section provides guidance to assessors and project teams on the various types and
forms of evidence required by the BREEAM Assessor to demonstrate compliance with BREEAM criteria. This includes a
description of why BREEAM requires an auditable trail of evidence, a table of general types of information produced during a
project, and therefore typically required and used as evidence of compliance, and guidance on the differing forms of evidence
that can be used and at what stages of the assessment, such as letters of commitment.
The Assessment criteria section includes the 43 BREEAM assessment issues, categorised in 12 environmental sections. Each
issue defines a level of performance (the assessment criteria) against which the assessed infrastructure asset demonstrates
compliance (using appropriate project information, i.e. evidence) in order to achieve a corresponding number of available
BREEAM credits.
The majority of BREEAM issues and credits are tradable, meaning that a client and their project team can pick and choose
which to target in order to build their BREEAM performance score and achieve the desired BREEAM rating. Several BREEAM
issues have minimum standards, meaning that to achieve a particular BREEAM rating specific credits or criteria must be
achieved (BREEAM's minimum standards are outlined in Scoring and rating BREEAM assessed infrastructure).
Each BREEAM issue is structured as follows:
1. Issue information: This contains the assessment issue reference, title, number of credits available1 and whether the issue
forms part of BREEAM's minimum standards.
2. Aim: This outlines the broad objective of the issue and the impact it measures or mitigates.
3. Assessment criteria: This outlines the good or best practice performance level benchmarks and criteria. Where the asset
complies with the assessment criteria, as determined by the BREEAM Assessor, the relevant number of BREEAM credits
can be awarded. Some issues have prerequisites; to ensure an asset demonstrates a standard level of practice before
targeting good or best practice performance (refer to Scoring and rating BREEAM assessed infrastructure for more
details). Some issues have Exemplary Level Criteria; where an asset demonstrates that it meets exemplary level of
performance, a BREEAM Innovation credit can be awarded (refer to the Innovation section for more details). Up to a
maximum of 10 Innovation credits are available.

Introduction
4. Checklists and tables: This section contains any checklists and tables referenced in the assessment criteria section. This
can include tables of benchmarks or asset type specific performance criteria.
5. Compliance notes: These notes provide additional guidance that supports the application and interpretation of the
main assessment criteria, including how to assess compliance in a particular location or for a particular asset or situation.
6. Methodology: This section includes a description of any methodology used to determine the number of BREEAM
credits achieved for a given level of performance. It includes, for example, calculation procedures or guidance on how
non-BREEAM schemes, standards or qualifications referenced in the assessment criteria relate to those criteria.
7. Evidence: This section describes the types of project information that must be provided by the design team or client and
given to the BREEAM Assessor to enable verification of the asset's performance against the assessment criteria and so
justify the award of the relevant number of BREEAM credits. The BREEAM evidential requirements section provides
further guidance on evidential requirements.
8. Additional information: This section contains any further information relevant to the application of the assessment
criteria, including any definition of terms used in the assessment issue or sources of additional information that may be
of use in addressing the issue.
The Appendices provide supporting information.

Scope BREEAM New Construction: Infrastructure (International pilot)
Scope of BREEAM New Construction Infrastructure
(pilot) scheme
This version of the infrastructure scheme is a pilot scheme designed to assess all new infrastructure assets including those
identified in Table 2.
Table 2List of infrastructure asset types covered under : BREEAM New Construction: Infrastructure (pilot)
Project type Project subtype
Aviation Runway
Associated assets
Energy Renewables - biomass, solar, tidal, wind
Refineries
Power stations - coal, gas, nuclear, oil
Transmission and distribution - pylons
Data and communication Cables - broadband, telecoms
Marine and coastal Flood defence
Harbours or ports
Offshore platform
Offshore wind farm
Sea defence
Outfall
Structures Bridge or viaduct
Platform
Retaining wall
Tunnel

Scope
Project type Project subtype
Transport Rail
Road
Tram
Water Water distribution - potable, non-potable, combined
Water treatment works
Other Contact BRE.
Assessments of other project types should be undertaken using BREEAM Buildings New Construction, Refurbishment and Fit-
out and In Use for buildings or BREEAM Communities for master planning projects.
Please note that BRE Global Limited is exploring how scores from different BREEAM schemes can be combined to provide an
overall asset rating.
A pilot scheme
This scheme will operate as a pilot to gain feedback from projects being assessed to ensure that the criteria can be applied
appropriately to a wide range of infrastructure assets. Learning from projects assessed during this time will inform the
development of a formal UKAS accredited infrastructure bespoke scheme.
The pilot infrastructure scheme operates in a similar way to other BREEAM schemes, but with an element of initial 'bespoking'
to ensure that the criteria are relevant to the project being assessed.
The bespoke process

In the bespoke process, BREEAM criteria are selected for the asset type. Amendments and additions to the standard criteria
may also be appropriate to reflect the unique nature, use and sustainability opportunities of the asset and the location.
Although the bespoke method involves adapting criteria for individual projects, it still adheres to some basic principles in
terms of BREEAM structure, credit method and content to ensure the credibility of BREEAM is maintained. The basic principles
are as follows:
Generic assessment criteria from the BREEAM Infrastructure scheme will form a large part of the criteria set
Where necessary, these are made relevant to the asset's function and local context through minor alterations
Where it is not appropriate for criteria to be applied, they will be filtered out
Sector and country specific codes and standards can be incorporated where necessary.
Please note the purpose of 'bespoking' the criteria is not:
To remove those assessment criteria that may be difficult to achieve for the project; or
To develop new assessment criteria or extensive new guidance for existing criteria unless this is determined to be
beneficial to the sustainability of the development. This should be discussed with BRE Global when applying for
bespoke pilot criteria.
The final outputs from this process will be included in a bespoke project criteria appendix that must be used alongside the
generic criteria within this scheme manual to assess the asset. Refer to the Bespoke Process Guidance Note for further details
(refer to www.breeam.org/projects).

Life cycle stages not covered by the BREEAM New Construction:

The BREEAM New Construction: Infrastructure (pilot) scheme is not designed for, and therefore is not appropriate to assess,
the environmental impacts of infrastructure assets at the following life cycle stages:
Early stage 'optioneering' to determine the solution to an identified need, e.g. the need to transport people from one
place to another should be via road, rather than rail, river or air
Existing asset refurbishment and fit-out
Existing assets in operation
Existing asset deconstruction.
For any enquiries about assessing assets at these stages, please contact BRE.
Life cycle stages covered by the BREEAM New Construction:

This BREEAM New Construction: Infrastructure (pilot) scheme can be used to assess and rate the environmental impacts
arising from a newly constructed asset (including external site areas) at the following life cycle stages:
1. New asset strategic assessment stage (SAS) leading to confirmation of the strategic assessment score
2. New asset design stage (DS) leading to an interim BREEAM rating and certificate of assessment
3. New asset post-construction stage (PCS) leading to a final BREEAM rating and certificate of assessment.
Criteria for the first stage are referred to as 'Strategic' and criteria for the second and third stages are referred to as 'Project
detail'.
Strategic assessment stage (SAS)

The strategic assessment is carried out at the earliest stages of a project, e.g. Strategy, Brief and Concept, but after the initial
'optioneering' process is completed. The aim of the SAS is to encourage projects to identify and maximise opportunities at the
earliest stages of a project.
There is no actual or promised level of performance at this stage, so the quality audit will confirm the strategic assessment
score only.
Project detail assessment: Design stage (DS)

The DS assessment and interim BREEAM rating confirms the proposed new asset's performance at the design stage of the life
cycle. Assessment and ideally certification will occur prior to the beginning of construction on site. The BREEAM rating at this
stage is labelled as 'interim' because it does not represent the asset's final, new construction BREEAM performance.
To complete an assessment at this stage, the design must be advanced to a point where the relevant design information is
available to enable the BREEAM Assessor to evaluate and verify the asset's performance against the criteria defined in this
Scheme Document. The interim DS assessment will therefore be completed and certified at the scheme design or detailed
design stages.
Project detail assessment: post-construction stage (PCS)

The PCS assessment and BREEAM rating confirms the final 'as built' performance of the asset at the new construction stage of
the life cycle. A final PCS assessment is completed and certified after practical completion of the construction works.
There are two approaches to assessment at the post-construction stage:
A post-construction review (PCR) based on a completed interim design stage assessment

A post-construction assessment (PCA).

Scope
A PCR serves to confirm that the asset's 'as built' performance and rating is in accordance with the assessment certified at the
interim design stage. Where an interim DS assessment has not been carried out, i.e. certified, and a BREEAM assessment and
rating is required, a full post-construction stage assessment can be conducted.
Assessing the project at the strategy and project detail stages

The BREEAM infrastructure assessment includes criteria to be assessed at the strategic stage to ensure opportunities are
identified at the early stages of a project to increase the sustainable credentials of the asset. Ideally these opportunities are
then taken forward to the detail stages of the design process and implemented. Approximately 20% of the assessment
score relates to the strategic stage criteria reflecting the importance of integrating sustainability at this early stage.
Where strategic credits are not achieved, or a BREEAM assessment is initiated after the concept stage, the assessment of the
project detail credits is therefore affected. Further details of how each issue must be assessed where strategic credits are
withheld are detailed in Appendix A - Strategic and project detail stages links.
Projects and subprojects

For some infrastructure projects, the strategic and project detail stage criteria will be applied to the whole project, therefore
one overall score will be achieved for the project. However for other infrastructure projects, such as some nationally significant
infrastructure projects, it may be more appropriate to split the project into a series of subprojects and assess these
individually.
When a project uses the latter approach, the strategic criteria should still be assessed for the whole project. The score
achieved at the strategic assessment stage is transferred to each subproject and the project detail criteria assessed at a
subproject level. The strategic assessment score for the whole project is then added to the project detail score for the
subproject resulting in an overall score for the subproject assessment.
Whole projects may be split where the sustainability outcomes for different subprojects may be different. For example,
where:
1. Different project teams or contractors are developing sections of the project and therefore are approaching design or
construction in a different way across the project
2. The project is assessed across numerous sites (e.g. linear projects) where the impacts of the project will have varying
impact on the sustainability issues covered within this scheme.
Where a client wishes to split their project for a reason not listed above, (for example in the case of separately tendered
enabling works), BRE Global Limited should be contacted. As the scheme is piloted, it is envisaged that the above options for
splitting a project will be refined.
In addition, at the time of writing BRE Global Limited is determining how subproject scores can be amalgamated to produce
an overall score or rating for the whole project. This is likely to follow a methodology that weights the sustainability impact of
each subproject when combining subproject scores.
Application of system boundaries in BREEAM Infrastructure

Infrastructure assets exist as part of a complex system-of-systems and this means that the boundary of a BREEAM
Infrastructure assessment what is included or excluded is not always immediately obvious. It is necessary to establish this
system boundary for BREEAM infrastructure assessments to provide a fair, accurate, and comparable assessment of the
design and construction of new infrastructure assets.
Due to the variety of activities and impacts that are addressed within the scheme, BREEAM does not define a single, overall
boundary for a project (or subproject). Instead, the necessary boundaries vary by assessment issue. These are defined within
the technical requirements of the scheme by one or more of the following:

Explicit geographical, temporal, or functional limits

National or international standards
National industry or government best practice guidance
Described, BREEAM specific methodologies
Specific minimum requirements for content or activities
Consultation with relevant stakeholders
Deferral to the judgement of a suitably qualified professional
The judgement of the project team with verification from a licensed BREEAM Assessor.
The adopted boundaries are designed to support the individual issue aims and the overall aims and objectives of this BREEAM
scheme. In some cases there is greater flexibility in the definitions so that assessments remain feasible or so that unforeseen
scenarios are not inappropriately excluded.
Where judgement is required to establish a boundary, either from a BREEAM Assessor or a suitably qualified professional,
then the following questions should be considered:
Does including this within the assessment support the issue aim?
Will including this better reflect the achieved as-built performance of the asset?
Is the inclusion of this feasible, justifiable, and proportional?
In some cases it is appropriate to simplify boundaries to ensure that an assessment remains proportional to the scale of a
project and its associated impacts. The boundaries as currently defined within BREEAM Infrastructure are often scalable in this
way, including where the decision has been deferred to the judgement of a suitably qualified professional. In some instances
the method of establishing the boundary can be particularly complex or challenging (e.g. require specialist expertise) and
alternative requirements are given for projects where this level of complexity is not appropriate.
A final common principle in establishing boundaries in BREEAM Infrastructure is that benefits arising from the intended
function of an asset are excluded. This is because these benefits have already been used to justify the decision to proceed with
the project a decision that is also outside of the scope of this scheme. However, as the scheme is assessing how a project
achieves its intended function, it does consider actions that affect operational performance.
Projects of a simple nature

BRE Global Limited is currently piloting how the BREEAM criteria will specifically apply to projects of a simple nature. Simplified
criteria are being developed and informed by the piloting process. The aim of these criteria is to allow projects that are
relatively simple, small or both to innovate and improve their sustainability performance, in a way that is cost effective and
appropriate to the project. Determining whether 'simplified criteria' are applicable to the project will form part of the
'bespoking' process discussed above.
Integrated design
The Integrated design (ID) section sits within the strategy and project management group of BREEAM Infrastructure. It is the
only process related section, the other 11 are all technical. The Integrated design section seeks to reward activities within the
design and construction process that are carried out in an integrated and holistic way, e.g. considering a range of technical
alternatives during options appraisal and agreeing targets and outcomes with all contributors to the process, at an early
stage in the project life. There are a greater number of strategic issues within Integrated design compared with the technical
sections, as these address wider scope and process related issues for which optimum outcomes result from early
consideration. There are also strategic issues within the technical sections, and these should be carried out in parallel with
some of the strategic Integrated design issues, for example the options appraisal process (within Integrated design) and
carbon strategy (within Carbon and energy) are best addressed in parallel, each informing the other as ideas and concepts
become more defined. The aim of the Integrated design section is to reward and encourage early involvement of project
team stakeholders, integrated team working, whole life and systems thinking. Using these approaches, the project team are
informed how each of the technical sections could be addressed and which of the project detail criteria should be targeted.
Figure 3 illustrates how the Integrated design section links to the other technical sections.

Scope
Figure 3 Structure and scope of BREEAM New Construction: Infrastructure (pilot) scheme
The use of national best practice standards

Certain criteria in BREEAM require compliance with national best practice standards or guidance or to exceed national
regulation or legislation. BRE have defined specific International, European or UK standards that can be used by the project
team to demonstrate compliance with these requirements. However, in some countries there may be national or local
equivalents of these standards that are familiar to the project teams designing and constructing new infrastructure assets.
In these cases there is the opportunity for the assessor and project team to substitute these with national or local standards
using the Approved Standards and Weightings List (ASWL).
Further information on the ASWL and which issues this is applicable to is detailed in Appendix B - The Approved Standards and
Weightings List (ASWL). Further details on the procedure for submitting standards for inclusion in the ASWL is included in the
BREEAM Operational Guidance available on the BREEAM Projects website www.breeam.org/projects/.

Scoring and rating BREEAM New Construction: Infrastructure (International pilot)

Scoring and rating
Scoring and rating BREEAM assessed infrastructure

There are a number of elements that determine the overall performance of a new infrastructure project assessed using
BREEAM, these are as follows:
The BREEAM rating level benchmarks

The minimum BREEAM standards
The environmental section weightings
The BREEAM assessment issues and credits.
How these elements combine to produce a BREEAM rating for a new asset is summarised on the following pages. This is
followed by a description and example describing the methodology for calculating a rating.
BREEAM rating benchmarks

The BREEAM rating benchmarks for projects assessed using the BREEAM New Construction: Infrastructure (pilot) scheme are
outlined in Table 3.
Table 3: BREEAM rating benchmarks
BREEAM rating % score
Outstanding 85
Excellent 70
Very good 55
Good 45
Pass 30
Unclassified < 30
The BREEAM benchmarks allow projects to set stretching targets, encourage innovation and provide an independent score to
demonstrate sustainable credentials. We would expect each BREEAM rating to represent performance equivalent to:
Outstanding: Less than the top 1% of new infrastructure assets (innovator)

Excellent: Top 10% of new infrastructure assets (best practice)
Very Good: Top 25% of new infrastructure assets (advanced good practice)
Good: Top 50% of new infrastructure assets (intermediate good practice)
Pass: Top 75% of new infrastructure assets (standard good practice).
This will be tested throughout the pilot process to inform the development of the scoring process if necessary.
An unclassified BREEAM rating represents performance that is non-compliant with BREEAM, as it fails to meet either the
BREEAM minimum standards of performance for key environmental issues or the overall threshold score required to achieve
at least a Pass rating.

Minimum Standards
To maintain a flexible system BREEAM adopts a 'balanced scorecard' approach to the assessment and rating of asset
performance. This means that, to achieve a particular level of performance the majority of BREEAM credits can be traded,, i.e.
non-compliance in one area can be offset through compliance in another to achieve the target BREEAM rating.
However, to ensure that performance against fundamental environmental issues is not overlooked in pursuit of a particular
rating, BREEAM sets minimum standards of performance in key areas, e.g. materials, water, waste etc. It is important to bear in
mind that these are minimum acceptable levels of performance and, in that respect they should not necessarily be viewed as
levels that are representative of best practice for a BREEAM rating level.
To achieve a particular BREEAM rating, the minimum overall percentage score must be achieved and the minimum standards,
detailed in Table 4, must also be met.
Table 4: Minimum standards for BREEAM in Infrastructure
Issue Minimum standard
Pass Good VG Ex Out
ID 03 Handover and aftercare (criteria 2 4 ) 1 1 1
ID 03 Handover and aftercare (criteria 5 6 ) 1 1 1
ID 03 Handover and aftercare (criteria 8 9 ) 1
Res 04 Surface water run-off (criteria 1 11 ) 1 1 2 2
ST 02 Consultation and engagement (criteria 12 15 ) 1 1 1
ST 03 Responsible construction practices (criterion 11 ) 1 2
ST 04 Owner operator requirements (criteria 1 8 )* 1 1 1
LW 02 Social impact (criteria 7 13 ) 1
Tra 01 Transport impact assessment (criteria 3 10 ) 2 2 2 2
LUE 04 Ecological impact assessment and action plan 1 1 1

(criteria 7 11 )
LUE 05 Protection of biodiversity (criteria 1 12 ) 1 2
Pol 02 Water pollution (criteria 5 14 ) 2 2 2
Pol 03 Noise and vibration (criteria 6 12 ) 1 1 1
Mat 02 Responsible sourcing of materials (criterion 1 ) Prerequisite

Scoring and rating
Issue Minimum standard
Pass Good VG Ex Out
Wst 01 Construction waste management (criteria 6 9 ) Prerequisite
Wst 01 Construction waste management (criteria 13 17 1

)
Wat 01 Water efficiency planning and implementation 1 1 1 1

(criteria 4 6 and 10 16 )
Wat 01 Water efficiency planning and implementation 1 1 1

(criteria 4 6 and 19 25 )
*This is the only issue with minimum standards for the strategic stage. This is because the strategic stage requirement
cannot be completed post DPoWStage 2. Please refer to Appendix A - Strategic and project detail stages links for
further details.
Prerequisites
Prerequisites are identified within some BREEAM issues. Where these are present they must be achieved in order to award
associated credits within that issue. Prerequisites therefore differ from 'minimum standards' in that they do not directly
influence the overall BREEAM rating, however they do influence the number of credits that can be achieved within the issue.
Environmental weightings
Environmental weightings are fundamental to any environmental assessment method as they provide a means of defining,
and therefore ranking, the relative impact of environmental issues.
This BREEAM scheme uses an independently peer reviewed, BREEAM weightings methodology that provides a standardised,
transparent and credible approach for assigning the relative importance to the different sustainability aspects covered by
BREEAM.
An adaptation process is used to reflect local conditions in a country (or region if the country has a significant land mass with
varied environmental issues). These are used to determine the relative values of the sections used in BREEAM, and their
contributions to an overall BREEAM score.
Using this process, BREEAM International the weightings are reviewed for the first project that registers for an assessment in a
country or region. These weightings are then set as appropriate for that project and all other projects thereafter in that
country or region for the life of the current BREEAM International version within the Approved Standards and Weightings List
(ASWL). The development of these weightings is based on robust and independent information forwarded from local
experts who have an understanding of local conditions. This may be a project team member or the assessor if they can
demonstrate sufficient knowledge of the environmental conditions of the region or country; or another individual or
organisation with the relevant expertise.
The required information is compiled by the BREEAM Assessor using the BREEAM International Infrastructure Weightings
form (available from the BREEAM Projects website). It is the assessors responsibility to correctly complete the form and
submit this to BRE Global, who use the information to develop appropriate weightings for that country or region.

The weightings are tailored based on the 12 environmental sections, with sections being considered 'Global' or 'Local'. Global
categories are those defined as having a universal impact, independent of the local context. Local categories are those
defined as being variable locally, due to social, environmental, political or economic factors. BRE Global will take account of
these factors when determining the relative importance of the technical sections.
BREEAM assessment issues and credits

The BREEAM New Construction: Infrastructure (pilot) scheme consists of 43 individual assessment issues spanning the 12
environmental sections, plus an additional section called 'innovation' (described below). Each issue addresses a specific asset
related environmental impact or issue and has a number of 'credits' assigned to it.
'BREEAM credits' are awarded where an asset demonstrates that it meets the best practice performance levels defined for
that issue, i.e. it has mitigated a negative impact and, in some cases, enhanced a positive impact.
The number of 'credits' available for an individual assessment issue will vary and generally the higher the number there are for
a given issue, the more important that issue is in terms of mitigating its impact. In most cases, where there are multiple 'credits'
available, the number awarded is based on a sliding scale or benchmark, where progressively higher standards of
performance are rewarded with a higher number of 'credits'.
It is worth noting that, in addition to the environmental section and overall score and BREEAM rating, verified performance
against individual assessment issues also provides users with a credible set of key performance indicators for a range of
embodied, operational and construction phase impacts. In this respect, in addition to using BREEAM to define overall targets,
it is possible to use the method to define performance levels in support of specific organisational policy objectives for
individual environmental issues. Care should be taken when setting design targets using individual issues and credit levels in
this way as it can limit design flexibility and have an impact on project costs.
Awarding 'credits' for innovation

It is one of the aims of BREEAM to support innovation within the construction industry and its supply chain. BREEAM does this
by making additional 'credits' available for the recognition of sustainability related benefits or performance levels which are
currently not recognised by standard BREEAM assessment issues and criteria. By doing this BREEAM is rewarding assets and
projects that go beyond best practice in terms of a particular aspect of sustainability, i.e. where the asset or its procurement
has demonstrated innovation.
Awarding 'credits' for innovation enables clients and design teams to boost their building's BREEAM performance and, in
addition, helps to support the market for new innovative technologies, and design or construction practices.
There are two ways in which BREEAM awards 'innovation credits' to recognise innovation in design and construction. The first is
by meeting exemplary performance criteria defined within an existing BREEAM issue, i.e. going beyond the standard BREEAM
assessment criteria and therefore best practice. Note, not all assessment issues have exemplary performance criteria. The
second route is where an application is made to BRE Global by the registered project's BREEAM Assessor to have a particular
technology or feature, design or construction method or process recognised as 'innovative'. If the application is successful and
subsequently compliance is verified, an 'innovation credit' can be awarded.
An additional 1% can be added to the overall score for each 'innovation credit' achieved. The maximum number of 'innovation
credits' that can be awarded for any one project or subproject is 10; therefore the maximum available additional score for
'innovation' is 10%. Innovation credits can be awarded regardless of the asset's final BREEAM rating,, i.e. they can be awarded
at any BREEAM rating level. Refer to the Innovation section for more details.

Scoring and rating
Calculating an asset's BREEAM rating

A BREEAM Assessor must determine the BREEAM rating using the appropriate assessment tools and calculators. An
indication of performance against this BREEAM scheme can also be determined by carrying out a BREEAM Infrastructure pre-
assessment 2, available from the BREEAM Projects website www.breeam.org/projects/.
The process of determining a BREEAM rating is outlined below and an example calculation included in Table 5:
For each of BREEAM's 12 environmental sections the number of 'credits' awarded must be determined by the
BREEAM Assessor in accordance with the criteria of each assessment issue (as detailed in the process and technical
sections of this document)
The percentage of 'credits' achieved is then calculated for each section
The percentage of 'credits' achieved in each section is then multiplied by the corresponding section weighting to give
the overall section score
The section scores are then added together to give the overall BREEAM score
An additional 1% can be added to the overall BREEAM score for each 'innovation credit' achieved (up to a
maximum of 10%)
The overall score is then compared to the BREEAM rating benchmark levels and, provided all minimum standards have
been met, the relevant BREEAM rating is achieved.
Note: Table 6 shows the relevant minimum standards have been met for this example calculation.
Table 5: Example calculation for BREEAM Infrastructure rating
BREEAMSection Credits Credits % of credits Section Section score

achieved available* achieved weighting* (%)
Integrated design 10 19 52.63 0.085 4.47
Resilience 9 14 64.28 0.10 6.42
Stakeholders 11 13 84.61 0.085 7.19
Local wellbeing 6 13 46.15 0.11 5.07
Transport 7 11 63.63 0.09 5.72
Land use and 15 21 71.42 0.08 5.71

ecology
Landscape and 3 7 42.85 0.06 2.57

heritage
Pollution 9 15 60.00 0.08 4.80
Materials 10 20 50.00 0.11 5.50
Carbon and energy 6 11 54.54 0.13 7.09
Waste 3 3 100.00 0.04 4.00

BREEAMSection Credits Credits % of credits Section Section score

achieved available* achieved weighting* (%)
Water 6 9 66.66 0.03 1.99
Innovation 3 10 30.00 0.10 3.00
Overall BREEAMScore 63.53%
BREEAMRating VERYGOOD
* This will vary based on the asset type being assessed and its location.
Note: In this example the BREEAM UK section weightings have been used.
Table 6: Minimum standards for a BREEAM 'Very Good' rating
Minimum standards for a BREEAM'Very Good' rating Achieved?
ID 03 Handover and aftercare (criteria 2 4 ) Yes
ID 03 Handover and aftercare (criteria 5 6 ) Yes
Res 04 Surface water run-off (criteria 1 11 ) Yes
ST 02 Consultation and engagement (criteria 12 15 ) Yes
ST 04 Owner operator requirements (criteria 1 8 ) Yes
Tra 01 Transport impact assessment (criteria 3 10 ) Yes
LUE 04 Ecological impact assessment and action plan (criteria 7 11 ) Yes
Pol 02 Water pollution (criteria 5 14 ) Yes
Pol 03 Noise and vibration (criteria 6 12 ) Yes
Mat 02 Responsible sourcing of materials (criterion 1 ) Yes
Wst 01 Construction waste management (criteria 6 9 ) Yes
Wat 01 Water efficiency planning and implementation (criteria 4 6 and 10 16 ) Yes
Wat 01 Water efficiency planning and implementation (criteria 4 6 and 19 25 ) Yes

Evidence
BREEAM evidential requirements

This section provides guidance to assessors and project teams on the types of evidence required to demonstrate compliance
with BREEAM issues.
Why does BREEAM require evidence?

BREEAM is a third party assessment and certification scheme operated in accordance with international standards. Operating
to international standards ensures that certification schemes such as BREEAM are run in a consistent and reliable manner. The
BREEAM Assessor's assessment report and the BRE Global Quality Assurance process are the fundamental tenets of BREEAM,
ensuring consistency of, and confidence in, the BREEAM rating awarded by the assessor.
To maintain this consistency and credibility all certification decisions must be based on verified and credible project
information that is traceable, i.e. evidence based. This is not only important for ensuring compliance with the international
standards to which BREEAM operates, but also in terms of managing risk to clients and BREEAM Assessors in the event that a
certification outcome is challenged.
The assessment report and the BREEAM Assessor role

It is the BREEAM Assessor who determines the BREEAM rating and the assessment report is the formal record of an assessor's
audit against the criteria defined in the Technical Manual for a BREEAM scheme. The BREEAM certificate issued by BRE Global
provides assurance that the service provided by the assessor (that is, the process of producing the assessment report) has
been conducted in accordance with the requirements of the scheme. The purpose of the certificate is therefore to give
confidence to the client in the assessor's performance and processes in determining a BREEAM rating.
It is the role of the assessor to gather project information and use it to assess performance against the BREEAM scheme in a
competent and impartial manner. To award a BREEAM credit, the assessor must be satisfied beyond reasonable doubt that
the evidence gathered demonstrates unambiguous compliance with all relevant criteria defined in the BREEAM scheme. All
evidence must be appropriately referenced in the formal report produced by the assessor and made available on request
from BRE Global Ltd for quality assurance checks.
Clear, ordered and well referenced evidence for each BREEAM issue and criterion facilitates efficient quality assurance and
certification. BREEAM Assessors can access further guidance on assessment report referencing in Assessor Guidance Note
01, and the 'Reporting process' webinar, both available from the BREEAM Assessor Guidance section of the BREEAM Assessor
extranet.
For large infrastructure projects, there may be significant volumes of evidence. BRE Global Limited will work with the pilot
project to explore how demonstrating compliance can be practical while remaining credible.
Evidence types
Evidence should not necessarily need to be prepared specifically for the purpose of the BREEAM assessment. In many
instances, the assessor should be able to source readily available and prepared project information for the purpose of
demonstrating compliance. For this reason, BREEAM aims to avoid being prescriptive on the type of evidence required,
although some issues do require specific documents to be provided.
The assessor and project team will find that many assessment issues require more than one piece or type of information to
demonstrate compliance with one criterion, or alternatively, one piece of information may be sufficient to demonstrate
compliance with multiple criteria.

Evidence BREEAM New Construction: Infrastructure (International pilot)
To assist project teams and the BREEAM Assessor in their collation of asset information at each stage of assessment, the
different types of documentation that can be used as evidence of compliance are listed below.
These evidence types fall broadly into three categories:
1. General evidence type

2. Specific evidence type
3. Other evidence type.
For some assessment issues, the assessor is likely to require a mixture of general and specific evidence types.
General evidence includes a broad list of defined construction information commonly produced for an infrastructure project.
One or a mix of these types of construction information can be used to demonstrate compliance for one or more of the
BREEAM issues and criteria, as deemed appropriate by the BREEAM Assessor for the stage of assessment.
General BREEAM evidence types are listed in Table 7, and are not specifically listed in the ' Evidence' section found within each
BREEAM issue. Note, not all general evidence types will be appropriate for all issues and it is the responsibility of the assessor
to ensure that the evidence provided specifically demonstrates compliance and is fully referenced in the Assessment
reporting tool.
Specific evidence is defined construction information that must be provided to verify compliance with the relevant criteria for
the BREEAM credit sought. In all cases it will be the only type of evidence that will be accepted by BRE Global Ltd for that
particular issue or criteria. Where specific evidence is not provided and appropriately referenced in the assessment report, the
Quality Assurance checks will identify nonconformity and certification will be delayed. An example of specific evidence would
be a copy of the life cycle assessment report for BREEAM issue Mat 01 Environmental life cycle impacts, and this is listed in the
evidence table for this issue.
When required, specific evidence is defined and listed for each BREEAM issue in the 'Evidence' section for strategic, interim and
final stages of assessment. Although the 'Evidence' section lists the specific evidence required to demonstrate compliance
with particular criteria, simply submitting this evidence may not be sufficient to demonstrate full compliance. Additional
'general evidence types' may also be required.
For example, Mat 01 Environmental life cycle impacts requires a copy of the carbon footprint report or life cycle assessment
report as listed in the 'Evidence' table. However, in addition to this report, further evidence is required to demonstrate how the
outputs of this report have influenced the design, i.e. general evidence types such as specifications for the asset or drawings
etc., confirming the material specifications to be used. Note, not all BREEAM issues will have specific evidence requirements.
Other types of evidence can still be used to demonstrate compliance where an information type provided by a client or design
team is not listed in Table 7 or the 'Evidence' section for each issue. To avoid nonconformities and delays in certification,
undefined alternative types of evidence must demonstrate credible, robust and traceable assurance to the same level as, or
better than, specified or general evidence types. If in doubt, please contact BREEAM prior to accepting such evidence.
Written commitments at the interim stage of assessment Design

stage
At the interim design stage of assessment it is permissible to use letters or emails to demonstrate intent to comply with
BREEAM criteria (provided they meet the requirements for the communication records above). Such evidence must also make
clear the actions and evidence (or an understanding thereof) that will be undertaken and provided to ensure the project's
ongoing compliance, particularly at the final stage of assessment,, i.e. post construction. This is to ensure that the party who
makes the commitment is clearly aware of the actions and evidence that needs to be supplied to demonstrate compliance
with BREEAM at the final stage of assessment. For example, in many circumstances it would not be acceptable for the design
team to copy and paste the BREEAM criteria into a formal commitment. The commitment should specifically detail how criteria
are to be achieved in the context of the assessment, and often copying and pasting the BREEAM criteria will not provide this
detail.

Evidence
While letters of commitment can play a role in demonstrating compliance, they are not a replacement for more formal and
established types of project information. The assessor must not award credits where they have a reason to doubt the validity
or intent of written commitments or where it is not unreasonable to expect formal design or specification information to be
available to confirm compliance.
Written commitments at the final stage of assessment Post

construction
The 'Final post-construction stage' column of the evidence table in each issue assumes that a design stage assessment has
been completed. Where a design stage assessment has not been completed, the assessor will need to review both the
'Interim design stage' and 'Final post-construction stage' evidence listed in the evidence table and ensure sufficient evidence is
submitted with the assessment to demonstrate compliance with the criteria.
Evidence supplied at the post-construction stage must be reflective of the built asset and must therefore demonstrate what
has actually been implemented. For example if sub-meters have been specified at design stage, evidence at the post-
construction stage would need to demonstrate that these have actually been installed. Appropriate evidence may be a site
inspection report with supporting photographs or as built drawings showing the location of a compliant feature.
Letters of commitment cannot be used to demonstrate compliance at the final, post-construction stage of assessment. The
only exception to this is where the criteria require an action to take place post construction,, i.e. after handover and possibly
during the asset operation. An example could be a written commitment from the asset owner making a commitment to
conduct post completion commissioning. As with written commitments at the design stage, the BREEAM Assessor must not
award BREEAM credits where they have a reason to doubt the validity or intent of written commitments or where it is not
unreasonable to expect formal documentation, e.g. a schedule of services or a professional services contract or both.
Evidence principles
As described above, where specific evidence is stated in the 'evidence' table within each assessment issue, this must be
sourced and verified by the BREEAM Assessor.
Where no specific evidence has been listed for an issue or specific criterion, this means that there are potentially a number of
different types of 'general' project information, as per Table 8 that can be sourced by the BREEAM Assessor and used to
demonstrate compliance. It is the BREEAM Assessor's responsibility to source and verify the 'general evidence types' for each
relevant criterion, where compliance and credits are being claimed by the project team.
In determining the appropriateness of 'general evidence types' for each issue, the principles outlined in Table 7 must be
considered by BREEAM Assessors. Where the 'general evidence types' meet the principles outlined in Table 7 and, where
appropriate, the guidance provided in the 'robustness of evidence' section, such evidence is admissible for the purpose of the
assessment and the BRE Global Quality Assurance checks.
These principles are not listed in a hierarchical order and are all equally important when considering which evidence type to
submit to demonstrate compliance for each issue or criterion.
Table 7BREEAM evidence principles
Summary Principle Objective A question to ask to check
1 Evidence Evidence must demonstrate that ALL Completeness Are all criteria and sub-criteria
provided for relevant* criteria and sub-criteria for covered? Have all relevant
all criteria for each credit sought are achieved and compliance notes and
all credits where relevant, is provided to support definitions been addressed?
sought compliance notes, definitions etc.

2 Unambiguous The assessment must demonstrate Independent If a 3rd party (e.g. BRE Global
assessment unambiguous compliance and the review Ltd) reviewed my report with
evidence must support this compatibility the submitted evidence, would
assessment. Evidence (and supporting they be able to confirm
notes) must clearly demonstrate to a compliance and award the
3rd party reviewer that the criteria have same credits I have?
been met.
3 Robust 1. When selecting the Evidence type, Proof that Is this the most robust form of
always ensure it is robust and is evidence is evidence available to
relevant to the stage of robust and demonstrate compliance with
assessment. from a reliable this criterion? Does the
2. The selected Evidence contains all source evidence contain all the relevant
the relevant basic information, basic information? Is it fully
with the necessary constituent auditable?
parts to be deemed robust.
(Refer to Robustness of evidence
section for further details on both of
the above.)
4 Use existing Use existing project information to Minimises Does robust evidence meeting
evidence demonstrate compliance. In most evidence and the above principles already
cases evidence should not need to be reduces time exist that I can use? If I need to
'created' for BREEAM compliance and cost of ask for more evidence, is the
purposes. compliance project seeking credits where
compliance is not adequately
demonstrated?
* Where the assessor or design team deem specific criteria 'not relevant' to the assessment, a full justification should be
collated and then submitted as a technical query, for review by BRE Global Ltd.
Robustness of evidence
Robust evidence provides confirmation that the assessment has been carried out correctly and the asset complies with the
criteria for the BREEAM credits sought. The assessor should consider the following when gathering project information and
evaluating whether the evidence provided is as 'robust' as possible:
Is there more than one piece of evidence that could be used to demonstrate compliance?
Is the chosen evidence the most robust and appropriate piece of evidence to demonstrate that a particular criterion
has been achieved?
Any evidence submitted for a BREAM assessment must be robust in terms of its source and its traceability. Below is a list of the
minimum information the assessor must expect to see, when certain types of evidence are submitted:
Communication records: Any communication records used as evidence must provide clear confirmation of the site name,
author's identity and role, the date and recipient's identity.
Formal letters of correspondence: Must be on company or organisation headed notepaper with a signature (electronic
signatures are acceptable). Ideally letters should be a secured document. (Please see sections relating to written commitment
for further information.)
Meeting minutes: Must include date, location and attendee information (names, organisations and roles), along with a record
of the meeting and agreed actions.

Evidence
Drawings: All drawings must have the asset or site name, phase (if applicable), title of drawing, date, revision number and a
scale.
Specification: A specification must be clear that it relates to the project under assessment, and it must have a date and revision
number. Where sections of a specification are provided the assessor should reference the extract and as a minimum submit
the front page of the specification detailing the project name, revision number and date.
Site inspection report: A site inspection report must include the site name, date, author and summary text to detail what was
witnessed, confirming compliance. Photographic evidence can be used to support the text in the report.
For other types of evidence not listed, the assessor should use the above as a guide for the sort of evidence that is suitable. As
a minimum in most cases the evidence used to assess compliance should always contain key information such as the project
name, the author, date, revision numbers etc.
Table 8Document and evidence types
Ref Document or Description and notes

evidence type
E1 As constructed Information produced at the end of a project to represent what has been constructed. This
information will comprise a mixture of 'as built' information or drawings and surveys from specialist
subcontractors and the 'final construction issue' from design team members.
E2 Building The BIM (or BIM files) used for the project containing relevant information or evidence of
information compliance.
model (BIM)
E3 BRE Global For example the reference number for a BRE Global response to an assessor's technical
correspondence query.
reference
number
E4 BREEAM A formal report based on the BREEAM Assessor's own survey of the site or asset to confirm
Assessor's site compliance with BREEAM criteria. An assessor's site inspection report will be distinct from
inspection their formal BREEAM assessment report, serving as a form of evidence of compliance in its
report own right, and it may include photographs taken by the assessor as part of the survey.
E5 Contracts The contract (or excerpts and clauses from it) between the client and the contractor for the
construction of the project. In some instances, the building contract may contain design
duties for either specialist subcontractors, design team members or both.
E6 Certificates of Examples include ISO 14001, BES 6001, FSC (Forest Stewardship Council), EPC
compliance (environmental profile certificate), EPD (environmental product declaration), Considerate
(third party) Constructors etc.
E7 Communication Formal communication records between or from relevant project stakeholders or other
records third parties confirming an appointment, action or outcome. This may be in the form of a
letter, meeting minutes, email correspondence, publication or another form of media.
E8 Communication The strategy that sets out when the project team will meet, how they will communicate
strategy effectively and the protocols for issuing information between the various parties, both
informally and at information exchanges.

E9 Computer aided Examples include flooding, life cycle assessment, life cycle costing, etc.
modelling
results and
outputs
E10 Construction The specification for the project or asset 3.

specification
E11 Construction For example, purchase orders, metering data, log books, commissioning records, reports
stage data or etc.
information
E12 Contractual tree A diagram that clarifies the contractual relationship between the client and the parties
undertaking the roles required on a project.
E13 Cost Project costs, including the cost estimate and life cycle costs.
information
E14 Curriculum vitae A brief account of a persons education, qualifications, and previous occupations,
demonstrating 'suitably qualified' status.
E15 Design Structural, civil, mechanical and electrical design, site plans, drainage designs, etc.
drawings4
E16 Design A programme setting out the strategic dates in relation to the design process. It is aligned
programme with the Project Programme but is strategic in its nature, due to the iterative nature of the
design process, particularly in the early stages.
E17 Design A matrix that sets out who is responsible for designing each aspect of the project and
responsibility when. This document sets out the extent of any performance specified design.
matrix
E18 Feasibility study Studies undertaken to test the feasibility of the brief or concept design for the site or in a
specific context and to consider how site-wide issues will be addressed.
E19 Final project The initial brief amended so that it is aligned with the concept design and any briefing
brief decisions made during this stage.
E20 Other third party For example, maps, product data, product details, manufacturers' literature, government or
information EU standards or codes, EU labelling.
E21 Professional An agreement to provide professional or consulting services such as, designing, feasibility
services contract studies, or legal or technical advice.
E22 Professional Professional reports resulting from specialist surveys or studies or test results, e.g.
specialist contaminated land, ecology, flood risk assessment, surface water run-off report, site
reports investigation, acoustics, low and zero carbon technologies study, transportation analysis,
commissioning reports, life cycle assessment, landscape and habitat management plan etc.

Evidence
E23 Project The Project Execution Plan is produced in collaboration between the project lead and lead
Execution or designer, with contributions from other designers and members of the project team. The
Quality Plan Project Execution Plan sets out the processes and protocols to be used to develop the
design.
E24 Project The overall period for the briefing, design, construction and post completion activities of a
programme project.
E25 Project roles A table that sets out the roles required on a project as well as defining the stages during
table which those roles are required and the parties responsible for carrying out the roles.
E26 Project strategy The strategies developed in parallel with the Concept Design to support the design and, in
certain instances, to respond to the Final Project Brief as it is concluded. Examples include
strategies for sustainability, acoustics, handover, maintenance and operation, technology,
health and safety, construction, travel plan, sustainable procurement plan.
E27 Risk assessment The risk assessment considers the various design risks and other risks on a project and how
each risk will be managed and the party responsible for managing each risk.
E28 Schedule of A list of specific services and tasks to be undertaken by a party involved in the project which
services is incorporated into their professional services contract.
E29 Strategic or The brief prepared following discussions with the client to ascertain the project objectives,
initial project the client's business case and, in certain instances, in response to site feasibility studies.
brief

blank page
Integrated design
Integrated design
Category overview
Weighting (%) Minimum standards
Refer to the country reference sheet in the ASWL ID 03 Handover and aftercare
Summary
This section encourages a holistic approach to option appraisal including whole systems thinking. In addition it promotes
collaborative working through early involvement of key stakeholders, whole life thinking, an integrated approach to data
management and processes to monitor and manage target setting ensuring the asset performs as required.
Category summary table

Issue Credits
ID 01 Option appraisal and objectives Strategy - 2

Project detail - 1
Setting a series of objectives relating to a range of sustainability targets

Options appraisal against a range of holistic sustainability objectives
Consulting on the appraisal process and outcome
Setting measurable targets for the project detail stage, based on the strategic objectives
ID 02 Project team collaboration Strategy - 1

Project detail - 3
Involvement of key stakeholders early in the design and construction process

Defining and communicating project team roles and responsibilities
Setting, managing and monitoring performance against targets
Use of an integrated data management and information exchange system
ID 03 Handover and aftercare Strategy - 1

Project detail - 4
Setting handover and aftercare objectives and budgets at the early stages of the project
Managing commissioning, handover and aftercare including post operation evaluation
ID 04 Ecosystem services Strategy - 1

Project detail - 1

Integrated design BREEAM New Construction: Infrastructure (International pilot)
Issue Credits
Strategic ecosystem services assessment to establish priority ecosystem services and associated marginal
changes
Measures are implemented to mitigate identified negative marginal changes and increase positive marginal
change
ID 05 Whole life costing Strategy - 2

Project detail - 1
Completion of strategic level service life planning and whole life costing analysis.
Detailed component level life cycle cost plan to minimise life cycle costs and maximise critical value.
ID 06 Whole life environmental impacts Strategy - 2

Project detail - 0
Development of a screening life cycle assessment (LCA) to establish where opportunities exist for reducing the whole life
environmental impact of the project

ID 01 Option appraisal and objectives Integrated design
ID 01 Option appraisal and objectives

Strategic credits available Project detail credits available Minimum standards
2 1 None
Aim
To set challenging objectives and targets for the project and encourage and reward a robust, consistent and transparent
approach to option appraisal.
Strategic assessment criteria

This stage of the issue is split into three parts:
Setting strategic objectives (prerequisite)

Consideration of alternative options (one credit)
Sustainability appraisal (one credit)
The following is required to demonstrate compliance:
Prerequisite - Setting strategic objectives

1 The project team, including the client, agree an initial set of social, economic and environmental objectives for the project
and organise these in terms of perceived importance. The objectives:
1.a Include the owner/operator requirements over the whole life of the asset (refer to ST 04 Owner operator
requirements)
1.b Include any project delivery team requirements, where known, e.g. organisational targets
1.c Reflect any area wide sustainability appraisal objectives set by government departments, local planning
authorities, special area governing bodies, e.g. statutory conservation agencies and other relevant stakeholders
1.d Include objectives for each of the subject areas identified in Table 9 (refer to CN1)
1.e Are informed by any recent similar projects (refer to CN2).
One credit - Consideration of alternative options

2 Criterion 1 is achieved.
3 Using an iterative approach, the following have been undertaken by the project team and owner/operator in considering
alternative options and selecting a preferred concept design solution for submission to the planning authority (refer to
CN3):
3.a Identify a number of alternative solutions to the proposed project by using a systems thinking approach (refer
to CN4 and CN5)
3.b Assess the risks, impacts, constraints and opportunities from the following (refer to ID 04 Ecosystem services):
3.b.i The system to the asset and vice versa
3.b.ii The asset to the environment and vice versa
3.c Evaluate the options against the objectives outlined in criterion 1 using a proportionate approach (refer to CN6).
4 The following are included as part of the 'Initial consultation' process detailed in ST 02 Consultation and engagement
(carried out prior to finalising the brief):
4.a Why alternatives were rejected or selected for more detailed consideration
4.b How the alternatives selected for more detailed consideration compare with the preferred solution including:
4.b.i Adverse effects and how these can be prevented, reduced or offset
4.b.ii Positive effects and how these can be enhanced

4.b.iii If and how these effects are quantified in a meaningful way

4.b.iv Stakeholder groups that will be most impacted (both positive and negative), e.g. rural versus city
dwelling, young versus old, ecology versus community and vulnerable, hard-to-reach groups
4.b.v Where effects are unclear, ambiguous or require further analysis
4.b.vi How the effects apply over the short, medium and long term
4.b.vii How cumulative, secondary and synergistic effects have been considered and the resulting outcomes
over the short, medium and long term.
5 The comments from this initial consultation are:
5.a Reviewed by the project team
5.b Considered in updated targets and objectives
5.c Responded to and made available to those stakeholders who were consulted.
6 The comments from this initial consultation influence either the selection, development or both, of the final concept
design for the project.
One credit - Consultation on appraisal process and outcome

8 The following are included as part of the 'Further consultation' process detailed in ST 02 Consultation and engagement
(carried out at concept design stage):
8.a Preferred solution and associated predicted social, economic and environmental risks, impacts, opportunities
and constraints
8.b Data used in the analysis and prediction of social, economic and environmental risks, impacts, opportunities and
constraints
8.c Justification to support decisions (including science or evidence where relevant)
8.d Project objectives - social, economic and environmental
8.e Considered alternatives, reflecting the detail of the evaluation (i.e. some will have been considered briefly and
dismissed and others considered more comprehensively)
8.f Option appraisal methodology including how impacts have been assessed and on what basis decisions were
made
8.g How stakeholder feedback was collected, addressed and presented for:
8.g.i The predicted impacts, opportunities and constraints
8.g.ii The objectives
8.g.iii The option generation and evaluation.
8.h Where stakeholder feedback has influenced the proposals.
9 The project team demonstrate how feedback from the consultation detailed in criterion 8 is collected, responded to and
taken forward in the project.
Project detail assessment criteria

One credit - Targets and objectives

10 The strategic objectives listed in criterion 1 are translated into a series of measurable project targets, either key
performance indicators, deliverables or both. These targets should consider:
10.a The owner/operator requirements over the whole life of the asset (refer to ST 04 Owner operator
requirements)
10.b Any project delivery team requirements, where known, e.g. organisational targets
10.c Area wide sustainability appraisal objectives set by government departments, local planning authorities, special
area governing bodies, e.g. statutory conservation agencies and other relevant stakeholders
10.d Targets for each of the subject areas identified in Table 9(refer to CN7)
10.e Targets and performance of any recent similar projects (refer to CN2).
11 An implementation plan is developed outlining:
11.a The measures to monitor and evaluate progress against these objectives throughout the project and
11.b The organisations or individuals responsible for achieving the objectives.

12 Progress and performance is:

12.a Monitored regularly and compared with targets, objectives and client or employer's requirements (refer to CN8)
12.b Regularly recorded (as appropriate to the project duration) and disseminated to the project team with
improvement actions identified where necessary
12.c Reviewed at the end of the project construction to assess actual performance against original targets,
objectives, client and employer's requirements
12.d Disseminated to inform targets, objectives and approaches for other projects with similar risks, impacts,
opportunities, constraints and construction processes or elements (refer to CN9).
13 Decisions taken throughout the design and construction stages including changes to the design are reviewed by the
project delivery team, owner/occupier and any relevant specialists (refer to CN10) and assessed in terms of the impact
on:
13.a Risks, impacts and opportunities
13.b Client or employer's requirements
13.c Agreed targets and objectives
13.d Added value.
Checklists and tables

Table 9: Strategic BREEAM objectives
Subject Objectives
Resilience 1. Enhancing the resilience of the asset and the system within which it sits through:
a. Business continuity plans and strategies
b. A robust and comprehensive risk assessment process
c. Liaison with appropriate stakeholders and resilience experts
d. Implementing appropriate and proportionate mitigation measures
e. Managing residual risks through operational processes and contingency plans
f. Identifying and allowing for future needs within the current design process.
2. Reducing risks resulting from the following to a tolerable level, where present:
a. Natural hazards and climate change impacts
b. Intentional threats such as crime and fire
c. Future needs and durability of the asset.
Stakeholders 1. Facilitating staff wellbeing and providing opportunities for training and development
2. Meeting the needs of the owner/operator and end user (where different), including a high quality
of service (where relevant)
3. Ensuring ease of access to, from and around the asset
4. Providing appropriate amenities, shared facilities or both
5. Facilitating a safe, secure and flexible working environment, now and in the future
6. Facilitating operation and maintenance tasks, now and in the future
7. Enhancing the experience of the asset user (where relevant), e.g. viewing points
8. Reducing the risk of asset failure during its operational lifetime to mitigate immediate and wider
implications.

Subject Objectives
Local 1. Enhancing the local economy during construction and operation

wellbeing 2. Enhancing the impacted community area and providing opportunities for broader stakeholder
groups during construction and operation.
The above objectives could consider success in terms of improvements in the following:
Economic growth (e.g. investment, income to the area)

Economic resilience (e.g. stability of income, reliance on one income stream)
Employment
Identified skills gaps
Investment opportunities
Future trends for capacity or additional services
Migration of people into and out of the community
Local skills and skill shortages
Amenities
Diversity, equality, health and wellbeing
Regeneration of the area
Social cohesion and accessibility
Opportunities to increase training
Opportunities to provide education and knowledge
Opportunities for social regeneration.
Transport During construction and, where appropriate, operation of the asset:

1. Improving the experience of the existing users of the surrounding infrastructure, because of good
transport planning
2. Minimising transport emissions
3. Minimising transport movements
4. Minimising disruption to and impacts on the community and existing transport systems, e.g.
mitigating diversions, temporary works and severance,
5. Minimising pollution associated with dust, noise, CO2 emissions, particulate and other emissions
6. Using and improving existing transport infrastructure
7. Improvements to transport links for impacted communities, particularly sustainable transport
modes.
At the construction stage:
1. Implementing good management procedures for temporary measures including the use of
sustainable modes of transport.
Land use 1. Using land efficiently and improving its value and condition
2. Remediating any contaminated land sustainably
3. Mitigation of risks arising from contaminated land to an acceptable level both during construction
and (where appropriate) because of the asset's operation
4. Enhancing amenity value of land
5. Preserving and enhancing the quality of agricultural land present, including presence of best and
most versatile land
6. Enhancing soil resources and functions, where present.
Biodiversity 1. Enhancing biodiversity and avoiding damage to existing ecological features

2. Where damage to biodiversity will occur, minimising, mitigating and compensating for the impact
of the damage.
Landscape 1. Protecting and enhancing the landscape

and heritage 2. Avoiding and minimising impacts on heritage assets.

Subject Objectives
Pollution Preventing and controlling air, water, noise, vibration and light pollution resulting from the construction
and operation of the asset through:
1. Carrying out a robust and comprehensive risk assessment process to identify key risks and
impacts
2. Liaison with appropriate stakeholders and pollution experts
3. Implementing appropriate and proportionate mitigation measures
4. Managing residual risks through choices of operational processes and monitoring programmes.
Materials 1. Optimise the material choices for permanent and temporary works while meeting the functional
(and aesthetic, where appropriate) requirements of the asset, e.g. durability, health and safety. etc.
Optimise in this context means consideration of LCA, reuse and recycling, lean design and
construction principles, material optimisation etc.
2. Minimising the embodied impact over the life of the asset including deconstruction or end of life
3. Minimising the impacts of transporting construction materials
4. Sourcing temporary and permanent materials responsibly.
Carbon and Reduce carbon resulting from materials, transport, construction processes, operational processes,
energy waste generated and land use changes.
Waste 1. Minimising waste in line with the waste hierarchy

2. Diverting waste from landfill
3. Managing waste disposal.
Water 1. Minimising total water demand and potable water consumption through effective management
and maintenance
2. Using water efficient fittings and appliances
3. Reusing and recycling water during construction and over the life of the asset
4. Minimising the impact from the asset on the local water supply over its life and vice versa, e.g.
because of new development or predicted water shortages.
Compliance notes
Ref Terms Description
CN1 Setting objectives The project objectives to be set against the BREEAM Infrastructure strategic
requirements are not prescribed within this issue. In some instances projects will set
challenging targets and at other times this will not be possible due to project
constraints. The purpose of this requirement is to reward consideration of a holistic
set of targets. The wider the scope and more challenging the objectives, the more
likely the asset will be to achieve the project detail requirements and subsequently a
higher score within the scheme, but specific targets are not mandated within this
issue.
CN2 Using similar past Other similar projects can inform objectives through a demonstration of best
projects to set practice, and also through lessons learnt.
targets

CN3 Alternative options This requirement refers to early stage decisions around a proposed solution to an
identified need. See below for some basic examples:
Example 1
Identified need - improve water quality in "A TOWN" rivers
Proposed solution - new treatment works
Early stage decisions might include - site location, layout, treatment options.
Example 2
Identified need - stabilise embankment
Proposed solution - build retaining wall
Early stage decisions might include - construction methods, material selection.
Example 3
Identified need - reduce flood risk to catchment area
Proposed solution - reservoir extension
Early stage decisions might include - location of extension, plan area and depth of
extended reservoir, construction methods and materials.
Example 4
Identified need - increase freight capacity on existing rail line
Proposed solution - new railway for passengers
Early stage decisions might include - route, tunnelling, cutting, construction methods
and materials.
CN4 Generating The alternatives must include the situation without the project intervention, i.e.
alternative options without the asset being built.
CN5 Systems thinking The asset is considered in terms of the system in which it sits and not in isolation.
approach This includes identifying:
Upstream and downstream dependencies

A systems boundary within which to consider the impacts and
opportunities
Issues that might cross the identified system boundary
Opportunities for features of the asset to realise multiple objectives, e.g.
landscaped swales that reduce flood risk, increase biodiversity, encourage
walking and cycling, and provide opportunities for local power generation.
CN6 Assessing Where more than three options are identified, a short list of three can be created by
alternative options reviewing each one against high-level priority objectives, identified by the project
team and owner/operator (refer to criteria 1 4 ).
Options can be rejected because they are not in alignment with the agreed
objectives. Options are selected for more detailed review where they are well
aligned with the agreed objectives.
The project team are expected to review at least one alternative proposal in the
same amount of detail as the current preferred solution. It is expected that the level
of detail available for assessing options will increase as the process develops and
initially there may only be high-level information available.

CN7 Targets The requirement for targets to be informed by the contents of Table 9 does not
require targets for all of these subject areas, however the assessor must be
satisfied that a robust review of all subject areas has been undertaken and where
no targets (or easy targets) have been set, there are sound technical reasons for
this.
The project team are made aware that aiming for high performance in these
subject areas will support a higher BREEAM rating at the project detail stage of
assessment.
CN8 Monitoring and Performance against targets is reviewed at regular project team meetings,
recording progress and actions are noted (including by who and for when) within minutes or
performance other formal records and individuals are informed of actions to be taken.
compared with
targets
CN9 Disseminating Information regarding targets, lessons learnt, successes etc. must be disseminated
information at the end of the project.
For projects with multiple stages, these should also be disseminated at the
completion of these stages.
CN10 Changes during the Changes (including proposed changes) during the design and construction process
design and include:
construction
Information regarding targets, lessons learnt, successes etc., and must be
process
disseminated at the end of the project.
For projects with multiple stages, these should also be disseminated at the
completion of these stages.
Relevant members of the project team (project delivery team, owner, operator and
specialists) then agree proposed actions and these are communicated to
appropriate teams and individuals.
Methodology
None.
Evidence
Ref Strategy stage Interim design stage Final post-construction stage
All One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in the BREEAM evidential requirements section can be
used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

Additional information
Relevant definitions
None.
Other information
None.

ID 02 Project team collaboration Integrated design
ID 02 Project team collaboration

1 3 None
Aim
To recognise and encourage an integrated design team and process resulting in optimised asset performance.

The following is required to demonstrate compliance.
One credit - Project team engagement (project delivery)

1 The following are agreed and included in formal project documentation before concept design stage:
1.a Client requirements including:
1.a.i The functional performance requirements and outcomes for the asset in operation (refer to ST 04
Owner operator requirements)
1.a.ii The environmental performance requirements and outcomes for the asset during construction and
operation (refer to ST 04 Owner operator requirements)
1.a.iii Any capital cost constraints or requirements for the project
1.a.iv Any operating cost constraints or requirements for the asset
1.a.v Project objectives and targets including target BREEAM rating, business objectives etc.
1.a.vi Timescales and budget
1.a.vii Constraints for the project, e.g. technical, legal, physical, environmental.
2 Before completion of the concept design key representatives of the project delivery team (refer to Relevant definitions)
have met to identify and define their roles, responsibilities and contributions for each of the key project gateways (refer
to Relevant definitions).
3 In defining the roles and responsibilities for each key project gateway, the following must be considered:
3.a The end user
3.b Aims of the design and design strategy
3.c Particular installation and construction requirements and limitations
3.d Design and construction risk assessments
3.e Legislative requirements, e.g. waste and heritage requirements
3.f Procurement and supply chain
3.g Identifying and measuring project success in line with project brief objectives
3.h Owner/operator's budget and technical expertise in maintaining any proposed systems
3.i Maintainability and adaptability of the proposals
3.j Requirements for the production of project and operator documentation
3.k Requirements for commissioning, training, handover and aftercare support.
4 The project delivery team contributions and the outcomes of criteria 1 3 have influenced or changed the initial project
brief, including if appropriate, the project execution quality plan, team communication strategy, and the concept design.
5 Representatives from the client and employer team and members of the project delivery team are appointed to work
together to:
5.a Manage and ensure delivery of the client and employer requirements (refer to ST 04 Owner operator
requirements)
5.b Manage and ensure delivery of the agreed targets and objectives

5.c Identify and agree how risks and opportunities can be shared
5.d Identify and agree a proactive and collaborative approach to problem resolution.
Please note that criteria 8 , 9 and 17 also require actions to be undertaken at the concept design stage, however, as they are
linked to the detail design process, they are included in the project detail assessment criteria.

This stage of the issue is split into four parts:
Project team collaboration (prerequisite)

Sustainability champion - design and monitoring progress (one credit)
Sustainability champion - construction (one credit)
Integrated data management (one credit)
Prerequisite - Project team collaboration

6 Representatives from the client and employer team and members of the project delivery team continue to work
together (or are appointed to work together) to undertake the responsibilities and tasks outlined in criterion 5 .
One credit - Sustainability champion (design and monitoring progress, i.e. concept, definition, design)
8 Sustainability champions are appointed to facilitate the setting and achievement of BREEAM performance targets for the
project (refer to CN1). The design stage sustainability champions are appointed to perform this role during the feasibility
or concept stages.
9 During the feasibility or concept design stage the defined BREEAM performance targets are formally agreed between
the client and project delivery team (refer to Relevant definitions).
10 Sustainability champions are appointed to monitor progress against the agreed BREEAM performance targets
throughout the design process and formally report progress to the client and design team (refer to CN2).
11 To achieve credit at the interim design stage assessment, the agreed BREEAM performance targets are demonstrably
achieved by the project design. This is demonstrated via the BREEAM Assessor's design stage assessment report.
One credit - Sustainability champion (construction, i.e. build and commission)

13 Sustainability champions are appointed to monitor the project to ensure ongoing compliance with the relevant
sustainability performance and process criteria, and therefore targets, during the construction stages (refer to CN3).
14 The defined BREEAM performance targets form a requirement of the contractor's contract.
15 To achieve credit at the final post-construction stage of assessment, the BREEAM performance targets for the project
are demonstrably achieved. This is demonstrated via the BREEAM Assessor's final post-construction stage assessment
report (refer to CN4).
One credit - Integrated data management

17 A process or system is implemented from feasibility or concept design stage to ensure integrated recording and
exchange of information across the design, construction and operational members of the project team to efficiently
manage data and support operational asset management.


None.
Compliance notes
CN1 BREEAM This includes the BREEAM rating and any specific performance requirements identified
performance by the client or project team.
targets
CN2 Sustainability The sustainability champion attends key project and design team meetings throughout
champion -Design the project, and is involved in discussions about changes. They shall take notes and
and monitoring report on progress with regards to achieving the BREEAM targets.
progress
CN3 Sustainability The sustainability champion will ideally be site based or will visit the site regularly to carry
champion Design out spot checks, with the relevant authority to do so and require action to be taken to
and monitoring address shortcomings in compliance.
progress The sustainability champion will monitor site activities with sufficient frequency (refer to
CN5) to ensure that risks of non-compliance are minimised. They will report on
progress at relevant project team meetings including identifying potential areas of
non-compliance and any action needed.
CN4 BREEAM-related If the BREEAM performance targets set at the end of the feasibility or concept design
performance stage have not been achieved at the post-construction stage, the credits awarded at
targets the interim design stage assessment for appointing the sustainability champion must
be withheld in the final assessment.
CN5 Frequency of site In context, visits should occur at key stages of the construction process, at times where:
monitoring
Works can be observed before they are covered up or new works or trades
start
Where significant risks of conflicts or errors could occur
Where timing is critical to demonstrating compliance
Where key evidence is required to be produced at specific times including, but
not limited to photographic, delivery notes and other documentary evidence
Where different trades and systems come together and one could harm the
integrity or compliance of another system's performance against the project
requirements.
Methodology
None.

Evidence
BREEAM-related performance targets

BREEAM performance targets refer specifically to the BREEAM rating and minimum standards required. This does not
necessarily include individual targeted BREEAM issues or credits, which may be traded over the course of the project
as it evolves. In agreeing a BREEAM target it is recommended that individual BREEAM issues, credits and criteria are
targeted or prioritised to ensure that the agreed target is achievable, and achieved without potentially costly
alterations to the design at a later stage.
Formally agreed
The term 'formally agreed' relates to performance targets. Examples of formal agreements include a contract or
letters of appointment with relevant project team members.
Key design team meetings

Key design team meetings can be defined as those where fundamental decisions that influence or affect the
proposed design and its construction in accordance with the design (and therefore the sustainability impacts and
BREEAM performance), are discussed and made. These meetings would typically include representatives from at least
the first three of the parties listed below.
Client, owner or operator
Contractor
Design team
Cost consultants
Environmental consultants
Project management consultants
Specialist subcontractors, e.g. demolition contractors
Specialist consultants, e.g. heritage specialists, security specialists, ecologists.
Key project gateways

The definition of key project gateways refers to project delivery phases, including:
Concept design
Definition
Design
Build and commission
Handover and close out
In-Use.
Key representatives of the project delivery team

Key representatives of the project delivery team must include as a minimum:
Client
Owner
Operator (where different from the owner)
Designer and specialist consultants (if relevant)

Contractor and specialist subcontractors (if relevant).

An objective of this issue is to reflect the need to consider the input of key representatives of the project delivery team
from the earliest practical stage, to ensure smooth and successful delivery of the project's sustainability objectives.
Regarding contractor involvement, it ensures their input in terms of formulating sustainable design solutions,
commenting or inputting on the practicality and build ability of (one or more) design solutions and their impact on
programming, cost etc.
BREEAM recognises that for some projects the contractor for the works might not be appointed at the early stages
of the project and therefore compliance with criterion 2 would not be possible. In these instances, to ensure the aim
of the criteria is upheld, criterion 2 will be met if a suitably experienced person with substantial construction or
contracting experience in projects similar to the proposed works is involved before appointment of the contractor. A
suitably experienced person could be a contractor appointed as a consultant for [missing words] stage or a
construction project manager.
Project Execution Plan

A Project Execution Plan is a plan produced in collaboration between the client and project delivery team. The Project
Execution Plan sets out the processes and protocols to be used to develop the design. It is sometimes referred to as
a 'Project Quality Plan'.
Sustainability champions
Sustainability champions will be members of a relevant professional institution, where membership (or the level of
membership) requires a peer review process .
Sustainability champions will have the authority to make changes (or propose changes for approval) where targets
are not being met and will understand what is required at key project gateways (see Key project gateways). They will
be trained to provide advice to the project delivery team to facilitate timely and successful target setting, scheduling,
prioritisation and monitoring of compliance relating to the design and construction of the asset. They may be
different individuals throughout the project, i.e. the sustainability champion at the design stage may be different from
the sustainability champion at the construction stage.
Where projects require a specific 'sign off' procedure, or the sustainability champion is required to obtain approval
for changes from a variety of individuals or teams, the assessor should ensure that proposals from the sustainability
champion are seriously considered as part of the process.
Team communication strategy

The team communication strategy is a strategy that sets out when the project team will meet, how they will
communicate effectively and the protocols for issuing information between the various parties, both informally and
at information exchanges.
Other information
None.

ID 03 Handover and aftercare

Strategic credits Project detail credits Minimum standards
available available
1 4 One credit - criteria 2 4 (Commissioning testing schedule and

responsibilities) - Very good
One credit - criteria 5 6 (Handover) - Very good
One credit - criteria 8 9 (Post operation evaluation) -
Outstanding
Aim
To provide post-handover aftercare to the owner/operator during the first year of operation to ensure the asset operates
and adapts in accordance with the design intent and operational demands.

One credit - Handover and aftercare strategy

1 The handover and aftercare requirements are agreed between the client, owner/operator and project delivery team at
the strategy stage and include:
1.a Estimated cost and resources
1.b Time scales
1.c Training and services to be provided
1.d Documentation to be provided.

Commissioning and testing schedule (1 credit)

Handover (1 credit)
Aftercare support (1 credit)
Post operation evaluation (1 credit)
The following is required to demonstrate compliance.
One credit - Commissioning and testing schedule

2 The contractor accounts for the commissioning and testing programme, responsibilities and criteria within their budget
and main programme of works, allowing for the required time to complete all commissioning and testing activities
before handover.
3 There is a schedule of commissioning and testing that identifies and includes a suitable timescale for commissioning and
recommissioning of all complex and non-complex MEICA (refer to Relevant definitions), drainage services and control
systems.

ID 03 Handover and aftercare Integrated design
4 An appropriate project team member is appointed to monitor and programme pre-commissioning, commissioning,
testing, and where necessary, recommissioning activities on behalf of the client.
One credit - Handover

5 Handover documentation is prepared by the contractor and agreed or reviewed by the owner/operators before
handover. This documentation contains the following as a minimum, either as part of the operation and maintenance
(O&M) manual or within an integrated data management system (refer to ID 02 Project team collaboration criterion 17 ):
5.a The asset's performance requirements (refer to ST 04 Owner operator requirements)
5.b The available aftercare provision and aftercare team main contacts, including any post operational or phased
commissioning and post operational evaluation
5.c Introduction to, and demonstration of, installed systems and key features, particularly automated systems,
controls and their interfaces
5.d Service life plan and maintenance requirements, including any maintenance contracts and regimes in place
5.e Introduction to other relevant documentation, e.g. design data, technical guides, maintenance strategy,
commissioning records, log book, materials register etc.
6 Training is provided to the owner/operator before the handover. As a minimum this includes the contents of the
documentation described in criterion 5 .
One credit - Aftercare support

7 There is (or will be) operational infrastructure and resources in place to provide aftercare support to the
owner/operator, which includes the following as a minimum:
7.a A meeting scheduled to occur between the aftercare team or individual and the owner/operator (before
operation) to:
7.a.i Introduce the owner/operator to the aftercare support available, including training schedule and
content
7.a.ii Present key information about the asset including the design intent and how to operate and maintain
it as efficiently and effectively as possible.
7.b Training in operating and maintaining the asset as appropriate
7.c Initial aftercare support provision as agreed with the client or employer at the start of the contract
7.d Longer term aftercare support provision for owner/operators for at least the first 12 months from operation,
e.g. a helpline, nominated individual or other appropriate system.
One credit - Post Operation Evaluation (POE)

8 The client, owner or operator makes a commitment to carry out a post operation evaluation (POE) exercise one year
after the asset becomes operational. This is done to gain in-use performance feedback from operators and users to
inform operational processes, including recommissioning activities, and maintain or improve productivity, health, safety
and comfort. The POE is carried out by an independent party and needs to cover:
8.a A review of the design intent and construction process (review of design, procurement, construction and
handover processes).
8.b Feedback from a wide range of stakeholders including operators, users and impacted community (where
relevant) on the design and operating conditions covering:
8.b.i Comfort conditions (light, noise, temperature, air quality where relevant)
8.b.ii Control, operation and maintenance
8.b.iii Facilities and amenities (where present)
8.b.iv Access and layout
8.b.v Other relevant issues.
8.c Sustainability performance (energy, carbon, water consumption, performance of any sustainable features or
technologies, e.g. materials, renewable energy etc.).
9 The client or owner/operator makes a commitment to carry out the appropriate dissemination of information on the
asset's post operation performance (refer to CN1 and CN2). This is done to share good practice and lessons learnt and
inform changes in user behaviour, asset operational processes and procedures, and system controls.


None.
Compliance notes
CN1 Appropriate Appropriate dissemination includes communication to immediate stakeholders such as

dissemination of owner, operators and also external communication.
post operation In most cases, this will be the production and publication of a case study through one of
evaluation the following means:
information
Client's or owner/operator's own website, publicly available literature or press
release
Industry, sector, government or local authority sponsored website or
information portals.
Where there is a demonstrably justifiable reason why public dissemination is not

possible, for example, the information is commercially or security sensitive, compliance
can be demonstrated by a commitment to produce and disseminate the relevant
information at an organisational level or to appropriate internal or external
stakeholders. Alternatively, the sensitive parts of the relevant information for
dissemination can be omitted from the publication.
CN2 Relevant The information for dissemination includes the following about the asset, its
information for construction and performance:
dissemination 1. A basic description of the project and asset
2. BREEAM rating and score
3. Any key innovative and low impact features or measures
4. Project cost
5. Facilities available for community use (where relevant)
6. Any steps taken during the construction process to reduce environmental
impacts, i.e. innovative construction management techniques
7. Predicted and actual carbon dioxide emissions
8. Outcomes of the post occupancy evaluation study, to share lessons learnt from
the project including:
a. Feedback from the owner/operator, community or both
b. Energy and water consumption including renewable energy generation, level
of rainwater or grey water provision, as applicable
c. Waste minimisation.
Methodology
None.

ID 03 Handover and aftercare Integrated design
Evidence
Independent third party

With respect to using an 'independent third party', the client or project delivery team need to demonstrate that
EITHER:
1. They have used a third party independent of the design and construction process to conduct the necessary Post
Operation Evaluation exercise using a compliant method OR;
2. If the POE is to be carried out by an organisation involved with the asset design or construction, then they must
present the assessor with the evidence that demonstrates the independence of the POE process from the design
and construction process. BREEAM has not attempted to define what form this exercise must take, the onus is on
the project team or relevant individual to clearly demonstrate to the BREEAM Assessor a credible level of
independence.
MEICA
Mechanical, electrical, instrumentation, control and automation services.
Other information
None.

ID 04 Ecosystem services
1 1 None
Aim
To identify and protect the ecosystem services affected by the project.

One credit - Strategic ecosystem services assessment

1 A strategic ecosystem services assessment is undertaken (CN1) for the selected option for the project. This includes:
1.a Identifying the boundary of the area under consideration (refer to CN2) and cross boundary issues, e.g. services
produced in the study area from which others beyond it might benefit or suffer and also services produced
outside the study area that might cause benefit or suffering to those within the study area, e.g. flooding, air
quality
1.b Identifying the main or 'priority' ecosystems and ecosystem services present including those produced and
consumed outside of the boundary but affected by the project (refer to CN3)
1.c Identifying the connections (or flows) and interactions between ecosystem services
1.d Identifying the relative importance of these services, this might be informed by consultation with key
stakeholders or specialist advice and could be presented using an appropriate weighting system (refer to Table
10).
2 The likely impacts of the selected solution on the priority ecosystem services are identified and the associated marginal
changes compared with the existing baseline situation (refer to CN4). This is considered over the predicted life of the
project.
3 The assessment identifies measures to reduce negative marginal changes and increase positive marginal changes.
4 The identified ecosystem services are included as part of the Further consultation process detailed in ST 02 Consultation
and engagement. The final strategic ecosystem services assessment is influenced by the feedback from the local
community.
5 The ecosystem assessment report includes a detailed description of the process, method and findings of the
assessment, in relation to the options considered and the ecosystem services detailed in Table 11 The report also
includes a non-technical executive summary.

One credit - Detailed ecosystem services assessment
6 The process required within the strategic stage assessment (criteria 1 5 ) is undertaken with the updated project
design (refer to CN5).
7 Measures are implemented to mitigate identified negative marginal changes and increase positive marginal changes.

ID 04 Ecosystem services Integrated design

Table 10: 'Likelihood of impact' scoring system
Score Assessment of likely impact
++ Potential significant positive impact
+ Potential positive effect
0 Negligible effect
- Potential negative effect
Potential significant negative effect
? Gaps in evidence or contention

Table 11: The Millennium Ecosystem Assessment classification of ecosystem services
Type of ecosystem service
Provisioning:
Fresh water
Food (e.g. crops, fish, fruit)
Fibre and fuel (e.g. timber, wool)
Genetic resources (used for crop or stick breeding and biotechnology)
Biochemicals, natural medicines, pharmaceuticals
Ornamental resources (e.g. shells, flowers).
Regulatory action:
Air quality regulation

Climate regulation (local temperature, precipitation, greenhouse gas, sequestration)
Water regulation (timing and scale of run-off, flooding)
Natural hazard regulation (e.g. storm protection)
Pest regulation
Disease regulation
Erosion regulation
Water purification and waste treatment
Pollination.
Cultural services:
Cultural heritage
Recreation and tourism
Aesthetic value
Spiritual and religious value
Inspiration of art, folklore, architecture etc.
Social relations (e.g. fishing, grazing, cropping communities).
Supporting services:
Soil formation
Primary production
Nutrient cycling
Water recycling
Photosynthesis (production of atmospheric oxygen)
Provision of habitat.

ID 04 Ecosystem services Integrated design
Compliance notes
CN1 Ecosystem services The ecosystem services assessment must:

assessment 1. Take an ecosystem services approach to assessing impacts
2. Be informed by national ecosystem assessment data
3. Use appropriate tools aligning with national best practice guidance (refer to
Appendix B - The Approved Standards and Weightings List (ASWL))
4. Be carried out by a number of professionals with expertise in some of the priority
ecosystem services being assessed, e.g. biodiversity, water quality etc. The
professionals seek advice from other experts and members of the project team
for technical or specialist areas that are highlighted as being relevant through the
ecosystem services assessment process. This specialist consultation is evidenced
in the assessment document.
Note: There may be crossover here with the options appraisal exercise.
CN2 Project boundary This is decided by the project delivery team, client and owner/operator. It should take
into account the objectives and drivers for the project. Some iteration of boundaries
may be necessary as the project progresses.
CN3 Ecosystem services The identification considers all ecosystem services identified, or classified in Table 11.
CN4 Strategic stage At this stage the assessment is expected to be rapid, accounting for the likely range
assessment of and magnitude of impacts, and not considered in detail.
'marginal' changes An appropriate 'likelihood of impact' scoring system could be used (refer to Table 10)
to inform decision-making or act as an initial filter to identify where further information
is needed. It may be necessary to undertake more detailed studies for contentious or
uncertain development proposals.
As a guide, where the risks are low, all that is necessary is an overview of the likely range
and magnitude of the impacts.
However, if the risks are high, a more detailed evaluation may be necessary to quantify
impacts (noting that this does not always refer to an exact value but to illustrate the
magnitude and extent of the impact) and value predicted changes.
The assessment must include defensible evidence for identified likely impacts and a
clarification of uncertainties.
CN5 Detailed At this stage the same approach to ecosystem services assessment is undertaken as
assessment of the for the strategic stage criteria but using the more detailed information for the project.
marginal changes It may also be necessary to provide more detail for contentious or uncertain issues.
Methodology
None.

Evidence
1 5 Ecosystem services assessment N/A N/A
Marginal changes
Marginal changes recognise the difference between a 'baseline' state and a 'post intervention' state. In ecosystem
services assessments these are considered more robust than predicted actual values due to the large numbers of
uncertainties and assumptions used in this type of study. When considering marginal changes these uncertainties are
applied to both the 'baseline' and the 'outcome' status which to a certain extent cancels them out.
Priority service
This can be identified where one of the following are true:
The project affects the ability of others to benefit from the ecosystem service AND it is important to their
livelihoods, health, safety or culture AND there are no viable alternatives to this ecosystem service
The ecosystem service could change in ways that affect operational performance of the project AND there
are no viable alternatives to this ecosystem service.
Other information
For more information see:
Institution of Environmental Sciences. Ecosystem services: How to do one in practice [Internet]. Institution of
Environmental Sciences; 2013 [cited 2015 Oct 10]. Available from: https://www.the-
ies.org/sites/default/files/reports/ecosystem_services.pdf
The World Resources Institute (WRI) publication weaving Ecosystem Services into Impact Assessment
www.wri.org/publication/weaving-ecosystem-services-into-impact-assessment
The Millennium Ecosystem Assessment www.millenniumassessment.org/en/index.html

ID 05 Whole life costing Integrated design
ID 05 Whole life costing

2 1 None
Aim
To encourage whole life thinking and design and construction choices based on the life of the asset.

This stage of the issue is split into two parts:
Service life planning (1 credit)

Whole life cost (1 credit)
One credit - Service life planning

1 A strategic service life plan is developed before the end of the briefing stage in line with the principles detailed in ISO
15686-1 5 .
2 The following are confirmed with the client, owner/operator and project delivery team and included in the strategic
service life plan:
2.a The required design life and estimated service life of the asset (refer to CN1 and CN2)
2.b Minimum functional performance criteria for each element over the asset's design life
2.c Components required to be easily repairable, maintainable, or replaceable within the design life of the asset
2.d Predicted maintenance and replacement requirements and activities over the life cycle of the asset
2.e How uncertainty in the estimated service life will be taken into account as the design of the project continues
2.f When and how the service life of the project will be reviewed and compared with the estimated service life
identified in the client's brief, to ensure that the predicted service life is adequate throughout the design and
construction stages
2.g Any significant service life implications that cannot be designed out.
3 The strategic stage service life plan provides assurance that the estimated service life of a new asset on the proposed
site, operated as specified in the design brief and with appropriate maintenance and replacement, is at least as long as
the design life.
One credit - Whole life cost (WLC)

4 A strategic whole life cost assessment is undertaken, based on initial assumptions, in line with ISO 15686-5:2008 6 and
used to compare alternative design and construction solutions for the project.
5 An elemental life cycle cost (LCC) analysis has been carried out at Process Stage 2 (equivalent to concept design),
together with any design option appraisals in line with ISO 15686-5:2008 (refer to CN3).
6 The LCC analysis shows:
6.a An outline LCC plan for the project based on the asset's basic structure, appraising a range of options and
based on multiple cash flow scenarios, e.g. 20, 30, 60, 100+ years
6.b The structure and servicing strategy for the project outlining services component options over a 15-year period,
in the form of an 'elemental LCC Plan'.

7 The following are included in the whole life cost plan (WLC), (refer to CN4):
7.a Information and results from the elemental LCC
7.b Income
7.c Non-construction costs
7.d Externalities (as defined in ISO 15686-5:2008 relevant to the project)
7.e A predicted single WLC cash flow output
7.f When and how the WLC of the project will be updated and compared with the requirements of the client's brief,
to ensure that critical value is maximised throughout the design and construction stages.
8 Demonstrate, using appropriate examples provided by the design team, how the elemental level LCC plan has been
used to influence the structure and services of the design and final asset to minimise life cycle costs and maximise critical
value.

One credit - Component level LCC Plan
9 A component level LCC plan has been developed by the end of Process Stage 4 (equivalent to technical design) in line
with ISO 15686-5:2008 and includes the following component types (where present):
9.a Structural, e.g. replacement or maintenance of track, wind turbine blades, road surface
9.b Services, e.g. ventilation systems, drainage, cabling, pumps
9.c External spaces, e.g. alternative hard landscaping.
10 The results are fed back to the client to inform the whole life cost (WLC) plan for the asset.
11 Demonstrate, using appropriate examples provided by the design team, how the component level LCC plan has been
used to influence the structure, services and external spaces of the design and final asset (where relevant) to minimise life
cycle costs and maximise critical value.

None.

Compliance notes
CN1 Service life of the The service life of the asset considers or takes account of:
asset
Service lives of the individual elements and critical components that are
required within the asset to provide an estimate for the whole asset, including
how to:
Minimise obsolescence (including material scarcity)
Adapt the asset for future use
Optimise reuse at demolition.
Performance expectations of each component within the project conditions

including:
Likely failure modes
Causes of loss of serviceability
Risk of premature failure.
CN2 Predicted estimates Projections are based on data which have been assessed for robustness and reliability,
and projections and records of the data sources are kept. Data can come from:
Data produced using the procedures within ISO 15686-2

Data produced using the procedures within ISO 15686-2 adjusted using the
procedures in ISO 15686-8
Documented service life data as described in ISO 15686-7.
CN3 Elemental life cycle For the elemental life cycle cost assessment, only key elements need to be considered
cost and these will vary from project to project. Guidance within ISO 15686-5:2008 should
be followed to establish the key elements for the project.
Information may be a mix of typical benchmark costs for key elements, comparative
cost modelling or approximate estimates and must be reported as:
Cost per unit of process or function.
Examples of this format may include:
Cost per passenger per mile travelled (road)

Cost per litre of sewage treated (sewage treatment works)
Cost per megawatt (MW) of energy generated (power station).
CN4 Whole life cost Evaluations are based on a fixed 'life' period that takes account of major cost
predictions consequences of the initial choice or contractual responsibilities for funding
maintenance, e.g. 40 years for road pavements. It is proposed that for the elemental
life cycle cost assessment, only significant elements need to be considered.
CN5 Appropriate The options selected to demonstrate how life cycle costs have been minimised and
examples critical value maximised must be appropriate to its relative impact on project costs,
(see criteria 8 and future maintenance burden and size (volume or area).
11 )

Methodology
None.
Evidence
1-3 Service life plan N/A N/A
4 Strategic whole life cost N/A N/A

assessment
5-6 Elemental life cycle cost analysis N/A N/A
9 N/A Component level life cycle cost N/A

plan
10 N/A Updated whole life cost plan N/A
Life cycle cost (LCC)

The cost of an asset, or its parts throughout its life cycle, while fulfilling the performance requirements; a
methodology for systematic economic evaluation of life cycle costs over a period of analysis, as defined in the agreed
scope.
Elemental level LCC plan

This is commonly used for developing solutions at project level during option appraisals. Costs are normally at
elemental level on the entire asset. Information may be a mix of typical benchmark costs for key elements,
comparative cost modelling or approximate estimates (refer to CN3).
Component level LCC plan

A component level LCC plan is commonly used for cost planning specification choices of systems, elements or
component levels during design development. Component level LCC appraisal for service life planning at the
feasibility stage requires the environment of the asset and other local conditions to be identified, and the
fundamental requirements to be met in planning the service life of the building. Decisions should be made on:
The likely design life of the asset (rather than the contractual design life)
Minimum functional performance criteria for each component over the asset's design life
Components that must be repairable, maintainable or replaceable within the design life of the building.
Service life

This is the service life that an asset of an assembled system (part of works) would be expected to have in a set of
specific in-use conditions, determined from reference service life data after taking into account any differences from
the reference and in-use conditions (adapted from ISO 15686-1:2011).
Other information
When to undertake life cycle costing

Life cycle costing is relevant throughout the asset's life cycle, in particular during the project planning, design and construction
and also during the in-use phases.
Useful references
Achieving Whole Life Value in Infrastructure and Buildings, BR 476, 2005, BRE.


ID 06 Whole life environmental impacts Integrated design
ID 06 Whole life environmental impacts

2 0 None.
Aim
To establish the whole life environmental impacts of the infrastructure asset over its lifetime.

Option 1: screening carbon footprint (one credit)

Option 2: screening life cycle assessment (two credits)
Option 1 - One credit - Screening carbon footprint

1 A screening carbon footprint is completed before finalising the concept by a suitably qualified carbon practitioner (refer
to Relevant definitions) to establish the total carbon equivalent impact associated with the following life cycle stages of
the asset (as shown in Figure 4 ):
1.a Extraction and manufacturing of materials (Modules A1 A3)
1.b Transport of materials from gate to site (Module A4)
1.c Construction processes and installation (Module A5) including use of plant and machinery, site accommodation
and facilities and transport and disposal of waste (site to grave)
1.d Operational processes (Module B1 and B6) as a result of the infrastructure design (refer to Relevant definitions)
1.e Maintenance, repair, replacement and refurbishment (Modules B2-B5)
1.f End of life (Modules C1-C4)
1.g Benefits and loads beyond the system boundary (Module D), such as land use changes (refer to Relevant
definitions) included if suitable scenarios can be developed and shown to be relevant and justified (i.e. optional
module).
Module D provides the net benefits relating to exported energy and secondary materials, secondary fuels or secondary
products resulting from reuse, recycling and energy recovery that take place beyond the system boundary.
2 The screening identifies the significant sources of emissions over the expected lifetime of the asset (refer to CN1) and
total carbon equivalent emissions or Global Warming Potential (kgCO2e) are reported. Please refer to the Methodology
section for details of how this should be calculated.
3 Recommendations are made to the project team to inform future design decisions and include the goal and scope of a
further assessment.
4 The suitably qualified carbon practitioner uses standards and sources of data in accordance with Table 12 and
documents the assessment process with all decisions justified (refer to CN2).
5 Total carbon equivalent emissions of the asset are reported within the BREEAM Infrastructure Online tool. Results shall be
presented separately for all the building life cycle stages and for module D (if reported).

Option 2 - Two credits - Screening life cycle assessment (LCA)

6 A screening LCA is completed before finalising the concept design by a suitably qualified LCA practitioner (refer to
Relevant definitions) to establish the environmental impact associated with the life cycle stages given in criterion 1 of the
asset in line with the principles set out in EN 15978 and the EeB Guidance document (refer to CN3, , CN4 and Other
information).
7 The screening identifies significant sources of the following indicators over the expected lifetime of the asset (refer to
CN1) and these are reported:
7.a Total carbon equivalent emissions and Global Warming Potential (kgCO2e)
7.b Net use of freshwater (m3)
7.c Hazardous waste disposed (kg)
7.d Non-hazardous waste disposed (kg).
8 Recommendations are made to the project team to inform future design decisions and include the goal and scope of
any further assessment.
9 The suitably qualified LCA practitioner sources data in line with the principles set out in EN 15978 and the EeB Guide and
documents the assessment process with all decisions justified.
10 The results of the screening LCA are reported in the BREEAM Infrastructure Online Tool for all indicators listed in criterion 7
. Results shall be presented separately for all the building life cycle stages and for module D as detailed in EN 15978 (if
reported).

None.

Table 12: Standards and data used to inform the carbon footprint (criterion 4 only)
Activities Approved standards Suggested data sources
Embodied carbon of products - cradle-to- EN 15978:2011 7 Sourced as detailed in EN 15804

gate OR (EPDs) and EN 15978 or ISO
ISO 14064-2:2006 8 21930 (outside EU only).
OR
Transport of construction products to site
GHG Protocol9
One standard should be
Construction activities on site (plant and selected.
machinery used on site & staff
accommodation)
Transport and disposal of waste from the

site
Operational carbon and energy
Land use change impact Land Use, Land Use Change and LULUCF GHG Inventory data
Forestry (LULUCF GHG) Inventory

Where a standard or data source not listed above is proposed by the suitably qualified carbon or LCApractitioner, BRE
Global should be contacted to confirm it can be used as a compliant standard or data source.
Compliance notes
CN1 Expected lifetime of The impacts should be measured over the expected lifetime of the asset as indicated in
the asset the design specification. If the lifetime is not specified then the working lifetimes
detailed in national best practice standards for the asset type should be used (refer to
Appendix B - The Approved Standards and Weightings List (ASWL)).
CN2 Cut-off criteria for Where the carbon equivalent impact of an activity is estimated to account for no more
the screening than 1% of the total impact of that module, that activity may be omitted from the
carbon footprint assessment.
The proportion of total neglected activities within a module, e.g. per module A1-A3,
A4-A5, B1-B5, B6-B7, C1-4 and module D (where calculated) should not exceed 5% of
the total impact within that module.
Although this rule should be upheld where possible it is appreciated that at the
screening stage not all details of the project will be known. The practitioner can exceed
this cut-off criteria where the corresponding impact can be deemed negligible and
justified.
This note cannot be applied in order to hide data. Any application of the cut-off criteria
should be documented.
Note: This compliance note is not relevant to projects undergoing the screening LCA
(criteria 6 10 ) - these projects should refer to EN 15978 and the EeB Guidance
Document for details of how to apply cut off criteria (refer to CN3).
CN3 Use of EN 15978 EN 15978 and the EeB Guidance document (refer to Other information) have both
and the EeB been written with a focus on buildings, however the principles and rules within these are
Guidance equally applicable to infrastructure projects.
document Dependent on the infrastructure type, the suitably qualified LCA practitioner can
modify the requirements of these documents where justified as necessary and
appropriate, and also record the rationale for these decisions.
For projects outside of the European Union refer to CN4
CN4 Assets outside of The standards EN 15978 and EeB Guidance documents are currently regarded as best
the European Union practice globally with respect to the sustainability of construction works, life cycle
assessments and environmental product declarations.
For the purposes of a BREEAM Infrastructure assessment BRE Global requires that the
principles of EN 15978 and EeB Guidance are followed in order to provide a consistent
approach to life cycle assessment. The suitably qualified LCA practitioner can modify
the requirements of these documents further to account for regional variations if
necessary for the assessment.
If an alternative national best practice standard for life cycle assessment of
infrastructure projects is commonly used, BRE Global should be contacted to confirm
whether these standards can be used in place of EN 15978 and the EeB Guidance
document.

Methodology
Coverage of total carbon equivalent (kgCO2e) emissions for the screening carbon footprint
Total carbon equivalent (kgCO2e) emissions should be reported for each life cycle stage shown in Figure 4 over the expected
lifetime of the asset. This includes:
Embodied carbon equivalent from construction products - Modules A1-A3

This includes whole life energy and carbon impacts from construction products - cradle-to-gate. The impact of materials must
be calculated in accordance with EN 15804 and consider all products within the asset (refer to Relevant definitions and CN2
cut-off criteria).
Total carbon equivalent from transport of construction products from gate to site - Module A4
This includes direct (Scope 1) and indirect (Scope 2) emissions from energy used to transport construction products from
supplier to construction site. The total volume of construction products and the distance they are transported is established.
An appropriate emission factor for the mode of transport is used to calculate the carbon equivalent emissions.
Total carbon equivalent from construction and demolition activities on site (plant and machinery used on
site & staff accommodation) - Module A5, B1-B5 & C1 (as relevant to the life cycle stage)
This includes direct (Scope 1) and indirect (Scope 2) emissions from energy used within the site boundary for on-site
construction, maintenance and disposal of the asset. The amount of carbon arising from on-site energy use is determined by
the plant and equipment used, its output rating, its efficiency, the type of fuel it uses and the hours of use.
On-site generation plant should not be included in main list of equipment. Instead the average operational efficiency of the
generation plant and the average emission factor for the fuels is needed. These values are used to calculate the average
carbon emission factor for plant and equipment which use electricity generated on site.
Total carbon equivalent from transport and disposal of waste from site - Module A5, B1-B5 & C2-C4
(continued)
This includes direct (Scope 1) and indirect (Scope 2) emissions from energy used to transport waste products from the site to
the disposal site plus any energy and carbon arising after disposal for waste which is not reused or recycled. This is calculated
based on the quantity of waste removed from site, the type of waste and the disposal option. UK emission factors for
environmental company reporting, or similar, can be used.
Total carbon equivalent from operation of the asset - Module B6

This includes direct (Scope 1) and indirect (Scope 2) emissions arising from operation of the asset, including commissioning
and standby emissions, repair, maintenance and replacement.
Where an asset has no operational energy consumption associated with the planned or operated asset, then this category
can be excluded from the assessment.
Total carbon equivalent from land use change - a Module D consideration

Land use change as a result of the construction and operation of the infrastructure asset should be assessed to determine
whether carbon equivalent savings can be demonstrated. Consideration of land use change is restricted to the construction
site during construction and demolition and over the expected operational life of the asset (refer to CN1).
The actual operational land use is determined based on the following land use categories above over the lifetime of the asset:
1. Forest land
2. Crop land
3. Grassland
4. Wetlands

5. Settlements
6. Other land.
The carbon equivalent impacts arising from land use changes should be quantified based on average values derived from the
most recent GHG Inventory data for the UK.
Refer to LUE 07 Land use changes for project detail requirements.
Evidence
Ref Strategy stage Interim design stage Final post-

construction stage
ALL One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in the BREEAM evidential requirements section
can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.
1 4 Carbon footprint report including N/A N/A

recommendations and justifications from the
suitably qualified LCA practitioner
6 9 LCA report including recommendations and N/A N/A

justifications from the suitably qualified LCA
practitioner
Direct (Scope 1) and indirect (Scope 2) emissions

The GHG Protocol Corporate Standard 10 classifies a company's GHG emissions into three 'scopes'. Scope 1
emissions are direct emissions from owned or controlled sources, e.g. emissions from combustion in owned or
controlled boilers, furnaces, vehicles, etc. Scope 2 emissions are indirect or out-of-scope emissions from the
generation of purchased energy, e.g. electricity, imported heat that is purchased. Scope 3 emissions are all indirect
emissions that occur in the value chain of the reporting company, including both upstream and downstream
emissions.
Environmental Product Declarations (EPDs)

ISO 14025:2006 11 defines an environmental label or environmental declaration as a claim which indicates the
environmental aspects of a product or service. ISO 14020:2012 goes on to state that environmental labels and
declarations provide information about a product or service concerning its overall environmental character, a specific
environmental aspect, or any number of aspects. BRE are an example of an EPD provider via the BRE Environmental
Profiles Scheme which is being replaced by the new EN 15804 compliant BRE EPD Verification scheme.
Independently verified third party Environmental Product Declarations (EPDs)

For this BREEAM issue, the independently verified third party EPDs can cover:
Partial life cycle (cradle-to-gate or cradle-to-gate with options*) OR
Whole life cycle (cradle-to-grave)
*Partial life cycle EPD can cover:

The product stage only: such an EPD covers raw material supply, transport, manufacturing and associated
processes; this EPD is said to be "cradle to gate"
The product stage and selected further life cycle stages: such an EPD is said to be "cradle-to-gate with
options".
In both cases, the EPD must be produced in accordance with the requirements within EN 15804 , ISO 21930 or the ISO
14020 series, particularly ISO 14025 and ISO 14040 and 14044 (life cycle assessment).
Land use change

Changes in energy and carbon arising from land use change within the site boundary over the life cycle of the asset.
Change in land use can have very significant carbon impact for some infrastructure projects, in particular those which
involve large-scale removal or planting of trees. These changes can have a significant effect on the total carbon
impact of the project over its lifetime, whereby land use changes can result in positive and negative carbon impacts.
Operational processes as a result of the infrastructure design

For the purpose of BREEAM Infrastructure, the impact of operational processes should be considered in order to
investigate potential savings which are attributed to the design of the asset itself rather than to expect savings to be
made due to the way in which the asset is operated. For example, consideration should be given to savings from
smoother road surfaces and more gradually curved corners leading to road traffic running more efficiently; gravity
drainage within a pipeline leading to a reduced pumping capacity, etc.
Suitably qualified carbon practitioner

An individual who can meet the following requirements can be deemed 'suitably qualified' for the purpose of a
BREEAM assessment:
1. Has a minimum of three years relevant experience (within the last five years). Such experience must clearly
demonstrate a practical understanding of LCA and its methodology. This includes familiarity and use of ISO
14040 and ISO 14044 and use of carbon footprinting tools or other carbon life cycle assessment methodologies
2. Has experience in undertaking assessments of the carbon and energy impact (or life cycle impacts for the suitably
qualified LCA practitioner - see below) of construction projects
3. Can demonstrate that they do not have a vested interest in the outcome of the infrastructure project and should
not be professionally connected with any energy company, low or zero carbon technology or manufacturer.
Suitably qualified LCA practitioner

BREEAM assessment:
1. Meets the requirements 1-3 specified for a suitably qualified carbon practitioner PLUS
2. Their knowledge and experience includes preparation of Type III environmental declarations, including familiarity
and use of ISO 14025 and ISO 21930.
3. Their knowledge and experience includes application of Type III environmental declarations in the construction
context, specifically awareness of EN 15978:2011 and EN 15804:2012+A1: 2013. (Refer to CN4 above for
projects outside of the EU.)
Total carbon equivalent (kgCO 2e)

Carbon should be reported for emissions including carbon dioxide (CO2), methane (CH4), nitrous oxide (N2O),
hydrofluorocarbons (HFCs), perfluorocarbons (PFCs) and sulfur hexafluoride (SF6) measured as CO2e to reflect the
relative global warming potential of these gases.
Other information
Purpose and completeness of a screening carbon footprint or life cycle assessment

A screening carbon footprint or LCA study serves as an initial overview of the environmental impacts of an asset at an early
design stage. With a screening carbon footprint or LCA it is not possible to retrieve detailed results on the environmental
performance of the asset, however this type of study is designed to yield an estimate of the environmental performance,
which can be helpful in the early stages of a project to identify environmental hotspots that would require an additional, in-
depth assessment.

A screening study would typically focus on the main contributors to the system under assessment, including (but not limited
to) the input materials, water and energy use, and the transportation of users (if relevant). In carrying out the screening carbon
footprint or LCA care is needed to ensure that omitted products are not significant for the chosen environmental indicators.
Carbon footprinting and LCA tools

It is not necessary to use a specific tool to carry out the LCA or carbon footprint, however reputable sources of data should be
used as detailed in EN 15978 (Section 10 - particularly 10.3 and 10.4) and the EeB Guide. The following sources can be
deemed appropriate for the screening LCA indicators:
1. Total carbon equivalent and Global Warming Potential (see Table 12 under 'suggested data sources').
2. Net use of freshwater: Water footprint tools can be used to obtain relevant data. A list of tools can be found here:
www.waterfootprint.org/waterfootprints
3. Combined hazardous and non-hazardous waste disposed: Data can be taken from resource management plans or
tools.
SimaPro and GaBi are LCA software packages that also contain data. These are appropriate for suitably qualified carbon or
LCA practitioners.
BS EN 15978:2011 and BS EN 15804:2012+A1:2013

BS EN 15978 Sustainability of construction works Assessment of environmental performance of buildings Calculation
method has been developed for buildings rather than civil engineering works. Currently there is not an equivalent standard for
civil engineering projects and as such the life cycle assessment required within this issue should be carried out in line with the
principles set out in EN 15978 as interpreted by a suitably qualified LCA practitioner.
Modules A1 to C4 cover environmental impacts and aspects that are directly linked to processes and operations taking place
within the system boundary of the asset, while module D provides the net benefits relating to exported energy and
secondary materials, secondary fuels or secondary products resulting from reuse, recycling and energy recovery that take
place beyond the system boundary.
The environmental assessment at the asset (or building) level requires information from products and services to inform the
LCA and EN 15804 or ISO 21930 should be applied to gather this information. EN 15804 or ISO 21930 applies equally to
civil engineering projects and building projects.

Figure 4 Life cycle stages as defined in EN 15978
EeBGuide Project
EeBGuide's Info Hub provides a wealth of information for LCA in the construction sector.
The guidance provided draws on the ILCD handbook developed by the Institute for Environment (IES) and Sustainability in the
European Commission Joint Research Centre (EC JRC) and EN 15804 and EN 15978 developed by the European Committee
for standardisation/Technical Committee 350 Sustainability of construction works (CEN/TC 350). It has been separated into
two parts:
For products (Part A) and

For buildings (Part B).
Although part B is targeted at buildings the guidance within this can be applied to infrastructure by a suitably qualified LCA
practitioner and support a standardised approach to LCA.
For more information please visit www.eebguide.eu/ .

Resilience
Resilience
Category overview
Refer to the country reference sheet in the ASWL Res 04 Surface water run-off
Summary
This category encourages proactive hazard identification, risk evaluation and risk management for the asset and the
infrastructure system within which it sits. The issues also cover business continuity, certification of products and systems,
specific flood mitigation measures, climate change adaptation and meeting future needs.

Issue Credits
Res 01 Business continuity Strategic stage 1

Project detail 0
Implementation of procedures that incorporate resilience into organisations and their assets
Res 02 Risk assessment and mitigation Strategic stage 4

Project detail 2
Appointing resilience specialists

Identifying and liaising with dependencies
Hazard identification
Risk assessment and evaluation
Risk mitigation measures and contingency planning
Flood impact mitigation
Res 03 Designing for future needs Strategic 1

Project detail 2
Assessing and implementing measures to meet future needs
Res 04 Surface water run-off Strategic 0

Project detail 2
Reducing peak flow rate and volume of surface water run-off
Res 05 Durability Strategic 0

Project detail 2

Resilience BREEAM New Construction: Infrastructure (International pilot)
Issue Credits
Material durability
Certification of products and systems

Res 01 Business continuity Resilience
Res 01 Business continuity

1 0 None
Aim
To encourage an organisational level approach to resilience and business continuity.

One credit - Business continuity management system
1 The organisation responsible for the asset's future operation (refer to CN1) has an ISO 22301 12 compliant business
continuity management system that is certified by an accredited third party certification body.

None.

None.
Compliance notes
CN1 Organisation This is likely to be the owner or operator of the asset. If the asset owner or operator is
responsible for the not known at the strategic assessment stage then it can be the organisation that
asset's future operates the system that the asset will be part of (for example, the national railway
operation network operator in the case of a rail project).
Methodology
None.

Evidence
All
None.
Other information
None.

Res 02 Risk assessment and mitigation Resilience
Res 02 Risk assessment and mitigation

4 2 None
Aim
To evaluate risks the asset is likely to be exposed to over its life and introduce appropriate measures and procedures to
reduce risk arising from natural and intentional threats and enhance resilience of the asset.

Identifying dependencies (one credit)

Project risk assessment (up to three credits)
One credit - Identifying dependencies

1 Models, tools or other formal methods (refer to CN1) are used to analyse the infrastructure asset and associated
systems to identify physical, geographical, digital and organisational dependencies (upstream, downstream and inter) at
a business and project level.
2 The project team consult relevant stakeholders (refer to Relevant definitions) to:
2.a Determine incidents that might impact the project site and simultaneously affect any dependencies
2.b Share information with relevant stakeholders to ensure:
2.b.i Effective system resilience across identified dependencies
2.b.ii Standard arrangements for business continuity across affected sectors.
3 Include any upstream dependencies as part of the standard business continuity management (BCM).
Up to three credits - Project risk assessment
Prerequisite
4 The project team (including the owner/operator) identify the criticality of the infrastructure or asset (e.g. nationally,
regionally, locally) and its components.
5 A risk assessment is carried out in line with ISO 31000 13 (refer to CN2) using current data (refer to CN3) and Table 13for
the following:
5.a Construction
5.b Operation.
6 Appropriate consultants (refer to Relevant definitions) are appointed to advise on the following in accordance with the
level of risk identified within the risk assessments carried out:
6.a Issues relating to flooding and other relevant natural hazards
6.b Issues relating to intentional threats.
7 The project delivery team or contractor's brief includes:
7.a Minimum regulatory requirements relating to resilience
7.b Corporate requirements relating to resilience

7.c Business dependencies that influence the project development process

7.d Recommendations made by the appropriate consultants including proposed measures to mitigate the risks
identified.
One credit - Natural hazards and risk evaluation (1)

8 Criteria 4 7 are achieved.
9 The risk assessment includes flooding and other relevant natural hazards (refer to CN2) for construction and operation
of the asset.
10 This risk assessment for relevant natural hazards follows national best practice guidance (refer to Appendix B - The
Approved Standards and Weightings List (ASWL)).
11 The data used to inform the risk assessment are current and primarily qualitative (refer to CN3).
One credit - Natural hazards and risk evaluation (2)

12 Criteria 4 7 are achieved for the construction and operation of the asset and criteria 8 11 are achieved for the
construction stage only.
13 Where the risk of flooding or other relevant natural hazards is found to be medium or high as defined in national best
practice planning policy or guidance (refer to Appendix B - The Approved Standards and Weightings List (ASWL)), a
further quantitative assessment of potential hazards and associated risk (refer to CN3) is carried out for the operation of
the asset.
This credit will be scoped out where the risk of flooding or other natural hazards is found to be low as defined in national best
practice planning policy or guidance.
One credit - Intentional threats and risk evaluation

15 The risk assessment includes intentional threats including physical (e.g. fire, vandalism) and cybersecurity threats (refer to
Relevant definitions).

Updated project risk assessment (prerequisite)

Project resilience planning (one credit)
Resilience measures (one credit)
Prerequisite - Updated project risk assessment

16 The project risk assessment developed at the strategic assessment stage is updated (or developed in accordance with
strategic assessment criteria 4 7 ) and includes:
16.a Relevant natural hazards
16.b Intentional threats, including cyber and physical security.
One credit - Project resilience planning

17 Criterion 16 has been achieved.
18 A project resilience plan (PRP) is developed (refer to CN4) and includes measures to reduce the risks and impacts of the
following (where relevant) to within the agreed 'maximum tolerable levels' (CN5):
18.a Flooding
18.b Other relevant natural hazards
18.c Intentional threats, including cyber and physical security.

19 Changes to the design or construction process (refer to CN6) are:

19.a Assessed in terms of their impact on resilience
19.b Communicated to, and where relevant agreed by, all relevant stakeholders
19.c Reflected in the project resilience plan.
20 A contingency plan (refer to CN7) is developed for any residual risks and impacts (as agreed between the project team,
owner/operator and other relevant stakeholders) to ensure the asset can continue to operate or be recovered in a
timely manner.
21 Mitigation and management measures required at the operational stage are included in handover documentation such
as the operation and maintenance manuals.
One credit - Resilience measures

23 For flooding, measures are implemented to reduce the risks and impacts identified to within the agreed 'maximum
tolerable levels' (refer to Step 2 of Table 13) and this includes:
23.a A site specific flood risk assessment (FRA) confirming the asset is situated in a flood zone that is defined as
having a low annual probability of flooding in accordance with current national best practice (refer to Appendix
B - The Approved Standards and Weightings List (ASWL) and CN9) OR
23.b A site specific FRA confirming the development is situated in a flood zone that is defined as having a medium or
high annual probability of flooding in accordance with current national best practice planning guidance (refer to
Appendix B - The Approved Standards and Weightings List (ASWL) and CN9) and EITHER
23.b.i Critical and vulnerable structures and equipment are at least 600mm above the design flood level of
the flood zone in which the assessed development is located OR
23.b.ii The final design of the asset and the wider site reflects the recommendations made by an appropriate
consultant in accordance with a hierarchical risk approach (refer to Relevant definitions).
24 For other relevant natural hazards, measures are implemented to reduce the risks and impacts identified to within the
agreed 'maximum tolerable levels'.
25 For intentional threats, measures are implemented to reduce the risks and impacts identified to within the agreed
'maximum tolerable levels'.

Table 13: Approach to risk assessment and mitigation
Stage Requirements
Step 1 Natural hazard identification

1. A series of Design Basis Events (DBEs) are formulated that:
a. Include all relevant natural hazards and sources of flooding (refer to Other information)
b. Are informed by consultation and advice from relevant stakeholders (refer to Relevant definitions)
c. Address high probability low impact events and low probability high impact events
d. Consider potential hazards over the life of the asset, including the influence of climate change and
expected future needs (refer to CN8).
Intentional threat identification
2. A series of Design Basis Threats (DBTs) are formulated that:
a. Are informed by consultation and advice from relevant stakeholders
b. Address high probability low impact events and low probability high impact events
c. Consider potential intentional threats over the life of the asset, including physical and cybersecurity.

Stage Requirements
Step 2 Risk analysis and evaluation

1. The identified DBEs, DBTs and dependencies are used to determine the risks associated with the asset.
2. The project team and owner/operator define the project's tolerable level of risk by:
a. Reviewing the scope of possible hazards including construction and operational phases identified
through the DBEs and DBTs, e.g. flooding, vandalism, theft etc.
b. Rating the severity of impacts resulting from these hazards or threats and a likelihood, i.e. high,
medium or low for each scenario or impact
c. Identifying 'maximum tolerable' impact and likelihood criteria (refer to CN9) for the agreed scope
of disruptive events.
3. The identified risks are evaluated against the agreed identified 'maximum tolerable' levels.
4. Resilience options are appraised taking into account:
a. Effectiveness in reducing risks
b. Proportionality given the risks
c. Whole life costs and the service life of the asset including maintenance, replacement, upgrades and
operational costs
d. Impacts on dependencies
e. The balance between investment in the infrastructure and investment in emergency response and
recovery capabilities
f. Uncertainties over the life of the asset.
5. Mitigation measures that are likely to reduce the risks to within the agreed 'maximum tolerable' levels
are identified.
Compliance notes
CN1 Models, tools As a minimum models or tools must:

or methods 1. Be either independent, peer reviewed or both
for identifying 2. Consider 'one level up' or direct dependencies, i.e. parts of the system that, if
dependencies impacted, would have a direct effect on the asset such as the energy supply or
communication system
3. Be current and up to date.
Dependencies can also be identified through engaging with relevant stakeholders,
e.g. through a series of structured workshops.

CN2 Risk Assessment of risk includes the scale and duration of impact of risks associated with
assessment the following as a minimum:
1. Health and safety of operators, users or others
2. Commercial or economic losses, e.g. failure to meet contractual obligations
3. Risks to reputation, e.g. negative media coverage, loss of trust
4. Business disruption, e.g. loss of essential services
5. Regulatory action, e.g. loss of life, serious injury, environmental damage
6. The environment, e.g. damage to the natural environment
7. The impacts of climate change.
As a minimum flood risk assessment includes:
1. The characteristics of the site
2. The use and design of the proposed development
3. The size and area likely to flood (through use of flood maps)
4. Depth of water, likely flow rate and path, rate of rise and duration
5. Existing flood prevention measures - extent, standard and maintenance
regime
6. The allowance of freeboard (refer to Relevant definitions)
7. Cumulative effects of development, especially the loss of flood storage
capacity
8. Cross boundary effects
9. Effects of a flood on access including by emergency services
10. Effects of flood on proposed open spaces including gardens
11. The extent to which the development, its materials and construction are
designed to be water resistant.
As a minimum flood risk assessment considers:
1. The nature of the hazard - the source
2. The way in which the flood water will reach the site - the pathway
3. The impact of the flood water - the receptor
4. The likelihood that a flood will occur in terms of percentage annual probability,
the depth of flood water across the site, the duration and flow velocity
5. All current and future sources of flooding (refer to Other information section).

CN3 Current and As a minimum data sources should:

robust data - 1. Be from an independent source and have been subject to peer review
types and 2. Include national risk registers, where available
sources 3. Include sector specific resilience plans , where available
4. Include strategic level risk assessments for flooding or other relevant natural
hazards (regional or local level).
For security and crime related threats this might include:
1. Local police statistics
2. National crime statistics
3. Insurance claim data
4. Corporate expenditure on maintenance and repair.
For relevant natural hazards this must include:
1. Qualitative - flood/hazard maps, local information, historical records
2. Quantitative - modelling and costed impact assessments, factors for climate
change and specific impacts. For flooding, specific impacts includes from
increased rainfall and higher sea levels to accurately determine flood depths,
duration and flow velocities at various percentage annual probability, e.g. by
using hydraulic and hydrological models and digital terrain data.
Factors for climate change should be based on climate projections from a national
body (refer to Appendix B - The Approved Standards and Weightings List (ASWL)).
Where major investment in long term infrastructure is being considered, results from
international climate modelling centres should also be referred to. For example, the
results from the Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change models can be viewed
using the IPCC Data Distribution Centre data visualisation tools.
CN4 Project The scope of the project resilience plan is approved by the owner/operator before
resilience plan being implemented and includes the following:
content 1. The scope of disruptive events agreed with the owner/operator
2. Planning and design measures used to reduce vulnerabilities of the as built
asset, e.g. increasing asset resilience reliability, redundancy and facilitating
effective response and recovery
3. Assumptions made regarding the role of operations in mitigating risks, e.g.
policy, procedures and available resources
4. Contingency plans for dealing with residual risks that cannot feasibly be
mitigated through physical changes to the infrastructure (refer to CN7)
5. Any measures required to mitigate risks during infrastructure construction and
phased handover.

CN5 Risk mitigation These include consideration of the following as a minimum: Risk mitigation
measures measures:
1. Planning
a. Site selection or infrastructure routing (linear systems)
b. Spatial and land use planning
c. Site access and circulation
d. Asset orientation
e. Topography and landscaping
f. Infrastructure planning and site connections.
2. Design
a. Network or system design
b. Architectural design
c. Urban design and landscaping
d. Infrastructure design
e. Use of appropriate standards, testing and certification
f. Materials selection
g. Technology solutions, e.g. wireless or hard-wired networks
h. Innovative design solutions, new technologies and materials that can
reduce the likelihood and impacts of disruptive events.
CN6 Change to the This criterion can be deemed compliant where changes are considered in terms of
design or resilience at regular project team meetings attended by representatives of the
construction project team including designer, contractor, owner/operator and relevant resilience
process (or other) specialists. The extent and scope to which this is considered will be
proportionate to the changes being made.
CN7 Contingency The contingency plan is integrated within the corporate BCM system, where present,
plan and includes:
1. Critical elements of the asset and measures in place to ensure these continue
to operate as planned
2. Features of the asset that are designed to be resilient, in what circumstance it
might be breached, predicted impacts and necessary operational measures in
the event of a breach
3. Full plans to enable recovery and repair work to be undertaken as necessary
4. Identification of agreed emergency procedures and supply of alternative
services to customers
5. Engagement with emergency services as necessary.
CN8 Allowance for An allowance for climate change should be made in accordance with current best
climate practice and planning policy. This should be applied to all identified natural hazards
change including both the before and after development flood risk.
Climate change allowances will be dependent on the site's context and location.
Please refer to the Other information section of this issue for further details on how
to account for climate change.
CN9 Likelihood When determining the project's 'tolerable' risk level, likelihood ratings are required,
rating this could be high, medium or low where each of these is defined appropriately for
the impact, e.g. flooding may be defined in terms of a certain probability of flooding.

CN10 Third party There are many defences, owned by third parties, which due to their location act as a
defences flood defence by default, e.g. motorway, railway embankments, walls etc. It can be
assumed that such embankments will remain in place for the lifetime of the
development, unless the assessor or project team have reason to believe otherwise.
For walls, assurance must be sought that the wall is likely to remain for the design life
of the asset affected.
CN11 Downgrade A site's flood risk may be downgraded to a lower flood risk category because of
flood risk due flood defence installations. This may occur in the following circumstances:
to flood
Where permanent new flood defences are planned (mentioned in formal
defences
planning documents with budgets allocated) to minimise the risk of
flooding to the site and its locality
Where the development is located on a site benefiting from existing
maintained flood defences.
In these circumstances, flood risk will be downgraded from medium to low flood
risk, as defined in best practice and planning policy guidelines, and the relevant
requirements can be deemed compliant. All of the following evidence will be
needed to demonstrate compliance:
Confirmation from a national flood defence agency that the flood risk level
for the site will be reduced to a low flood risk
Confirmation from the flood defence agency that there are plans to
maintain the defences for the lifetime of the asset (for private flood
defences, evidence must be provided that there is a contractual agreement
to cover the maintenance of the defences for the lifetime of the asset)
The flood risk assessment clearly demonstrates that the residual risks have
been identified and will be managed appropriately.
CN12 Areas that Developments in areas that historically have a low risk of flooding (e.g. desert
historically regions), may still experience a risk of infrequent flash flooding. In these instances the
have a low risk assessment should still consider flooding but the level of detail required will
flood risk reduce. For example, an acceptable assessment of flood risk could be a brief report
carried out by the design team confirming the risk of flooding from all sources of
flooding, including information obtained from the local authority or statutory body,
site investigation, and local knowledge.
CN13 National Information produced for assessment of this issue may be linked to national security
security and and confidentiality requirements. Where this is the case, the assessor should use the
confidentiality secure BREEAM inbox (secureBREEAM@bre.co.uk) to submit evidence in relation to
requirements assessment of this issue. Only staff with security clearance to Security Check (SC) level
will be able to access this information for the Quality Assurance (QA) process.
Methodology
None.

Evidence
Ref Strategy stage Interim design stage Final post-construction

stage
All One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in the BREEAM evidential requirements
section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.
5 , 8 15 Risk assessment Updated risk assessment As Interim design stage
18 N/A Project resilience plan Refer to generic evidence

types
20 N/A Contingency plan Updated contingency plan
23 N/A Site specific FRA Updated site specific FRA
Appropriate consultant
For flooding this is a consultant with qualifications and experience relevant to designing SuDS and flood prevention
measures and completing peak rate of run-off calculations. Where complex flooding calculations and prevention
measures are required, this must be a specialist hydrological engineer.
For other natural hazards, this is a consultant with relevant technical and professional experience able to:
1. Determine the potential for natural hazards in the region of the development
2. Determine the likely impacts on the site, the asset and the locality, and
3. Subsequently identify appropriate mitigation measures.
For intentional threats, this is a consultant with experience in designing appropriate and relevant security measures
and a relevant professional qualification.
Appropriate statutory body

This refers to either the appropriate national body, or the relevant local authority or internal drainage board whose
duty it is to carry out the planning approval function.
Critical infrastructure
Those physical and information technology facilities, networks, services and assets which if disrupted or destroyed
have a serious impact on the health, safety, security or economic wellbeing of citizens or effective functioning of
governments .
Dependency
A dependency is a relationship between two products or services in which one product or service is required for
generating the other product or service.
Design Basis Events

A series of disruptive events based on natural hazards.
Design Basis Threats

A series of disruptive events based on intentional threats.

Design flood level

The maximum estimated water level during the design storm event. The design flood level for a site can be
determined through either known historical data or modelled for the specific site.
Design flood event

A historic or notional flood event of a given annual flood probability, against which the suitability of a proposed
development is assessed and mitigation measures, if any, are designed.
Design storm event

Historic or notional weather conditions of a given annual probability, against which the suitability of a proposed
development is assessed and mitigation measures, if any, are designed.
Digital dependency
A cyber connection between infrastructure or a shared dependency between two or more elements on the transfer
of information from a third party.
Downstream dependency
Where the infrastructure asset provides a service to another infrastructure asset which is dependent on that service.
Flood defences
Flood defences do not completely remove the risk of flooding, but they do reduce it. Building in areas where flood
defences are present (and appropriately designed to withstand a certain magnitude of flooding) is therefore
preferable to building in medium or high risk areas without defences. However, for the purpose of this issue, it is still
preferable to build in areas of low risk than encourage development of new flood defences in areas with a higher risk
of flooding purely for the sake of a new development.
Flood event
A flooding incident characterised by its peak level or flow, or by its level or flow hydrograph.
Flood probability
The estimated probability of a flood of given magnitude occurring or being exceeded in any specified time period.
For example, the 100-year flood has a 1% chance of occurring in any given year.
Flood risk
The combination of the flood probability and the magnitude of the potential consequences of the flood event.
Flood risk assessment

A study to assess the risk of a site flooding, and to assess the impact that any changes or development on the site will
have on flood risk to the site and elsewhere. A flood risk assessment (FRA) should be prepared according to relevant
planning policy and technical guidance documents. The FRA must account for future climate change and detail any
necessary adaptation measures where or if required. Where more than five years have passed since the FRA was
carried out, evidence would be required to demonstrate that the basis of the FRA has not changed in that time.
Flood storage
The temporary storage of excess run-off or river flow in ponds, basins, reservoirs or on the flood plain during a flood
event.
Flood zones
Flood zones are defined in the relevant planning, policy and technical guidance documents for each country (refer to
Freeboard
The difference between the crest level of a flood defence and the flood water level.
Geographical dependency
The close proximity of infrastructure assets, systems or networks makes them susceptible to the same incident.
Hierarchical Risk Assessment

This should be a risk-based approach taken in order to ensure resilience measures are considered with regards to
flood risk. In order to comply with this issue the assessor would need to determine whether or not the final design of
the asset has considered the recommendations made in accordance with this approach. An example of a best
practice risk based hierarchy would typically follow these steps:
Stage 1 - Assessing and understanding
Stage 2 - Avoiding the risk
Stage 3 - Substitution
Stage 4 - Control and management Incorporation
Stage 5 - Resistance and resilient building techniques
Stage 6 - Safety
For further information on national guidance for risk assessments refer to Appendix B - The Approved Standards
and Weightings List (ASWL).
Intentional threats
Man-made threats including fire and crime (theft, arson, vandalism, terrorist attacks, cybersecurity etc.). These are not
usefully informed by historical data due to their nature and are best assessed using a series of credible threat events
to allow risk analysis and assessment of asset vulnerability.
Maximum tolerable levels

The level of risk the client, owner or operator of the asset is willing to accept and manage as part of the assets
operational procedures.
Natural hazards
A natural process or phenomenon that may cause loss of life, injury or other health impacts, property damage, loss of
livelihoods and services, social and economic disruption, or environmental damage. These include, but are not limited
to:
1. Flooding
2. Hazards of geological origin such as volcanic eruptions, earthquakes and landslides
3. Hazards of climatic or meteorological origin such as droughts, avalanches, wave surges including tsunamis and
tidal waves, and wind storms including cyclones, hurricanes, tornadoes, tropical storms, and typhoons
4. Wildfires.
Relevance will be dependent on local geography, geology, hydrology and climate factors. The assessment of natural
hazards tends to be based on historical data. However, it should also consider climate scenarios and potential future
risk.
Organisational dependency
Shared ownership, governance, financing mechanisms 'soft' infrastructure.
Peer review
Peer review is defined as the process employed by a professional body to demonstrate that potential or full
members maintain a standard of knowledge or experience required to ensure compliance with a code of conduct
and professional ethics.
Physical dependency
A physical connection between different infrastructure assets, systems or networks, e.g. one asset uses fuel supplied
by another.
Relevant stakeholders
For the purpose of this issue, relevant stakeholders include as a minimum:
1. The owner/operator, where known
2. Representatives from local public services, including the emergency services, local authorities, health services and
environmental agencies
3. Stakeholders upstream and downstream of the project; as a minimum those considered to be reasonably at risk
of impacts arising from the project or those reasonably considered to have an impact on the project
4. Flooding, natural hazard and security stakeholders.
Additional relevant stakeholders could include:

1. Sector resilience leads

2. Climate change experts
3. Owner/operators of other similar infrastructure assets
4. Customers
5. Members of the public, where affected.
Relevant stakeholders for flooding could include:
1. Regulators in flood management
2. Appropriate statutory bodies (refer to definition above).
3. Local flood groups
4. Internal Drainage Boards
5. Water companies.
Relevant stakeholders for intentional threats could include:
1. Corporate ICT and cybersecurity specialists
2. National security organisations
3. Police forces
4. Security specialists.
Resilience
The ability of assets, networks and systems to anticipate, absorb, adapt or rapidly recover from a disruptive event.
Note that this is sometimes considered in a range of ways including:
Resistance resilience - This considers designing the asset to withstand predicted impacts, e.g. barriers to
prevent water entering the asset or walls with the strength to withstand the impact of flood water.
Reliability resilience - This considers the asset or systems required to operate under a range of set
conditions for a specified period of time, this might include raising critical components above the design
flood level, or using specifications that address identified risks, e.g. burglar alarms or anti-graffiti coatings.
It can also include non-technical items such as flood warning schemes, staff training and good practice
guidance to ensure that staff can respond to flood events to ensure continuity of service in a safe manner.
Redundancy resilience - This considers the availability of backup installations or spare capacity within a
system to enable operations to be switched or diverted to alternative parts of the system in the event of
disruption to ensure continuity of service. The resilience of networks reduces when running at or near
capacity, although in some sectors or organisations it is recognised that it may not always be feasible to
operate with significant spare capacity within the network.
Recovery resilience - This considers preparations for fast and effective response and recovery from
disruptive events and will include processes for dealing with an event if it occurs to ensure that the asset can
continue to operate.
NOTE: In flooding terms, resilience and resistance are often used, resistance meaning where measures prevent water
from being in contact with the asset and resilience meaning where the asset is designed to withstand contact with the
water.
Upstream dependency
Where the infrastructure asset is dependent on a service provided by other infrastructure.
Other information
Identification of relevant stakeholders

Relevant stakeholders can by identified by asking the following questions outlined in ISO 26000:2010 Guidance on Social
Responsibility14:
1. To whom does the organisation have legal obligations?

2. Who might be positively or negatively affected by the organisation's decisions or activities?
3. Who is likely to express concerns about the decisions and activities of the organisation?
4. Who has been involved in the past when similar concerns needed to be addressed?
5. Who can help the organisation address specific impacts?
6. Who can affect the organisation's ability to meet its responsibilities?
7. Who would be disadvantaged if excluded from the engagement?
8. Who in the value chain is affected?

Sources of flooding and flood risk

The following list identifies the typical areas or sources that may be in danger or risk of flooding:
1. Streams and rivers: flooding that can take place from flows that are not contained within the channel due to high levels
of rainfall in the catchment
2. Coastal or estuarine: flooding that can occur from the sea due to a particularly high tide or surge, or a combination of
both
3. Groundwater: where the water table rises to such a height where flooding occurs. Most common in low-lying areas
underlain by permeable rock (aquifers), usually due to extended periods of wet weather
4. Sewers and highway drains: combined, foul or surface water sewers and highway drains that are temporarily
overloaded due to excessive rainfall or due to blockage
5. Surface water: the net rainfall falling on a surface (on or off the site) which acts as run-off which has not infiltrated into the
ground or entered into a drainage system
6. Infrastructure failure: canals, reservoirs, industrial processes, burst water mains, blocked sewers or failed pumping
stations.
Allowance for climate change

Professionals completing the flood risk assessment should refer to Appendix B - The Approved Standards and Weightings
List (ASWL) for national allowances for climate change.
Flood protection
To meet the requirements of criterion 23 (the requirement to implement measures to protect or defend the site from
flooding) the design need not be restricted to flood defences. A site can be protected from flood water using various
methods including solutions such as use of topography, attenuation and storage of flood waters. This can ensure that flood
water is kept away from the development. These types of solutions may be appropriate in some instances. However,
assurances must be made that the solutions do not create issues further downstream and will not inconvenience the local
area. It is the responsibility of the relevant professional to determine the most appropriate solution for the development.

blank page
Res 03 Designing for future needs Resilience
Res 03 Designing for future needs

1 2 None
Aim
To recognise and encourage design of the asset that allows for opportunities for interdependencies, increased capacity and
future proofing.

One credit - Future needs assessment

1 The project team consults relevant stakeholders (refer to Relevant definitions) to carry out an assessment of future
needs.
2 The assessment uses well informed data to support predictions and considers the following as a minimum (refer to
Methodology):
2.a Population growth and changing demographic (refer to CN1)
2.b Customer expectations
2.c Integrated systems
2.d Resource availability
2.e New and existing technology
2.f Flexibility of the asset
2.g Industry changes.
3 Opportunities for how the design can be adapted to address future needs are identified and a qualitative assessment of
each is included within the report addressing:
3.a Cost (saving and expenditure)
3.b Benefits and disadvantages.
4 Opportunities for addressing future needs are included in the project delivery team or contractor's brief.

Up to two credits - Designing in capacity for future needs
One credit
5 The opportunities identified within the strategic stage assessment are reassessed by the project team (including the
owner/operator) using updated information to:
5.a Identify which of the areas identified in criterion 2 are most critical to the either the sector, asset or both
5.b Make recommendations about how future needs can be addressed.

6 The design is influenced by recommendations in three areas identified in criterion 5 as being the most critical for the
sector or asset (refer to CN2).
7 The measures allow the predicted future needs to be accommodated with minimal disruption (refer to Relevant
definitions) to the asset and without destruction.
Two credits
9 The design is influenced by recommendations in five areas identified in criterion 2 as being the most critical for either the
sector, asset or both, (refer to CN2).
10 The measures allow the predicted future needs to be accommodated with minimal disruption to the asset and without
destruction.

None.
Compliance notes
CN1 Changing When assessing the changing demographic, consideration should be given to the
demographic following:
1. Age (children, young people, older people and the ageing population)
2. Disability
3. Gender and sexual orientation
4. Religion or belief
5. Race
6. Deprivation (this includes: income; employment; health and disability; education,
barriers to housing and services; crime; and the living environment)
7. Health (life expectancy, obesity, physical activity, mortality associated with illnesses,
dementia, depression, mental health)
8. Employment (sectors, incomes, businesses, working patterns, economic activity,
unemployment)
9. Education, skills and training
10. Population projections.
The current demographic profile should be available from the local authority and
census data.

CN2 Most critical areas The project team, including the owner/operator make a judgement about the most
critical areas based on the assessment of future needs. For:
One credit - the three most critical areas must be considered within the design
and construction of the asset
Two credits - this increases to the five most critical areas.
This requirement is unrelated to the number of recommendations, but instead related

to addressing the areas detailed in the Methodology section. It is expected that as a
minimum, population growth, future demographics, integrated systems, resource
availability, and industry changes will be relevant to a greater or lesser extent depending
on the size and complexity of the asset.
Methodology
The future needs assessment must include predictions using well informed data covering the following content:
Population growth and changing demographic

To appreciate future needs with regards to population growth and changing demographic the assessment must consider:
1. Predicted future demand and capacity including;

a. Potential future expansion and upgrades
b. Whether further assets will be required to meet predicted needs
c. How future growth or adaptation can be safeguarded (e.g. land) or incorporated into the current design to allow
future needs to be more easily met
d. How innovation could be used to meet the demands of a growing population.
2. Potential future functional changes
3. Potential future access requirements.
Customer expectations
To appreciate future needs with regards to customer expectations the assessment must consider:
1. How customers will interact with the asset in the next 5, 10, 20(+) years
2. Improved cost efficiency over the life of the asset
3. Meeting increasing customer expectations for reliability, comfort, safety, security and information (where relevant)
4. Accessibility of services for future upgrades.
Integrated systems
To appreciate future needs with regards to Integrated systems the assessment must consider:
1. The asset as part of the system within which it operates now and over its life
2. How technical aspects of the asset interact with (potentially changing) operational aspects over the life of the asset (e.g.
telecommunications, energy sectors)
3. Opportunities for current or future interconnections to other assets of the same sector or different sector, e.g.
water/water, energy/water
4. Potential shared facilities, energy and infrastructure, e.g. sustainable drainage systems (SuDS), amenity spaces and cables
5. Working with other organisations, through multi-agency communication and coordination
6. Future dependencies (upstream and downstream) and also interdependencies through use of tools, models, and
consultation with (upstream and downstream) stakeholders. Being aware and planning for potential dependency is
crucial to designing for future needs; if these dependencies are not taken into account, the measures taken to design for
future needs will be at best limited and at worst totally ineffective.

Resource availability
To appreciate future needs with regards to resource availability the assessment must consider:
1. Future demand of resources needed by the asset over its life and delivered by the project over its life including:
a. Materials requirements over the life of the asset in terms of robustness and predicted or possible changes in
material supply
b. Energy and water requirements over the life of the asset and predicted or possible changes in supply, demand and
(for energy) type (refer to CE 03 Operational carbon and energy and Wat 01 Water efficiency planning and
implementation).
Technology
To appreciate future needs with regards to technology the assessment must consider:
1. Smart technology for operation and maintenance purposes, e.g. intelligent distribution networks that automatically
reroute when equipment fails and smart metering to allow customers to make informed decisions about when to use
their power
2. Techniques and technologies that could be implemented to meet predicted future needs, e.g. dual use for an asset such
as a road tunnel that can act as storm water storage at times of high rainfall.
Flexibility
To appreciate future needs with regards to flexibility the assessment must consider:
1. Flexibility of the asset or system, e.g. through identifying a diverse set of solutions to meet customer and operator needs
2. Layered fall back arrangements to mitigate unavailability
3. Implementing ideas which will allow projects to be self-sufficient, e.g. generate more of their own energy or have dual
functionality
4. How to ensure the functionality of the asset is not compromised based on future predictions
5. Whether the asset can be designed to be part of a flexible system now and in the future (possibly more relevant for
energy and communications sectors).
Industry changes
To appreciate future needs with regards to industry changes the assessment must consider:
1. How legislation is likely to change and what effect this will have on the service provided by the asset
2. Predicted changes to the infrastructure industry and how might this affect the service provision of the asset.
Evidence
Minimal disruption
This cannot be clearly defined as it will differ for each project, however the assessor should look for evidence that
disruption to the asset and future asset users has been addressed in the process of considering future needs.

For the purpose of this issue, relevant stakeholders include as a minimum:
1. The owner/operator, where known
2. Individuals with:
a. Experience in operating similar assets
b. Specialist knowledge and experience of the sector now and in the future
c. An understanding of new and relevant technologies
d. An understanding of sector specific dependencies, e.g. energy, communications
e. An understanding of the asset's resource requirements and availability, e.g. energy and water.
The relevant stakeholders should be knowledgeable and representative.
Other information
None.

Res 04 Surface water run-off

0 2 One credit - any criteria 1 11 - Good

Two credits - all criteria 1 11 - Excellent
Aim
To avoid, reduce and delay the discharge of rainfall to adjacent land, public sewers and watercourses, minimising the risk and
impact of localised flooding on and off site.

None.

Appropriate consultant (prerequisite)

Peak rate of run-off for the asset in operation (1 credit)
Volume of run-off for the asset in operation (1 credit)
Prerequisite - Appropriate consultant

1 An appropriate consultant (refer to Relevant definitions) is appointed to carry out, demonstrate or confirm the
development's compliance with the following criteria:
One credit - Peak rate of run-off for the asset in operation

3 Where drainage measures are specified in order to ensure that the peak rate of run-off from the site to the
watercourses (natural or municipal) is no greater for the developed site than it was for the pre-development site. This
should comply at the 1-year and 100-year return period events.
4 Relevant maintenance agreements for the ownership, long term operation and maintenance of all specified sustainable
drainage systems (SuDS) are in place.
5 Calculations should be made in accordance with current national best practice planning guidance (refer to Appendix B -
The Approved Standards and Weightings List (ASWL)) and should account for climate change. Where no guidance exists
within the country of assessment the following can be used for compliance:

Res 04 Surface water run-off Resilience
Table 14: Allowance for climate change according to annual probability of flooding
Annual probability of flooding Allowance for climate change
Low 10%
Medium 20%
High 30%
One credit - Volume of run-off for the asset in operation

7 Where flooding of the asset or the surrounding area will not occur in the event of local drainage system failure (caused
either by extreme rainfall or a lack of maintenance) AND EITHER:
7.a Drainage design measures are specified to ensure that the post-development run-off volume, over the
development lifetime, is no greater than it would have been prior to the assessed site's development for the
100-year 6-hour event, including an allowance for climate change
7.b Any additional predicted volume of run-off for this event is prevented from leaving the site by using infiltration
or other SuDS techniques.
OR (only where criteria 7.a and 7.b for this credit cannot be achieved for technical reasons, e.g. impermeable soils).
8 Justification from the appropriate consultant indicating why the above criteria cannot be achieved, i.e. where infiltration
or other SuDS techniques are not technically viable options.
9 Drainage design measures are specified to ensure that the post-development peak rate of run-off is reduced to the
limiting discharge. The limiting discharge is calculated in accordance with the Methodology section and defined as the
highest flow rate from the following options:
9.a The pre-development 1-year peak flow rate; OR
9.b The mean annual flow rate Qbar; OR
9.c 2L/s/ha.
Note: The pre-development 1-year peak flow rate (criterion 9.a) is equivalent to the 1-year return period event described in
the peak rate of run-off credit (criterion 3 ) above.
10 Relevant maintenance agreements for the ownership, long term operation and maintenance of all specified SuDS are in
place.
11 For either option, above calculations must include an allowance for climate change; this should be made in accordance
with current national best practice planning guidance (refer to Appendix B - The Approved Standards and Weightings
List (ASWL) or Table 14).

None.

Compliance notes
CN1 Discharge to the sea The peak rate of run-off and volume run-off criteria can be deemed to be met by
or tidal estuaries default if the site discharges rainwater directly to a tidal estuary (refer to Relevant
definitions) or the sea.
The site must discharge run-off directly into the tidal estuary or the sea, if these criteria
are to be awarded by default. Typically, this would mean that drainage pipes would
only carry run-off from the site and that they would not need to cross privately owned
land outside the boundary of the development before reaching the sea.
CN2 No change in Where the man-made impermeable area draining to the watercourse (natural or
impermeable area municipal) has decreased or remains unchanged post development, the peak rate and
volume run-off requirements for the surface water run-off credits will be met by
default.
Flow rate calculations will not need to be provided. Instead, drawings clearly showing
the impermeable areas of the site draining to the watercourse should be provided for
the pre and post-development scenarios. Figures must also be given (ideally on the
drawings) to show a comparison between the areas of drained impermeable surfaces
pre- and post-development.
In this instance a flood risk assessment must be carried out and any opportunities
identified to reduce surface water run-off are implemented.
CN3 Limiting discharge For the surface water run-off credits, where the limiting discharge flow rate would
flow rate require a flow rate of less than 5L/s at a discharge point, a flow rate of up to 5L/s may
be used where required to reduce the risk of blockage.
CN4 Derelict sites If the site has been derelict for over five years, the appropriate consultant must assess
the previous drainage network and make reasonable assumptions to establish
probable flow rates and volumes. To do this they should use best practice simulation
modelling to determine the 1-year and 100-year peak flow rates at the relevant
discharge points. To complete the calculations, a site visit prior to development will be
required unless accurate data already exist from a previous survey. The resultant
professional report can then be used to determine the pre-development volumes and
rates of run-off. Without this professional input, the site must be deemed greenfield
pre-development.
CN5 Rainwater National best practice guidance should be followed where rain water harvesting
harvesting systems are used (refer to Appendix B - The Approved Standards and Weightings List
(ASWL)).
Compliant drainage For criteria 7.a and 7.b, SuDS and other infiltration techniques are acceptable. Criterion 9
solutions is only applied where there are technical reasons why drainage solutions would not
work, e.g. in clay soils. For this reason, storage solutions may also be considered
compliant for criterion 9
Methodology
Limiting discharge rate
The following outlines the process to assess criterion 9 :
The limiting discharge for each discharge point should be calculated as the flow rates from the pre-developed site. The
calculation should include the total flow rate from the total area of the site feeding into the discharge point (this should
include both BREEAM-assessed and non-BREEAM-assessed parts of the development, if applicable).
The discharge point is defined as the point of discharge into the watercourse or sewers (including rivers, streams, ditches,
drains, cuts, culverts, dykes, sluices, public sewers and passages through which water flows, see Relevant definitions). Where
this calculation results in a peak flow rate of less than 5L/s, the limiting discharge rate may be increased up to a level of no
more than 5L/s at the point of discharge from the site to reduce the risk of blockage.
For example, if the flow rate for the 1-year and 100-year events were 4L/s and 7L/s respectively, then the limiting discharges
would be 5L/s and 7L/s. Similarly, if it was calculated to be 2L/s and 4L/s, then a maximum of 5L/s limiting discharge rate could
be applied to both discharge points.
Evidence
A consultant with qualifications and experience relevant to designing SuDS and flood prevention measures and
completing peak rate of run-off calculations. Where complex flooding calculations and prevention measures are
required, this must be a specialist hydrological engineer.

This refers to either the appropriate national body or the relevant local authority or internal drainage board whose
duty it is to carry out the planning approval function.
Catchment
The area contributing surface water flow to a point on a drainage or water course. It can be divided into sub-
catchments.
Control devices
Any drainage structure or unit designed to control the run-off of storm water. Examples of SuDS control devices are
check dams within swales and basins, and combined weir or orifice controls for ponds. Examples of traditional
control devices are throttles constructed with pipes and vortex controls. The control devices must be capable of
regular inspection and maintenance, and the system should be fail-safe so that upstream flooding does not result
from blockage or other malfunction.
Design flood level

The maximum estimated water level during the design storm event. The design flood level for a site can be
determined through either known historical data or modelled for the specific site.
Discharge point
The discharge point is the point at which the run-off from the site leaves the site boundary and enters a watercourse.
Greenfield
A site which has either never been built on, or one which has remained undisturbed for five years or more.
Greenfield run-off rate

The rate of run-off that would occur from the site in its undeveloped and therefore undisturbed state.
Hard surfaces
These include roofs, car parks, access roads, pavements, delivery areas, service yards and external hard landscaping.
Footpaths less than 1.5 m wide which have free drainage to soft landscaped areas on both sides may be excluded.
SuDS hierarchy
The hierarchy of SuDS techniques considered in the development of the SuDS management train is defined as follows:
1. Prevention the use of good site design and site housekeeping measures to prevent run-off and pollution (e.g.
sweeping to remove surface dust and detritus from car parks), and rainwater reuse and harvesting. Prevention
policies should generally be included within the site management plan
2. Source control control of run-off at or very near its source (e.g. soakaways, other infiltration methods, green
roofs, pervious pavements)
3. Site control management of water in a local area or site (e.g. routing water from building roofs and car parks to
a large soakaway, infiltration or detention basin)
4. Regional control management of run-off from a site or several sites, typically in a balancing pond or wetland.
SuDS management train

An approach to drainage design that combines a sequence of appropriate surface water drainage structures using
SuDS systems for management of the run-off to treat the flow, reduce run-off volume and restrain the run-off rate to
minimise man's impact on the environment. Additional benefits associated with operation and maintenance, ecology
and amenity are aspects which are considered when designing a management system. The management train
incorporates a hierarchy of techniques:
1. Source control. Examples of SuDS techniques include:
Soakaways
Porous or pervious paving
Roof water directed to garden (rather than piped drains)
Rainwater reuse and harvesting
Green roofs
Other surface infiltration, attenuation and conveyance techniques that deal with run-off at source.
2. Site or local control. Examples of SuDS techniques include:
Swales
Pond
Infiltration basins
Detention basin
Larger soakaways
Pervious (porous or permeable) paving.
3. Regional control. Examples of techniques include:
Balancing ponds
Wetlands
Large detention basin.
SuDS techniques
One or more components built to manage surface water run-off to prevent flooding and pollution, including for
example: wet ponds, infiltration basins, detention basins, swales, reed beds, pervious (porous or permeable) paving,
soakaways, rainwater harvesting, filter strips, filter drains and trenches with or without perforates pipes, green roofs
and underground attenuation storage.
Surface water run-off

Water flow over the ground surface to a drainage system. This occurs if the ground is impermeable, is saturated or if
the rainfall is particularly intense.
Tidal estuary
A tidal estuary is defined as a semi-enclosed coastal body of water which has a free connection with the open sea
and within which seawater is measurably diluted with fresh water derived from land drainage. An estuary should be
unconstrained tidal waters, i.e. there should be no barriers or constricted shorelines that would restrict the free flow
of water into the open sea in any conditions. The impact on the total volume of run-off from the site (and other sites
which may in future discharge into the estuary) should be insignificant in terms of the overall water levels in the
estuary. Tidal rivers (i.e. where no or limited measurable seawater content is present during normal tidal movements)
cannot be included as part of the estuary for the purposes of BREEAM.
Volume of run-off
The volume of run-off that is generated by rainfall occurring on the site. This is typically measured in cubic metres.
Additional predicted volume of run-off is the difference between the volumes of run-off pre- and post-
development.
Watercourses and sewers

A term that includes rivers, streams, ditches, drains, culverts, dykes, sluices, sewers and passages through which water
flows.
Other information
SuDS - sustainable drainage systems

A sequence of management practices and control structures designed to drain surface water in a more sustainable fashion
than some conventional techniques. Examples of SuDS devices include:
Holding ponds
Swales
Reed beds
Permeable paving - in areas where local geological and hydrological conditions allow this to function, e.g. block paved
surface on permeable subbase over gravel bed to store the water and allow it to seep into the soil. For less
permeable soils, the gravel layer might be deeper and the water taken to a soakaway although this is not an option in
some areas
Local or centralised soakaways either as full systems or as 'overflow' or 'holding' systems, in areas where local
geological and hydrological conditions allow them to function
Run-off from roofs collected as a part of a rainwater harvesting system
Run-off from roofs directed to a local soakaway or other holding facility such as tanks, ponds, swales etc.
Green roofs.
Res 05 Durability
0 2 None
Aim
To reduce the replacement and maintenance of materials through careful design and specification of more durable solutions.

None.

Asset durability (1 credit)

Security product certification (1 credit)
One credit - Asset durability

1 The project team identify elements of the asset that are prone to material degradation due to environmental factors
and consider possible degradation effects, as shown in Table 15.
2 Appropriate design and specification measures are incorporated for these elements to limit material degradation due
to environmental factors (refer to CN1).
Refer to the Methodology section for the process to assess this credit.
One credit - Security product certification

3 All security products and systems used are third party tested and certified where an appropriate International, European
or national standard is available (refer to CN2 and Appendix B - The Approved Standards and Weightings List (ASWL)).
This includes:
3.a Electronic components of security systems, e.g. cabling
3.b Physical components of security systems, e.g. doors, windows, barriers.
4 All security products and systems installations are subject to third party testing before project handover (refer to CN2).
Res 05 Durability Resilience

Table 15: Environmental factors and material degradation effects to consider
Environmental factors and material degradation effects
Environmental factors
1. Environmental agents, including:

a. Solar radiation
b. Temperature variation
c. Water, moisture
d. Wind
e. Precipitation, e.g. rain and snow
f. Extreme weather: high wind speeds, flooding, driving rain, snow.
2. Biological agents, including:
a. Vegetation
b. Pests, insects.
2. Pollutants, including:
a. Air contaminants
b. Ground contaminants.
Material degradation effects (includes, but not necessarily limited to the following)
1. Corrosion
2. Dimensional change, e.g. swelling or shrinkage
3. Fading, discolouration
4. Rotting
5. Leaching
6. Blistering
7. Melting
8. Salt crystallisation
9. Abrasion.
Compliance notes
CN1 Varying The project team should consider whether environmental factors that may cause
environmental material degradation vary across the sites, in particular for linear projects which are
factors across the more likely to experience different durability issues in different locations.
site or different The project team should demonstrate that different environmental factors have been
sites investigated based on the location of the asset (or part of the asset).
CN2 Third party testing This credit will be filtered out where:
of security products
No standard exists for the security products or systems present
and systems
There are no security products or systems present.
Methodology
Protecting exposed parts of the asset from material degradation
The following outlines the process to assess criterion 2 :
1. Identify the elements likely to be affected by material degradation

2. Establish from the 'environmental factors' list those factors that are likely to cause material degradation effects and
where in the asset this is likely to occur.
3. Confirm the design and specification measures in place to limit these degradation effects
4. The assessor should use their professional judgement in determining whether the design team have adequately
demonstrated that they have designed and specified materials or measures which will be effective in preventing
unnecessary deterioration so reducing frequent replacements, repairs and maintenance through the life cycle of the
asset
5. At post-construction stage, where the design and specification measures installed differ from that proposed at design
stage, the assessor must ensure that these measures still meet the aims of the criterion as detailed in point 4 above.
Evidence
3 4 N/A Refer to generic evidence types Third party certification

certificates
Security
Refer to Res 02 Risk assessment and mitigation.
Other information
None.
Stakeholders
Stakeholders
Category overview
Refer to the country reference sheet in the ASWL. ST 02 Consultation and engagement
ST 03 Responsible construction practices
ST 04 Owner operator requirements
Summary
This category encourages the project team to consult with all relevant stakeholders relating to the project in order to
understand their needs and incorporate their knowledge and requirements into the project. Issues in this category focus on
putting together a plan for consultation, carrying out consultation and engagement throughout the design and construction,
and evaluating the success of the process.

Issue Credits
ST 01 Consultation plan Strategy - 1

Project detail - 1
A consultation plan is developed at the pre-planning stage to effectively engage key stakeholders and
establish a communication strategy
An evaluation of the consultation process is conducted during handover and close out to establish the
success of the process and disseminate key learning outcomes
ST 02 Consultation and engagement Strategy - 3

Project detail - 1
An initial consultation is carried out in line with the consultation plan before finalising the project brief
An inclusive design strategy is developed with technical specialists and vulnerable groups to establish
measures that enhance inclusivity in and around the asset
Further consultation and continued engagement occurs throughout design and construction to ensure the
project incorporates community knowledge and inclusive design measures
ST 03 Responsible construction practices Strategy - 0

Project detail - 5
Exemplary - 1
A workforce plan is developed, implemented, monitored and evaluated with contractor involvement
The principal contractor demonstrates sound environmental management practices and consideration for
neighbours across their on-site activities and fleet
Stakeholders BREEAM New Construction: Infrastructure (International pilot)
Issue Credits
ST 04 Owner operator requirements Strategy - 1

Project detail - 1
Strategic Operational Performance Indicators (OPIs) are developed with the owner and operator of the asset
to inform the asset design and construction
The project specific objectives achieved and evaluated to facilitate enhanced operation of the asset over its
life
ST 01 Consultation plan Stakeholders
ST 01 Consultation plan
1 1 None
Aim
To encourage early and ongoing engagement of stakeholder groups during the planning, design and construction of the
asset and to evaluate the success of the process employed.

One credit - Consultation plan

1 During preparation of the brief a consultation plan is developed to identify the relevant stakeholders to consult with
(refer to Relevant definitions) and the activities or impacts of the project to consult on. The plan includes timescales and
methods of consultation, clearly identifying for each stakeholder group:
1.a Who will be consulted
1.b How they will be consulted and have their input collected,, i.e. what methods or media will be employed (refer to
CN1)
1.c A named stakeholder champion or champions (refer to Relevant definitions)
1.d At which stages they will be engaged,, i.e. planning, design, construction or handover. As a minimum, an initial
consultation should occur during preparation of the brief and a further consultation during concept design
stage
1.e How they will be kept informed about progress of the project
1.f How and when feedback will be provided on consultation input, including how it will be considered and what
actions could be taken as a result
1.g How the consultation will be monitored or reported throughout the project to inform evaluation of the
complete programme.
2 For the community stakeholder group specifically, the consultation plan establishes the following:
2.a The approach that will be taken to target and provide for minority and hard-to-reach groups (refer to CN2) and
what measures will be implemented to meet their needs
2.b The facilitated community consultation methods (refer to Relevant definitions) that will be used to engage the
community on the project.
3 The consultation plan is used to develop a communication strategy for disseminating the results of the consultations.
The results of the consultation includes information on how stakeholder input has been incorporated into the project.

Prerequisite - Updated consultation plan

4 The consultation plan detailed at the strategic assessment stage is updated (or developed) as necessary at key project
gateways (refer to Relevant definitions) with inputs from stakeholder champions (refer to CN3).
5 The plan is revised as necessary to ensure the consultation methods employed are appropriate for the project's scale,
delivery stage and stakeholders.
One credit - Consultation evaluation

7 During handover and close out of the completed asset to the owner/operator, an evaluation of the success of the
consultation programme is conducted by an independent party (refer to Other information).
8 The evaluation employs a variety of qualitative and quantitative methods such as analysis of complaints, surveys, focus
groups, interviews and workshops (refer to CN4).
9 The scope of the evaluation must include:
9.a The success of the consultation process to provide an understanding of what worked well and what could be
done differently in the future
9.b The delivery of the project to enhance positive and mitigate negative impacts
9.c Identification of actions to be given to the owner/operator to ensure positive outcomes for the community
during the operation of the asset.
10 Lessons learnt and suggestions for improvement are collated and appropriately disseminated (refer to CN5) to inform
future projects.

None.
Compliance notes
CN1 Consultation A variety of consultation methods should be employed by the project to ensure the
methods to be consultation process is inclusive for all stakeholders. Different stakeholder groups may
employed be consulted separately where appropriate (e.g. supply chain engagement exercises).
The scale and impact of the project will affect the scope of the consultation. The design
team should justify the scope of consultation methods employed; for smaller projects
this will mean a minimum of two methods.
Both proactive and reactive methods should be employed throughout the consultation
process, with proactive measures prioritised during the strategic and design stages.
Proactive measures include letters, meetings, project websites, press articles, door
knocking, site visits, stakeholder mapping, open days and visitor centres. Reactive
measures include helplines and complaints procedures.
CN2 Consultation The consultation approach should actively engage with minority and hard-to-reach
approach for groups who may commonly be excluded from such exercises.
minority and hard- The plan should demonstrate how community demographics have been considered to
to-reach groups actively include these groups who may include:
1. Elderly
2. Young
3. Parents, guardians or carers
4. Persons with a disability
5. Minority due to race, religion or belief
6. Non-native speakers
7. Those with limited time to participate.
The approach should consider issues such as the use of jargon and technical language
which can act as a barrier, translation of documents into other languages if necessary,
and ensuring that the needs of minority groups are taken into account in the timing and
location of meetings.
CN3 Updated This does not have to be the original document, it can be a separate document
consultation plan containing up-to-date information. It does not need to be completed by the author of
(criterion 4 ) the strategic stage document.
CN4 Consultation The purpose of the consultation evaluation is to ensure the processes employed
evaluation and scale throughout the project are reviewed and undertaken transparently.
of the project When carrying out the evaluation the independent party should justify the methods
they use, and therefore the scope of the evaluation, based on the scale of the project.
For example, small projects may employ informal door knocking and surveys that are
documented, whereas large projects may carry out facilitated evaluation.
CN5 Appropriate Appropriate dissemination includes communication to immediate stakeholders such as

dissemination the asset owner/operator, contractors and design team.
In addition information should be communicated externally, such as production and
publication of the consultation evaluation report through one of the following means:
1. Asset owner/operator's own website, publicly available literature or press release
2. Industry or sector or government or local authority sponsored website or
information portals.
Where there is a demonstrably justifiable reason why public dissemination is not
possible, for example the information is commercially or security sensitive, compliance
can be demonstrated by a commitment to produce and disseminate the relevant
information at an organisational level or to appropriate internal or external
stakeholders. Alternatively, the sensitive parts of the relevant information for
dissemination can be omitted from the publication.
Methodology
None.
Evidence
One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in the BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to
demonstrate compliance with these criteria.
1 Consultation plan N/A N/A

Stakeholder champions name
and contact details
2 Facilitated community N/A N/A

consultation methodology
7 10 N/A Refer to generic evidence Consultation evaluation report

requirement above
Facilitated community consultation

There are many methodologies available to engage communities about the formulation and design of development
proposals. For BREEAM, the following principles must be adhered to:
1. The consultation exercise has a clearly communicated purpose
2. Participants understand how their views will be used within the project
3. Expectations are set as to which options are open for discussion and revision
4. Reasonable advance notice is given to potential participants of the consultation exercise
5. Efforts are made to include hard-to-reach groups and jargon is avoided during the consultation exercise
6. The consultation is facilitated by a person or organisation that is independent from the developer.
Independent party (evaluation)

With respect to compliance with the criterion on using an independent party, the client or design team needs to
demonstrate one of the following options has been met:
1. They have used a party independent of the design process to conduct the necessary evaluation process, using a
formal method OR
2. If the evaluation is to be carried out by an organisation involved with the design of the asset then they must
present the assessor with evidence that robustly demonstrates the independence of the evaluation process.
BREEAM has not attempted to define what form this evidence must take; the onus is on the design team or
relevant individual to clearly demonstrate to the BREEAM Assessor a credible level of independence.

This definition of key project gateways refers to project delivery phases. shown in chronological order in reference to
delivery as:
1. Concept design
2. Definition
3. Design
4. Build and commission
5. Handover and close out
6. In-use.
For this issue, relevant stakeholders to be consulted as a minimum include:
1. Local community, including residents, businesses and other organisations located in the neighbourhood (e.g.
schools) that may be impacted by the site or sites during construction and the completed asset in use
2. Wider community, including regional business interests who may not be located in the immediate vicinity but who
may be impacted by the project
3. Owner/operator of the asset
4. End users (where different from above) and their representative bodies (e.g. in the case of a road this could be
drivers, road haulage companies, emergency services)
5. National or local statutory bodies
6. Relevant regulatory bodies
7. Relevant interest groups and organisations (e.g. heritage organisations)
8. Contractors and their supply chain (e.g. trades professionals)
9. Technical specialists (e.g. inclusive design specialists, costs specialists, etc.) where impacts relating to their area of
expertise are considered significant
10. Any statutory consultees.
Stakeholder champion
An individual formally tasked by the client with the responsibility to deliver the consultation activities and champion the
outcomes in the project team. The individual can be internal or external to the project team with sufficient authority to
influence the design of the project and advise the client, design and construction teams.
Stakeholder mapping
Maps that are developed to act as a visual aid to show where local stakeholder groups are located in relation to the
project and to show consultation activities that have been undertaken or are planned in that location.
Other information
Consultation terminology
The terms communication, consultation, and engagement are often used interchangeably. The accepted view is that there is a
continuum:
Communication: provision and exchange of information, often only one-way

Consultation: process of jointly examining and discussing issues of mutual concern through seeking acceptable
solutions and involves actively meeting and taking account of views before making a decision
Engagement: working collaboratively with and through groups to address issues affecting them, following a process
that ensures communities are empowered and have control over the decision-making process.
For the purposes of the BREEAM Infrastructure scheme, the focus should be different depending on the stakeholder group
and stage of the project. In general the focus will be on consultation where stakeholders are not just provided with
information but have the opportunity to have some involvement in decision-making; although they will not drive the design
process. However, for other groups such as the owner/operator, it should be more of an engagement process. At later
stages within the project, such as when the asset is being constructed, communication may be more appropriate to inform
people about site activities and timetables.
Scope of the evaluation process

The scope of the evaluation process is intended to understand fully the success of the consultation process itself and the
success of the mitigation and enhancement measures implemented to provide a whole life based approach to assessing the
impact of the proposed asset on the community.
In assessing the consultation process itself, questions could include how well the stakeholders feel that the process gave them
a chance to express their opinions, did the process use the right methods for them, did they feel they were listened to and
their concerns addressed, were they given feedback in a timely and useful manner, etc.
In assessing the delivery of the project, questions could include how successful were any mitigation measures, how well did
positive enhancements work, how good was the communication from the site (e.g. timings of works), how well did they feel
that the complaints process worked, etc.
ST 02 Consultation and engagement

Strategic credits available Project detail credits Minimum standards
available
3 1 Criteria 12 15 (Continued engagement and

implementation) - Very good
Aim
To address any concerns and maximise positive impacts from the asset for key stakeholders during construction and
operation.

Initial consultation (one credit)

Further consultation (one credit)
Inclusive design strategy (one credit)
One credit - Initial consultation

1 Criteria 1 3 in ST 01 Consultation plan have been achieved.
2 During the options appraisal process, prior to finalising the project brief, an initial consultation is carried out (in
accordance with the consultation plan) with relevant stakeholders (refer to Relevant definitions) and their feedback is
used to inform the proposed scheme.
3 The minimum consultation content is covered (refer to CN1).
4 The project team demonstrate how the stakeholder contributions and the outcomes of the early consultation process
have influenced or changed the initial project brief, including if appropriate, the project execution plan, communication
strategy, the tender specifications and the Code of Construction Practice (CoCP) (refer to Relevant definitions).
5 Consultation feedback has been provided to all participating stakeholder groups and they have acknowledged receipt
of this (refer to CN2). The feedback includes justification for decisions that have been taken.
One credit - Further consultation

6 Criteria 1 3 in ST 01 Consultation plan have been achieved.
7 A minimum of one consultation is carried out at concept design stage. The consultation includes all relevant stakeholders
(see Relevant definitions) and the minimum content (refer to CN1) as appropriate to each stakeholder group and the
stage of the project.
8 The project team demonstrates that stakeholder feedback has been collected and considered by key members of the
project team, such as the design team, contractor, client or operator as appropriate.
9 The outcomes of the consultation process have influenced or changed the project.
ST 02 Consultation and engagement Stakeholders
One credit - Inclusive design strategy

10 An inclusive design strategy (refer to Relevant definitions and CN3) is produced that considers the impact of the project
on the community throughout its life cycle stages (construction, operation, maintenance and decommissioning).
11 The inclusive design strategy, as a minimum:
11.a Is developed in consultation with interest groups, inclusive design specialists and vulnerable groups
11.b Covers a range of measures that will enhance inclusivity in and around the asset such as signage, wayfinding,
accessibility and reducing severance
11.c Includes a plan of how the measures can be implemented and monitored during construction.

One credit - Continued engagement and implementation

12 Criteria 4 5 in ST 01 Consultation plan are achieved.
14 Prior to completion of the detailed design, consultation feedback has been provided to all participating stakeholder
groups highlighting how their input has influenced the design and site works and they have acknowledged receipt of this
(refer to CN2). The feedback includes justification and reasons for decisions that have been taken.
15 The named stakeholder champion or champions (refer to Relevant definitions) continue to communicate with the
relevant stakeholders throughout the detailed design and construction stages of the asset by:
15.a Implementing the communication strategy (refer to ST 01 Consultation plan - criterion 3 )
15.b Monitoring and reporting to the project team on the measures implemented to enhance positive and mitigate
negative impacts on the community for the construction stage
15.c Ensuring complaints received during design and construction stages are promptly and satisfactorily dealt with
15.d Ensuring that hard-to-reach groups are aware of and able to benefit from implemented measures through
signage, communications etc. at both the construction and in-use stages.
16 The inclusive design strategy is updated (or developed in line with criteria 10 11 ) as appropriate to the project and the
measures within it are implemented.

None.
Compliance notes
CN1 Minimum In addition to any statutory consultation content, for the purposes of a BREEAM
consultation assessment, the stakeholder consultation should consider the following as a minimum:
content 1. Impacts of the development upon the surrounding community in construction
and following completion (including the protection of areas of historic or heritage
value, biodiversity, water quality, amenities, etc.)
2. Socio-economic and environmental impacts of the proposed scheme on the
community during construction and operation and how any negative impacts can
be mitigated
3. Design quality and inclusivity
4. Management, maintenance or operational issues
5. Measures where benefits can be provided to enhance the area for the community
during construction and operation
6. Opportunities for shared use or provision of facilities and infrastructure with or
for the existing community.
Within the BREEAM Infrastructure manual, across the technical sections, the assessor is
required to engage, consult or communicate with stakeholders. There are two specific
ways that the stakeholder consultation within the technical manual links with this issue.
These are as follows:
Areas that link directly to ST 02 in order to achieve credits (generally considered

as 'wider consultation')
Areas that do not link to ST 02 in order to achieve credits, but take the principles
of consultation from this issue (generally considered as 'Specialist stakeholder
consultation').
Refer to the Other information section of this issue for descriptions of 'Wider
consultation' and 'Specialist stakeholder consultation' and the issues associated with
these.
CN2 Providing Feedback must be accessible to all participating stakeholders but does not have to be
consultation sent directly to each individual. It should be provided to each stakeholder group in
feedback accordance with the provisions made in the consultation plan. At least one named
stakeholder champion from each stakeholder group must have acknowledged receipt
of the feedback.
CN3 Scope of the An inclusive design strategy will go beyond minimum legislative requirements and
inclusive design recognise the different ways projects need to address inclusivity. This includes
strategy measures in and around the asset during construction and operation, i.e. for asset users
and also individuals or groups likely to be affected by any changes outside of the site
boundary such as diversions and signage changes. The specific impacts and relevant
measures will vary from project to project in accordance with the asset's function and
its location.
Methodology
None.
Evidence
Ref Strategy stage Interim design stage Final post-construction

stage
10 11 Inclusive design strategy N/A N/A
Code of Construction Practice (CoCP)

The Code of Construction Practice (CoCP) is a formal document containing a series of measures and standards of
work to be applied by the contractors throughout the construction period. This will provide a consistent approach to
the management of construction activities on a project.
Where no CoCP has been developed, but an equivalent document is in place, it must contain measures appropriate to
the project and be compliant where specified within this, and other issues within the manual.
Facilitated community consultation

There are many methodologies available to engage communities about the formulation and design of development
proposals. For BREEAM, the following principles must be adhered to:
1. The consultation exercise has a clearly communicated purpose
2. Participants understand how their views will be used within the project
3. Expectations are set as to which options are open for discussion and revision
4. Reasonable advance notice is given to potential participants of the consultation exercise
5. Efforts are made to include hard-to-reach groups and jargon is avoided during the consultation exercise
6. The consultation is facilitated by a person or organisation that is independent from the developer.
Inclusive design strategy

An inclusive design strategy is one that considers the needs of the full range of human diversity with respect to ability,
language, culture, gender, age and other forms of human difference.
The strategy should aim to be:
1. Inclusive so everyone can use the asset or facilities provided by the project safely, easily and with dignity
2. Responsive and therefore taking into account what people say they need and want
3. Flexible so different people can use the asset or facilities provided by the project in different ways
4. Convenient so everyone can use the asset or facilities provided by the project without too much effort or
separation
5. Accommodating for all people, regardless of their age, gender, disability, faith or circumstances
6. Welcoming with no disabling barriers that might exclude some people
7. Realistic and therefore offering more than one solution to help balance everyone's needs and recognising that
one solution may not work for all.
For this issue, relevant stakeholders to be consulted as a minimum include:
1. Local community, including residents, businesses and other organisations located in the neighbourhood (e.g.
schools) that may be impacted by the site or sites during construction and the completed asset in use
2. Wider community, including regional business interests who may not be located in the immediate vicinity but who
may be impacted by the project
3. Owner/operator of the asset

4. End users (where different from above) and their representative bodies (e.g. in the case of a road this could be
drivers, road haulage companies, emergency services)
5. National or local statutory bodies
6. Relevant regulatory bodies
7. Relevant interest groups and organisations (e.g. heritage organisations)
8. Contractors and their supply chain (e.g. trades professionals)
9. Technical specialists (e.g. inclusive design specialists, costs specialists, etc.) where impacts relating to their area of
expertise are considered significant
10. Any statutory consultees.
Stakeholder champion
An individual formally tasked by the client with the responsibility to deliver the consultation activities and champion the
outcomes in the project team. The individual can be internal or external to the project team with sufficient authority to
influence the design of the project and advise the client, design and construction teams.
Vulnerable groups
A vulnerable group is one whose members have a need for care and support, are experiencing or at risk of abuse or
neglect, or those who are unable to protect themselves against harm or exploitation. Refer to ST 01 Consultation
plan: CN2 for examples of those who may be included within vulnerable groups.
Other information
Crossover with Local wellbeing section

The criteria within this issue link directly with the issue LW 02 Social impact. This issue is looking to reward the process of
consulting with the community and ensuring measures implemented as part of the infrastructure project meet the needs of
all community stakeholders considering the full life cycle of the asset through reviewing the implemented measures.
The focus of LW 02 Social impact is to assess and reward the measures implemented and how they address community
needs, rather than rewarding the process followed to provide these outcomes.
Consultation links within the Infrastructure scheme
Wider stakeholder consultation

Some issues require a wide community consultation on the assessment and proposals for the issue. The following issues
include this type of consultation:

LW 02 Social impact
Tra 03 Transport connectivity
LUE 01 Land use and value
LSH 01 Landscape and visual impact
LSH 02 Heritage assets
Pol 01 Air quality
Pol 03 Noise and vibration
Pol 04 Light pollution.
The above issues are directly linked with this issue (ST 02). To achieve credits within these issues, consultation on the content of
these issues must be carried out in accordance with the process outlined within the 'Further consultation credit', i.e. prior to the
end of the concept design stage) unless otherwise stated in the issue.
Please refer to these issues and their compliance notes for a full explanation of the consultation requirements. For example: to
achieve the Connectivity assessment credit in Tra 03 Transport connectivity, details of the following must be included in the
'further consultation' minimum content:
Connectivity assessment
Connectivity impacts resulting from the project in construction and operation
Proposals for enhancing connectivity and
Proposals for minimising and mitigating negative impacts on existing connections.
The BREEAM Infrastructure Online tool reminds assessors of this link and will not allow credits to be awarded in the above
issues until the credit within ST 02 for Further consultation is achieved.
Specialist stakeholder consultation

Specialist stakeholder consultation differs from the wider consultation in that involves a more concentrated and direct
consultation with specialists and experts. The following issues include this type of consultation:

LUE 03 Remediation of land contamination
Pol 02 Water pollution
Wst 01 Construction waste management
Wat 01 Water efficiency planning and implementation.
This issue requires local, rather than specialist, knowledge to be gathered through a consultation process and references this
issue as a means to gather this information, but there is currently no formal link to these requirements.
One exception to the above scenarios is found in LUE 04 Ecological impact assessment and action plan. This issue requires
local, rather than specialist, knowledge to be gathered through a consultation process and references this issue as a means to
gather this information but there is currently no formal link to these requirements.

available
0 5 One credit - criterion 11 (Considerate construction) -

Excellent
Two credits - criterion 11 (Considerate construction) -
Outstanding
Aim
To recognise construction sites that offer enhanced consideration of the welfare and development of their staff and the
contribution they make to an environmentally and socially accountable site.

None.
Please note that criterion 1 requires actions to be addressed from the briefing stage, however, as the requirements
are linked to the building and commissioning of the asset, they are included in the project detail assessment criteria.

National health and safety legislation (prerequisite)

Implementation of a workforce plan (one credit)
Environmental management (one credit)
Considerate construction (up to two credits)
Considerate fleet operations (one credit)
Prerequisite - National health and safety legislation

1 All national health and safety legislation and regulation for construction sites is considered, addressed or implemented
during:
1.a The design of the asset; to minimise health and safety risks
1.b Pre-construction work planning and organisation; to collate health and safety information from all relevant
stakeholders (refer to Relevant definitions)
1.c Site set-up; to implement health and safety features
1.d Construction; to manage, monitor and report on the health and safety of construction site staff.
One credit - Implementation of a workforce welfare plan

3 Before construction begins a plan is developed with the contractors (refer to CN1) that clearly identifies measures to
enhance the welfare and development of the construction site workforce on the project. The plan covers, as a minimum:
ST 03 Responsible construction practices Stakeholders
3.a Provision of staff facilities (refer to Relevant definitions)

3.b Opportunities to improve the welfare and development of the workforce that go beyond legal requirements
(refer to Relevant definitions)
3.c Promotion of sustainable working practices (refer to Relevant definitions)
3.d Methods for monitoring workforce satisfaction (refer to CN2).
4 The workforce plan is implemented and at least one named stakeholder champion (refer to Relevant definitions)
monitors workforce satisfaction throughout the construction stage (refer to CN2).
5 The workforce plan is reviewed, and where necessary updated, by the contractors as the project progresses. This takes
into account new project details and any input from the workforce.
6 An evaluation of workforce satisfaction is undertaken prior to handover to establish how satisfied the workforce have
been with:
6.a The facilities
6.b The opportunities for training and development
6.c Their input into the success of the project.
7 The lessons learnt are disseminated to the contractor, design team and client.
One credit - Environmental management

9 Prior to construction starting on site, the principal contractor operates an environmental management system (EMS)
covering their main operations. The EMS must be either:
9.a Third Party Certified, to ISO 14001/EMAS or equivalent
9.b Follow an incremental approach to implementing an EMS system (see Relevant definitions) as defined in national
best practice standards (refer to Appendix B - The Approved Standards and Weightings List (ASWL)) and have
reached the stage of 'implementation and operation' of the EMS system
9.c .
Up to two credits - Considerate and responsible construction

11 The following is required to demonstrate compliance for:
11.a One credit: Where the principle contractor achieves six items in each of the four sections within Appendix C.
11.b Two credits : Where the principle contractor achieves all of the items in each of the four sections within Appendix
C and the contractor's performance has been confirmed by an independent assessment and verification (refer
to CN3 and CN4)
One credit - Considerate and responsible fleet operations

12 Where all operators travelling to or from the construction site have achieved all of the items in the five sections within
Appendix D.
Exemplary level criterion

The following outlines the exemplary level criterion to achieve one innovation credit for this BREEAM issue:
13 With reference to the considerate construction criterion 11 where the principal contractor has achieved compliance with
the criteria of a BREEAM compliant organisational, local or national considerate and responsible construction scheme,
and the performance has been confirmed by independent assessment and verification.

None.
Compliance notes
CN1 Contractor Where the workforce plan is created before the appointment of the contractor or
involvement contractors, then compliance with this criterion can still be met providing that a suitably
experienced person with substantial construction or contracting experience in projects
similar to the proposed works is involved. A suitably experienced person could be a
contractor appointed as a consultant for this stage or a construction project manager.
The workforce plan should still be reviewed, and where necessary updated, as the
project progresses and the contractors are appointed.
CN2 Monitoring Monitoring workforce satisfaction is intended to allow changes to be made during the
workforce construction of the asset that empower the workforce. It should seek to determine
satisfaction satisfaction with the staff facilities, implemented site policies, and available
development opportunities.
BREEAM does not specify how monitoring is carried out, however, examples include a
suggestions box with a feedback mechanism or a regular agenda, i.e. at meetings or
briefings.
CN3 Compliance with In instances where items in Appendix C are not relevant due to the scope of works on
Appendix C site, the assessor should seek guidance from BRE Global on the appropriate number of
items required.
CN4 Independent An assessment of the site activities against Appendix C which is carried out by an
assessment and individual who can demonstrate their independence from the project delivery, i.e.
verification someone not employed by (or working under a contract for) the contractors
organisation. The individual must have at least five years' experience working within the
construction industry either as a contractor or as part of a design team. Where the
assessor meets these requirements, they can fulfil this role.
Methodology
None.
Evidence
3 N/A Workforce plan N/A
ST 03 Responsible construction practices Stakeholders
6 N/A Refer to generic evidence Workforce evaluation report

requirement above
9 N/A Refer to generic evidence A copy of the principal contractor's

requirement above EMS or EMAS certificate or evidence of
their status, e.g. a copy of their phase 4
audit
11 13 N/A Refer to generic evidence Scheme certificate or compliance

requirement above report
Compliant organisational, local or national and responsible considerate construction schemes

Where a considerate and responsible construction scheme exists and is not listed as a BREEAM compliant scheme, the
scheme administrator or operator can apply to BRE Global for recognition as a compliant scheme.
Prior to any application the operator should first review their scheme against the requirements of Guidance Note 11
(GN11). If they believe their scheme demonstrates compliance with GN11, they should contact BRE Global. BRE Global
will review the scheme and, if appropriate, add them to the list of compliant schemes and define appropriate
benchmarks of performance for achieving BREEAM credits using the scheme.
Environmental Management Systems - An Incremental Approach

In order to comply with criterion 9.a, a process must be followed that enables the contractor to improve on their
environmental performance and develop their supply chain business through step by step implementation of an
environmental management system (refer to Appendix B - The Approved Standards and Weightings List (ASWL)).
Welfare and development of the workforce

Consideration should be given to the development of policies and procedures that support the welfare and
development of the workforce over and above any legal requirements (including health and safety law). This should
include:
1. Encouraging the promotion of health and safety throughout the workforce
2. Respecting the wellbeing of all staff including mental and emotional wellbeing through policies such as anti-
bullying, harassment and ensuring these are followed
3. Promoting equality and diversity across the workforce
4. Maximising opportunities for staff personal and career development through practices and policies such as
diversity and equality, training and skills and career development
5. Providing staff with the opportunity to make suggestions for improving the working environment and working
practices to support a culture of ownership. This could include a staff suggestion scheme with incentives to
encourage input and feedback surveys.
The above must be considered for all staff working on the site including subcontractors and self-employed
individuals.
Promotion of sustainable working practices

Sustainable working practices can be promoted through provision of staff training that raises awareness of the
practices used on site. This should cover:
1. The site's environmental and social impacts

2. Stakeholder interfaces and sensitive issues
3. Risks and mitigation methods for potential incidents, e.g. that impact on the community
4. Working practices on site including the correct operation procedures for plant and equipment to maximise
energy and carbon efficiency and minimise waste, and to mitigate or minimise pollution from noise, vibration, dust
and other emissions
5. Health and safety risk assessments (e.g. procedures for dealing with spills of fuels and chemicals) carried out to
meet the legislative minimum are not considered as a part of this process.
Provision of staff facilities

Facilities for the construction site workforce that demonstrate best practice and exceed the requirements of
legislation including the provision of:
1. Toilets
2. Washing and changing facilities
3. Facilities for eating and preparing food
4. Shelter
5. Accommodation (where relevant).
Facilities that would exceed the requirements of legislation include, but are not limited to, provision of:
1. Rest and recreation facilities
2. Healthcare facilities
3. Faith facilities or quiet room
4. Canteen (if appropriate)
5. Internal condition and specification of facilities provided.
For this issue, relevant stakeholders to collate health and safety information from include, as a minimum:
1. Client
2. Design team
3. Main and subcontractors
4. Specialist contractors and consultants
5. Equipment and material suppliers
6. National health and safety executives, if relevant.
Stakeholder champion for the workforce

An individual formally tasked by the client with the responsibility to monitor the workforce satisfaction and champion
the outcomes of the workforce plan on site. The individual can be internal or external to the project team with
sufficient authority to influence working practices on site and advise the client, design and construction teams.
Other information
None.
ST 04 Owner operator requirements Stakeholders

available
1 1 Two credits - criteria 1 8 (Operational performance) -

Very good
Aim
To engage with the asset owner/operator throughout the design and construction phases to facilitate operation over the life
of the asset.

One credit - Strategic operational performance indicators (OPIs)

1 At the briefing stage , technical scoping discussions are held with the project owners and existing, or future operators, to
evaluate design options for the asset that optimise performance of the asset in regards to their operational
requirements (refer to CN1).
2 Owners/operators and their staff from existing similar infrastructure projects are consulted based on their experience of
delivering and operating their asset.
3 The proposed options for the asset are evaluated against key criteria and are used to develop operational performance
indicators (OPI) for the project (refer to CN2).

One credit - Operational performance

5 A regular review is undertaken at key project gateways (refer to Relevant definitions) with the owner or future operator
of the asset to ascertain whether the proposed design will meet the operational performance indicators (OPI) and
therefore their in-use needs.
6 All OPIs are achieved for the project (refer to CN3).
7 A post project review of the delivery process is undertaken prior to handover and covers as a minimum:
7.a How the owner/operator input has influenced the design and construction of the asset
7.b How the completed asset meets the project specific OPIs
7.c Lessons learnt from implementing the OPIs.
8 The information is disseminated to all stakeholders involved in the process (from the briefing stage to handover) and
whoever will be working on future projects for the owner/operator.
Note: There may be crossover with the KPIs referred to in Integrated design.

None.
Compliance notes
CN1 No asset If no owner/operator has been identified at the feasibility stage, input should be
owner/operator at obtained from contractors or owners or operators of other similar assets to provide
the strategic stage feedback on lessons learnt from their experience of long term operational issues.
CN2 Developing Key criteria that must be established with the owner/operator and used to inform the
operational operational performance indicators (OPI) for the asset should include as a minimum:
performance 1. Technical feasibility
indicators 2. Maintenance and repair requirements
3. Resilience: Extreme weather events, future needs or capacity
4. Feedback from current operators on their experience of what works and what
does not
5. Environmental impacts
6. Cost Capital and operational costs
7. Value for money
8. Safety
9. Accessibility
10. Integration with other planned actions in the area
11. Dependencies with other sectors road, rail, waterways, utilities etc.
The OPIs must be established before finalising the concept stage for any credits to be
awarded for this issue.
CN3 Achieving all OPIs BREEAM recognises that as the project progresses the operational requirements may
for the project also be adapted to meet the needs of the owner and operator.
Where any of the OPIs are not achieved for the asset at completion, full justification must
be provided along with written confirmation from the asset owner and operator that
the operation of the asset will not be compromised to award the 'Operational
performance' credit.
Methodology
None.
ST 04 Owner operator requirements Stakeholders
Evidence
1 3 Strategic Operational N/A N/A

Performance Indicators
documentation
7 N/A Refer to generic evidence Post project review

requirement above

This definition of key project gateways refers to project delivery phases. shown in chronological order in reference to
delivery as:
1. Concept design
2. Definition
3. Design
4. Build and commission
5. Handover and close out
6. In-use.
Other information
Local wellbeing BREEAM New Construction: Infrastructure (International pilot)
Local wellbeing
Category overview
refer to country reference sheet in the ASWL LW 02 Social impact
Summary
This category encourages project teams to consider how the construction and operation of the asset affects the local
community. Issues in this category establish local economic and social priorities through completion of impact assessments
and reward is given where measures are implemented that mitigate negative and create positive impact.

Issue ID Credits
LW 01 Economic impact Strategic stage - 1

Project detail - 5
Demographic profiling and defining the local area impacted by the project to establish the existing socio-
economic system within which the asset will sit
Economic impact assessment informed by input from key representatives and a baseline established to quantify
the economic impact of the project
Measures for mitigating negative impacts and opportunities for creating positive impacts identified and
implemented resulting in net positive economic impact
Additional credits for implementing measures that have a local economic benefit beyond the regulatory
minimum
LW 02 Social impact Strategic stage -1

Project detail - 6
Social impact assessment informed by demographic profiling and input from key representatives. Proposals are
consulted on with the community to establish measures of local priority
Negative social impacts are sufficiently mitigated as agreed with relevant stakeholders and one or more of the
community high priority needs for positive social impact are implemented
Additional credits for implementing measures that have a local social benefit beyond the regulatory minimum
and of priority to the community
LW 01 Economic impact Local wellbeing
LW 01 Economic impact
1 5 None
Aim
To assess issues relating to the local economy and implement measures that result in a net positive economic impact in the
local area.

Defining the local area of impact (prerequisite)

Economic impact assessment (one credit)
Prerequisite - Defining the local area of impact

1 The project team consult with relevant stakeholders (refer to Relevant definitions) to define the local areas likely to be
impacted by the asset's construction and operation (refer to CN2). As a minimum the consultation should consider the
effects on local:
1.a Businesses (e.g. technical or industrial facilities)
1.b Social infrastructure (e.g. schools, hospitals and open space)
1.c Connectivity and accessibility (e.g. transport, energy and communications).
2 A review of the current demographic profiles and future trends is carried out for the local impacted area (refer to CN3).
This is compared with local, regional, and national data to provide context for appropriately addressing local needs.
One credit - Economic impact assessment

4 An economic impact assessment (refer to Relevant definitions) is developed by an independent party (refer to Relevant
definitions) before completion of the concept. The assessment clearly identifies the economic needs within the local area
and the opportunities for mitigating negative and creating positive economic impacts.
5 The assessment uses a baseline to quantify the economic impact of the project on the local area. Scenarios are modelled
with and without the asset in-situ in order to assess the positive and negative impacts, or demonstrate that no significant
effects are likely. The study period of the modelling should align with the service life of the asset (refer to ID 05 Whole life
costing).
6 Relevant stakeholders are involved in reviewing the project's opportunities to mitigate negative and create positive
economic impacts.
7 The project delivery team or contractor (as applicable) commit to:
7.a Implement measures that mitigate any negative impact from the project on the local economy
7.b Implement measures that create a positive impact on the local economy beyond the regulatory minimum (refer
to CN4)
7.c Regularly review throughout design and construction the impacts of the implemented measures (both
mitigation and positive measures) on the local economy. This includes monitoring, reviewing, and adjusting
(where necessary) any specific targets that are set.

Net positive economic impact (one credit)

Measures that create a positive economic impact (up to four credits)
One credit - Net positive economic impact

8 The measures for mitigating negative impacts and creating positive impacts identified in the strategic stage assessment
are reviewed, and where necessary updated, based on detailed design proposals and the latest needs within the local
impacted area.
9 Changes to either the design or construction process continue to be assessed in terms of their net economic impact by
the project team (refer to CN5). New significant impacts or measures are reflected in the economic impact assessment.
10 Measures to mitigate negative and create positive economic impact are implemented beyond the regulatory minimum
(refer to CN4).
11 The development will result in a net positive impact on economic activity in the local area (refer to CN6).
Up to four credits - Measures that create a positive economic impact

13 Additional credits can be awarded in accordance with Table 16 where a percentage of relevant measures (refer to CN7)
are implemented that:
13.a Provide local procurement opportunities during construction or operation
13.b Provide local people access to off-site employment during construction or operation
13.c Provide local people access to on-site employment during construction or operation
13.d Provide opportunities for inward investment or consumer expenditure in the local area
13.e Provide training opportunities that upskill local unemployed or vulnerable groups
13.f Support continuity of local income
13.g Support local enterprise
13.h Support local productivity
13.i Support local trades, skills, training providers (refer to Additional information) or facilities.
Table 16: Credits associated with implementation of measures that create local positive economic impact
Requirements Associated credits
25% of relevant measures implemented 1
Note: Only full credits can be awarded within BREEAM and therefore the relevant percentage achieved should be
rounded down to the lower credit allocation.
For example, if five measures are deemed relevant and three out of five (60%) are implemented then two credits
should be awarded.

Table 17: Measures for creating positive local economic impact and examples of their implementation
Measure Example of implementation
Training opportunities that up- The project supports and promotes the provision of training or apprenticeships in
skill locally unemployed and the local area during planning, design or construction.
other vulnerable groups
Local trades, skills, training The client or contractor partners with a training provider to promote and
providers or facilities contribute to a legacy of enhanced training and skills for local residents and
businesses that continues beyond the construction of the asset.
On-site employment during Jobs associated with the construction or operation of the asset are advertised
construction and operation locally through a number of media. Jobs can be:
1. Temporary or permanent
2. Part-time or full-time
3. Apprenticeships
Off-site employment during Direct (e.g. design office jobs or factory production) and indirect jobs (e.g.
construction and operation management of new services or social infrastructure) associated with the design,
construction and operation of the asset and surrounding infrastructure are
advertised locally through a number of media.
Continuity of local income No financial loss is incurred by local businesses as a result of the construction of the
asset. Businesses that remain open are compensated for any loss of income
throughout the construction period (where losses are clearly demonstrated). For
businesses that cannot continue to operate compensation is provided to cover all
reasonable costs, including relocation costs and any loss of income during
relocation.
Measure Example of implementation
Procurement opportunities Opportunities to provide products or services are advertised locally and relevant
during construction and businesses are identified and invited to tender at the beginning of the tender
operation process. Local businesses are given sufficient time to respond to the invitation.
Opportunities could include:
1. Short term contracts related to the construction of the asset
2. Long term contracts related to the operation of the asset
Consideration should be given to how procurement contracts might improve the
economic, social and environmental wellbeing of the area before the construction
process is started.
The award of contracts should be based on a balance of factors including local
proximity of the supply chain.
Opportunities to attract inward Opportunities can include new or enhanced:

investment or consumer 1. Amenities
expenditure 2. Facilities
3. Services
4. Businesses.
Local enterprise Support is given to promote innovation or growth in local businesses.
Local productivity For example, providing:

1. Improved access to jobs
2. Enhanced infrastructure for local businesses.
Compliance notes
Simplified criteria
CN1 Simplified criteria For assessment of this issue for projects of a simple nature, refer to the Methodology
section for further information.
General
CN2 Local area of impact The local area of impact is the area likely to experience significant socio-economic
impact due to the construction and operation of the asset. Significant socio-economic
impact should be determined considering:
1. The probability, duration, frequency and reversibility of the effects
2. The cumulative nature of the effects
3. The magnitude and spatial extent of the effects
4. The value and vulnerability of the community likely to be affected.
Where relevant, and when agreed by all relevant stakeholders (refer to Relevant
definitions), the local area of impact can align with the area considered by an
environmental impact assessment.
CN3 Demographic The demographic profile should include information about:

profiles 1. Age (children, young people, older people and the ageing population)
2. Persons with a disability
3. Gender and sexual orientation
4. Religion or belief
5. Race
6. Health (life expectancy, obesity, physical activity, mortality associated with illnesses,
dementia, depression, mental health)
7. Employment (sectors, incomes, businesses, working patterns, economic activity,
unemployment)
8. Education, skills and training
9. Population projections.
Only data available from the local authority or another appropriate statutory body and
census data need to be considered for the purpose of BREEAM. Where all information
listed 1-9 is not included, only data available need to be considered for the impact
assessment.
CN4 Measures beyond For this issue the regulatory minimum is defined as any measures required by the
the regulatory appropriate statutory body (refer to Relevant definitions), e.g. measures mandated to
minimum gain approval to construct the asset.
Measures that go beyond the requirements of the appropriate statutory body but are
subsequently incorporated into a planning obligation can be considered compliant
providing it can be clearly demonstrated that the project proposed the measures
above and beyond anything requested originally.
CN5 Change to the This criterion can be deemed compliant where changes are considered in terms of
design or economic impact at regular project team meetings attended by at least the designer,
construction contractor and relevant socio-economic specialists. The extent to which the economic
process (criterion 9 ) impact is considered will be proportionate to the changes being made.
CN6 Net positive impact The total net gain in economic activity as a result of the project must be demonstrated
on economic activity against the baseline described within criterion 5 .
To calculate the total net gain in economic activity, the project team must take into
account any negative economic impacts due to the construction and operation of the
asset. Total net gain can be reported as either:
Gross value added (GVA)

Earnings
Employment levels
Skill levels.
CN7 Relevant measures Only measures listed in Table 17 that are relevant to the project need to be included
for creating local when calculating the percentage of relevant measures achieved.
positive economic Relevant measures are those included in the economic impact assessment and
impact therefore meet the needs of the local demographic and are demonstrated to create a
positive impact for the local economy.
Where measures have been identified as creating local positive economic impact but
are not included in Table 17, BRE Global should be contacted for further guidance.
Methodology
Scope of the economic impact assessment for projects of a simple nature
The scope of the economic impact assessment and resulting actions to create a positive economic impact for projects of a
simple nature should reflect the significance and impact of the project on the local community. The work undertaken by the
project delivery team in relation to the standard criteria detailed above is described here for these projects. Where specific
criteria are not listed, it would be expected that the criteria are met as detailed above.
Criterion 1 : Defining the local area of impact

As detailed in CN2 the local area of impact is the area likely to experience significant socio-economic impact due to the
construction and operation of the asset. For a simple project there may be minimal impact beyond the site boundary (for
example, in a rural area) and therefore the area to consider would be the area within the site boundary.
Criterion 2 : Demographic profiles and future trends

For a simple project with little socio-economic impact the demographic profiling may be a short report to highlight that a
limited number of people will be affected by the development. Where this is the case the local authority area should be
profiled and the priorities of the local authority used to inform the economic impact assessment.
Criteria 4 7 : Economic impact assessment

Where little socio-economic impact is envisaged because of the project, the economic impact assessment may be a brief
report. The relevant stakeholders need not include socio-economic specialists where local statutory bodies agree the impact
will be minimal.
Potential positive economic impacts must still be identified and measures established with relevant stakeholders to mitigate
negative and create a positive impact on the local economy.
Criterion 5 does not apply to simple projects with little impact on the local community.
Criteria 8 11 : Net positive economic impact

Criteria 8 , 9 and 11 do not need to be achieved where the project will have little impact on the local community. However,
evidence must clearly demonstrate that criterion10 (to mitigate negative and create positive economic impact) has been
achieved through verification by a third party, such as a local authority with expertise in economic impact assessment.
Criterion 13 : Measures that create a positive economic impact

For simple projects the number of relevant measures for creating local positive economic impact (refer to CN7) may be
significantly less than for other larger projects with a greater impact on the local area. Provided the economic impact
assessment details relevant measures that are a priority for the local authority and meet the needs of the local demographic,
only these measures need to be considered when awarding credits using Table 16.
For example, if only two measures are deemed of local importance, two credits can be awarded for implementing one
measure (or 50% of all relevant measures); four credits can be awarded for implementing two measures (or 100% of all
relevant measures).
It should be highlighted that measures do not always need to be provided within the local area of impact, but should be
accessible to the community residing within the local area. For example, a client or contractor might choose to partner with a
technical college in a nearby town to contribute to local training and skills. As long as it can be demonstrated that this is
accessible to local residents or businesses, and is promoted to them, then this can be seen as an economic benefit to the local
area.
Evidence
All One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in the BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used
to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.
1, Demographic and site profiles N/A N/A

2
4, Economic impact assessment Updated economic impact As interim design stage

9 assessment
5, Economic baseline calculation Calculation to demonstrate net As interim design stage

11 gain in economic activity

This refers to the statutory or legal organisation or entity whose duty it is to carry out the planning approval function
for the development area.
Economic impact assessment

The economic impact assessment should focus on local needs, mitigation measures and opportunities for creating
local positive impact. As a minimum the assessment includes:
1. Consideration of demographic profiles and future trends in the local area (as defined in criteria 1 and 2) and the
priorities of the local authority
2. A review of local and national planning policy, if relevant, to inform the assessment
3. Identification of potential impacts and their consequential effects on the local economy during construction and
operation of the proposed project
4. Mitigation measures to reduce negative impacts of the project on the local economy
5. Measures to incorporate into the project to create a positive impact on the local economy.
Independent party
With respect to compliance with the criterion relating to using an independent party, the client or design team needs
to demonstrate they have used a party independent of the design process to conduct the assessment with
knowledge and experience of economic impact assessment processes including how economic activity, enhanced
skills and productivity can be affected by development. For simple projects a member of the project team whose
work is independently verified can be deemed appropriate where verification is provided by a third party, such as a
local authority with expertise in economic impact assessment.
For the purpose of this issue, relevant stakeholders include national or local statutory bodies, local business networks
and socio-economic specialists.
Training provider
A training provider could include (but is not limited to):

1. Technical colleges
2. Universities
3. Higher educational institutions
4. Apprenticeship scheme providers.
Vulnerable groups
A vulnerable group is one whose members have a need for care and support, are experiencing or at risk of abuse or
neglect, or those who are unable to protect themselves against harm or exploitation. Refer to ST 01 Consultation
plan: CN2 for examples of those who may be included within vulnerable groups.
Other information
Socio-economic impact assessments

Major infrastructure projects required to undertake an environmental impact assessment are likely to address socio-
economic impacts in some way. Socio-economic impact assessments can be used for this purpose.
Where a socio-economic impact assessment is developed and the scope covers the requirements of this issue, this can be
used as evidence to demonstrate compliance in place of an economic impact assessment.
Crossover with issue LW 02 Social impact

BREEAM recognise that there is crossover between the economic and social impact assessment and measures that create a
local positive impact. However, reward is given independently to recognise the importance of addressing both of these
issues.
Measures that are equally valuable for economic and social enhancement can be rewarded in both issues. For example,
although health benefits are included as measures that can create a positive local impact in LW 02 Social impact, where it can
be demonstrated that the measures also create a positive impact on the local economy these can be included when
calculating the net increase in economic activity.
LW 02 Social impact Local wellbeing
LW 02 Social impact
available available
1 6 One credit - criteria 7 13 (Measures that mitigate negative

and create positive social impact) - Outstanding
Aim
To identify issues of importance to the local community and implement measures that mitigate negative impact and result in
a positive social impact in the area.

Prerequisite - Defining the local area of impact

1 Criteria LW 01 Economic impact: 1 2 are achieved.
One credit - Social impact assessment

3 A social impact assessment (SIA, refer to Relevant definitions) is developed by an independent party (refer to Relevant
definitions) before completion of the concept stage. The assessment clearly identifies the social needs within the local
areas and the opportunities for mitigating negative and creating positive social impacts (refer to CN2).
4 Relevant stakeholders (refer to Relevant definitions) are involved in:
4.a Reviewing opportunities defined in the SIA and commenting on their appropriateness to the scale of the project
4.b Defining the project's scope to create a positive social impact (refer to CN3)
4.c Establishing an appropriate dispute resolution process to ensure negative social impacts will be effectively be
mitigated (refer to CN4).
5 The following are included as part of the 'Further consultation' process detailed in ST 02 Consultation and engagement:
5.a The project's scope to create a positive social impact
5.b The social impacts resulting from the project in construction and operation
5.c Proposals for mitigating negative social impacts within the local area or areas, and measures that create a
positive social impact
5.d The measures of local social importance and their relative priority in order of desirability, e.g. low, medium and
high, taking into account any strategies for the local area
6 The project delivery team or contractor (as applicable) commit to:
6.a Implement measures that mitigate negative impact from the project on the local community.
6.b Implement measures that create a positive impact on the local society beyond the regulatory minimum (refer to
Appendix B)
6.c Regularly review throughout design and construction stages the impacts of the implemented measures (both
mitigation and positive measures) on the local community. This includes monitoring, reviewing, and adjusting
(where necessary) any specific targets that are set

Up to six credits - Measures that mitigate negative and create a positive social impact
7 The measures for mitigating negative impacts and creating positive impacts identified in the strategic stage assessment
are reviewed, and where necessary updated, to account for the consultation feedback and the latest needs of the local
demographic.
8 The project demonstrates that feedback has influenced the design and construction of the final asset.
9 Changes to the design or construction process continue to be assessed in terms of their social impact by the project
team (refer to CN5). New significant impacts or measures are reflected in the social impact assessment.
10 Once measures to mitigate negative impact have been fully defined (during definition and design), the relevant
stakeholders are given the opportunity to review these. If they are not agreed to be sufficient, the dispute resolution
process (refer to criterion 4.c) should be used to ensure mitigation is appropriate (refer to CN4) and the agreed
measures are implemented.
11 Measures to mitigate negative and create positive social impact are implemented beyond the regulatory minimum (refer
to CN6).
12 Measures to create a positive social impact are prioritised to reflect the needs of the community (refer to criterion 5.d)
taking into account any strategies for the local area.
13 Credits are awarded based on the level of local needs and priorities that have been incorporated into the project and
implemented as detailed in Table 18, i.e. one or more of the local high priority needs are incorporated into the project
and implemented (refer to CN7).
Table 18: Credits associated with implementation of measures that enhance local social impact
One or more of the high priority needs 1
All of the high priority needs 3
All of the high and medium priority needs 5
All of the high, medium and low priority needs 6
Note: The enhanced social impact credits can only be awarded where the needs of the community are being met.
Table 19 gives some examples of measures that can increase the social impact of the project, however, these are not
mandatory to achieve compliance.

Table 19: Examples of measures that could be implemented to enhance local social impact
Measure Example of how to implement
Opportunities for The project could support and promote the provision of education and knowledge
education and knowledge transfer in the local area during the planning, construction or operation of the asset. This
transfer includes:
1. Providing construction updates for the local community and wider public
2. Providing access to site (e.g. through organised site visits or a viewing platform)
3. Communicating the aim of the project and wider issues it tackles
4. Supporting engineering education and knowledge transfer (e.g. through local
science, technology engineering and maths (STEM) networks or professional
institutions)
5. Providing education in schools on the impact of the project.
Maintaining or enhancing The project could support the maintenance or upgrade of facilities and amenities, such as:
existing community 1. Community buildings or local meeting places
facilities and amenities 2. Education and library services
3. Leisure facilities (free or priced) and other sports facilities (e.g. tennis courts, football
pitches, swimming pools, etc.)
4. Health and social care services (e.g. pharmacies, medical centres, GP surgeries, etc.)
5. Shops or markets
6. Allotment space or places for growing fresh produce
7. Communication services such as public internet access or postal facilities
8. Banks or cash machines
9. Public houses
10. Places of religious worship.
Maintenance could include physical improvements to existing facilities or facilitating long
term management of these services.
Providing or upgrading The project could support the development of new or improved natural green space,
natural green space (refer such as:
to Relevant definitions) 1. Public parks
2. Village greens
3. Children's playgrounds
4. Local nature reserves.
The space should be accessible green space (refer to Relevant definitions).
Measure Example of how to implement
Sustaining or enhancing The project could enhance the perception of safety in and around the site during
the perception of safety in construction and operation. The following principles from within BRE's Environmental site
and around the sites and layout planning guidance should be applied:
preventing opportunities 1. Prospect, i.e. the view length in all directions from a specific viewing point. A low
for crime prospect will reduce the possible control of a given area by potential victims
2. Refuge, i.e. how easy it is for a potential attacker (or perception of an attacker) to
hide in or next to an open space. Refuge can include hiding places, dark spots, trees
and shrubs, parked cars and building enclosures
3. Escape, i.e. degree to which a space affords an opportunity for escape: either an exit
route from a potential threat, or by reaching someone else who could respond in
case of an attack, e.g. shops, bars, open receptions
Lighting, where properly designed can also support safety perception and reduce
opportunities for crime.
Enhancing accessibility to The project team could enhance accessibility to social infrastructure by applying inclusive
social infrastructure (health design principles to new or existing access ways or signage. Please refer to ST 02
services, leisure facilities, Consultation and engagement for further details of the inclusive design strategy.
open space, transport
hubs, etc.)
Enhancing accessibility or The project team could enhance accessibility or connectivity to MEICA services through
connectivity to installation of new services or improvement of existing services.
MEICAservices (refer to
Relevant definitions)
Opportunities to enhance Opportunities to enhance health could include improving air or water quality, reducing
health noise, or increasing uptake of active travel. However, this should exclude the intended
function or service provided by the asset (refer to CN7).
Compliance notes
CN1 Simplified criteria For assessment of this issue for projects of a simple nature, refer to the Methodology
section for further information.
CN2 Potential social The social impact assessment may look to address:
impacts 1. Sustaining existing communities
2. Sustaining existing amenities and (where feasible and desired) inclusion of new
amenities
3. Enhancing accessibility to social infrastructure (health services, leisure facilities,
open space, etc.)
4. Opportunities to enhance health (e.g. improve air quality, reduce noise, encourage
active travel etc.)
5. Opportunities to reduce crime and enhance community safety
6. Opportunities to eliminate discrimination, harassment and victimisation
7. Opportunities to enhance social cohesion and advance equality between local
minorities and other groups
8. Opportunities for education and knowledge transfer
CN3 Clearly defining the It is important that the scope of the social impact assessment is clearly defined so that
project's scope to community aspirations for social enhancement are achievable and the process is not
create a positive dominated by disputes outside of the scope of the project. For example, any budgetary
social impact limits or measures outside of the control of the project should be clearly
communicated.
The scale of the consultation and measures implemented will be dependent on the
scale of the project and the location of the site (urban or rural, densely or sparsely
populated).
However, a consistent approach should still be taken as detailed in ST 02 Consultation
and engagement.
CN4 Appropriate The dispute resolution process should be one in which an independent party (refer to
dispute resolution Relevant definitions) facilitates communications between the client and design team
processes and the relevant stakeholders. The independent party should be agreed between these
individuals at the concept design stage. Mediation or conciliation would be an
appropriate dispute resolution process for the purpose of this issue (refer to Other
information).
At the project detail assessment stage, the dispute resolution process only needs to be
implemented if mitigation measures are not agreed to be sufficient. If a resolution
cannot be agreed with the relevant stakeholders, the credits can still be awarded if the
independent party is satisfied that the process is undertaken robustly and mitigation is
appropriate to the scale of the project.
It should be noted that it is not expected that all significant impacts will be eliminated;
however, this requirement is included to ensure the best approach for reducing
negative impact is achieved through a transparent process.
CN5 Change to the This criterion can be deemed compliant where changes are considered in social impact
design or at regular project team meetings attended by at least the designer, contractor and
construction relevant socio-economic specialists. The extent and scope to which the social impact is
process (criterion 9 ) considered will be proportionate to the changes being made.
CN6 Measures beyond For this issue the regulatory minimum is defined as any measures required by the
the regulatory appropriate statutory body (refer to Relevant definitions), e.g. measures mandated to
minimum gain approval to construct the asset.
Measures that go beyond the requirements of the appropriate statutory body, but are
subsequently incorporated into a planning obligation, can be considered compliant;
providing it can be clearly demonstrated that the project proposed the measures
above and beyond anything requested originally.
CN7 Measures that Opportunities to create a positive social impact because of the project should exclude
create a positive the intended function or service provided by the asset. For example, a flood defence
social impact scheme should always protect property and people, and therefore this would not be
because of the rewarded as a social benefit for this type of project. The holistic approach to delivering
project an infrastructure asset that meets the inherent need for the project is rewarded in
integrated design.
Within this issue, BREEAM will reward projects that show improved social enhancement
beyond the intended function of the asset, for example a flood defence scheme that
improves water quality locally would be rewarded.
Methodology
Scope of the social impact assessment for projects of a simple nature
The scope of the social impact assessment and resulting actions to create a positive social impact for projects of a simple
nature should reflect the significance and impact of the project on the local community. The work undertaken by the project
delivery team in relation to the standard criteria detailed above is described here for these projects. Where specific criteria are
not listed, it would be expected that the criteria are met as detailed in the standard criteria.
Defining the local area of impact

Criterion 1
Refer to the simplified methodology in LW 01 Economic impact.
Note: The area of impact may be the same for both LW 01 Economic impact and LW 02 Social impact, however, the priorities
of the local authority would be those of social, rather than economic, importance for this issue.
Social impact assessment

Criteria 3 6 :
Where little socio-economic impact is envisaged because of the project, the social impact assessment may be a brief report.
The relevant stakeholders need not include socio-economic specialists where local statutory bodies agree the impact will be
minimal. A dispute resolution process should still be established, however, this should reflect the scale of the project and can
be an informal process as agreed with the relevant stakeholders.
Consultation carried out in ST 02 Consultation and engagement can be scaled to reflect the impact of the project and only the
following needs to be included:
1. The project's scope to create a positive social impact (refer to CN3)

2. Proposals for mitigating negative social impacts within the local area and measures that create a positive social impact
3. The measures of local social importance and their relative priority, e.g. medium or high, taking into account any strategies
for the local area
Measures that mitigate negative and create a positive social impact

Criteria 7 13 :
Criteria 7 and 9 do not need to be achieved where the project will have little impact on the local community. However,
evidence must clearly demonstrate that criteria 8 and 10 12 have been achieved.
In reference to criterion 13 , the number of relevant measures for creating local positive social impact (refer to CN7) may be
significantly less than for other projects with a greater impact on the local area. Provided the results of the consultation
confirm the relevant high and medium priority needs of the community, only these measures need to be considered when
awarding credits using Table 20 rather than Table 18 in the main criteria.
Table 20: Credits associated with implementation of measures that enhance local social impact for projects of a simple
nature
One or more of the high priority needs 1
All of the high priority needs 3
All of the high and medium priority needs 6
In some instances, due to the scope of measures that can be encompassed by the project, there may be only one high priority
need and therefore three credits could be awarded for only one measure being implemented. This would need to be
confirmed through the results of the SIA and consultation.
It should be highlighted that measures do not always need to be provided within the local area of impact, but should be
accessible to the community residing within the local area. For example, a client or contractor might choose to maintain
existing community facilities in a neighbouring area. As long as it can be demonstrated that this is accessible to local residents
or businesses, and it is a priority to them to address, then this can be seen as a social benefit to the local area.
Evidence
All One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in the BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used
to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.
1 Demographic and site profiles N/A N/A
3 Social impact assessment Updated social impact As interim design stage

&9 assessment
Accessible green space
Places that are available for the general public to use free of charge and without time restrictions (although some
sites may be closed to the public overnight and there may be fees for parking a vehicle). The places are available to all,
meaning that every reasonable effort is made to ensure the space is inclusive (refer to the relevant definition of
'Inclusive design strategy' in ST 02 for general principles). An accessible place will also be known to the target users,
including potential users who live within the site catchment area.

for the development area.
Independent party
With respect to using an independent party to develop the SIA, the client or design team needs to demonstrate they
have used a party independent of the design process to conduct the assessment with knowledge and experience of
social impact assessment processes including how human health, equality and social cohesion can be affected by
development. A member of the project team whose work is independently verified can be deemed appropriate
where verification is provided by a third party, such as a local authority with expertise in social impact assessment.
The independent party for the dispute resolution process should have the same independence, knowledge and
expertise, however, they cannot be a member of the project team, therefore different individuals may be required.
MEICA
Mechanical, Electrical, Instrumentation, Communication and Automaton services.
MEICA connectivity
MEICA connectivity refers to a safe and reliable connection between systems and the customer. The system should be
adaptable to the customer, for example offering reliable connection and appropriate technology to allow the service
to be accessible.
Negative social impacts

Negative social impacts because of the construction and operation of a project can be wide ranging where not
adequately addressed by the project team. As such, BREEAM does not look to definitively define all of these, however,
impacts could include:
1. Noise and vibration
2. Poor air quality
3. Light pollution
4. Ground and surface water pollution
5. Transport disruption
6. Severance
7. Displacement of people from their homes (compulsory purchase)
8. Displacement of businesses
Natural green space

Places where human control and activities are not intensive so that a feeling of naturalness is encouraged to
predominate. Natural and semi-natural green space exists as a distinct typology but also as discrete areas within
most other green space typologies.
For the purpose of this issue relevant stakeholders include national or local statutory bodies, local community
organisations and socio-economic specialists.
Social impact assessment

The social impact assessment should focus on local needs and opportunities. As a minimum the assessment includes:
1. Consideration of demographic profiles and future trends in the local area and the priorities of the local authority
2. A review of local and national planning policy if relevant, to inform the assessment
3. Identification of potential impacts and their consequential effects on the local community during construction and
operation of the proposed project (refer to CN2)
4. Mitigation measures to reduce negative impacts of the project on the local community
5. Actions to incorporate into the project to create a positive social impact
Other information
Socio-economic benefits of green space

The 2012 review, 'Microeconomic Evidence for the Benefits of Investment in the Environment'15 published by Natural England
provides evidence for the economic and social benefits of green infrastructure. These benefits include: economic growth,
health and productivity, attractiveness, housing and property values, climate change mitigation and adaptation, air quality
improvement, noise reduction, tourist and recreation attraction, community cohesion, and economic and social dynamism.
Socio-economic and other impact assessments

Major infrastructure projects required to undertake an environmental impact assessment are likely to address socio-
economic impacts in some way. Socio-economic impact assessments can be used for this purpose.
Where a socio-economic impact assessment is developed and the scope covers the requirements of this issue, this can be
used as evidence to demonstrate compliance in place of a social impact assessment. Similarly, where a project has completed
other assessments (e.g. equalities impact assessments or health impact assessments) which cover the requirements of this
issue then these can also be used as evidence for demonstrating compliance.
Mediation and conciliation

Mediation or conciliation refers to a process in which an independent third party reopens or facilitates communications
between parties and so aids the settlement process. The process can be facilitative in that the third party merely tries to aid
the settlement process (usually referred to mediation), or evaluative in that the third party comments on the subject matter or
makes recommendations as to the outcome (usually referred to as conciliation).
Transport BREEAM New Construction: Infrastructure (International pilot)
Transport
Category overview
Refer to the country reference sheet in the ASWL Tra 01 Transport impact assessment
Summary
This category encourages effective management of transport by identifying the impacts in a transport impact assessment
and implementing mitigation measures as part of a travel and logistics plan during construction and operation of the asset.
Category summary
Issue Credits
Tra 01 Transport impact assessment Strategic stage - 1

Project detail - 2
Assessing the transport impact of the proposed asset
Tra 02 Travel and logistics plan Strategic stage - 1

Project detail - 5
Development, implementation and monitoring of the travel and logistics plan
Tra 03 Transport connectivity Strategic stage - 1

Project detail - 1
Completion of a transport connectivity assessment and implementing measures that enhance transport links
within the community impacted by the construction and operation of the asset
Tra 01 Transport impact assessment Transport
Tra 01 Transport impact assessment

1 2 Two credits - all criteria 3 10 - Good
Aim
To assess the potential transport impacts and reduce traffic congestion generated in and around the asset during
construction and operation.

One credit - Strategic transport impact assessment

1 A strategic transport impact assessment or statement is carried out to determine key transport impacts due to the
construction and operation of the asset on a project wide scale.
2 The assessment covers the minimum content (refer to CN1) and relevant stakeholders (refer to Relevant definitions) are
consulted on the content. Feedback from stakeholders is incorporated into the assessment.

Updating the transport impact assessment (prerequisite)

Transport assessment at the construction stage (one credit)
Transport assessment at the operational stage (one credit)
Prerequisite - Updating the transport impact assessment

3 The transport impact assessment or statement detailed within the strategic assessment criteria is updated for the
construction and operational stages, to be in line with the project details (refer to CN2 and CN3).
4 Relevant stakeholders are consulted on the content of the updated assessment or statement. Feedback from
stakeholders is incorporated into the assessment.
5 The assessment or statement follows national best practice guidance for transport impact assessments (refer to
Appendix B - The Approved Standards and Weightings List (ASWL)) and contains as a minimum:
5.a Existing site information including location of the site, access and constraints
5.b Existing transport needs and facilities at the site and how these relate to the proposed transport needs and
facilities for the new development including an assessment of baseline data (refer to Relevant definitions).
One credit - Transport impact assessment at the construction stage

7 The assessment or statement includes:
7.a An assessment of potential transport impacts on the community and environment as a result of the
construction process (refer to CN4)
7.b Options for mitigating the identified transport impacts
7.c Targets and objectives to demonstrate best practice.
Note: Table 21 provides examples of possible mitigation measures for construction of the asset.
One credit - Transport impact assessment at the operational stage

9 The assessment or statement includes:
9.a An assessment of potential transport impacts on the community and environment as a result of the operation
of the asset (refer to CN4)
9.b Options for mitigating the identified transport impacts
9.c Targets and objectives to demonstrate best practice.
10 The assessment or statement considers the impacts and benefits of the following situations:
10.a The asset is not constructed
10.b The proposed asset in operation.
Note: Table 22 contains examples of possible mitigation measures for operation of the asset.

construction of the asset
Area of mitigation Considerations
Construction of the asset
Optimising construction site traffic 1. Assess size of vehicles versus frequency of movements
2. Provide awareness courses, promoting safe and efficient driving for
drivers of all transport modes (refer to ST 03 Responsible construction
practices)
3. Provide on-site services such as catering to reduce travel off-site during
the working day
4. Use low emission vehicles and plant
5. Maintain standard working hours where practicable
6. Minimise the loss of parking and loading facilities
7. Assess off-site assembly for appropriate components (balanced with
distances travelled and loads transported)
8. Plan and carry out multi-purpose or linked trips
9. Assess opportunities to reduce the mass or volume of material that
needs to be transported
10. Source local materials or suppliers where appropriate, e.g. inviting
appropriate local suppliers to tender for work
11. Address impacts resulting from the scale of development.
Efficiently manage construction 1. Reduce combined impacts from adjacent developments, e.g. through
traffic liaising with adjacent development teams and adjusting delivery times or
reprogramming works
2. Adapt the road network or footpaths to support construction traffic
3. Change the road network to accommodate construction traffic and
access to site, to mitigate impact on existing journey times, distances
travelled and public transport services
4. Implement systems to reduce congestion caused by vehicles entering and
leaving site, e.g. advanced notification of arrival times, queue
management processes
5. Plan construction transport routes to avoid residential areas, businesses
and sensitive receptors and identify back up routes approved by the
relevant authority
6. Coordinate with local transport authorities and transport operators
7. Implement procedures for managing use of a transport network where
the project takes over part of the road network, railway lines or
waterways.
Efficiently manage temporary 1. Plan temporary road closures to be as short as practicable

measures 2. Complete diversions before closing existing routes
3. Put controls in place to ensure safe pedestrian and cycle routes
4. Provide suitable signage, lighting and barriers
5. Ensure diversions are fully accessible and in line with national legislation or
best practice guidance (refer to Appendix B - The Approved Standards
and Weightings List (ASWL)), where practicable
6. Provide alternative transport services or amenities where severance will
be for an extended time, e.g. more than three months.
Minimising pollution including dust, 1. Determine the most sustainable transport options based on the average
noise, CO2 emissions, NOx, particulate CO2 emissions (kg/km) for construction labour and the average CO2
and other emissions emissions (kg/tonne/km) for materials or waste
2. Use low-emission vehicles and equipment
3. Inform staff, subcontractors and visitors about adopting sustainable
driving practice, e.g. engines are turned off while waiting to be unloaded
etc.
4. Provide regular maintenance of construction vehicles.
Reduction in severance 1. Maintain access where it is reasonably practicable

2. Minimise the length of time the community is affected
3. Limit the need for diversions of public rights of way, cycle routes and limit
the length and time the diversions are in place
4. Provide local residents and businesses with advance warning of the dates
and duration of closures.
operation of the asset
Operation of the asset
Optimising transport 1. Public transport accessibility to, from and around the asset, reducing the need for
movements and additional car movements
minimising pollution 2. Design routes to, from and around the site to avoid residential areas and sensitive
receptors (in some cases it may also be appropriate to avoid businesses)
3. Coordinate with local transport authorities and transport operators where applicable
4. Encourage sustainable modes of transport, e.g. through provision or maintenance of
cycle paths, walkways, access to public transport, electric recharging stations
5. Good signage, lighting, accessibility to minimise unnecessary journeys.
Reduction in severance 1. For permanent changes in travel patterns ensure journey times are the same or less
than the original route including access to public amenities, services and facilities
2. Limit the need for diversions of public rights of way, cycle routes, etc.
Other considerations 1. Minimise the loss of existing parking and loading facilities, where appropriate.
Compliance notes
CN1 Minimum content The strategic transport impact assessment should cover the following as a minimum:
for the strategic 1. Existing site information including location of the site access and any constraints
transport impact 2. Existing transport needs and facilities at the site and how these relate to
assessment proposed transport needs and facilities for the new development
3. Transport impacts on both the community (including vulnerable groups) and the
environment and options for mitigating those impacts
4. Opportunities for using sustainable modes of transport
5. Resource strategy for transporting waste and materials.
CN2 Updated transport This does not have to be the original document, it can be a separate document
assessment or containing up-to-date information. It does not need to be completed by the author of
statement (criterion the strategic stage document.
3)
CN3 Transport A transport statement is suitable when the proposed development is expected to
statement generate relatively low numbers of trips or traffic flows, with minor transport impacts,
e.g. operational transport for a water treatment works. The requirement for a
transport statement or assessment will depend on the interaction of proposed
transport with sensitive receptors in the community. As a minimum a transport
statement should include:
1. Existing site information including existing uses, site specific considerations and
plans for the site such as whether the site has poor air quality or possible access
constraints
2. Baseline transport data including existing site travel characteristics, public
transport provision, description and classification of the surrounding highway
network and analysis of any associated injury accident records
3. Plans for the proposed site layout, scale of development and proposed land uses
and main features
4. Expected 'person-trip' generation, distribution of trips across modes and a
description (based on recent site observations) of the travel characteristics of the
proposed development.
CN4 Potential transport Potential transport impacts must consider the effect on the following as a minimum:
impacts 1. Public transport
2. Walking and cycling
3. Road network and traffic levels
4. Levels of pollution including dust, noise, CO2 emissions, NO , particulate and any
x
other significant emissions
5. The health and safety of all users of the asset and the surrounding area
6. The impacts of phased development and handover, where appropriate
7. Hours of operation and seasonal changes if appropriate
8. Future uses of any undeveloped areas of the site and the associated impacts.
CN5 Multiple site A project may be split into a series of smaller subprojects which may include lengths of
projects a linear project or multiple sites. A multiple site project is defined to be two or more
sites.
For these larger projects site specific transport assessments are required.
CN6 Analysing the Analysing the impacts can include the following indicators:
impacts 1. Changed journey times, distances or frequencies for private and commercial
vehicle occupants, public transport, pedestrians, cyclists, vulnerable road users
and waterway users
2. Permanent changes that will affect roads, public transport, vulnerable users and
waterway users
3. Risk of transport accidents
4. Number of alterations to road layout, closures, diversions and the associated
impacts
5. Changes in access to properties and places of work.
The data analysis should include:
1. The proposed number of current and proposed 'person trips' or 'vehicle trips'
2. The characteristics of the proposed development
3. Known and anticipated peak patterns of demand for transport systems
4. Development generated trips.
Methodology
None.
Evidence
1 2 Strategic Transport Impact N/A N/A

Assessment
3 10 N/A Detailed or updated Transport As Interim design stage

Impact Assessment requirements
Baseline transport data

This refers to the collection of data on existing transport conditions which can be used to compare with the expected
future conditions for the construction and operation of the asset.
For the purpose of this issue relevant stakeholders include as a minimum:
Local authorities
Highways authorities.
Additional relevant stakeholders could include:
Local transport operators (e.g. train or bus companies)
Local business representatives
Regional, national and specialist transport authorities
Relevant interest groups or organisations (e.g. transport-related non-governmental organisations (NGOs),
charities and associations).
Severance
This is the action of separating the community from facilities and services they usually access.
Sustainable transport modes

Transport modes with low environmental impact. For people, examples include travel by foot, bike or public
transport. For materials, examples could include movements by boat or rail.
Other information
None.
Tra 02 Travel and logistics plan Transport
Tra 02 Travel and logistics plan

1 5 None
Aim
To recognise and encourage effective management of transport during the construction and operation of the asset

One credit - Strategic level travel and logistics planning

1 A transport liaison group is formed by a suitably qualified professional (refer to CN1, CN2 and Relevant definitions) to
review and comment on the strategic transport impact assessment and:
1.a Highlight any omissions or inaccuracies
1.b Suggest priority areas and impacts
1.c Make recommendations on mitigation measures
1.d Suggest how to measure and monitor the success of the transport mitigation measures, e.g. surveys, traffic
monitoring
1.e Include input from the public, staff, local authorities and transport operators, where applicable.
2 A strategic travel and logistics plan is produced by a suitably qualified professional including, as a minimum:
2.a Results of the strategic level transport impact assessment
2.b Proposals for mitigating transport impacts
2.c Recommendations from the transport liaison group
2.d Proposed mechanisms to measure and monitor the success of the transport mitigation measures.

Travel and logistics plan for the construction stage (one credit)
Monitoring the transport of construction materials and waste (one credit)
Success of the construction stage travel and logistics plan (up to two credits)
Travel and logistics plan for the operational stage (one credit)
One credit - Travel and logistics plan for the construction stage
3 A detailed travel and logistics plan is developed for the construction stage by a suitably qualified professional and
reviewed by the transport liaison group.
4 The travel and logistics plan:
4.a Is informed by the:
4.a.i The travel and logistics plan carried out during the strategic stage assessment
4.a.ii The detailed transport impact assessment
4.a.iii Comments from the transport liaison group.

4.b Includes targets and objectives for the project detail stage (refer to CN3)
4.c Includes agreed transport impact mitigation measures
4.d Encourages sustainable modes of transport and movements of materials and people
4.e Is updated in collaboration with the transport liaison group as travel patterns change or new initiatives are
introduced.
5 Data are collected to monitor the success of the travel and logistics plan using the following indicators as a minimum
(refer to CN4):
5.a Travel times for the surrounding community
5.b The ease of travel and accessibility to, from and around the asset
5.c The comfort of travel, e.g. overcrowding on public transport or incidents related to road surface quality
5.d The proportion of workforce (and materials where relevant) travelling by sustainable modes of transport.
One credit - Monitoring the transport of construction materials and waste

6 Monitor and record data on transport activities resulting from the movement of the majority of construction materials
to site and construction waste from site. As a minimum this must cover:
6.a Transport of construction materials from the factory gate to the construction site (refer to Relevant definitions),
including any intermediate storage and distribution. Scope of this monitoring must cover the following as a
minimum:
6.a.i Materials used for key elements of the infrastructure asset (refer to Mat 01 Environmental life cycle
impacts: Table 36)
6.a.ii Materials used for earthworks.
6.b Transport of construction waste from the construction gate to waste disposal processing or recovery centre
gate. Scope of this monitoring must cover the construction waste groups outlined in the project's Resource
Management Plan (RMP).
7 Using the collated data, report separately for materials and waste, the total transport-related carbon dioxide emissions
(kgCO2eq) via the BREEAM Infrastructure Online tool (refer to the Methodology section for how this must be calculated).
Up to two credits - Success of the construction stage travel and logistics plan
One credit
9 The data collected (refer to CN4) demonstrate that the development has not had a negative impact on:
9.a Travel times for the surrounding community
9.b The ease of travel and accessibility to, from and around the asset.
Two credits
10 Criteria 8 9 are achieved
11 The data collected (refer to CN4) demonstrate that the development has:
11.a Not had a negative impact on the comfort of travel
11.b Increased the proportion of 'person trips' for sustainable modes of transport.
One credit - Travel and logistics plan for the operational stage
12 Criteria 3 and 4 are carried out with respect to the operational stage of the development
13 Transport modelling to, from and around the operational asset predicts that there are no adverse effects on the
indicators outlined in criterion 5
14 Where the asset provides a non-transport-related service, e.g. water treatment, flood defence, the asset requires no
new transport infrastructure.
15 Recommendations for monitoring the impact of transport to, from and around the asset once operational (refer to
CN5) are provided in the handover documentation. The handover documentation indicates the predicted movements
and provides guidance on how to measure existing traffic movements and compare these with the predictions.

None.
Compliance notes
CN1 Simple projects For simple projects, a member of the project team can undertake the role of the
'suitably qualified professional' where the transport impact is deemed negligible by the
local authority. In these cases compliance with criteria 1 , 3 and CN2 would not require a
'suitably qualified professional'.
CN2 Transport liaison The transport liaison group can consist of one single group or multiple smaller groups.
group see criterion The groups must be organised and managed by a suitably qualified professional
1 responsible for developing and implementing the travel and logistics plan.
The overall number of people forming the transport liaison group will be
proportionate to the scale of the project and the make-up should be representative of
the affected community. Advice must be sought from relevant stakeholders (refer to
The transport liaison group and the individuals within it may:
1. Form part of the wider stakeholder consultation
2. Include different individuals at the strategic and project detail stages.
CN3 Setting and The suitably qualified professional responsible for the travel and logistics plan engages
monitoring travel with the relevant local authorities and organisations on appropriate targets and
targets for the monitoring arrangements to ensure that:
construction stage
Realistic targets are set
Periodic surveys are used to monitor the effectiveness of the travel and
logistics plan
Targets are set so that it is possible to verify the success of the travel and
logistics plan.
CN4 Data to monitor the Various indicators can be used to assess the success of the travel and logistics plan
success of the travel including:
and logistics plan
Number of vehicle movements during peak and off peak times
Length of journey times
Duration and frequency of delays and blockages
Incidents of people losing their way because of road closures or changes to
road layout
Utilisation of public transport
Proportion of travel undertaken using sustainable transport modes.
The data may come from relevant third parties, including local transport operators or
transport authorities, and may be collected at discrete points throughout the project.
To achieve compliance, the assessor must consider the data robust, complete and
representative of the project being assessed.
CN5 Monitoring Monitoring recommendations will only be necessary where travel patterns after the
recommendations construction of the asset are changed because of the new asset.
for in-use stage
CN6 Multiple site A project may be split into a series of smaller subprojects which may include lengths of
projects a linear project or multiple sites. A multiple site project is defined to be two or more
sites. These larger projects will require:
Site specific travel and logistics plans

A travel and logistics plan coordinator to oversee the implementation of the
project, for smaller multiple site projects this can be a suitably qualified
professional already working on one of the sites.
CN7 Small negative Criteria 9 and 11.a require the development has not had a negative impact on:
impacts on travel 1. Travel times for the surrounding community
during the 2. The ease of travel and accessibility to, from and around the asset
construction stage 3. Comfort of travel.
Some projects may have successfully mitigated construction stage impacts on local
travel but still result in small adverse effects on these transport indicators, e.g. an extra
60 seconds walking around a bollard. The credits can still be awarded where small
negative impacts are recorded if the assessor deems the adverse effects to travel (to,
from and around the asset during construction) to be negligible and non-disruptive.
In these instances the credits can only be awarded if all of the following are also
achieved:
1. The transport impact assessment and travel plan credits have been achieved at
the project detail stage
2. The most current travel and logistics plan has been consulted on and approved by
the local authority and any other statutory bodies that are impacted by the works,
e.g. highways authorities.
3. The commitments and proposals outlined in the most current travel and logistics
plan have been fully implemented.
Methodology
Calculating total transport-related carbon dioxide emissions (kgCO2e)
National best practice (Appendix B - The Approved Standards and Weightings List (ASWL)) fuel and vehicle-distance
conversion factors should be used to calculate the carbon dioxide emissions from modes of transport for which carbon
conversion factors are available. For other modes of transport (freight, rail, sea tanker, cargo ship, planes) refer to carbon
factors for freighting goods.
The first of the methodologies below that is practical to implement must be followed for each vehicle type:
1. If data are available on the amount of fuel consumed, then this should be multiplied by the fuel emission factor to
calculate the emissions produced.
2. If data are available on the cost of the fuel consumed, then this should be divided by the price (specific suppliers price
where possible, historic average otherwise) to give the amount of fuel consumed, which can then be used to calculate
the emissions produced (via method 1).
3. If data are available on the distance travelled, vehicle loading and fuel efficiency of the vehicle at that loading, then the
distance should be divided by the efficiency to give an estimate of the amount of fuel consumed, which can then be used
to calculate the emissions produced (via method 1).
4. If data are available on the distance travelled and fuel efficiency of the vehicle at average loading, then the distance
should be divided by the efficiency to give an estimate of the amount of fuel consumed, which can then be used to
calculate the emissions produced (via method 1).
5. If data are available on the distance travelled and vehicle loading, then the distance should be multiplied by the distance
emission factor appropriate for the vehicle type and loading to calculate an estimate of the emissions produced.
6. If data are available only on the distance travelled, then the distance should be multiplied by the distance emission factor
appropriate for the vehicle type at average loading to calculate an estimate of the emissions produced.
Evidence
1 2 Strategic Travel and logistics plan N/A N/A
3 11 N/A Detailed travel and logistics plan As interim design stage

requirements and collected data
7 N/A Refer to generic evidence Calculations for total transport-

requirement related carbon dioxide emissions
Factory gate
For the purposes of this issue, the factory gate is defined as being the product manufacturer gate (i.e. where
manufacture and pre-assembly finishes and the product or material is in its final form).
Examples might include:
1. Quarry gate for aggregate and sand
2. Concrete plant for concrete
3. Saw mill and timber processing plant for timber
4. Dredging or excavation location for soils.
For the purpose of this issue relevant stakeholders include:
Local authorities
Highways authorities
Regional transport authorities
Emergency services
charities and associations).
Suitably qualified professional

An individual achieving all the following items can be considered to be 'suitably qualified' for the purposes of a
BREEAM assessment:
1. Is a practising transport and logistics professional with two years relevant experience within the last five years
2. Demonstrate competence in performing the role of a transport and logistics professional, as detailed below.
The role of the suitably qualified professional is to:
1. Develop, manage and monitor the travel and logistic plans
2. Promote and encourage the use of sustainable transport through the plan
3. Establish and manage a transport liaison group with relevant stakeholders
4. Coordinate travel surveys to monitor the progress of the travel plan
5. Act as a point of information and contact with transport operators, businesses and transport authorities to
coordinate plans and initiatives
6. Liaise with parties within and outside the organisation.
These tasks will be scalable depending on the size of the project.
Sustainable transport modes

Transport modes with low environmental impact. For people, examples include travel by foot, bike or public
transport. For materials, examples could include movements by boat or rail.
Travel and logistics plan

A travel and logistics plan comprises site specific initiatives that aim to improve the movement of people and
materials to and from a development. It incorporates mitigation measures outlined in the transport impact
assessment.
Other information
None.
Tra 03 Transport connectivity Transport

1 1 None
Aim
To enhance the connectivity of transport networks for community benefit.

One credit - Connectivity assessment

1 A connectivity assessment is developed before finalising the concept stage. The assessment establishes opportunities
for enhancing connectivity in and around the asset and includes:
1.a A study of existing connectivity within the impacted community (refer to Relevant definitions)
1.b Opportunities to enhance connectivity during construction and operation of the asset.
2 The project team review opportunities with relevant stakeholders (refer to Relevant definitions) to enhance and protect
the existing transport networks, where applicable.
3.a The connectivity assessment
3.b The connectivity impacts resulting from the project in construction and operation
3.c Proposals for enhancing connectivity
3.d Proposals for minimising and mitigating negative impacts on existing connections.
Note: Future needs of the community in terms of connectivity are not addressed in this issue. These are considered within the
scope of the issue Res 03 Designing for future needs.

One credit - Enhanced connectivity

4 The opportunities for enhanced connectivity identified within the strategic stage assessment are reviewed and updated
to account for the consultation feedback and input from relevant stakeholders.
5 The project demonstrates that feedback has influenced the design (and construction) of the final asset.
6 Measures are implemented, based on the findings of the updated connectivity assessment that enhance transport links
within the community impacted by the construction and operation of the asset.
7 At least two measures are implemented that result in an aspect of enhanced connectivity as shown in Table 23 to award
the credit (refer to CN1).

Table 23: Aspects of enhanced transport connectivity
Ref Aspect of enhanced transport connectivity
A Reduced travel times within the community
B Greater choice of travel mode, a higher frequency of service, or both
C Greater choice of routes, e.g. new access roads, public footpaths, bridleways, cycle paths, etc.
D Improving existing access ways, e.g. resurfacing, widening, delineating routes to improve accessibility and
connectivity
E Reduced severance within the community (either existing or because of the asset)
Compliance notes
CN1 Implementing The criteria requires that a minimum of two connectivity measures are implemented in
measures as line with the recommendations in the connectivity assessment. This is relevant to simple
appropriate to the projects.
scale of the project Where the impact of the project on the community is large, for example in densely
populated areas or high profile projects, then the number of measures implemented
should be agreed with the local authority.
CN2 Scope of measures For transport projects, such as road and rail, the transport connectivity items A-E might
for transport be achieved because of the function of the asset.
projects To award the credit for this issue, measures must also be implemented that improve
connectivity beyond the intended function of the asset. For example, a road project may
look at improving connectivity with other road networks, junctions, etc. A rail project
may look at improving connectivity for onward travel from the asset.
CN3 Measure identified Where a measure is identified that enhances transport connectivity for the assessed
within the project is not listed in Table 23, BRE Global should be contacted for further guidance.
connectivity
assessment not
listed within Table
23
Methodology
None.
Tra 03 Transport connectivity Transport
Evidence
1 4 Connectivity assessment Detailed or updated connectivity As interim design stage

assessment
Connectivity
The directness of links and density of connections in a transport network.
Connectivity study
The study on existing transport connectivity and links within the impacted community should establish as a minimum:
1. Good transport links and services
2. Poor transport links and services
3. Current and future projects affecting transport links and services in areas impacted by the project.
Key representatives of the project team

See ID 02 Project team collaboration .
For the purpose of this issue relevant stakeholders include:
Owner or operator of the asset
Local authorities
Local highway authorities
Local, regional or national transport authorities
charities and associations
Suitably qualified transport professionals.
Transport connectivity
Transport connectivity refers to the directness of links and the density of connections in a transport network. A highly
permeable network has many short links, numerous intersections, and minimal dead-ends. As connectivity increases,
travel distances decrease and route options increase, allowing more direct travel between destinations, creating a
more accessible and resilient transportation system.16
Other information
None.
Land use & ecology BREEAM New Construction: Infrastructure (International pilot)
Land use and ecology
Category overview
Refer to the country reference sheet in the LUE 04 Ecological impact assessment and action plan
ASWL LUE 05 Protection of biodiversity
Summary
This section encourages efficient use of low value land, increasing land value where possible, sustainable remediation for
contaminated land and assessment, protection and enhancement of existing biodiversity and soil resources.

Issue ID Credits
LUE 01 Land use and value Strategy - 1

Project detail - 3
Use of low value land

Enhancing existing land value
Efficient land use
LUE 02 Soil and vegetation management Strategy - 1

Project detail - 2
Assessing and planning soil resource management

Managing soil resources and vegetation clearance during construction
LUE 03 Remediation of land contamination Strategy - 0

Project detail - 2
All appropriate site investigations have taken place to identify and assess possible contamination
Promoting the implementation of sustainable land remediation techniques as verified by a land contamination
specialist
LUE 04 Ecological impact assessment and action plan Strategy -1

Project detail - 1
Ecological impact assessment carried out by a suitably qualified ecologist (SQE)

Provision of an ecology strategy
Biodiversity Action Plan
Land use & ecology
Issue ID Credits
LUE 05 Protection of biodiversity Strategy - 0

Project detail - 3
Measures to encourage good management of existing ecological features (as deemed appropriate by the SQE),
rewarded in a hierarchy as follows:
Protection
Mitigation
Compensation
LUE 06 Enhancement of biodiversity Strategy - 0

Project detail - 4
Enhancements as deemed appropriate by the SQE including:
Percentage of ecologist recommendations implemented

Change in ecological value of the site before and after construction
LUE 07 Land use changes Strategy - 1

Project detail - 2
Appointing a carbon specialist to advise on the carbon impacts of land use changes over the life of the asset and
provide recommendations to create, enhance and preserve existing carbon sinks
Determining the change in carbon stock (or carbon equivalent emissions or savings) over the life of the asset
resulting from land use changes

1 3 None
Aim
To encourage a robust assessment of land constraints, prioritisation of low value land, efficient use of land and enhancements
in land value on and around the project site.

One credit - Assessment of land value

1 A constraints mapping exercise is undertaken to identify either potential routes, sites or both for the project (refer to
CN1). The mapping includes:
1.a Natural environment, ecological, soil function and agricultural land quality constraints
1.b Surface water constraints
1.c Land ownership, tenure and management constraints
1.d Land use constraints (e.g. contaminated land, land stability)
1.e Cultural heritage constraints
1.f Landscape and amenity constraints
1.g Roads and transport constraints.
2 The following are included as part of the 'Further consultation' process detailed in ST 02 Consultation and engagement,
(note for this issue the local community stakeholders are to include owners, occupiers and managers of land being
considered):
2.a The value (or perceived value) of impacted local land areas (refer to Relevant definitions)
2.b Proposals for enhancing the local land use (refer to CN2)
2.c Proposals for minimising and mitigating impacts on areas perceived by the community and environmental
specialists to have value.
3 The constraints mapping exercise is updated to account for the stakeholder feedback and key representatives of the
project team identify opportunities to:
3.a Minimise use of and impact on valuable land types
3.b Maximise efficiency of project footprint
3.c Enhance land use, value and condition (refer to CN2)
3.d Input into the stakeholder consultation process with respect to land use issue.
4 The project delivery team or contractor's brief includes the following requirements:
4.a To evaluate further opportunities to maximise land efficiency or minimise use of valuable land types or both
4.b To evaluate further opportunities to enhance land use, value and condition.

LUE 01 Land use and value Land use & ecology
Use of low value land (one credit)

Local land value (one credit)
Efficient use of temporary land (one credit)
One credit - Use of low value land

5 The constraints mapping exercise and opportunities identified within the strategic stage assessment are reviewed and
updated as the design develops with input from key representatives of the project team.
6 For non-linear projects at least 75% of the proposed development's footprint (refer to CN3) is:
6.a On an area of land which has previously been occupied by industrial, commercial or domestic buildings or fixed
surface infrastructure
6.b Is deemed to be of low ecological value by a suitably qualified ecologist (SQE) (refer to CN8, CN9 and LUE 04
Ecological impact assessment and action plan for a definition of a SQE).
7 For linear projects:
7.a At least 75% of the proposed development's footprint is on land identified as being with 'no constraints' or 'low
constraints' including permanent and temporary works
7.b The land identified in criterion 7.a is also deemed to be on land of low ecological value, as defined by a SQE (refer
to CN8, CN9 and LUE 04 Ecological impact assessment and action plan for a definition of a SQE)
7.c The remainder of the proposed development's footprint is on land identified as being with 'moderate
constraints'.
One credit - Local land value

8 The following are enhanced because of the project (refer to CN2, CN4 and CN5):
8.a Land use
8.b Land value and condition
8.c Land use multi-functionality (refer to Relevant definitions).
9 Land use management and maintenance requirements are identified and included within a long term land management
plan for the operational stage of the project. The plan includes all aspects of land management required to maintain:
9.a The operation of the asset
9.b Any mitigation measures or benefits implemented because of the project and its associated works.
10 The plan is given to the owner/operator at handover with training on the contents of the plan and any specialist
requirements (refer to CN6).
One credit - Efficient use of temporary land

11 The land use involved in the temporary works is evaluated by the contractor to see where efficiencies can be made,
including consideration of:
11.a Choice of land
11.b Phasing of work
11.c Off-site construction where relevant (refer to Mat 04 Reuse and recycling)
11.d 'Just in time' deliveries
11.e Clearly defined and well maintained material storage areas
11.f Any land surveys, assessments and expert recommendations.
12 Efficiencies are demonstrated at the construction stage (refer to CN7).
13 Any negative impacts on the land because of the temporary works are remediated and the land is left in a condition that
is the same or better than the condition pre-development.

None.
Compliance notes
CN1 Constraints This mapping is carried out to determine areas of land on and around the proposed
mapping site or route that fall into one of the following categories:
Areas with high constraints (e.g. legally protected areas, nature reserves,
residential areas, buffer zones to protected areas): these areas will require
additional approvals, surveys and stakeholder consultation, conditions may be
imposed
Areas with moderate constraints (e.g. areas with some flora and fauna,
amenity or cultural value): these areas are likely to require additional surveys,
stakeholder consultation and mitigation measures such as species and habitat
relocation
Areas with low constraints (e.g. areas that can be protected through mitigation
measures and management plans such as areas adjacent to water courses or
green corridors): these areas may require additional surveys, approvals and
stakeholder engagement
Areas with no constraints (e.g. previously developed land with no ecological
value).
The categories will need to be defined by the project team, and will be influenced by the
economic, social and environmental value of the land. For all projects this should involve
existing datasets and also datasets collected through site investigation. For a large
number of projects, using geospatial mapping software would be helpful for this
process.
CN2 Enhancing local land This refers to positive measures to increase the land or amenity value of the site. It could
use include:
Remediating the land so it can be used by the community, e.g. for recreation
purposes
Providing amenities for the local community, e.g. benches, pathways, recreation
areas, community orchards, safe walkways, allotment spaces, green
infrastructure, etc.
Regenerating an existing community area
Enhancing the quality of agricultural land present in the area, including presence
of best and most versatile land.
CN3 The development This includes all land areas affected by the works and so includes both temporary and
footprint permanent land uses.
CN4 Enhanced land use, This requirement must take into account the improvements identified as a priority for
condition and the community through the stakeholder consultation process (refer to ST 02
amenities Consultation and engagement). Where priorities are not identified through this
process, an informal consultation must be carried out with local groups and
communities who will be impacted by the changes, and these groups must consider
the proposed improvements to be positive.
LUE 01 Land use and value Land use & ecology
CN5 Improved land use The project is deemed to be improving the land use, value, condition or functionality of
the project's land footprint and its environs where it provides an enhanced area for
people, wildlife and community activity.
CN6 Training on land use The extent of this training will depend on the extent of the land management and
management maintenance required. The training is given to those responsible for managing and
maintaining the land (this may be a number of individuals, particularly for a large
project). The training can be one to one or in a group, but the project team must
demonstrate that the relevant information has been transferred to a member or
members of the owner/operator team responsible for the land management and
maintenance. It includes the following where relevant:
Management procedures for either the various land types or amenities

provided (short and long term), e.g. watering requirements, requirements for
green infrastructure, footpath (or other amenity) maintenance
Potential risks and impacts if land is not managed or maintained in line with the
recommendations
Potential risks and impacts on the land because of the asset's operation
Any seasonal or timing constraints.
CN7 Efficiencies in It may not be possible to demonstrate efficiencies in all areas of criterion 11 due to
temporary land use regulatory or other constraints. The contractor must demonstrate that each of the
areas has been considered and measures are in place or decisions have been taken to
reduce the size and impact on temporary land use.
CN8 Land of low When defining land as being of 'low ecological value,' the SQE must base their findings
ecological value on data collected from a site visit conducted at appropriate times of the year, when
different plant and animal species are evident. The content of the Ecology Report is to
be representative of the existing sites ecology prior to the commencement of initial site
preparation works (i.e. before build and commission). Where the ecologist has not
visited the site at the appropriate times the credit cannot be awarded (except in the
circumstances indicated in CN9).
CN9 Site clearance prior For sites cleared prior to purchase of the site and less than five years before
to purchase of site assessment, a SQE should estimate the sites ecological value immediately prior to
clearance using available desktop information (including aerial photography) and the
landscape type or area surrounding the site. Where it is not possible for the SQE to
determine that the site was of low ecological value prior to the site clearance then the
credits must be withheld, i.e. where there is no evidence and therefore no justification
for awarding the credits.
For sites cleared more than five years ago, the ecological value of the site is to be based
on the current situation on the basis that within five years, ecological features would
have started to re-establish themselves and therefore act as an indicator of the sites
ecological value.
Methodology
None.
Evidence
1 3 Constraints mapping exercise N/A N/A
Constraints mapping
A broadscale desk top assessment tool to guide the planning of site and route selection within the project area.

For issues relating to this issue these would include the project delivery team, owner/operator and also experts in land
use, ecology, amenity, social provision, landscape, heritage and contamination as appropriate.
Land use multi-functionality

This refers to using the land for a number of purposes, e.g. providing benches and picnic areas on a public footpath
or providing a green infrastructure corridor as part of an amenity space.
Previously developed land

For the purposes of this issue BREEAM defines previously developed land as an area which is, or once was, occupied
by a permanent structure, including any associated fixed surface infrastructure. The definition excludes:
1. Land that is or has been occupied by agricultural or forestry buildings
2. Land that has been developed for minerals extraction or waste disposal by landfill purposes where provision for
restoration has been made through development control procedures
3. Land in built-up areas such as parks, recreation grounds and allotments which, although they may feature paths,
pavilions and other buildings, have not been previously occupied
4. Land that was previously occupied but where the remains of the permanent structure or fixed surface structure
have blended into the landscape in the process of time (to the extent that it can reasonably be considered as part
of the natural surroundings).
Value or perceived value

Land with amenity or habitat value as determined through a representative stakeholder consultation (including
community and relevant interest groups) and desk based research.
Other information
None.
LUE 02 Soil and vegetation management Land use & ecology
LUE 02 Soil and vegetation management

1 2 None
Aim
To encourage best practice in soil and vegetation management during construction.

The following are required to demonstrate compliance:
One credit - Soil strategy and resource plan

1 A soil survey and assessment of soils is undertaken to identify the quality of soils present within the site boundary.
2 A soil strategy or resource plan is developed to identify opportunities for:
2.a Reusing permanently displaced soils
2.b Storing and protecting temporarily disturbed and displaced soils, including peat where present
2.c Restoring land, e.g. for agriculture, forestry, landscaping and biodiversity
2.d Preserving and enhancing the quality of agricultural land present in the area to be developed in line with national
best practice guidance (refer to Appendix B - The Approved Standards and Weightings List (ASWL))
2.e Enhancing soil resources and functions, where present.

Up to two credits - Construction stage land management
One credit - Soil resource management

3 The following are carried out in line with national best practice guidance or legislation (Appendix B - The Approved
Standards and Weightings List (ASWL)):
3.a A soil resource survey is carried out on site by a suitably qualified soil scientist or practitioner (refer to Relevant
definitions) before any earthworks operations.
3.b The results of the soil resource survey are incorporated into either the Resource Management Plan (RMP),
Material Management Plan or both (refer to Mat 04 Reuse and recycling and Wst 01 Construction waste
management for more information on these documents)
3.c A Soil Resource Plan is developed, taking into account the results of the soil resource survey, and implemented at
the construction stage. The plan includes the following as a minimum:
3.c.i The areas and type of topsoil and subsoil to be stripped
3.c.ii Haul routes
3.c.iii The methods to be used for soil handling
3.c.iv The location, types and management of each soil stockpile
3.c.v Soil placement and reinstatement.
4 Recommendations from a suitably qualified soil scientist or practitioner for maintaining healthy top soil and peat on the
site are included in a land management plan for both long and short term stages. These recommendations are
discussed and agreed with any ecologists responsible for protecting and enhancing biodiversity on site.
5 A suitably qualified soil scientist or practitioner verifies that the work has been carried out in compliance with national
best practice guidance or legislation (refer to Appendix B - The Approved Standards and Weightings List (ASWL)).
One credit - Vegetation management

6 The following are included within the vegetation clearance proposals of a land management plan:
6.a The areas of vegetation or habitats that require clearing (minimum and maximum)
6.b The seasonal timing of vegetation clearance
6.c Phasing of vegetation clearance
6.d Buffer zones that need to be established
6.e The management of invasive floral species including the control of dust and weeds
6.f Any international regulations relating to vegetation clearance that will affect site work
6.g Opportunities for composting cleared vegetation excluding invasive species as appropriate
6.h Application of the 'wood use hierarchy' (only relevant where woody vegetation is being cleared from site - see
Other information)
6.i Pollution control (refer to the Pollution section)
6.j General wildlife disturbance prevention (refer to LUE 05 Protection of biodiversity)
6.k Prevention of formation of wildlife hazards (refer to LUE 05 Protection of biodiversity)
6.l Where vegetation is disposed of off site it is diverted from landfill and sent to a composting or bioenergy facility
where the transport distance is not significantly further than the distance to alternative disposal facilities.
7 The vegetation clearance proposals in the land management plan have been implemented. Changes to the proposals
for vegetation clearance are agreed with key representatives of the project delivery team.

None.
Compliance notes
None
Methodology
None.
LUE 02 Soil and vegetation management Land use & ecology
Evidence
1 3 N/A Soil resource survey and plan Refer to generic evidence

requirements above
6 7 N/A Land management plan Refer to generic evidence

requirements above

For this issue key representatives of the project delivery team include the client, designer, contractor and specialists
such as ecologists, soil specialists and landscape architects.
Peer review
Suitably qualified soil scientist or practitioner

An individual achieving all the following items can be considered to be 'suitably qualified' for the purpose of a BREEAM
assessment:
1. Holds a degree, PhD or equivalent qualification in soils and earth sciences
demonstrate a practical understanding of factors affecting sustainable use of soils in relation to construction and
the built environment; including, acting in an advisory capacity to provide recommendations for short and long
term land management planning
3. Is covered by a professional code of conduct and subject to peer review.
Other information
The wood use hierarchy

Where woody vegetation is being cleared on site the following hierarchy (similar to the waste hierarchy) must be taken into
consideration before sending wood materials to landfill:
1. The use of timber on site to create deadwood habitats (subject to the advice of a suitably qualified ecologist)
2. The production of solid wood for local use
3. The production of solid wood for national use
4. The production of reconstituted wood product for boards
5. Avoiding landfill by sending woody biomass cleared from site to a bioenergy facility
6. Landfill.

0 2 None
Aim
To encourage the appropriate use of land affected by contamination and to promote sustainable land and ground water
remediation.

None.

Land contamination site investigation and risk assessment (prerequisite)

Verification of site investigation and risk assessment (one credit)
Sustainable remediation (one credit)
Prerequisite - Land contamination site investigation and risk assessment

1 An appropriate site investigation and risk assessment has been undertaken which shows that land within the site is 'land
affected by contamination' (refer to CN1).
One credit - Verification of site investigation and risk assessment

3 A land contamination specialist (see Relevant definitions) verifies the site investigation and risk assessment (refer to CN1
and CN2).
One credit - Sustainable remediation

5 A land contamination specialist verifies that the remediation techniques used in the project are the most sustainable
solutions based on an appropriate assessment of the sustainability of potential remediation options for the project
(refer to CN3).

None.
LUE 03 Remediation of land contamination Land use & ecology
Compliance notes
CN1 Appropriate site Land contamination, site investigations and risk assessments must be carried out in
investigation and accordance with established procedures and national best practice guidance (refer to
risk assessment Appendix B - The Approved Standards and Weightings List (ASWL)). It is the
responsibility of the land contamination specialist to ensure that work is performed in
accordance with all relevant procedures and best practice guidance.
The specialist is not required to undertake these investigations and assessments but is
required to verify that they have been undertaken appropriately.
CN2 Timing of The investigation must be completed prior to work commencing on site for these
investigation credits to be awarded. The verification of the report can take place at any time before
certification.
However the project team should be mindful that the verifier may request to see the
site before any ground works take place. There is a risk that by leaving this verification to
later in the process, the credit becomes unavailable.
CN3 Sustainable The land contamination specialist needs to demonstrate to the assessor that an
remediation appropriate assessment has been carried out and that the most sustainable
assessment remediation solutions have been selected. The specialist is not required to carry out the
assessment themselves, but must verify that it has been carried out appropriately.
BREEAM does not prescriptively define the process for undertaking sustainable
remediation assessments, but expects such assessments to be carried out according
to current industry national best practice (refer to Appendix B and the Methodology
section).
Note: the sustainable remediation assessment could form part of a wider sustainability
assessment covering other project issues.
CN4 Design life of Where a remediation solution does not remove contamination from the site (e.g. uses a
remediation physical containment method such as a cover layer or barrier system), appropriate
solutions consideration must be paid to the design life of the remediation solution to ensure its
durability and long term effectiveness (e.g. resilience to flooding, drought, accidental
damage, possible future additional development or changes in land use such as road
widening, etc.).
CN5 Post-construction Where a remediation solution requires ongoing monitoring and maintenance post
monitoring and construction, a comprehensive monitoring and maintenance programme that defines
maintenance of future responsibilities for this work must be in place before handover of the project.
remediation
CN6 Asbestos Where the only remediation required is the removal of asbestos within the fabric of
existing buildings or structures, the site cannot be classified as 'land affected by
contamination'. However, where asbestos is found to be present in the ground this will
be classed as contamination for the purposes of assessing this issue.
Methodology
Sustainable remediation assessment
The following key principles should be considered in the design, implementation and reporting of sustainable remediation
schemes:
Protection of human health and the wider environment

Safe working practices
Consistent, clear and reproducible evidence based decision-making
Record keeping and transparent reporting
Good governance and stakeholder involvement
Sound science.
The process of sustainable remediation requires an assessment of the environmental, social and economic aspects
associated with remediation, to demonstrate that net benefit exists, i.e. the benefits delivered by remediation exceed the
costs of undertaking remediation. A number of activities are required in this process, including:
Agreeing or setting objectives for the sustainability assessment

Identifying stakeholders for consultation and engagement
Specifying boundary conditions for the assessment (e.g. system, life cycle, spatial, temporal)
Specifying the scope of the assessment including selection of appropriate environmental, social and economic
indicators
Deciding the methodology to be used for the assessment (e.g. qualitative, semi-quantitative, quantitative)
Deciding how to deal with uncertainty (e.g. sensitivity analysis)
Clear recording of decisions and of the assumptions used to make decisions.
Sustainability indicators that could be used in an assessment include, but are not limited to, the following:
Environmental indicators
Air (e.g. emissions affecting climate change and air quality)
Soil and ground conditions (e.g. changes in physical, chemical, biological soil condition that affects the
ecosystem function goods or services provided by soils)
Groundwater and surface water (e.g. changes in the release of contaminants (including nutrients), dissolved
organic carbon or silt and particulates; impacts of water abstraction; flooding issues)
Ecology (i.e. impacts on ecology and biodiversity)
Resources and waste (e.g. impacts of primary resource use, waste generation, energy and water use).
Social indicators
Human health and safety (e.g. safe working practices, risk management)
Ethics and equality (e.g. regulatory compliance; community engagement; equality impact assessment)
Neighbourhood and locality (e.g. effects from dust, light, noise, odour and vibrations during works and
associated with traffic)
Communities and community involvement (e.g. effective communication with local community; stakeholder
engagement in decision-making)
Uncertainty and evidence (e.g. quality of investigations, assessments and plans; optimised data collection).
Economic indicators
Direct economic costs and benefits (e.g. direct financial costs and benefits of remediation for organisation;
consequences of capital and operation costs, and sensitivity to alteration)
Indirect economic costs and benefits (e.g. long term or indirect costs and benefits including avoiding
financing debt, prosecution or fines through regulatory compliance, changes in site, local land or property
values)
Employment and employment capital (e.g. job creation; skills and training; local employment)
Induced economic costs and benefits (e.g. opportunities for inward investment; ability to affect other
projects in the area by client to enhance economic value)
Project lifespan and flexibility (e.g. climate change mitigation or adaptation, long term institutional control).
LUE 03 Remediation of land contamination Land use & ecology
Evidence
1 &3 Site investigation and risk N/A N/A

assessment
Verification from the land
contamination specialist
5 N/A Assessment report on the Verification report for the

sustainability of potential remediation works and, if
remediation options applicable, the long term
Remediation strategy and monitoring and maintenance
implementation plan for the programme
project
Verification from the land
contamination specialist
Construction zone
For this BREEAM issue, the construction zone is defined as any land on the site which is being developed (and
therefore disturbed) for the asset, buildings, hardstanding, soft landscape, site access, plus a 3m wide zone
measured outward from the boundary. It also includes any areas used for temporary site storage and buildings. If it is
not known exactly where the asset, buildings, hardstanding, site access and temporary storage will be located it must
be assumed that the construction zone is the entire site.
Land affected by contamination

Land that could not be legally or safely developed or built on to the proposed end use without the remediation of
contamination. Contamination is defined as any substance or agent in, or on the ground within the construction zone,
which presents an unacceptable risk to human health, property or the environment. For the purposes of BREEAM,
substances or agents that could present unacceptable contamination risks are defined as those that act as a barrier
to the development of land, which could include certain plant species such as, but not limited to, Japanese knotweed
and Giant hog weed.
Land contamination specialist

A senior professional who has a degree in a relevant subject (e.g. civil engineering, geology, earth sciences, chemistry,
environmental science), is a chartered member of an appropriate professional body with at least ten years'
experience of working in the land contamination industry, and therefore a broad awareness, knowledge and
understanding of land contamination and remediation issues.
Remediation
Any activity undertaken to prevent, minimise, remedy or mitigate the risk caused by land affected by contamination to
human health, property or the environment.
Sustainable remediation
For the purposes of this issue BREEAM defines sustainable remediation as "the practice of demonstrating, in terms of
environmental, economic and social indicators, that the benefit of undertaking remediation is greater than its impact
and that the optimum remediation solution is selected through the use of a balanced decision-making process".
Other information
Sustainable Remediation Forum (SuRF) International

Sustainable remediation has become an area of development globally with public and private sector organisations becoming
involved in a number of projects and networks intended to improve remediation practice and make it more sustainable, with
initiatives in Europe, North and South America, Australia, New Zealand and Asia.
The chairs of the international Sustainable Remediation Forums (SuRF) and associated partners meet on a quarterly basis with
the aim to share progress and learning amongst the different networks and develop opportunities for collaboration. For
more information on each visit www.claire.co.uk/surfinternational
LUE 04 Ecological impact assessment and action plan Land use & ecology
LUE 04 Ecological impact assessment and action plan

available
1 1 One credit - criteria 7 11 (Site specific biodiversity action

plan) - Very good
Aim
To assess and mitigate the impact of the development on existing habitats, and to promote measures that enhance
biodiversity on the site and in the locality.

One credit - Ecological impact assessment

1 A Suitably Qualified Ecologist (SQE) is appointed at or before the briefing stage. The SQE undertakes an Ecological Impact
Assessment (EcIA) before the end of the concept design stage (refer to CN1, CN2 and CN6) to identify:
1.a Valued ecological features (including those off site that may be affected by the development)
1.b The location of green infrastructure
1.c The extent of green infrastructure
1.d The connectivity of habitats
1.e Potential impacts from the development.
2 The Ecological Impact Assessment takes account of any local knowledge of ecological issues through a process of
consultation (this could use information gathered from the process outlined in ST 02 Consultation and engagement).
3 An ecology strategy, covering the site preparation, construction and operation phases, has been drawn up by a SQE to
avoid damage to any valued ecological features on or near the site. The strategy is based on the findings of the EcIA
(refer to CN3 and CN4).
4 Where it is unavoidable that damage to a valued ecological feature will occur, either a mitigation plan, compensation plan
or both has been agreed by the appropriate statutory body and the SQE to ensure there is no net loss of any of the
valued ecological features (refer to CN5).
5 The SQE confirms that the plans conform to the ecology strategy.
6 Using information from the EcIA and any existing biodiversity action plan (BAP) information, a site specific biodiversity
action plan (BAP) is developed or updated by the SQE to cover both construction and in-use phases of the project (refer
to CN7).

One credit - Site specific biodiversity action plan
7 Prior to build and commission the site specific biodiversity action plan (BAP), detailed within the strategic assessment
criteria, is updated (or developed) by the SQE to cover both construction and in-use phases of the project (refer to CN7).
8 A Biodiversity Champion (refer to Relevant definitions) is nominated for the construction phase with the authority to
influence site activities and ensure that impacts on-site biodiversity are managed in line with the recommendations of a
SQE.
9 The site workforce are trained on how to protect site ecology during the project. Training is based on the
recommendations for protection of ecological features highlighted by the SQE.
10 The contractor is responsible for:
10.a Recording actions taken to protect biodiversity and monitoring their effectiveness throughout key stages of the
construction process
10.b Committing to make such records available where publicly requested.
11 The long term BAP is provided to the owner/operator of the asset at handover with appropriate training and
information to ensure the BAP can be implemented.

None.
Compliance notes
CN1 Ecological Impact An Ecological Impact Assessment may form part of an environmental impact
Assessment (EcIA) assessment in order to comply with planning applications for large-scale
developments within your country of assessment (refer to Appendix B - The Approved
Standards and Weightings List (ASWL)). The following should be covered by the
assessment process:
Scoping
Likely zone of influence
Ecological features likely to be affected
Likely biophysical changes and impacts
Valued ecological resources
Refinement measures to improve the project
Consequences for decision-making
Provision for monitoring outcomes.
CN2 Suitably Qualified An individual achieving all of the following items can be considered 'suitably qualified'
Ecologist (SQE) for the purpose of compliance:
Holds a nationally recognised degree or equivalent qualification in ecology or a

related subject
Is a practising ecologist with a minimum of three years relevant experience
(within the last five years). Such experience must clearly demonstrate a practical
understanding of factors affecting ecology in relation to construction and the
built environment; including acting in an advisory capacity to provide
recommendations for ecological protection, enhancement and mitigation
measures. Examples of relevant experience are: ecological impact assessments;
habitat restoration projects and practical ecology surveys. The relevant
experience must relate to the country of assessment.
Is covered by a professional code of conduct and subject to peer review (refer
to Relevant definitions).
CN3 Ecology strategy The strategy should follow national best practice guidance for ecology strategies (refer
to Appendix B - The Approved Standards and Weightings List (ASWL)) and identify
actions to address or achieve:
Protection, enhancement and creation of local ecological habitats and the

processes that sustain them (including water supply and quality; nutrient
cycling; shelter; ecosystem hierarchies etc.)
Opportunities for maximising the presence of flora and fauna species on or
near to the site
Protection, enhancement and creation of wildlife movement and migration
routes
Potential damage or disturbance arising from the proposed development and
its ongoing use
The optimal balance between ecological, social and economic benefits of the
proposed development and predicted damage and disturbance
Protection and enhancement of existing ecological features.
CN4 Valued ecological To determine the value of ecological features on site, the following factors must be
features considered:
Biodiversity and ecosystems services

Social benefits to the community
Economic value.
CN5 Unavoidable Where unavoidable damage to ecological features occurs, the ecologist should
damage or prioritise mitigation or compensatory activities within the development boundary of
compensation the assessed site.
CN6 Small scale projects For small scale infrastructure projects, e.g. the installation of cables, broadband etc. a
full EcIA is not required; however as a minimum an EcIA desk study and habitat and
vegetation survey is undertaken. The habitat survey will identify the main plant
communities and habitat types that may be affected by the project and provide a
documented basis for determining the scope of more detailed surveys. These initial
surveys will inform the developer if any further studies need to be carried out, e.g. for
legal purposes for issues surrounding protected species. for issues surrounding
protected species.
CN7 Biodiversity action This includes

plan (BAP) 1. Identifying and assessing the likely ecological impacts of the infrastructure
construction and in-use plans. This stage aligns with the baseline data and
information that are collected when undertaking an EcIA, and the identification of
likely ecological impacts
2. Establishing and implementing a management schedule and monitoring
programme to enable the effects on biodiversity to be assessed. This stage
ensures appropriate actions and a monitoring programme are implemented to
enable the effects on biodiversity to be assessed and the biodiversity action plan
reviewed
3. Creating targets and performance indicators to identify potential opportunities
for ecological enhancement, or avoidance of impacts, and to measure progress
using a performance indicator. This stage aligns with an EcIA by confirming the
potential opportunities for ecological enhancement or avoidance of impacts;
however a further step can be taken in terms of setting realistic targets for the
implementation of the BAP. For some targets progress may be easily measurable
using a performance indicator
4. Procedures for monitoring, reviewing and reporting to ascertain if the targets set
are being achieved, if they are realistic or if they need adjusting, and to
communicate these results. A BAP should be reviewed on a regular basis to
ascertain if the targets set are being achieved, if they are realistic, or if adjustments
to targets and performance indicators need to be made
5. The site BAP being fully integrated with any country specific biodiversity strategy
and any local BAPs.
Methodology
None.
Evidence
1 2 Ecological impact assessment N/A N/A

(EcIA)
3 4 Ecology strategy, mitigation and N/A N/A

compensation plan
6 Site specific BAP
7 N/A Updated site specific BAP As Interim stage requirements
Biodiversity Champion
This role can be undertaken by a member of the project delivery team.
Compensation
Measures taken to make up for the loss of, or permanent damage to, biological resources through the appropriate
provision of replacement areas. Any replacement area should be similar to or with appropriate management, have
the ability to reproduce the ecological functions and conditions of those biological resources that have been lost or
damaged.
Green infrastructure (GI)

Green Infrastructure (GI) is a network of high quality green and blue spaces and other environmental features. It needs
to be planned and delivered at all spatial scales from national to neighbourhood levels. The greatest benefits will be
gained when it is designed and managed as a multifunctional resource capable of delivering a wide range of
environmental and quality of life benefits (ecosystem services) for local communities. Green Infrastructure includes
parks, open spaces, playing fields, woodlands, wetlands, grasslands, river and canal corridors, allotments and private
gardens.
Integrity of the site

The coherence of its ecological structure and function, across its whole area, that enables it to sustain the habitat,
complex of habitats or the levels of populations of the species for which it was classified.
Mitigation
Measures taken to avoid or reduce negative impacts. Measures may include locating the development and its
working areas and access routes away from areas of high ecological interest, fencing off sensitive areas during the
construction period, or timing works to avoid sensitive periods. An example of a reduction measure is a reed bed silt
trap that is designed to minimise polluted water running directly into an ecologically important water course. See also
compensation, which is separate from mitigation.
No net loss
The point at which habitat or biodiversity losses equal their gains, both quantitatively and qualitatively.
Net gain
The point at which the quality and quantity of habitats or species improves compared to their original condition, i.e.
improvements over and above those required for mitigation or compensation.
Peer review
Valued ecological features

This is determined by the suitably qualified ecologist, building on their knowledge of the area and consultation with
local groups. They are ecological features that contribute to the biodiversity or ecosystem services that provide social
and economic benefits to the local community.
Other information
None.
LUE 05 Protection of biodiversity Land use & ecology
LUE 05 Protection of biodiversity

0 3 One credit - any criteria 1 12 - Excellent

Two credits - any criteria 1 12 - Outstanding
Aim
To protect and mitigate damage to existing biodiversity.

The strategic stage requirements for this issue are linked to LUE 04 Ecological impact assessment and action plan. See project
detail criterion 1 .

Ecologist assessment and recommendations (prerequisite)

Protection, mitigation and compensation (up to three credits)
Prerequisite - Ecologist assessment and recommendations

1 An Ecological Impact Assessment (EcIA) is carried out in line with LUE 04 Ecological impact assessment and action plan: 1
and 2 before the end of the concept design.
2 In consultation with the client, the SQE provides recommendations (refer to CN1) for:
2.a Maximising the area of green infrastructure given the identified constraints
2.b Maximising the ecological value and connectivity of each area of green infrastructure in the site's given ecological
context
2.c Protecting and enhancing the integrity and connectivity of the site
2.d Each of the following topics unless robust case for exception is made. Note: one recommendation may cover
several of these items:
2.d.i Provision and protection of habitats of principal importance (refer to CN2)
2.d.ii Provision and protection of species of principal importance (refer to CN2)
2.d.iii Provision for local biodiversity action plan (BAP) species
2.d.iv Provision for other species of conservation concern
2.d.v Provision for long term management and maintenance
2.d.vi Local provenance of plant and seed stock
2.d.vii Engagement of the public in nature conservation.
2.e Protecting existing ecological features, habitats and species
2.f Any necessary and appropriate mitigation or compensation measures.
3 Recommendations include issues to be considered at planning, construction and in-use phases and are weighted to
reflect the impact of the recommendation (refer to CN3).
4 Key recommendations are highlighted (refer to Relevant definitions) and include long term management and
maintenance requirements.
Up to three credits - Protection, mitigation and compensation

6 Up to three credits are achieved for ONE of the following as indicated in criteria 7 12
Three credits - Protection of biodiversity and existing ecological features

7 All valued on-site and near-site ecological features (as identified by the SQE) including wildlife corridors are preserved and
protected during the development works in line with the SQE recommendations.
8 Measures are provided to ensure that the ecological integrity and value of the site is maintained in line with SQE
recommendations resulting in no net loss in biodiversity, e.g. management, buffer zones, creating meaningful corridors
or links from and to, creation of supporting habitat etc. This includes:
8.a Areas within the physical site boundary
8.b Areas off-site that will be affected by the project, e.g. species and habitats are not located on the site but will be
affected because of the project.
Two credits - Mitigating impact on biodiversity and existing ecological features

9 Where recommended by the SQE, measures are implemented during the design and construction stages to mitigate (i.e.
avoid or reduce) impact on existing ecological features both on or near to the site, for example through one or more of
the following:
9.a Choice of site
9.b Design development
9.c Construction processes
9.d Programme of works.
10 The SQE confirms that there is no net loss in biodiversity
One credit - Compensating impact on biodiversity and existing ecological features

11 Where recommended by the SQE, measures are implemented during the design and construction stages to compensate
for any impact on existing ecological features on or near to the site.
12 The SQE confirms that because of these measures there is no net loss in biodiversity when considering the area losing
biodiversity and the area gaining biodiversity.

None.
Compliance notes
CN1 Ecologist's The SQE's recommendations for enhancing and protecting the ecological value of the
recommendations site are to include, and exceed, the most onerous of all relevant local, regional, national
and (where relevant) international legislation relating to protected species and habitats.
LUE 05 Protection of biodiversity Land use & ecology
CN2 Species and habitats The SQE must consider species and habitats of principle importance as defined in
of principal national best practice guidance and legislation (refer to Appendix B - The Approved
importance Standards and Weightings List (ASWL)).
CN3 Ecologist's The SQE must state the relevant importance or weighting of each recommendation in
weighted the report. Where the SQE confirms that one of the recommendations is twice as
recommendations beneficial to the local ecology as another recommendation this can hold twice as much
weight in the percentage assessment detailed in LUE 06 Enhancement of biodiversity.
This approach can be applied to more than one recommendation and where there is
considered to be more (or less) than twice as much benefit as confirmed by the SQE.
CN4 Damage or Where damage to ecological features occurs, the ecologist should prioritise mitigation
compensation or compensatory activities within the development boundary of the assessed site.
Methodology
None.
Evidence
1 12 N/A Ecologist's report Refer to generic evidence

requirements above.
Key recommendations
These are recommendations that the SQE identifies as essential to the integrity of the enhancements.
Compensation
Refer to LUE 04 Ecological impact assessment and action plan.
Green infrastructure (GI)

Integrity of the site

Mitigation
No net loss
Valued ecological features

Other information
None.
LUE 06 Enhancement of biodiversity Land use and ecology
LUE 06 Enhancement of biodiversity

0 4 None
Aim
To ensure that the project enhances biodiversity on site through its design and construction.

The strategic stage requirements for this issue are linked to LUE 04 Ecological impact assessment and action plan. See project
criterion 1 and LUE 05 Protection of biodiversity.

Ecologist assessment and recommendations (prerequisite)

Ecologist recommendations (up to two credits)
Increasing value of site (one credit)
Higher plant weighted area average species richness (one credit)
Prerequisite - Ecologist assessment and recommendations

1 Criteria LUE 05 Protection of biodiversity: 1 4 are achieved.
Up to two credits - Ecologist recommendations
One credit
3 All of the suitability qualified ecologist's (SQE) key recommendations are implemented.
4 More than 50% of the SQE's weighted recommendations are implemented (refer to LUE 05 Protection of biodiversity).
Two credits
6 All of the SQE's key recommendations are implemented.
7 More than 75% of the SQE's weighted recommendations are implemented (refer to LUE 05 Protection of biodiversity).
One credit - Increasing value of site

Land use and ecology BREEAM New Construction: Infrastructure (International pilot)
9 The SQE values each habitat affected by the works according to a national best practice scale of value and geographical
frame of reference (refer to Appendix B - The Approved Standards and Weightings List (ASWL) and CN1). The
geographical frames are either those defined in national best practice or as follows:
9.a Negligible
9.b Zone of ecological influence
9.c Local or community
9.d District
9.e Region or above.
10 The SQE confirms that the scale of impact of the site increases by one geographical frame of reference, e.g. from
negligible to zone of ecological influence, local to district or etc. (refer to CN2).
One credit - Higher plant weighted area average species richness

12 The SQE values the site and any off-site areas affected by the project by higher plant weighted area average species
richness in each stand type before and after the proposed works (refer to CN3 and CN4).
13 The SQE confirms that there is an increase in ecological value of the site (including off-site areas affected), with an increase
of six higher plant species richness or greater and that this has been calculated using actual plant species numbers (refer
to CN5).

Table 24: Sizes of quadrat for higher plant weighted area average species richness
Stand type Quadrat size
Woodlands 50m x 50m for canopy and shrub layers
4mx 4m or 10m x 10m for ground layer
Scrub 10m x 10 m; exceptionally 50m x 50m in open patchy scrub
Hedges and boundaries 30 m lengths for canopy
10m lengths for ground flora
Heaths and mires 2m x 2m or 4m x 4 m; exceptionally 10m x 10m in very

impoverished or grossly structured vegetation
Grasslands 2m x 2m or 4m x 4m where thick tufts or clumps of

vegetation is present
Aquatics 2m x 2m or 4m x 4m
Swamps and tall herb fens 4m x 4m or 10m x 10m
Saltmarshes 2m x 2m or 4m x 4m
Stand type Quadrat size
Sand dunes 2m x 2m or 4m x 4m
Sea cliffs 2m x 2m or 4m x 4m
Shingle 2m x 2m or 4m x 4m
Ruderals* 2m x 2m or 4m x 4m where thick tufts or clumps of

vegetation is present
*Ruderal species are those that are first to colonise disturbed lands. The disturbance may be natural (e.g. wildfires or
avalanches) or a consequence of human activity, (e.g. construction or agriculture).
Compliance notes
CN1 National scale of If national best practice guidance is not available the SQE should define the
value and geographical frames of reference for assessment in that country. Input from local
geographical frame experts (refer to Relevant definitions) must be sought to ensure country specific
of reference ecological and administrative typologies are reflected (refer to Other information).
The different frames of reference should be relative to the scale of the country (in terms
of size and ecological importance) to ensure local resources are valued at different
scales.
CN2 SQE confidence in It is recognised that the SQE will need to make predictions in order to establish the pre-
predictions and post-development geographical frame of reference. The SQE must document and
rationalise confidence in their predictions. Only predictions that are certain, near-certain
or probable should be included in assessing the change. However, if an unlikely
prediction will have a minimal impact on the value of the site, the SQE can include this,
where justified.
'Extremely unlikely' positive effects should not be included. However, if these effects are
negative, although they may be very improbable, they can be extremely serious if they
occur and hence merit contingency planning.
CN3 Higher plant species Native floral or plant species contributing to local, regional or national priority species
and habitats, or those species specified by the SQE with a known attraction or benefit
to local wildlife can be considered for increasing the number of species on site, as well
as general enhancement. The planting area, density and mixture of different species
must be specified with input from both the SQE and the landscape architect (where
employed), to address the following three points:
The enhancement of the ecological value of the site

The best possible chance of establishment and long term survival of the
species within the habitat
Links to and support of the local ecosystem beyond the site boundary.
Land use and ecology BREEAM New Construction: Infrastructure (International pilot)
CN4 Higher plant Higher plant weighted area average species richness in each stand type should be
weighted area determined in line with the sampling methodologies set out in national best practice
average species guidance (refer to Appendix B - The Approved Standards and Weightings List (ASWL)).
richness If national best practice guidance is not available the SQE should follow the
methodology and use quadrat sizes for each stand type as detailed in the Handbook
of Biodiversity Methods17. The stand types and quadrat sizes are extracted in Table 24
and the SQE must classify the vegetation type appropriately. For example, a mangrove
although ecologically intertidal can be classified as a woodland.
Stand types should only be combined where they are similar in ecological function and
relatively close to each other on site. If they are separated or have a different ecological
function (within the same stand type), they should be considered separately.
Where the asset is in an urban setting, the SQE should adopt a sensible rationale, based
on these guidelines, to determine the shape and quadrats required for the area being
measured.
CN5 Increase in For criteria 12 13 , BREEAM uses higher plant weighted area average species richness
ecological value as an indicative measure of ecological value of the assessed site. Where the SQE
identifies that an increase in the ecological value of the site can be achieved without
meeting the target of an increase of six plant species the criteria can be deemed
compliant if there is clear evidence which addresses the following three points:
The enhancement of the ecological value of the site

The best possible chance of establishment and long term survival of the
species within the habitat
Links to and support of the local ecosystem beyond the site boundary.
The BREEAM Assessor must rely on the professional judgement of the SQE when
determining compliance on this issue.
CN6 Small scale projects For small scale infrastructure projects, e.g. the installation of cable, broadband etc., it is
acceptable to have sought recommendations from recognised 'local' ecological
expertise and generic guidance in the form of either published guidance documents,
information leaflets or both, to inform the adoption of locally relevant ecological
measures that enhance the ecological value of the site. These measures may include:
1. Planting of native species or those with a known attraction or benefit to local
wildlife
2. Adoption of horticultural good practice (e.g. no or low use of residual pesticides)
3. Installation of bird, bat or insect boxes at appropriate locations on the site.
Only native floral species or those with a known attraction or benefit to local wildlife can
be considered for enhancing the ecological value of the site.
The number of credits available and assessed for these project types will be detailed in
a project's bespoke criteria appendix.
Methodology
None.
Evidence
1 13 N/A Ecologist's report Refer to generic evidence

requirements above
Refer to LUE 04 Ecological impact assessment and action plan and LUE 05 Protection of biodiversity for definitions.
Local experts
For the purpose of this BREEAM issue local experts must include as a minimum:
Local ecologists or local conservation organisations
Local administrations, e.g. town councils, local authorities, etc.
Other information
Use of a scale of value and geographical frame of reference

The criteria for this credit are included to encourage the uptake of a system to quantify how ecological resources are affected
due to the construction of an asset. Key to the approach is recognising how people define ecological value locally. Therefore
the approach requires ecological and administrative typologies to be reflected together when establishing appropriate
geographical frames of reference. For example, if a national park is situated across three administrative areas (such as a
district ), this should be reflected in the geographical frames of reference used.
This will vary significantly from country to country. An example used near an airport in Singapore is given below as an example:
Negligible
Within the context of the site and its immediate zone of ecological influence
Within the context of the Local Township (Bedok)
Within the context of District 16: Bedok, Upper East Coast, Eastwood, Kew Drive, Chai Chee, Siglap
Within the context of East Region (93.1km2)
Above the regional context would be
Within the Context of Singapore (National)
International
The CIEEM EcIA Guidelines18(although UK specific) can be referenced by the SQE to facilitate the use of this system if national
best practice guidance is not available.
LUE 07 Land use changes

available
1 2 None
Aim
To encourage land use change that mitigates the carbon impact of the asset.

One credit - Carbon stock estimate

1 The potential increase or decrease in carbon stock resulting from land use changes is estimated in accordance with the
process outlined in the Methodology section below.
2 Measures to increase the potential carbon stock and minimise potential carbon losses as a result of land use changes
over the lifetime of the project, e.g. by siting the asset to minimise emissions from soil disturbance, reducing the
destruction of existing carbon sinks and increasing the capacity of existing carbon sinks are identified.
3 Opportunities for increasing the carbon stock potential and minimising potential carbon losses are identified in the
project team or contractor's brief.

Prerequisite - Appointment of carbon specialist

4 A carbon specialist (refer to Relevant definitions) is appointed to:
4.a Carry out calculations relating to the carbon impacts resulting from land use changes
4.b Provide recommendations for reducing carbon emissions resulting from land use changes and land
management issues
4.c Produce, or input into, a land management plan detailing land management processes with a carbon impact at
the construction and operation stage of the asset, including as a minimum:
4.c.i Carbon impacts arising from land use and management over the life of the asset, e.g. soil
displacement, fertilisers, maintenance equipment
4.c.ii Maintenance requirements relating to peat (refer to CN1).
One credit - Carbon stock potential

6 The potential change in carbon stock resulting from land use changes, determined at the strategy stage, is updated by
the carbon specialist incorporating:
6.a Changes to the proposed design including agreed recommendations related to the carbon effects of land use
suggested by the carbon specialist
LUE 07 Land use changes Land use & ecology
6.b Site specific information replacing the generic values outlined in the Methodology section.
7 The carbon specialist demonstrates how the approach used to determine the carbon impacts of land use changes is
aligned with the approach outlined in the Land Use, Land-Use Change, and Forestry Guidance for GHG Project
Accounting publication.
8 The estimated total carbon equivalent emissions or savings are inserted into the BREEAM Infrastructure online tool.
One credit - No net decrease in carbon stock due to land use changes
10 The updated calculations outlined in criterion 6 indicate no net decrease in equivalent carbon emissions over the life of
the asset.

None.
Compliance notes
CN1 Maintenance Where peat is present, measures are implemented to ensure the hydrological
requirements conditions necessary for its maintenance in the long term, e.g. through creating a
relating to peat suitable landform with impeded drainage, to prevent the peat oxidising and increasing
CO2 emissions.
CN2 Expected lifetime of The carbon impacts should be measured over the expected lifetime of the asset as
the asset indicated in the design specification which has received planning consent. If the lifetime
is not specified then the working lifetimes detailed in national best practice standards
for the asset type should be used (refer to Appendix B).
CN3 Land use change All land use change used to calculate the carbon equivalent savings should be
post construction completed once the project is constructed and handed over to the operator. However,
in the case of complex sites or project completion dates that do not fall within an
appropriate planting season, land use enhancements must be completed within 18
months.
The client or contractor must provide evidence to confirm that the features will be
added at a later date in an appropriate planting season within 18 months from
completion of the development.
Methodology
Calculating increase in carbon stock (or carbon equivalent emissions or savings) from land use
change
The potential change in carbon stock resulting from land use changes is determined, taking into account activities resulting
from construction, demolition (where this will occur) and any expected changes over the lifetime of the asset (refer to CN2). If
the expected lifetime is less than 50 years, a 50-year lifespan should be used.
The methodology for calculating carbon equivalent land use savings shown in the following steps is in accordance with The
Green House Gas Protocol, The Land Use, Land-Use Change, and Forestry (LULUCAF) Guidance for GHG Project Accounting 19 .
Step 1- Determine the change in land types as a result of land use changes
Table 25 is completed for the following situations:
Firstly for the case of 'no change' indicating land type areas prior to any construction site activities (including site
clearance and demolition). The 'From' and 'To' represent how these land uses might expect to change over the
expected life of the proposed asset, but assuming it is not built. In most cases the land types would remain the same
Secondly for the case of 'asset constructed and operated' indicating land type areas expected post construction of
the asset and how these are expected to change over the life of the asset.
Table 25: Expected change in land type areas
Changes in land types Forest Crop land Grassland Wetlands Settlements Other
(hectares) land land
From Forest land
Crop land
Grassland
Wetlands
Settlements
Other land
The land types indicated are as defined in the top-level land categories for greenhouse gas (GHG) inventory reporting and are
defined in more detail within Other information.
Step 2 - Calculate changes in the carbon stock of the land resulting from land use changes
'The figures identified in Step 1 for the 'no change' and 'asset built and operated' scenarios are then multiplied by average
figures for changes in carbon stock between land types in Tonnes CO2e/hectares. The data for these figures can be from one
of the following sources:
Average values derived from the country's most recent Green House Gas Inventory data (refer to Appendix B - The
Approved Standards and Weightings List (ASWL))
Average values derived from a neighbouring countrys most recent Green House Gas Inventory data OR
Where neither of these are readily available, the UK values shown in Table 26 can be used as default values.
Note
The figures in Table 26 represent average values derived from the most recent GHG Inventory data for the UK20 and
indicate the changes in carbon stock between land types in Tonnes COe/hectares.
The figures in Table 26 that reflect carbon stock changes from 'Land type 1' to 'Land type 1', might be expected to be
'1', however there are reductions or increases in carbon stock over time for a particular land type, and this is what is
reflected in these numbers.
LUE 07 Land use changes Land use & ecology
Table 26: Factors associated with changes in carbon stock as a result of land use changes
Tonnes CO 2e/hectares Forest Crop land Grassland Wetlands Settlements Other

land land
From Forest land 0.75 -4.23 -3.75 N/A -3.89 N/A
Crop land 2.79 -0.36 0.59 N/A -1.84 N/A
Grassland 2.71 -1.17 0.10 N/A -3.44 N/A
Wetlands N/A 0 0 N/A N/A N/A
Settlements 2.76 0.89 1.65 N/A -0.72 N/A
Other land 2.79 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Note: The N/A figures are where no generic data are available. This is not expected to prevent this calculation for
BREEAM Infrastructure assessments as (i) it is unlikely that many infrastructure projects would convert a land type to or
from a wetland and (ii) the available land types will hopefully cover land types found for an infrastructure project. If
more detail is required refer to the Land Use, Land Use Change and Forestry (LULUCF) Guidance for GHG Project
Accounting, World Resource Institute
Step 3 - Determine the carbon equivalent emissions released over the life of the asset.
Add the figures in the appropriate tables together to predict the change in carbon stock for (i) the 'no change'
situation and (ii) the 'asset built and operated' situation
Subtract the figure for the 'asset built and operated' from the 'no change' figure to determine the difference in
carbon stock (or carbon equivalent emissions or savings) over the life of the asset.
Note:
Where this total figure is negative, this indicates a release in carbon emissions over the life of the asset. Where this
figure is positive this indicates an absorption or saving in carbon emissions over the life of the asset.
Where there is no difference in the allocation of land use areas between the 'no change' case and the 'asset built and
operated' no further quantification is required as the difference will be zero.
Evidence
ALL One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in the BREEAM evidential requirements section can be
1 3 Calculations N/A N/A
4 N/A Land management plan Land management plan
4,6 N/A Calculations Calculations

and 10
Carbon and energy specialists

An individual achieving all the following items can be deemed a carbon and energy specialist for the purpose of a
BREEAM assessment:
1. Holds a degree or equivalent qualification in carbon assessment or a related subject
2. Is a practising carbon specialist with a minimum of three years relevant experience (within the last five years). Such
experience must clearly demonstrate a practical understanding of factors affecting carbon stock breakdown in
relation to land use changes; protection and adaptation of the built environment; and assessment of carbon and
energy impacts on construction projects
This role can be undertaken by more than one person where this experience is found through two or more experts
working together.
Carbon stock
In the context of this BREEAM issue it refers to the amount of carbon stored in the actual or proposed land types in
terms of living biomass, dead organic matter and soils. Where there is a change in carbon stock, this can been seen as
carbon equivalent emissions or savings (see also total carbon equivalent definition below).
Land use change

Peer review

Other information
None.
Landscape & heritage
Landscape and heritage
Category overview
Refer to the country reference sheet in the ASWL None
Summary
This category encourages protection and enhancement of the existing landscape including impact on visual and landscape
receptors, heritage assets and microclimate.
Category summary
Issue Credits
LSH 01 Landscape and visual impact Strategy - 1

Project detail - 3
Undertaking a landscape and visual impact assessment and providing recommendations

Implementing a percentage of the landscape architect's recommendations
LSH 02 Heritage assets Strategy - 1

Project detail - 2
Developing a strategy for heritage assets

Implementing proposed protection and mitigation measures
Recording, reporting and disseminating measures taken
Landscape & heritage BREEAM New Construction: Infrastructure (International pilot)

1 3 None
Aim
To ensure the character of the landscape is respected and, where possible, enhanced through the location of features and
design appropriate to the local environment.

One credit - Landscape and visual impact assessment

1 A suitably qualified landscape architect (SQLA) is appointed at the briefing stage to be part of the project team.
2 The SQLA develops an independent landscape and visual impact assessment (LVIA) (refer to Relevant definitions and
CN1) in accordance with national best practice guidelines (refer to Appendix B - The Approved Standards and
Weightings List (ASWL)).
3 Key representatives of the project team are involved in reviewing opportunities to enhance and protect the existing
landscape.
4.a The LVIA
4.b The landscape and visual impacts resulting from the project
4.c Proposals for enhancing the landscape
4.d Proposals for minimising and mitigating negative landscape and visual impacts.

Up to three credits - Enhancing and protecting landscape character and visual impact
5 The LVIA is updated by the SQLA to account for opportunities identified within the strategic stage assessment,
consultation feedback and updated project details (refer to CN1).
6 The LVIA includes weighted recommendations for enhancing and protecting landscape character (refer to CN2 and
CN6).
7 The LVIA includes weighted recommendations for reducing visual impact (refer to CN3).
8 The LVIA includes weighted recommendations for reducing the impact of temporary works (refer to CN4 and CN6).
9 Credits are awarded based on the percentage of weighted SQLA recommendations implemented in accordance with
Table 27
10 Any landscape maintenance is identified and included in a long term land management plan.
LSH 01 Landscape and visual impact Landscape & heritage
Table 27: Credits associated with the landscape character and visual impact recommendations implemented
Percentage of implemented recommendations Associated credits

(weighted where appropriate - refer to CN6)
25% or more 1
50% or more 2
75% or more 3

None.
Compliance notes
CN1 Verification of a For the purposes of this issue, a landscape architect that does not meet the
report written by a BREEAMdefinition of a SQLA (refer to Relevant definitions) can carry out the LVIA and
landscape architect associated recommendations, where these are reviewed and verified by a SQLA, as
defined by BREEAM.
CN2 Recommendations This includes recommendations for:

for protecting and
Retention and protection of aspects which are identified in the LVIA as
enhancing
contributing to the structure of the landscape, e.g. topography, woodland,
landscape character
vegetative belts or hedgerows, surface water and other structuring
components lending positive character such as disused railway lines, historic
settlement patterns, field patterns, estate boundary walls and fences, etc. This
should also include key views, where these contribute to landscape character
Enhancement and restoration of aspects which are identified in the LVIA as
contributing to the structure of the landscape as listed above, but which are in
a condition which limits their current landscape value
Retention and protection of specific features which are identified in the LVIA as
contributing to the character of the landscape, e.g. monuments, key buildings
and other structures, specimen trees, public artworks, etc.
Enhancement and restoration of specific features which are identified in the
LVIA as contributing to the character of the landscape as listed above, but
which are in a condition which limits their current landscape value.
Examples of how these could be measured are given in Other information

For assets where the landscape can affect the user's experience, e.g. railways,
recommendations can be related to enhancing the user experience, however, as a
minimum, there must be equal consideration given to the impact of the landscape on
the areas surrounding the asset.
CN3 Recommendations This includes recommendations for:

for reducing visual
Adaptation of the development design to fully address negative impacts upon
impact
visual receptors as identified within the LVIA
Integration with local landscape character and visual identity through positive
design measures.
CN4 Temporary works This includes recommendations for:
Effective mitigation measures regarding temporary works from their

commencement to reduce the magnitude of visual impacts identified within
the LVIA.
CN5 Recommendations Recommendations to meet statutory requirements (to enhance and protect existing
and statutory landscape character and minimise negative visual impact) cannot be included in this
requirements calculation.
CN6 Weighting Where deemed appropriate by the suitably qualified landscape architect,
recommendations recommendations can be weighted to reflect their importance and impact on the
landscape character and visual impact. These weightings are then included within the
percentage calculation for credit allocation. For example, where the SQLA confirms that
one of the recommendations is twice as beneficial as another recommendation this
can hold twice as much weight in the percentage assessment. This approach can be
applied to more than one recommendation and where there is considered to be more
(or less) than twice as much benefit as confirmed by the SQLA.
CN7 Value and The measurement of value decisions and importance are determined by the suitably
importance qualified landscape architect in accordance with national best practice guidance (refer
decisions to Appendix B - The Approved Standards and Weightings List (ASWL)) based on:
The sensitivity of the landscape and visual receptors and

The magnitude of the landscape and visual effect.
Methodology
None.
Evidence
1 4 Strategic LVIA N/A N/A
5 9 N/A Detailed or updated LVIA Refer to generic evidence

requirements above
10 N/A Long term management plan As Interim design stage

requirements
Appropriate to the setting

To be judged by the competent landscape architect because of their experience, specialist advice and stakeholder
feedback.
Effective screening
To be judged by the competent landscape architect because of their experience, specialist advice and stakeholder
feedback.
Independent LVIA
For BREEAM this is defined as a LVIA uninfluenced by the client or project delivery team. It may be that the final LVIA is
influenced by the client, e.g. in terms of including only recommendations they are willing to implement, however the
LVIA referred to in this issue is the precursor to the influenced report and defines all options identified by the SQLA.

For this issue, key representatives of the project team include client, owner/operator, designer, contractor and also
experts in land use, ecology, amenity or social provision, landscape and heritage.
Landscape receptors
Landscape receptors are components of the landscape likely to be affected by the proposed scheme
Most important (aspects or actions)

Refer to CN7 for information on decisions relating to the importance of landscape features
Most valued (aspects)

Refer to CN7 for information on value decisions.
Negative impacts
The judgement of negative impacts is a fundamental stage of the LVIA process as set out in the LVIA guidance. The
judgement is therefore made by the author of the LVIA, in this case a competent landscape architect.
Notable new landscape feature
To be judged by the competent landscape architect because of their experience, specialist advice (including the
project architect) and stakeholder feedback.
Peer review
Specific features
These refer to physical components of the landscape which make a defining contribution to landscape character and
which are identified in the LVIA for doing so.
Suitably Qualified Landscape Architect

An individual achieving all the following items can be considered to be 'suitably qualified' for the purposes of a
BREEAM assessment:
1. Holds a degree or equivalent qualification in Landscape Architecture or a related subject.
2. Is a practising landscape professional with a minimum of three years relevant experience (within the last five years).
Such experience must clearly demonstrate a practical understanding of factors affecting landscape theories and
design in relation to construction and the built environment; including acting in an advisory capacity to provide
recommendations for landscape protection, enhancement and mitigation measures. Examples of relevant
experience are: landscape architecture and engineering within landscapes; preservation, conservation and
restoration within historic landscapes, etc.
Vernacular
Materials used in local architecture which characterise the local landscape and are identified within the landscape
character assessment as doing so, e.g. 'cob' stones in Norfolk, red brick in industrial settlements.
Visually low key materials

Materials which, in the judgement of the competent landscape architect, are not vernacular but nonetheless are
complementary to local landscape character.
Visual receptors
The people who will be affected by the changes in views and visual amenity - to be determined by the competent
landscape architect.
Other information
Examples of how recommendations to address landscape character and visual impact issues could be measured are given
below:
Description of requirement Measurement
Landscape character
Retention and protection of aspects which are identified in the Retention and protection of a percentage of the
LVIA as contributing to the structure of the landscape, e.g. most valued of the key aspects identified in the LVIA.
topography, woodland, vegetative belts or hedgerows, surface
water and other structuring components lending positive
character such as disused railway lines, historic settlement
patterns, field patterns, estate boundary walls and fences, etc.
This should also include key views, where these contribute to
landscape character.
Description of requirement Measurement
Enhancement and restoration of aspects which are identified in Delivery of some or all of the most important
the LVIA as contributing to the structure of the landscape as enhancement or restoration actions identified in the
listed above, but which are in a condition which limits their current LVIA.
landscape value.
Retention and protection of specific features which are identified Retention and protection of the most valued of
in the LVIA as contributing to the character of the landscape, e.g. features (%).
monuments, key buildings and other structures, specimen trees,
public artworks, etc.
Enhancement and restoration of specific features which are Delivery of some or all of the most important
identified in the LVIA as contributing to the character of the enhancement or restoration actions identified in the
landscape as listed above, but which are in a condition which LVIA.
limits their current landscape value.
Visual impact
Adaptation of the development design to fully address negative Removal of negative impacts upon the most
impacts upon visual receptors as identified within the LVIA. significant (%) of visual receptors through positive
design measures.
Integration with local landscape character and visual identity Use of vernacular or visually low key materials when
through positive design measures. viewed from the nearest visual receptors.
Consideration of colour in the design process and

use of material colours appropriate to the setting
as defined in the LVIA.
Use of off-site mitigation measures to further

reduce visual impacts through additional screening,
softening or filtering views as defined in the LVIA.
Use of characterful and distinctive architecture to

create a positive and notable new landscape
feature visible to the public.
Temporary works
Effective mitigation measures regarding temporary works from Impact magnitude reduced from a significant level
their commencement to reduce the magnitude of visual impacts to an insignificant level for (number of) visual
identified within the LVIA. receptors.

1 2 None
Aim
To minimise the impact of the development on heritage assets.

Establishing a baseline (prerequisite)

Strategy for heritage assets (one credit)
Prerequisite - Establishing a baseline

1 In accordance with the appropriate national best practice guidance or legislation (refer to Appendix B - The Approved
Standards and Weightings List (ASWL)) projects affecting heritage assets collate the following information and share it
with the appropriate statutory body:
1.a The significance of the heritage asset or assets affected
1.b Any contribution made by the setting of the heritage asset to its significance
1.c Detail that is proportionate to the asset's importance and no more than is sufficient to understand the potential
impact of the proposal on its significance
1.d Results from any consultation with appropriate local and national statutory bodies
1.e Where necessary, the results of any desk based assessments, field evaluation or both, to characterise the
significance of specific heritage assets or locations
1.f Outline mitigation proposals to be developed and implemented.
One credit - Strategy for heritage assets

3 Heritage specialists (refer to Relevant definitions) are integrated into the project team at the options appraisal stage and
required to:
3.a Establish project wide heritage principles and practices to promote a consistent approach to heritage assets
where the project is linear or consists of numerous development site locations
3.b Develop a heritage strategy including how the project will protect, preserve and mitigate damage to expected
heritage assets (refer to CN1)
3.c Comment on the construction programme and proposals suggesting where changes could lower the risk and
impacts to both the project and the heritage assets. For example, areas of 'expected' discoveries can be
programmed into a non-critical time of working to minimise risks to the construction programme
3.d Carry out the baseline assessments to:
3.d.i Establish the existing situation and 'value' or 'significance' of heritage assets as required by national
best practice guidance or legislation and
3.d.ii Reduce the risk of 'unexpected discoveries'.
LSH 02 Heritage assets Landscape & heritage
4 Proposals for heritage assets are included as part of the 'Further consultation' process detailed in ST 02 Consultation and
engagement. The documents outlined in criterion 3 are amended to account for feedback and stakeholders are
informed of actions taken as a result of feedback.
5 The construction programme reflects any special considerations or requirements to enhance, preserve and mitigate
damage to known and expected heritage assets as identified in the strategy document, baseline assessment and
calculation.

Planning protection and mitigation measures (one credit)

Implementation, reporting and disseminating information (one credit)
One credit - Planning protection and mitigation measures

7 Heritage specialists (including input from local experts or individuals from relevant organisations representing local
interests) are or continue to be integrated as part of the project team and are required to:
7.a Confirm that works are planned and undertaken in accordance with national best practice guidance or
legislation appropriate to the project
7.b Re-evaluate the project design and scope of investigation
7.c Confirm or develop the project wide principles and practices (refer to criterion 3.a)
7.d Nominate an individual to oversee and be a central point of contact for all heritage issues on a project
7.e Comment on design decisions that have an impact on existing heritage assets
7.f Suggest amendments or additions to the investigative works as appropriate
7.g Review the proposals within the mitigation strategy (identified in criterion 3.b), and amend these (if necessary) to
address updated information and implement into project procedures.
8 The heritage specialists are required to develop or approve the following for known heritage assets:
8.a How the approach will support enhancement, preservation, mitigation and compromise with respect to the
heritage assets
8.b Documentation explaining why the final approach was selected as being the most acceptable or appropriate
for each site in the overall context of the project
8.c That the approach is proportionate to the significance of the asset and can be scrutinised by a third party if
appropriate, e.g. if challenged (refer to Relevant definitions)
8.d An 'expected discoveries procedure' indicating:
8.d.i Trained or accredited staff required to monitor work around the identified heritage assets
8.d.ii Notification and assessment procedures and potential level of investigation or recording required for
anticipated heritage assets.
9 The heritage specialists develop or approve a procedure for the unexpected discovery of heritage assets (refer to CN2).
One credit - Implementation, reporting and disseminating information

10 The heritage specialists will be required to:
10.a Be present during construction work around particularly sensitive heritage assets or at particularly sensitive
times, e.g. times that might prove critical to finding and protecting heritage assets such as the start of work in a
sensitive area
10.b Review the status or significance of heritage assets throughout the construction process and determine if it
changes or requires a different approach to that indicated within current plans
10.c Develop or approve documentation indicating that agreed mitigation measures have been carried out
10.d Undertake full reporting of the mitigation works and monitoring, including whether the mitigation has been
successfully implemented (e.g. through post-excavation assessment, analysis, reporting).
11 The heritage reports outlined in criterion 10 are:

11.a Disseminated and made easily accessible to the public
11.b Appropriately archived.
12 In consultation with the heritage specialists and local experts, opportunities are identified and taken for proactively
sharing or disseminating heritage information, e.g. schools, museums, heritage and local interests groups. This may be
through talks, visits or virtual technology etc.
13 The project team work with the heritage specialists, statutory organisations and local authorities to:
13.a Identify suitable museums and storage facilities (ideally local to the point of origin) for depositing artefacts and
records generated by investigation works and
13.b Consider how the project could fund improvements to local museums or sites.

None.
Compliance notes
CN1 Strategy for The strategy includes:

protecting
Proposals for undertaking heritage investigations
'expected' heritage
Proposals for the protection and preservation of heritage assets
assets
Mitigation strategies and measures
Details of how actions and results will be recorded, analysed, reported and
archived.
CN2 Procedure for the This procedure or plan includes:

unexpected
Provision for the monitoring of ground works by professionally accredited
discovery of
staff to ensure that, where found, unexpected heritage assets are identified
heritage assets
Agreed notification and assessment procedures to determine the significance
of the finds and the level of investigation and recording required
Unexpected discoveries are appropriately investigated and recorded.
Appropriate training of site staff
A requirement to review the potential impact of 'unexpected discoveries' on
the planned programme and costs.
LSH 02 Heritage assets Landscape & heritage
CN3 Where no heritage A question within the online tool will ask if heritage assets are expected. Where the
assets are expected answer is 'no' the tool will automatically award the 'Strategy for heritage assets' credit
and the 'Planning protection and mitigation measures' credits. This reflects and rewards
a site that avoids impacting existing heritage assets. In this situation the
'Implementation, reporting and dissemination' credit will be filtered from the
assessment as it is not relevant in this situation. It should be noted that robust evidence
must still be provided to demonstrate how the project team have determined there
are no expected heritage assets.
Where heritage assets are not expected but subsequently found during the site works
(i.e. during the project detail assessment stage), the online tool responses must be
amended. In this case the 'Strategy for heritage assets' credit will remain awarded,
however the requirements for the 'Planning protection and mitigation measures' credit
and the 'Implementation, reporting and dissemination' credit will be reinstated and
form part of the assessment.
Methodology
None.
Evidence
Heritage asset
A heritage asset is defined as all archaeological remains, historic buildings, and historic landscapes nationally
designated or locally listed that merit consideration by statutory authorities. It includes all aspects of the environment
resulting from the interaction between people and places through time.
Heritage specialists
Heritage specialists would include a lead specialist and input either from local experts or individuals from relevant
organisations representing local interests, e.g. local archaeologists or conservation specialists. A lead heritage
specialist must achieve the following items for the purpose of a BREEAM assessment:
1. Holds a degree or equivalent qualification in heritage conservation or a related subject
2. Is a practising heritage conservationist with a minimum of three years relevant experience (within the last five
years). Such experience must clearly demonstrate a practical understanding of factors affecting heritage
conservation, protection and adaptation of the built environment which include both structures and landscape.
The specialist must also seek to promote regeneration, revitalisation and heritage education, while enhancing
areas to provide a sense of place, identity and local character.

Note: The individual's qualification and experience should be relevant to the heritage assets present on site, e.g. a
building conservation architect may not have experience in archaeology and vice versa.
Peer review
Proportionate assessment and mitigation measures

This is not defined in this issue, but instead it is suggested that a third party reviews the justifications for a certain
approach where a disagreement or challenge to procedures arises.
For this issue relevant stakeholders include client, owner/operator, project delivery team, specialists, local community
and relevant interest groups or organisations.
Setting (of a heritage asset)

The surroundings in which a heritage asset is experienced. Its extent is not fixed and may change as the asset and its
surroundings evolve. Elements of a setting may make a positive or negative contribution to the significance of an
asset, may affect the ability to appreciate that significance or may be neutral.
Significance (of a heritage asset)

The value of a heritage asset to this and future generations because of its heritage interest. That interest may be
archaeological, architectural, artistic or historic. Significance derives not only from a heritage asset's physical presence,
but also from its setting.
Other information
Definitions of heritage
Cultural heritage asset as defined by the Council of Europe in the Framework Convention on the Value of Cultural Heritage for
Society (Faro 2005):
'a group of resources inherited from the past which people identify, independently of ownership, as a reflection and
expression of their constantly evolving values, beliefs, knowledge and traditions. It includes all aspects of the
environment resulting from the interaction between people and places through time.'
The wide 'group of resources' defined here form the heritage assets covered in this study. The term heritage asset is defined
in National Planning Policy Framework Planning Policy Guidelines Annex 2 as:
'A building, monument, site, place, area or landscape identified as having a degree of significance meriting
consideration in planning decisions, because of its heritage interest. Heritage asset includes designated heritage
assets and assets identified by the local planning authority (including local listing)'.
The Highways Agency Design Manual for Roads and Bridges (DMRB) Volume 11 Section 3 Part 2 HA 208/07 subdivides the
wide group into three subtopics - Archaeological Remains, Historic Buildings and Historic Landscapes. DMRB 11 3.2
comments that:
'each of these subtopics contains a range of assets that may survive as upstanding or buried remains, which may be
more or less extensive, and, while acknowledging that cultural heritage is a seamless resource, these subtopics are
identified because techniques for their study and the mitigation of impacts on them require different specialist
approaches'.
Pollution
Pollution
Category overview
Refer to the country reference sheet in the Pol 02 Water pollution

ASWL Pol 03 Noise and vibration
Summary
This category encourages project teams to address and minimise pollution resulting from the construction and operation of
the asset. Issues in this section focus on carrying out risk assessments, developing and implementing appropriate mitigation
strategies and monitoring the effectiveness of the mitigation measures.
Category summary
Issue Credits
Pol 01 Air quality Strategy - 1

Project detail - 2
Strategic air quality assessment (AQA) developed by an appropriate air quality consultant with input from the
local authority
Delivery of air quality mitigation measures in line with AQA for construction and operation
Monitoring of the effectiveness of the air quality measures
Pol 02 Water pollution Strategy - 1

Project detail - 3
Strategic review of the activities required to construct and operate the asset and establishing resulting risks to
water quality
A detailed risk assessment by an appropriate consultant to establish all water pollution hazards and measures
developed and implemented to mitigate the risk of water pollution
Monitoring of effectiveness of water pollution measures including an emergency response plan and handover of
a protection and monitoring programme for the operation of the asset
Implementation of best practice measures to minimise watercourse pollution during operation
Pol 03 Noise and vibration Strategy - 1

Project detail - 4
Pollution BREEAM New Construction: Infrastructure (International pilot)
Issue Credits
Strategic review of noise and vibration likely to arise due to the construction and operation of the asset and
determination of appropriate magnitudes of impact and effect levels from the asset by a suitably qualified
acoustician
A detailed noise and vibration impact assessment including a baseline noise and vibration survey and prediction
of exposure levels for sensitive receptors
A construction noise and vibration plan developed and implemented in line with best practice guidance to
mitigate the risk of noise and vibration from site activities
Monitoring of effectiveness of noise and vibration mitigation measures
A permanent noise and vibration plan developed and implemented that mitigates noise and vibration to
appropriate magnitudes of impact and effect levels through best practicable means
Pol 04 Light pollution Strategy - 1

Project detail - 2
Strategic review of lighting required to construct the asset and the impact of any subsequent light pollution on
sensitive receptors
A temporary lighting plan developed and implemented to mitigate the risk of light pollution and appropriate site
training
Monitoring of effectiveness of light pollution mitigation measures
A permanent lighting plan developed and implemented that mitigates light pollution in line with best practice
guidance
Pol 01 Air quality Pollution
Pol 01 Air quality

1 2 None
Aim
To control and minimise air pollution from the construction and operation of the asset.

Prerequisite - Air quality assessment (AQA)

1 The project delivery team and an appropriate air quality consultant liaise with the local authority or other appropriate
statutory body before completing a full air quality assessment (AQA) , to discuss the proposed scope, methodology and
approach to the assessment (refer to CN1, CN2 and CN3).
2 An AQA is completed before finalising the concept stage by an appropriate air quality consultant (refer to Relevant
definitions) to determine the potential impact of the construction and operation of the asset on local air quality. The AQA
is carried out in line with national best practice guidance (refer to CN4 and Appendix B - The Approved Standards and
Weightings List (ASWL)) and covers the minimum content (refer to CN5).
3.a The AQA
3.b The air quality impacts resulting from the construction and operation of the asset, including residual impacts
3.c Proposals for mitigating adverse air quality impacts.
One credit - Construction and operation air quality strategy

4 Criteria 1 3 have been achieved.
5 The project delivery team's or contractor's brief includes the following requirements:
5.a To carry out a detailed risk assessment for the construction and operation stages and evaluate further
opportunities to reduce negative impacts on air quality
5.b To implement measures appropriate to the project that mitigate the impact on air quality as detailed in the
Code of Construction Practice (CoCP), or equivalent (refer to Relevant definitions)
5.c To carry out air quality monitoring before and during construction to ensure best practice measures are being
adhered to.

Minimising construction and operational stage air pollution (prerequisite)

Monitoring construction stage air quality (one credit)
Reduction in pollutants from non-road mobile machinery (NRMM) (one credit).
Prerequisite - Minimising construction and operational stage air pollution

For criteria 10 14 only)
6 Informed by the AQA (carried out at the strategic assessment stage) a method statement and risk assessment for
preventing and minimising the impact of construction site activities on air quality is developed detailing appropriate
mitigation measures (refer to CN11).
7 Mitigation measures identified for construction and operation are implemented.
8 The developer and contractor follow the air quality requirements outlined within the CoCP, or equivalent.
One credit - Monitoring construction stage air quality

10 An air quality monitoring plan is developed by the project delivery team in line with national best practice guidance (refer
to CN4 and Appendix B - The Approved Standards and Weightings List (ASWL)), agreed with the local authority or other
appropriate statutory body and implemented by the contractor.
11 An individual is appointed to carry out monitoring of air quality on and around the site (refer to CN12) and undertakes
their role throughout construction of the asset (refer to CN13).
12 Site induction and specific training is provided for all site staff (refer to CN15) identifying how their activities may affect air
quality. This should include training on the procedures included within the CoCP, or equivalent, and how to eliminate or
reduce the potential for an air quality incident.
13 Lessons learnt and suggestions for improvement are collated and fed into the consultation evaluation (refer to ST 01
Consultation plan: criteria: 7 10 ).
14 The project delivery team prepare and hand over an 'operation stage' monitoring programme to the operator of the
infrastructure asset in line with national best practice guidance (refer to Appendix B - The Approved Standards and
Weightings List (ASWL) and ).
One credit - Reduction in pollutants from non-road mobile machinery

15 Engines for all non-road mobile machinery (refer to Relevant definitions) used during the construction stage either:
15.a Use engines compliant with national best practice legislation against the emission of gaseous and particulate
pollutants from internal combustion engines (refer to Appendix B - The Approved Standards and Weightings
List (ASWL)) OR
15.b Are fitted with suitable after-treatment devices compliant with published emission requirements for gaseous
and particulate pollutants (refer to Appendix B - The Approved Standards and Weightings List (ASWL))

None.
Compliance notes
CN1 Assessment of Where activities associated with the construction or operation of the asset are unlikely
projects with a to have a significant impact on air quality, the criteria still apply. However, the detail of
small impact on air the approach to AQA may be a simple analysis of the likely risks and appropriate
quality mitigation measures proposed.
CN2 Recognised BREEAM does not specify the approach or software models that should be used for
approach and the AQA. However, the appropriate air quality consultant should use their judgement
accompanying as to an appropriate approach and model and confirm these are acceptable to the
software models relevant local authority or other appropriate statutory body.
Recognised air quality approaches and air pollutant dispersion modelling software
includes the ADMS packages, Caline etc.
CN3 Local authority or If the local authority has expertise in AQA, they should be consulted early in the
other appropriate process in order for them to have the opportunity to review the proposals and advise
statutory body on the scope of the AQA of the particular infrastructure asset.
consultation Where the asset will be situated in more than one local authority area the discussions
should involve them all.
If the local authority does not have the expertise, another appropriate statutory body
(refer to Relevant definitions) should be given the opportunity to review and comment
on the proposed approach.
CN4 National best The appropriate air quality consultant should determine best practice guidance that is
practice guidance appropriate to the project, i.e. the construction and operational activities related to
the infrastructure asset. These should be produced by a reputable independent third
party and be current at the time of assessment (refer to Appendix B - The Approved
Standards and Weightings List (ASWL)).
It should be noted that relevant local guidance or legislation should also be
considered when undertaking the AQA.
CN5 Minimum content The AQA should cover the following as a minimum:
for AQA 1. A description of the project details and any alternatives being considered
2. A review of relevant and latest national and regional legislation and planning
policies in relation to air quality
3. An assessment of the baseline air quality (refer to CN6)
4. A description of air quality sensitive receptors, likely impacts and their proximity
to the project (refer to Relevant definitions and CN7).
5. The predicted air quality impacts on the identified sensitive receptors for the
following scenarios (refer to CN8):
a. The baseline
b. Construction stage (this may include more than one scenario and will
depend on the proposed activities, refer to CN9)
c. Future ordinary operation
d. Worst case operation.
6. Measures to prevent or mitigate the predicted negative air quality impacts (refer
to CN10), considering and proportionate to the size and significance of the
impact
7. Any local requirements for air quality, e.g. within local planning requirements or
similar
CN6 Baseline air quality The baseline air quality is determined using existing monitoring or modelling data or
preferably actual monitored data gathered by on-site monitoring throughout an
extended period.
Where there are particularly sensitive receptors or where small differences in air quality
will have a big impact, the air quality consultant should discuss using air quality data
that are monitored specifically for the project with the local authority to see if this is a
preferred way to proceed.
CN7 Sensitive receptor - Where biodiversity could be deemed a sensitive receptor, input from a suitably
ecology qualified ecologist (SQE) (refer to LUE 04 Ecological impact assessment and action
plan) should be sought to determine the sensitivity of the receptor. This information
should be used by the appropriate air quality consultant to identify the significance of
the effect in accordance with best practice.
CN8 Scenarios Differing air quality scenarios are determined to establish the full scope of the effects
of the project on local air quality. Scenarios are determined through consideration of a
range of factors such as:
1. Addition and reduction in traffic
2. Emissions from different processes (e.g. boilers, combined heat and power
plant (CHP) and other industrial processes)
3. The emissions from different processes under different modes of operation.
The cumulative effect of relevant factors and nearby air pollution sources outside the
boundary of the project are taken into account when determining the range of
scenarios.
CN9 Construction stage This includes an assessment (qualitative or quantitative) of pollutant emissions from
assessment of air demolition and construction activities following national best practice guidance (refer
quality impacts to Appendix B - The Approved Standards and Weightings List (ASWL)).
CN10 Appropriate Appropriate mitigation measures are:

mitigation
Established based on the likely impact on air quality through the scenario
measures
modelling
Informed by the adverse impacts identified in the assessment process.
CN11 Risk assessment The risk assessment and method statement should be site specific and cover the
and method duration of the construction stage. The method statement should cover all air quality
statement risks during construction, and therefore where construction processes evolve this
should be reviewed and updated where required. A minimum time scale for review is
set as every six months or where construction processes are changing on site.
It should be noted where the air quality impact assessment highlights there is no (or
low) risk of any negative impacts to air quality during construction criterion 6 can be
ignored. BRE Global expect this to be unusual, and only relevant to particularly small
infrastructure projects, where there is no risk of dust or transport pollution.
CN12 Individual This is an individual or team with the responsibility for implementing and monitoring
responsible for air quality plans and influencing site activities so that they comply with the air quality
implementing and requirements and objectives as detailed within the CoCP or equivalent. The individual
monitoring air must have sufficient authority, time on site and knowledge of construction to carry out
quality plans the role. This individual need not be an air quality specialist but should have experience
in air quality monitoring, sufficient understanding of air quality issues and how they are
affected by activities on site.
Note: Where other pollutants are also being monitored, one individual with sufficient
knowledge could be appointed to carry out these responsibilities for all pollution
types.
CN13 Role of the Their role includes:

individual 1. Carrying out monitoring before and during construction works (to include dust,
responsible for PM2.5,PM10and other gaseous pollutants such as nitrogen dioxide (NO2) and
carrying out site air volatile organic compounds (VOCs) if required by the local authority or other
quality monitoring appropriate statutory body (refer to CN14)
2. Varying monitoring to take account of the nature of the construction activities
3. Analysing the data collected and using this in regular air quality reports
4. Ensuring best practice guidance (refer to CN4) is being following to reduce
pollutant emissions from construction activities taking place
5. Monitoring and investigating the effectiveness of the air quality mitigation
measures on the local environment and sensitive receptors
6. Ensuring national air quality objectives (refer to Appendix B) have not been
breached by the project (refer to Other information)
7. Ensuring accessible avenues of complaint are available for stakeholders, such as
a complaints line or public site reception
8. Investigating and responding to events or causes for a change in air quality.
Events must be reported and corrective actions, if necessary, documented. This
may be triggered by complaints from local residents or a site inspection
9. Ensuring complaints received during the construction stage are promptly and
satisfactorily dealt with
10. Ensuring air quality data monitored by the project team, are publicly available
with appropriate metadata for understanding.
CN14 Monitoring of The monitoring carried out is determined by assessment based or means testing and
pollutants as agreed with the local authority or other appropriate statutory body. If a pollutant is
required by the shown to be relevant, then monitoring is required for this pollutant.
local authority For example, polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons (PAHs) would not be relevant for most
infrastructure projects, but for some, such as industrial processes including Anaerobic
Digestion Plants, these could be released and therefore should be monitored.
CN15 Site induction In the context of this issue this includes all site staff, including subcontractors,
training for all site undergoing activities that could be polluting to air quality if not appropriately
staff managed or mitigated.
Methodology
None.
Evidence
1 3 AQA. N/A N/A
6 N/A. Method statement and risk Monitored data and site

assessment inspection
10 N/A Air quality plan Monitored data or site

inspection
Air quality sensitive receptors

Landscapes, buildings or cluster areas where the occupiers or wildlife are likely to be sensitive to air pollution created
by the construction or operation of the asset, including:
1. Hospitals, schools and housing close to the development
2. Receptors alongside roads significantly affected by the development even if they are well away from the
development site
3. Air quality management areas
4. Ecologically sensitive areas.
The sensitive receptors for the project must be determined by the air quality consultant and agreed with the local
authority.
Appropriate air quality consultant

For the purpose of a BREEAM assessment, an individual achieving all of the following items can be considered to be an
appropriate air quality consultant:
1. Holds a university or higher education qualification or equivalent in science, technology, engineering or maths
(STEM)
2. Has a minimum of four years relevant experience (within the last five years). Such experience must clearly
demonstrate a practical understanding of factors affecting air quality in relation to construction and the built
environment. This may include experience in completing AQAs, air dispersion modelling, odour and dust
assessments and air quality management and monitoring.

of the asset.

A Code of Construction Practice (CoCP) is a formal document containing a series of measures and standards of work
to be applied by the contractors throughout the construction period. This will provide a consistent approach to the
management of construction activities on a project.
To demonstrate compliance with this issue the CoCP, or an equivalent document, must contain measures
appropriate to the project that mitigate the impact on air quality as defined within the AQA and method statement.
Non-road mobile machinery (NRMM)

Non-road mobile machinery (NRMM) is defined as any mobile machine, i.e. of transportable industrial equipment or
vehicle, (with or without bodywork), that is:
Not intended for carrying passengers or goods on the road
Installed with a combustion engine - either an internal spark ignition (SI) petrol engine, or a compression
ignition diesel engine
Examples of non-road mobile machinery include, but are not limited to:
1. Garden equipment, such as hedge trimmers and handheld chainsaws
2. Generators
3. Bulldozers
4. Pumps
5. Construction machinery
6. Industrial trucks
7. Fork lifts
8. Mobile cranes.
Peer review
Other information
Air Quality Standards

Air Quality Standards provide pollutant concentration values which are used as benchmarks for setting objectives. The
standards are set purely concerning existing scientific and medical evidence on the effects of the particular pollutant on health
and on the wider environment. Air quality legislation internationally and in particular in Europe is derived from health-based
evidence provided by the World Health Organisation (WHO). The WHO has published various guidelines for both global air
quality and European air quality based on the latest research from around the world 21 These guidelines are neither standards
nor legally binding criteria; they are designed to offer guidance in reducing the health impacts of air pollution based on expert
evaluation of current scientific evidence.

1 3 Two credits - criteria 5 14 - Very good
Aim
To ensure that measures are put in place to protect the local watercourse from pollution and environmental damage.

One credit - Construction and operation water pollution prevention strategy

1 A strategic review of the activities required to construct and operate the asset is completed before finalising the concept
stage by an appropriate consultant to determine the level of risk associated with water pollution and methods to
minimise this. The strategy identifies:
1.a All possible sources of pollutants from construction and operation of the asset, including any existing
contamination
1.b Possible pathways through which the pollutant may travel
1.c The possible receptors that may be affected, including location of surface water and groundwater, ecosystems
dependent on the water and the sensitivity of the underlying aquifer and its users, such as watercourse
protected from potentially polluting activities.
2 The strategy covers the minimum content (refer to CN2) to demonstrate that measures and procedures have been
investigated to reduce the likelihood of surface and groundwater pollution.
3 Relevant stakeholders (refer to Relevant definitions) are consulted on the content of the water pollution strategy and the
strategy amended to reflect feedback.
4.a To carry out a full assessment of surface and ground water resources within the location of the infrastructure
asset
4.b To carry out a detailed risk assessment for the construction and operation stages of the project and evaluate
further opportunities to reduce water pollution
4.c To apply the principles of the water pollution strategy to the project and implement measures appropriate to
the project in line with national best practice guidance (refer to Appendix B - The Approved Standards and

The stage of the issue is split into four parts:
Water pollution risk assessment (prerequisite)

Minimising watercourse pollution (construction) (one credit)
Monitoring water pollution (construction) (one credit)
Minimising watercourse pollution (operation) (one credit)
Pol 02 Water pollution Pollution
Prerequisite - Water pollution risk assessment

5 A detailed risk assessment is carried out by an appropriate consultant before finalising the project definition stage and
includes or builds on the content of the strategic review (criteria 1 2 ) for construction and operation (refer to CN4).
The assessment is informed by an appropriate pre-works survey (refer to Relevant definitions) and identifies:
5.a All water pollution hazards associated with the infrastructure and related activities and the level of potential risk,
including:
5.a.i The nature of pollution (source)
5.a.ii The way in which the pollution will reach the surface or ground water (pathways) and
5.a.iii The impact on the surface or ground water (receptor).
5.b The location and potential impact on surface water and groundwater
5.c Any existing contamination and risks of further dispersal of this contamination, e.g. opening new or additional
pathways
5.d Key habitats and designated areas on or adjacent to the site that could be affected by water course pollution,
e.g. local nature reserves, Special Areas of Conservation (SACs), Ramsar sites and other managed areas.
One credit - Minimising watercourse pollution (construction)

7 A plan for minimising watercourse pollution during construction is developed by the appropriate consultant in line with
national best practice guidance (refer to Appendix B - The Approved Standards and Weightings List (ASWL)) and
implemented on site. The plan builds upon the content of the construction and operation water pollution strategy
(criteria 1 2 ) and information from the water pollution risk assessment (criterion 5 ).
8 The plan covers the good practice requirements detailed in Table 28.
9 An appropriate consultant designs pollution prevention measures to ensure that the run-off from all hard surfaces
receives an appropriate level of treatment (refer to CN5). Measures are in accordance with guidance produced by the
appropriate statutory body (refer to Relevant definitions) and national best practice guidance (refer to Appendix B - The
Approved Standards and Weightings List (ASWL)).
10 Site induction and specific training is provided for all site staff (refer to CN7) identifying how their activities may affect
surface or ground water pollution. This should include training on the emergency response plan and how to eliminate or
reduce the potential for a water pollution incident.
One credit - Monitoring water pollution (construction)

12 A 'construction stage' protection and monitoring plan is developed and implemented by the contractor.
13 An individual is appointed to carry out on-site monitoring of ground and surface water pollution (refer to CN8) and
undertakes their role throughout construction (refer to CN9).
14 Lessons learnt and suggestions for improvement are collated and fed into the consultation evaluation (refer to ST 01
Consultation plan: criteria 7 10 ).
One credit - Minimising watercourse pollution (operation)

16 The good practice requirements in Table 29 are met.
17 An appropriate consultant designs systems to ensure that the run-off from all hard surfaces receive an appropriate level
of treatment (refer to CN5).
18 All water pollution prevention systems are designed and installed following the recommendations within national best
practice guidance (refer to Appendix B - The Approved Standards and Weightings List (ASWL)).
19 Where present, all external storage and delivery areas are designed and detailed following national best practice
guidance (refer to Appendix B - The Approved Standards and Weightings List (ASWL)).
20 The project delivery team prepare and hand over to the operator of the infrastructure asset:
20.a An emergency response plan for the operation stage to include procedures for dealing with pollution incidents
and emergencies
20.b A comprehensive and up-to-date drainage plan of the site (refer to Relevant definitions)
20.c Relevant maintenance agreements for the ownership, long term operation and maintenance of all specified
sustainable drainage systems (SuDS) (refer to Relevant definitions)
20.d An 'operation stage' protection and monitoring programme (refer to CN10).
See also CN12 for companies operating a portfolio of infrastructure assets.

Table 28: Construction stage implementation of good practice surface water and groundwater pollution prevention
measures
Item Requirements
Planning and set up 1. Any existing drainage on the site (grey and green) is included in site development drawings,
where it is to be retained, and flow characteristics determined.
2. Areas of high risk of contamination (refer to Relevant definitions) are located away from
watercourses and drainage paths and buffer strips and working or storage distances
from watercourse are identified.
3. Timing of site works with a high risk to watercourse are planned to avoid sensitive times of
the year.
4. An emergency response plan for the construction stage with a procedure for dealing with
incidents and emergencies is developed and communicated to all site staff at site
induction. Site staff responsible for taking action must be:
a. Aware of their responsibilities
b. Trained to use the necessary equipment such as spill control equipment and shut off
valves.
5. A process is in place to accommodate variation to the permanent works, temporary
works, programme or work methods and a clear communication strategy developed
between the site and /design team to ensure watercourse pollution is not exacerbated.
Site clearance 1. Unnecessary vegetation clearance is avoided to prevent destabilisation of the banks or bed
of the watercourse or make them more vulnerable to erosion.
2. Invasive or noxious plants (refer to Relevant definitions) are removed before works
commence.
3. Buffer zones are established around watercourses and protected habitats or species.
4. Removed vegetation and debris is prevented from entering watercourses.
Construction - Site 1. All fuel, oils and chemicals are stored on an impervious base within a bund able to contain
storage at least 110% of the volume stored.
2. Use biodegradable oil in all plant and machinery used in or near water.
Construction - 1. The volume of contaminated run-off being generated is minimised by:

Volume of a. Diverting clean water away from exposed soils and working areas
contaminated run- b. Minimising erosion, including erosion of exposed soils
off c. Preventing contaminated water from entering watercourses untreated.
Item Requirements
Construction - 1. Where engineering works are carried out in or on the banks of surface water, the work area
Working in or near is isolated and de-watered.
water 2. All discharges from de-watering must receive an appropriate level of treatment before
discharge. The pollutants likely to be present are assessed to identify the type of treatment
required.
Construction - 1. Before construction of a temporary river crossing an assessment is required to determine

temporary river whether (if possible):
crossings a. Works can be carried out from the banks
b. Existing bridges can be used for crossing the river.
2. Where a temporary river crossing is deemed necessary national best practice guidance for
construction of river crossings is followed (refer to Appendix B - The Approved Standards
and Weightings List (ASWL)).
Post construction - 1. When the permanent works are complete, the bed and banks of rivers or lakes or lochs
reinstatement of should be appropriately reinstated.
beds and banks 2. Surveys are carried out before the works commence on site to ensure the beds and banks
can be reinstated to their pre-works condition, or an improved condition where possible.
Table 29: Operational stage implementation of good practice surface water and groundwater pollution prevention
measures
Item Requirements
Site layout and 1. Areas of high risk of contamination (refer to Relevant definitions) are located away from
storage water courses and drainage paths.
2. All fuels, oils and chemicals are stored within a bund able to contain at least 110% of the
volume stored.
Volume of 1. The volume of contaminated run-off being generated is minimised by:

contaminated run- a. Diverting clean water away from exposed soils and working areas
off b. Minimising erosion, including erosion of exposed soils
c. Preventing contaminated water from entering watercourses untreated.
Treatment of 1. In areas with a low risk source of watercourse pollution, an appropriate level of pollution
contaminated prevention is provided, using appropriate SuDS techniques.
water 2. Where there is a high risk of contamination or spillage of substances an appropriate type of
separator (or an equivalent system) is installed in surface water drainage systems
3. Where the site has chemical or liquid gas storage areas, a means of containment is fitted to
the site drainage system (i.e. shut-off valves) to prevent the escape of chemicals to natural
watercourses (in the event of a spillage or bunding failure).
Compliance notes
projects with a to have a significant negative impact on watercourse, the criteria still apply. However,
small impact on the detail of the strategic review may be a simple analysis of the likely risks and
watercourse appropriate mitigation measures proposed. A qualitative risk assessment would be
adequate in these situations.
CN2 Minimum content The water pollution strategy should cover the following as a minimum:
for water pollution 1. Options for locating the infrastructure asset and high risk construction activities
strategy away from surface water and groundwater that is used for the abstraction of
drinking water (refer to CN3)
2. A review of risks associated with prevention measures or management
procedures and planning how these would operate during construction and
operation
3. A review of watercourse legislation and regulations for construction and
operation
4. Identification of watercourse incidents and emergencies (refer to Relevant
definitions) which could arise during construction and operation and establishing
proposals for potential measures and emergency procedures
5. Planning for site activities so that works which are a risk to water pollution avoid
sensitive times of the year, e.g. fish spawning, fish migration time and bird
nesting season
6. Allocation of sufficient space for SuDS, including facilities such as settlement
ponds for use during construction and options for retaining or converting these
into permanent SuDS to serve the operational asset assessed
7. Exploring options for operational processes that seek to minimise waste
effluent and other types of waste.
CN3 Location of the The location of the asset and locating construction activities away from ground and
asset away from surface water is required to minimise the risk of water pollution. Where this is not
ground and surface technically possible, for example, where the asset must be located in or near water or
water there are site restraints, the appropriate consultant should identify prevention
methods, using construction techniques and technologies to control spillages, run-off,
leaching and direct discharge into the watercourse.
CN4 Risk assessment It is important that the design and construction aspects of the infrastructure asset are
covering closely aligned so that risks and opportunities to eliminate or reduce these are
construction and considered holistically.
operation In regards to pollution of surface and groundwater, there is a risk that there could be
interchange of pollution between surface and ground water and pollution sources
and pathways may be common. As such this should be addressed within the risk
assessment and appropriate action taken.
CN5 Appropriate level In all cases the appropriate consultant should use their professional judgement to
of treatment determine the optimum strategy for minimising watercourse pollution and, where
required, pollution prevention measures should be supported by calculations or
numerical modelling to ensure pollution does not occur. Treatment and disposal
methods should be considered dependent upon the type of contamination expected.
Examples include:
1. Sustainable drainage systems (SuDS) (refer to CN6)
2. Settlement lagoons
3. Filtration including mechanical filtration
4. Infiltration or pump to grassland
5. Discharge to sewer
6. Disposal of water off site or tanker off site.
For the construction stage options, the use of SuDS should be explored and
preference given to these systems where they will provide suitable treatment.
For the operational stage SuDS must be prioritised where technically viable.
CN6 Sustainable Where SuDS are to be included as a permanent feature of the constructed asset (e.g.
drainage systems ponds or wetlands) it should be possible to use the area designated for the SuDS to
used for the deal with drainage or contaminated run-off from the construction site.
construction and
operation of the
asset
CN7 Site induction In the context of this issue this includes all site staff, including subcontractors,
training for all site undergoing activities that could be polluting to watercourse if not appropriately
staff managed or mitigated.
CN8 Individual An individual with responsibility for monitoring ground and water course pollution
responsible for and influencing site activities so that they comply with the required pollution
monitoring ground prevention plans and guidelines, and that the measures outlined in the water pollution
and water course monitoring plan are implemented. The individual must have sufficient authority, time
pollution on site and knowledge of construction to carry out the role. This individual need not be
a specialist but should have experience in water quality sampling, sufficient
understanding of water pollution issues and how they are affected by activities on site.
types.

individual 1. Using data collected on 'receptors' before the construction stage began as a
responsible for site reference during construction to identify where pollution is occurring
monitoring 2. Ensuring guidance and procedures for maintaining, inspecting and testing the
pollution prevention measures and any existing pipework at the site is followed
3. Monitoring of land, surface water or groundwater (where necessary) to ensure
pollution prevention measures are effective
4. Formally recording monitoring results to demonstrate the land and water
courses during and post construction are in a satisfactory state (refer to CN11)
5. Ensuring national best practice guidance, legislation and regulations are being
adhered to
7. Investigating and responding to events, or causes for a change in water quality.
Events must be reported and corrective actions, if necessary, documented. This
may be triggered by complaints from local residents or a site inspection
satisfactorily dealt with.
CN10 Operation stage The protection and monitoring programme for the operation stage must include:
protection and 1. The operational water pollution risk assessment (refer to criterion 5 )
monitoring 2. Guidance and procedures for maintaining, inspecting and testing the water
programme pollution prevention measures at the site throughout the life of the asset to
ensure effective operation
3. Reference data collection requirements for substances used during construction
for which pollution could or is occurring
4. Monitoring requirements of land, surface water or groundwater (where
necessary) to ensure pollution prevention measures are effective and to provide
warning of the failure of pollution prevention measures
5. A formal record of the monitoring results at handover to demonstrate the land
at the installation is in a satisfactory state (refer to CN11)
6. Identification of who will have ongoing long term responsibility for
implementing the programme.
CN11 Land and Land and watercourses are deemed to be in a satisfactory state based on a review
watercourses in a from the appropriate consultant and where:
satisfactory state 1. The project complies with all relevant legislation
2. The situation post construction is considered to be the same or better than pre-
construction
3. The project has not incurred any regulatory penalties.
A formal record of the appropriate consultant's report including robust justification
for deeming the land and watercourses to be of a satisfactory state is presented.
CN12 Companies Many operators of infrastructure will be in the business of operating a portfolio of
operating a infrastructure assets. In these businesses, interdependencies between assets in the
portfolio of portfolio may be quite significant and therefore management and maintenance
infrastructure procedures handed over by the operator must align with their corporate approach to
assets preserve and enhance the value of these assets as a portfolio.
This is also detailed within the Resilience section.
Methodology
None.
Evidence
1 2 Water pollution strategy N/A N/A
5 N/A Water pollution risk assessment As interim design stage
7 N/A Minimising water course Monitored data or site

pollution plan inspection
20 N/A Emergency response plan As interim design stage
A consultant with qualifications and experience relevant to surface and groundwater risk assessment, designing SuDS
and pollution prevention measures and completing run-off calculations. Where complex prevention measures are
required, this must be a specialist hydrological engineer.
Appropriate pre-works survey

An appropriate pre-works survey must include both of the following:
1. Desk based review of all available reports, site plans, operational records, material inventories, records of
pollution incidents, etc. to establish the environmental setting and history of any land or groundwater pollution at
the site.
2. Site reconnaissance (or walk over) to make site based observations and verify the desk based review.
Appropriate type of separators

There are different types of oil separator that are designed for different functions, as follows:
1. Class 1 Separators: These are designed to achieve a concentration of less than 5 mg/l oil under standard test
conditions. They should be used when the separator is required to remove very small oil droplets, such as those
arising from car park run-off.
2. Class 2 Separators: These are designed to achieve a concentration of less than 100 mg/l oil under standard test
conditions. They are suitable for dealing with discharges where a lower quality requirement applies or for
trapping large spillages.
Both classes can be produced as 'full retention' or 'bypass' separators:
1. Full retention separators: These treat the flow that can be delivered by the drainage system, which is normally
equivalent to the flow generated by a rainfall intensity of 50mm/hr.
2. Bypass separators: These fully treat all flows generated by rainfall rates of up to 5mm/hr. Flows above this rate
are allowed to bypass the separator. These separators are used when it is an acceptable risk not to provide full
treatment for high flows.

of the asset.
If they do not produce relevant guidance, only the national best practice guidance as detailed in Appendix B needs to
be followed.
Areas of high risk of contamination

For BREEAM, areas of high risk to watercourse pollution include:
1. Fuel and chemical storage
2. Refuelling areas
3. Material stockpiles
4. Vehicle and equipment washing areas
5. Site compounds, parking areas and vehicle manoeuvring areas
6. Waste disposal facilities.
Comprehensive and up-to-date drainage plan

For BREEAM a comprehensive and up-to-date drainage plan includes:
1. The location of and direction of flow for all sewers and drains on the site
2. The location of all drain covers and gullies
3. All surface water drain outfalls
4. The destination of all foul sewers or combined drains
5. The location of all pollution control facilities, for example oil separators
6. A plan of sources - pathways - receptors on and surrounding the site.
Groundwater
Groundwater is all water below the surface of the ground in the saturation zone and in direct contact with the ground
or subsoil.
Invasive or noxious plants

Non-indigenous species that adversely affect the habitats they invade economically, environmentally or ecologically.
Low risk areas

Low risk areas can be defined as areas where the risk of contamination or spillage of substances such as petrol and oil
is reduced. For this credit, roofs and small car parks may be considered as low risk areas.
Ramsar site
Ramsar sites are wetlands of international importance designated under the Ramsar Convention.
For this issue relevant stakeholders include the appropriate statutory body, local flood specialists, drainage Boards,
river trusts and water companies.
Surface water
Surface water include rivers, lakes, reservoirs, ponds, streams, canals, ditches, including those that are temporarily dry,
estuaries and coastal waters up to three miles offshore.
Sustainable drainage systems (SuDS)

A sequence of management practices and control structures designed to drain surface water in a more sustainable
fashion than some conventional techniques. Examples of SuDS devices include:
1. Holding ponds
2. Swales
3. Reed beds
4. Permeable paving - in areas where local geological and hydrological conditions allow this to function, e.g. block
paved surface on permeable subbase over gravel bed to store the water and allow it to seep into the soil. For less
permeable soils, the gravel layer might be deeper and the water taken to a soakaway although this is not an
option in some areas
5. Local or centralised soakaways either as full systems or as overflow or holding systems, in areas where local
geological and hydrological conditions allow them to function
6. Run-off from hard surfaces collected as a part of a rainwater harvesting system
7. Run-off from hard surfaces directed to a local soakaway or other holding facility such as tanks, ponds, swales etc.
8. Green roofs.
Watercourse
For the purpose of this issue 'watercourse' refers to surface and groundwater (as defined above).
Watercourse incidents and emergencies

Possible incidents and emergencies to watercourse include:
1. Pollution incidents such as spillages, failure of temporary works, bank collapse, vandalism and fire
2. Extreme weather events such as heavy rainfall, flooding and severe frost or snow.
Other information
The source-pathway-receptor approach

The source-pathway-receptor approach has the following terms:
The source is the activity (for example, the discharge of sewage effluent to an infiltration system, a landfill, etc.).
The pathway is through engineered measures (for example, a landfill lining system, infiltration system, etc.) and the
migration of contaminants through the unsaturated zone and saturated zone to an agreed receptor incorporating
all the processes of attenuation that may be present.
The receptor is a groundwater dependent ecosystem or use of groundwater and / or the groundwater resource
itself or any other identified conservation-site that may be at risk).

available available
1 4 One credit - criteria 6 12 (Monitoring construction noise and

vibration) - Very good
Aim
To manage and mitigate noise and vibration pollution from the asset and its construction.

One credit - Construction and operational noise and vibration strategy

1 A strategic review of the noise and vibration likely to arise due to the construction and operation of the asset is
completed before finalising the concept stage by a suitably qualified acoustician (SQA) (refer to Relevant definitions and
CN2).
2 For operational noise and vibration, the SQA defines project specific benchmarks for the following with reference to
Table 31 and guidance contained in local or national planning documentation for noise and vibration (refer to Appendix
B - The Approved Standards and Weightings List (ASWL), CN3, CN4 and CN5):
2.a The lowest observed adverse effect level (LOAEL)
2.b The significant observed adverse effect level (SOAEL).
3 The proposals for these benchmarks are reviewed by either a local planning authority or other appropriate statutory
body (refer to Relevant definitions) and are confirmed to be appropriate for the project.
4.a The noise and vibration strategic review (criterion 1 )
4.b The noise and vibration impacts resulting from the construction and operation of the asset, including residual
impacts
4.c Proposals for mitigating noise and vibration impacts during construction and operation.
5.a To evaluate further opportunities to minimise noise and vibration during construction and operation
5.b To apply the principles of the noise and vibration strategy to the project.

Detailed construction and operational noise and vibration assessment (prerequisite)

Monitoring construction noise and vibration (one credit)
Operational noise and vibration (up to three credits)
Pol 03 Noise and vibration Pollution
Prerequisite - Detailed construction and operational noise and vibration assessment

6 A SQA:
6.a Carries out a detailed noise and vibration impact assessment, identifying the location and details of noise and
vibration sensitive receptors
6.b Undertakes a baseline noise and vibration survey in accordance with the guiding principles of the ISO 1996 series
(refer to CN6) and establishes existing exposure to noise and vibration
6.c Predicts exposure to noise and vibration from the construction and operation of the asset for each sensitive
receptor and
6.d Makes an assessment of the impact and effect for each sensitive receptor based on the data and available
national best practice guidance (refer to CN7)
6.e Confirms the SOAEL and LOAEL benchmarks identified at the Strategic stage of this issue are still appropriate OR
determines these in accordance with criteria 2 3
7 For the construction stage, a noise and vibration plan:
7.a Is informed by the noise and vibration strategic review (criterion 1 )
7.b Is developed by the SQA in compliance with national best practice guidance for construction noise and vibration
(refer to Appendix B - The Approved Standards and Weightings List (ASWL) and CN7) and is implemented on
site through the Code of Construction Practice (CoCP), or equivalent (refer to Relevant definitions).
7.c Includes a process for early and ongoing engagement with relevant stakeholders (refer to Relevant definitions),
to keep them informed of likely noise and vibration impacts and effects and actions that have been taken to
mitigate these
7.d Includes a monitoring plan for noise and vibration on site.
8 In alignment with national pollution regulations, where present, action is taken to acquire consent to construct before
construction begins. This application for consent should detail the measures employed to demonstrate best practicable
means (BPM) for minimising noise and vibrations resulting from the works (refer to Relevant definitions).
One credit - Monitoring construction noise and vibration

10 An individual is appointed to carry out on-site monitoring of noise and vibration (refer to CN8) and undertakes their role
throughout construction (refer to CN9).
11 Site induction and specific training is provided for all site staff (refer to CN10), identifying how noise and vibration from
their activities may affect sensitive receptors. This should include training on the procedures included within the noise and
vibration plan and how to reduce the potential impact on sensitive receptors.
12 Lessons learnt and suggestions for improvement are collated and feed into the consultation evaluation (refer to ST 01
Up to three credits - Operational noise and vibration

14 A noise and vibration plan is developed by the SQA for the in-use or operation stage of the asset. The plan:
14.a Is informed by the noise and vibration strategic review (criterion 1 )
14.b Follows national best practice guidance (refer to CN7)
14.c Identifies measures to reduce noise and vibration levels to best practice levels.
15 Measures to minimise the risks and impacts of noise and vibration are implemented and do not compromise
functionality.
16 Measures implemented achieve best practice levels as identified in Table 30
Table 30 : Credits associated with reduction in operational noise and vibration
Requirement Associated credits
Operational noise and vibration is less than or equal to LOAEL 3
Operational noise and vibration is less than SOAEL through use of BPM* 2
Operational noise and vibration has been effectively managed through use of BPM* 1
* The local planning authority or other regulatory authority must confirm best practicable means (BPM) have been
achieved (refer to Relevant definitions).

Table 31: The Noise Exposure Hierarchy
Perception Examples of outcomes Increasing effect Action

level
Not No effect No observed effect No specific

noticeable measures required
Noticeable Noise can be heard but does not cause any change No observed No specific
and not in behaviour or attitude. Can slightly affect the adverse effect measures required
intrusive acoustic character of the area but not such that
there is a perceived change in the quality of life.
Lowest observed
adverse effect level
(LOAEL)
Noticeable Noise can be heard and causes small changes in Observed adverse Mitigate and reduce
and intrusive behaviour or attitude, e.g. turning up volume of effect to a minimum
television, speaking more loudly; where there is no
alternative ventilation, having to close windows for
some of the time because of the noise. Potential for
some reported sleep disturbance. Affects the
acoustic character of the area such that there is a
perceived change in the quality of life.
Significant observed
adverse effect level
(SOAEL)
Perception Examples of outcomes Increasing effect Action

level
Noticeable The noise causes a material change in behaviour or Significant observed Avoid
and disruptive attitude, e.g. avoiding certain activities during adverse effect
periods of intrusion; where there is no alternative
ventilation, having to keep windows closed most of
the time because of the noise. Potential for sleep
disturbance resulting in difficulty getting to sleep,
premature awakening and difficulty getting back to
sleep. Quality of life diminished due to change in
acoustic character of the area.
Noticeable Extensive and regular changes in behaviour or an Unacceptable Prevent

and very inability to mitigate effect of noise leading to adverse effect
disruptive psychological stress or physiological effects, e.g.
regular sleep deprivation or awakening; loss of
appetite, significant, medically definable harm, e.g.
auditory and non-auditory.
Compliance notes
CN1 Scope of this Not all projects will have noise and vibration impacts, either during construction or
BREEAMissue operation. Therefore it may not be necessary to take forward proposals for either of
these measures beyond the initial scoping.
Criterion 1 within the strategic review should be completed for all projects with
proposals for noise or vibration as relevant to the project.
Criterion 2 and 3 are only applicable to projects with operational noise.
Criteria 6 12 are applicable to all projects, however, dependent on the construction
activities only noise or vibration may be relevant.
The operational noise and vibration credits are only applicable to projects that will
have an operational impact. Therefore criteria 13 16 will be filtered from the
assessment for projects with no operational noise, e.g. a retaining wall.
CN2 Minimum content The noise and vibration strategy should identify the following as a minimum:
for the noise and 1. The sources and nature of existing noise on and around the site
vibration strategy 2. Noise and vibration sensitive receptors (refer to Relevant definitions), particularly
numbers of people and habitats potentially adversely affected
3. The type of noise or vibration that may be generated by the different activities
on site, including demolition and construction
4. The type of noise or vibration that may be generated due to the operation of
the asset including maintenance activities
5. The predicted distance the noise or vibration is likely to travel where adverse
effects might occur, e.g. creation of noise maps
6. The kind of media the noise may travel through (airborne, ground-borne, water-
borne, structure-borne)
7. Measures to mitigate noise and vibration.
CN3 Noise and vibration Noise and vibration benchmarks for the SOAEL and LOAEL levels are determined by
benchmarks the SQA for review and agreement with the local planning authority or other
regulatory authority (see Relevant definitions). These are developed considering the
noise and vibration sources relevant to the infrastructure project including, as
appropriate:
1. Airborne noise
2. Ground-borne noise and vibration
3. Water-borne noise and vibration
4. Structure-borne noise and vibration.
For example, an offshore wind farm may require examination of the potential for
water-borne noise and its impact on sensitive ecosystems. An underground railway
system may require examination of the potential for ground-borne noise, which will
often be considered alongside vibration. Whereas airborne noise may be the most
appropriate for other projects, such as roads.
Benchmarks should be derived for SOAEL and LOAEL considering:
1. All local sensitive receptors
2. The identified risks and impacts on these receptors because of the predicted
noise and vibration from the project
3. That impacts on receptors may vary because of the same noise and vibration
level, e.g. hospitals and business parks, humans and wildlife species. As a result it
may be necessary to provide different LOAEL and SOAEL depending on the
nature of sensitive receptors present.
CN4 Appropriate Table 31 details the noise exposure hierarchy Although the table refer to noise, the
benchmarks for approach should also be applied to vibration and benchmarks derived by the SQA for
increasing effect both noise and vibration.
levels
CN5 Sensitive receptor - Where wildlife is defined as a sensitive receptor, input from a suitably qualified
wildlife ecologist (refer to LUE 04 Ecological impact assessment and action plan) is sought to
determine the appropriate values.
CN6 Guiding principles ISO/DIS 1996-1 Description, measurement and assessment of environmental noise:
of ISO/DIS 1996 includes guiding principles for the description and assessment of environmental noise,
basic requirements and definitions. Surveys undertaken in accordance with other
standards may also satisfy the basic requirements and definitions within ISO/DIS
1996-1. This standard is cited to ensure consistency in measurement and description
of noise surveys. Assessments in accordance with the requirements of national
standards in alignment with the ISO 1996 series for construction or operation would
satisfy this requirement (where relevant to the type of noise).
CN7 National best Given the large variations in types and effects of noise, specialist technical guidance or
practice guidelines good practice guides may exist examining noise sources of particular character and
for noise and complexity.
vibration ( For example, operational wind turbine noise will be different to that generated from a
operation) road or airport.
The design team should demonstrate they have used appropriate best practice
guidance for the operation of the asset type.
CN8 Individual An individual with responsibility for monitoring noise and vibration and influencing site
responsible for activities so that measures outlined in the construction noise and vibration plan are
monitoring noise implemented. The individual must have sufficient authority, time on site and
and vibration knowledge of construction to carry out the role. This individual need not be an
acoustic specialist but should have sufficient understanding of noise and vibration
issues and how they are affected by activities on site.
types.

individual 1. Ensuring effective management of noise and vibration from the construction
responsible for site activities that impact on the local environment and surrounding sensitive
monitoring receptors. This can be measured through measurement of noise and vibration
or analysis of complaints received (refer to CN11)
3. Investigating and responding to events or causes for a change in noise and
vibration. Events must be reported and corrective actions, if necessary,
documented. This may be triggered by complaints from local residents or a site
inspection
satisfactorily dealt with
5. Ensuring current and historic noise and vibrational data, as monitored by the
project team, are publicly available with appropriate metadata for
understanding.
CN10 Site induction In the context of this issue this includes all site staff, including subcontractors
training for all site undergoing activities that result in noise and vibration that may have a significant
staff adverse effect on sensitive receptors if not appropriately managed or mitigated.
CN11 Methods to The method of monitoring effective noise and vibration management will vary
monitor effective depending on the type of sensitive receptor.
management of For human receptors the individual responsible for monitoring noise and vibration
noise and vibration may identify the types of complaints received, the action taken and the outcomes and
circumstances when any specified noise conditions were contravened.
For non-human receptors such as a sensitive wildlife population, measurements of
noise or vibration at the receptor would be required based on advice from a suitably
qualified ecologist.
Measurement should be taken during different stages of the construction based on
the predicted noise profile and as advised by the SQA.
Methodology
None.
Evidence
1 Noise and vibration strategy N/A N/A
2 Calculations for LOAEL and N/A N/A

SOAEL benchmarks
7 N/A Noise and vibration plan Monitored data or site

inspection
Application of Consent
Where the construction of an asset is likely to result in noise or vibration, an application for consent must be submitted
to the local authority in order to demonstrate best practicable means for minimising noise and vibration. This
application typically should include the following: the works, and the method by which they are carried out; and the
steps proposed to be taken to minimise noise and vibration resulting from the works.
This is only applicable where a local planning authority or other appropriate statutory body exists within the area
where the asset will be constructed.

of the asset.
Best practicable means (BPM)

BPM or 'all reasonable steps', is the provision of mitigation that ensures all reasonable measures have been taken to
reduce exposure to noise and vibration. This includes investigation of alternative layouts and materials that reduce
noise or vibration. BPM recognises that there are technical and financial limits on actions that might reasonably be
required to abate a nuisance. For BREEAM, BPM must be confirmed through an independent review of the project's
noise mitigation measures by the local planning authority or other regulatory authority.

To demonstrate compliance within this issue, the CoCP, or an equivalent document, must contain measures
appropriate to the project that mitigate the impact of noise and vibration as detailed in the construction stage noise
and vibration plan.
Effect of a noise or vibration impact on a sensitive receptor

The noise or vibration effect is linked to the level of the impact, the sensitivity of the receptor and other key matters
such as the existing acoustic environment.
Impact
The introduction of a new sound or vibration into an existing environment.
Low Observed Adverse Effect Level (LOAEL)

Refer to Other information section.
Noise and vibration sensitive receptors

Landscapes or buildings where the occupiers or wildlife are likely to be sensitive to noise or vibration created because
of the construction and operation of the asset, including:
1. Residential areas, nearby dwellings and shared community open areas
2. Hospitals, health centres, care homes, doctor's surgeries etc.
3. Schools, colleges and other teaching establishments
4. Libraries
5. Places of worship
6. Historic, heritage or listed buildings
7. Nature reserves, wildlife areas, historic landscapes, parks and gardens
8. Special Areas of Conservation (SACs), Ramsar sites and other managed areas
9. Any other development that can be considered noise or vibration sensitive.
No Observed Effect Level (NOEL)

Peer review
Ramsar site
For this issue, relevant stakeholders are receptors sensitive to noise or vibration due to the construction of the asset.
This is likely to include, where present, local residents, businesses, operators of community groups and social
infrastructure and ecologists (where local wildlife is affected).
Significant Observed Adverse Effect Level (SOAEL)

Suitably qualified acoustician (SQA)

An individual achieving all the following items can be considered to be 'suitably qualified' for the purpose of a BREEAM
assessment:
1. Holds a degree, PhD or equivalent qualification in acoustics or sound testing
demonstrate a practical understanding of factors affecting acoustics in relation to construction and the built
environment; including, acting in an advisory capacity to provide recommendations for suitable acoustic
performance levels and mitigation measures
Suitably qualified ecologist

See LUE 04 Ecological impact assessment and action plan.
Vibration
Vibration can be defined as oscillation of matter about a fixed reference point. Units of displacement, velocity or
acceleration are used to describe and quantify vibrations. 22
Other information
BREEAM Operational noise and vibration benchmarks

The methodology for operational noise and vibration used in this issue is derived from the toxicology approach 23 used by
the World Health Organisation.
In this approach, instead of seeking to apply a static 'one size fits all' acoustics criteria, at the strategic stage an assessment will
define values following criteria, based on guidance, research and good practice available at the time, and evaluate the
predicted levels from the development against these criteria.
No Observed Effect Level (NOEL) - This is the level below which no effect can be detected. In simple terms, below this
level there is no detectable effect on health and quality of life due to any noise or vibration.
Lowest Observed Effect Level (LOAEL) - This is the level above which adverse effects on health and quality of life can be
detected.
Significant Observed Adverse Effect Level (SOAEL) - This is the level above which significant adverse effects on health
and quality of life occur.
The UK government web resource Planning Practice Guidance for Noise provides guidance on how these are arrived at, in the
form of the table of noise hierarchy (reproduced in Table 31). Although the tables and guidance all refer to noise, the
approach can be applied to vibration without difficulty as criteria and values are defined specific to each project.
Pol 04 Light pollution Pollution
Pol 04 Light pollution

1 2 None
Aim
To ensure that external lighting is concentrated in appropriate areas and that lighting is minimised, reducing unnecessary light
pollution, energy consumption and nuisance.

One credit - Construction and operational lighting strategy

1 A strategic review of the lighting required to construct and operate the asset (refer to CN2) is completed before
finalising the concept stage by an appropriate member of the project team.
2.a The strategic review of the lighting (criterion 1 )
2.b The impact of lighting resulting from the construction and operation of the asset
2.c Proposals for mitigating the impact of lighting during construction and operation.
3 The project delivery team's or contractor's brief includes a requirement to evaluate opportunities to minimise light
pollution during construction and operation.

Prerequisite - Minimising construction stage light pollution

For criteria 5 8 only.
4 Building on the strategic review of the lighting carried out at the strategic stage of assessment (criteria 1 2 ), a
temporary lighting plan (refer to CN3) is developed by the contractor or project team and implemented on site through
the Code of Construction Practice (CoCP) or equivalent (refer to Relevant definitions).
One credit - Monitoring construction stage light pollution

5 Criterion 4 has been achieved.
6 An individual is appointed to carry out on-site monitoring of light pollution (refer to CN5) and undertakes their role
7 Site induction and specific training is provided for all site staff (refer to CN7) identifying how lighting used to perform
their activities may affect sensitive receptors. This should include:
7.a The appropriate use of portable and temporary light sources
7.b How site activities may affect light pollution
7.c Staff responsibilities with respect to minimising light pollution.
8 Lessons learnt and suggestions for improvement are collated and feed into the consultation evaluation (refer to ST 01
One credit - Minimising operational light pollution

EITHER
9 External light pollution has been eliminated through effective design that removes the need for external lighting without
adversely affecting the safety and security of the site and its users.
OR alternatively, where the asset does have external lighting, one credit can be awarded as follows:
10 Lighting for permanent fixtures is designed in compliance with the limits set for light technical parameters in section 2.7
of CIE 150-2003 24 and table 2 of CIE 126-1997 25.Alternative national best practice guidance is also used where
relevant (refer to Appendix B - The Approved Standards and Weightings List (ASWL) and CN9).
11 Illuminated advertisements, where specified, comply with the uniformity of illuminance and maximum illuminance
(CD/m2) outlined in Table 32 (refer to CN8).
12 Where safety, security and advertising lighting is to be used between 23:00 hrs and 06:00hrs:
12.a Illuminated advertisements comply with Table 32 as detailed above except within Zone E1 where the maximum
luminance value shall be zero past curfew
12.b Safety and security lighting complies with the lower levels of lighting recommended during these hours in CIE
150-2003 and CIE 126-197
13 The lighting implemented for the fully constructed asset is designed considering the content of the construction and
operational lighting strategy and further identifies:
13.a The desirability for decorative lighting and the necessity for safety and security lighting
13.b The type and placement of light fittings in and around the asset and opportunities for zoning or limiting lighting
to critical locations on site (refer to CN4)
13.c Measures to minimise the risks and impacts of light pollution without compromising health and safety
13.d Requirements for a curfew provision, where appropriate (refer to Relevant definitions).

Table 32: Recommendations for maximum luminance (CD/[m2])
Environmental Zone Zone E0 Zone E1 Zone E2 Zone E3 Zone E4
< 10.00 N/A 100 600 800 1000
10.00 N/A N/A 300 600 600
Table 33: Environmental zone descriptions
Environmental Surrounding Lighting environment Examples

Zone
E0 Protected. Dark. UNESCO Starlight Reserves, IDA Dark Sky

Parks
E1 Natural. Intrinsically dark. National parks, Areas of Outstanding

National Beauty etc.
Environmental Surrounding Lighting environment Examples

Zone
E2 Rural. Low district brightness. Village, or relatively dark outer suburban

locations.
E3 Suburban. Medium district Small town centres or suburban locations.

brightness.
E4 Urban. High district brightness. Town or city centres with high levels of
night time activity.
Compliance notes
projects with a small to have a significant impact on light pollution, the criteria still apply. However, the detail
impact light within the lighting strategy may be a simple analysis of the likely risks and appropriate
pollution mitigation measures proposed.
CN2 Minimum content The lighting strategy should identify the following as a minimum:
for the strategic 1. Identification of light sensitive receptors (refer to Relevant definitions) particularly
lighting review areas adjacent to the project which are likely to be sensitive to spill light
2. Opportunities for minimising the impact of lighting during construction and
operation
3. Consideration of differences in the construction and operation stage in regards
to lighting.
CN3 Temporary lighting The temporary lighting plan must require as a minimum:
plan 1. All health and safety requirements and legislation are met in respect to
construction site lighting
2. All light is directed away from the sky
3. Light shines directly onto the site and away from:
a. Windows of dwellings or other sensitive buildings (e.g. hospitals)
b. Drivers of approaching vehicles (including trains and other transport sources)
4. There is no light spill into areas which do not need to be lit, particularly areas
containing wildlife
5. Zoning is determined to allow lower limits of obtrusive light in more sensitive
areas (refer to CN4 and Relevant definitions)
6. Opportunities for limiting lighting to daylight hours and to critical locations on site
7. Lights are switched off at times when work is not taking place
8. A stated commitment to the avoidance of light pollution and obtrusive lighting.
Where any, i.e. above cannot be met due to a breach in H&S regulation or for security
reasons associated with the operation of the construction site the lighting plan should
include, or be accompanied by, a justification explaining why the circumstances are
unavoidable and detail any mitigation measures that are being incorporated.
CN4 Zoning of lighting Based on the scale or type of the project the number and size of lighting zones are
determined by the project team.
CN5 Individual An individual with responsibility for monitoring light pollution and influencing site
responsible for activities so that measures outlined in the temporary lighting plan are implemented.
monitoring light The individual must have sufficient authority, time on site and knowledge of
pollution construction to carry out the role. This individual need not be a lighting specialist but
should have sufficient understanding of light pollution issues and how they are affected
by activities on site.
knowledge could be appointed to carry out these responsibilities for all pollution types.

individual 1. Promoting the aim of the temporary lighting plan through site inductions, daily
responsible for site briefings or similar so that the impact of light pollution on the local environment
monitoring and sensitive receptors is minimised
2. Establishing accessible avenues of complaint for stakeholders, such as a
complaints line or public site reception
3. Investigating and responding to events or causes for a change in light. Events
must be reported and corrective actions, if necessary, documented. This may be
triggered by complaints from local residents or a site inspection
satisfactorily dealt with.
CN7 Site induction In the context of this issue this includes all site staff, including subcontractors
training for all site undergoing activities that use lighting that may impact sensitive receptors if not
staff appropriately managed or mitigated. This is particularly relevant for operatives using
lighting equipment.
CN8 Safety signs The application of criterion 11 does not apply to safety signs, although these should
be lit with consideration for avoidance of upward light pollution where possible.
CN9 Exemptions to The limits recommended in CIE 150-2003 and CIE 126-1997 are not appropriate for
application of some infrastructure lighting components. They would not be applicable to the
design guidance in following:
1. Lighthouse lanterns
2. Directional security or safety searchlights
3. Lasers
4. Tall building or structure warning lights
5. Runway or landing pad marker lights
6. Traffic signals, including railway and waterway signals
7. Lights on vehicles.
Methodology
None.
Evidence:
c Strategy stage Interim design stage Final post-construction stage
All One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in the BREEAM evidential requirements section
can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.
1 Strategic review of the project N/A N/A

lighting
4 N/A Temporary lighting plan Refer to generic evidence

requirement above

To demonstrate compliance within this issue, the CoCP, or an equivalent document, must contain measures
appropriate to the project that mitigate the impact of light pollution as defined in the temporary lighting plan.
Curfew provision
The time after which stricter requirements (for the control of obtrusive light) will apply to lighting on the asset and
across the site, or within more sensitive areas (refer to light sensitive receptors definition below). The CIE Guide on the
Limitations of the Effects of Obtrusive Light from Outdoor Lighting Installations26 recommends post-curfew hours
between 23:00 and 06:00 hours although an earlier curfew of 21:30 may be more appropriate if the project is in a
rural zone.
Light pollution
Spill light which, because of the quantitative, directional or spectral attributes in a given context, gives rise to
annoyance, discomfort, distraction or a reduction in the ability to see essential information.
Light sensitive receptors

Landscapes, buildings or cluster areas where the occupiers or wildlife are likely to be sensitive to light created by the
construction or operation of the asset, including:
Residential areas and nearby dwellings
Hospitals, health centres, care homes, doctor's surgeries etc.
Viewpoints where lots of people are likely to be after dark
Nature reserves, wildlife areas, historic landscapes, parks and gardens
Special Areas of Conservation (SACs), Ramsar sites and other managed areas
Any other development that can be considered light sensitive.
Ramsar site
Other information
None.
Materials BREEAM New Construction: Infrastructure (International pilot)
Materials
Category overview
Refer to the country reference sheet in the ASWL Mat 02 Responsible sourcing of materials
Summary
This category encourages steps taken to reduce the impact of temporary and permanent construction materials through
strategic planning, design and construction. Issues in this section focus on the procurement of materials that are sourced in a
responsible way, have a low embodied impact over their life and encourages materials to be used efficiently and reuse and
recycling to be adopted.

Issue ID Credits
Mat 01 Environmental life cycle impacts Strategy - 0

Project detail - 5
Reduction of the assets impact through selection of materials with a low impact over the full life cycle of the asset
Increasing reward given through consideration of more LCA indicators
Use of Environmental Product Declarations to inform materials selection decisions
Mat 02 Responsible sourcing of materials Strategy - 0

Project detail - 5
Exemplary - 1
Sustainable procurement strategy developed with key representatives of the project team to inform future
procurement
Materials sourced in accordance with a sustainable procurement plan
Permanent and temporary materials responsibly sourced to reduce environmental and socio-economic impact
Mat 03 Materials efficiency Strategy - 2

Project detail - 4
Improve lean construction through mapping of lean tools and activities and implementation throughout design,
mobilisation and construction
Optimisation of material use through standardisation, off-site construction (where appropriate) and other
techniques
Improve end of life efficiency through Design for Deconstruction planning and meeting best practice
benchmarks
Materials
Issue ID Credits
Mat 04 Reuse and recycling Strategy - 1

Project detail - 3
Exemplary - 1
Feasibility study of opportunities for reuse and recycling of materials on and off-site
A pre-demolition audit (where relevant) to identify potential applications for reuse and recycling
Reduce use of virgin material through identification and implementation of materials to be reused and recycled
Recycled or secondary aggregate specified for high grade uses against best practice benchmarks
Mat 01 Environmental life cycle impacts

0 5 None
Aim
To recognise and encourage the use of construction materials with a low environmental impact over the full life of the asset.

None.

Option 1: Product life cycle impact (one credit)

Option 2 (A-C): Asset level life cycle impact assessment (up to four credits)
Both options: Environmental Product Declarations (EPDs) (one credit)
Option 1 - One credit - Product life cycle impact assessments

1 A suitably qualified carbon, or life cycle assessment (LCA), practitioner carries out product life cycle assessments for ten
key products (refer to CN1) within the assessed asset using existing product specific Environmental Product Declarations
(EPDs) or generic LCA data (refer to Relevant definitions).
2 The suitably qualified practitioner considers a minimum of three functionally appropriate options for each key product
(refer to CN2) and makes recommendations to the project team to reduce the environmental impact of each product.
As a minimum, total carbon equivalent emissions should be considered over the expected lifetime over the asset (refer
to CN4).
3 The project team demonstrate how the recommendations have been taken forward for the fully constructed asset and
report the LCA data for each product via the BREEAM Infrastructure online tool.
OR
Option 2 - Up to four credits - Asset level life cycle impact assessment
Option 2A - Two credits - Complete carbon footprint

4 Building on the results of the screening carbon footprint (within issue ID 06 Whole life environmental impacts) a full
carbon footprint is produced and updated throughout key project gateways (refer to Relevant definitions) to establish
the total carbon equivalent impact associated with all life cycle stages of the asset shown to be significant during the
screening (refer to ID 06 Whole life environmental impacts: Figure 4 ).
5 The suitably qualified carbon practitioner uses standards and sources data in accordance with Table 35 for modules A-C
and D (where appropriate) and documents the assessment process with all decisions justified (refer to CN3).
Mat 01 Environmental life cycle impacts Materials
6 The suitably qualified carbon practitioner considers a range of functionally appropriate options and identifies impacts
over the expected lifetime of the asset (refer to CN4). Recommendations are provided to minimise the total carbon
equivalent emissions (Ref 1 in Table 34), prioritising those that result in the biggest reduction in impact.
7 The project team demonstrate how the recommendations resulted in changes in the design and an overall reduction in
emissions.
8 The total carbon equivalent data are reported via the BREEAM Infrastructure online tool in reference to the asset's
capacity (refer to CN5).
Option 2B - Three credits - Simplified life cycle assessment (LCA)

9 Building on the screening LCA (within issue ID 06 Whole life environmental impacts) a simplified LCA is updated
throughout key project gateways (refer to Relevant definitions) to establish the environmental impact associated with all
life cycle stages of the asset shown to be significant during the screening (refer to ID 06 Whole life environmental
impacts: Figure 4 ).
10 The following indicators are evaluated and reported in line with the principles set out in EN 15978 and the EeB Guidance
document (refer to CN6) for modules A-C and D (where appropriate):
10.a Ref 1: Total carbon equivalent and Global Warming Potential
10.b Ref 8: Net use of freshwater
10.c Ref 9: Hazardous waste disposed
10.d Ref 10: Non-hazardous waste disposed.
Note: Where the asset being assessed will be constructed outside of the European Union (EU) refer to CN7
11 The suitably qualified LCA practitioner considers a range of functionally appropriate options and identifies impacts over
the expected lifetime of the asset. Recommendations are provided to minimise the environmental impact, prioritising
those that result in the biggest reduction in impact.
12 The project team demonstrate how the recommendations resulted in changes in the design and an overall reduction in
impact.
13 All LCA indicators investigated are reported via the BREEAM Infrastructure Online tool and the total carbon equivalent
reported in reference to the asset's capacity (refer to CN5).
Option 2C - Four credits - Complete life cycle assessment

14 Building on the screening LCA (within issue ID 06 Whole life environmental impacts) a complete LCA is updated
throughout key project gateways (refer to Relevant definitions) to establish the environmental impact associated with all
life cycle stages of the asset (refer to ID 06 Whole life environmental impacts: Figure 4 ).
15 All indicators shown in Table 34 are evaluated and reported in line with the principles set out in out in EN 15978 and the
EeB Guidance document (refer to CN6) for modules A-C and D (where appropriate).
16 Criteria 11 13 are achieved for the complete LCA.
Both options - One credit - Environmental Product Declarations (EPDs)

17 At least one credit has been awarded for Option 1 or 2 above (criteria 1 16 ).
18 The suitably qualified carbon or LCA practitioner identifies ten key products (refer to CN1) within the assessed asset. Five
of these products are specified within the final asset based on the analysis of product specific, independently verified,
third party Environmental Product Declarations.
19 The EPDs must inform specification recommendations made by the suitably qualified carbon or LCA practitioner and the
EPDs relating to the products used in the final asset must be requested and documented.

Table 34: Indicators to be reported on a full life cycle assessment
Ref Indicators Unit
1 Total carbon equivalent or Global Warming kgCO2e

Potential (Climate Change); GWP (refer to Relevant
definitions)
2 Ozone Depletion Potential; ODP kg CFC 11e
3 Acidification Potential for Soil and Water; AP kgSO2-e
4 Eutrophication Potential; EP kg (PO4)3-e
5 Photochemical Ozone Creation; POCP kg C2H4e
6 Abiotic Depletion Potential Elements; ADPE kg Sbe
7 Abiotic Depletion Potential Fossil Fuels; ADPF MJe
8 Net use of fresh water; FW m3
9 Hazardous waste disposed; HWD kg
10 Non-hazardous waste disposed; NHWD kg
11 Radioactive waste disposed (high-level nuclear kg

waste); RWDHL
Note: For countries outside of the European Union, the above indicators may be varied to suit your project and country of
assessment. BREGlobal should be contacted where the suitably qualified carbon or LCApractitioner believes this is
necessary.
Table 35: Standards and data used to inform the carbon footprint (criterion 4 only)
Embodied carbon of products - cradle to EN 15978:2011 27 Sourced as detailed in EN 15804

gate OR (EPDs) and EN 15978 or ISO
ISO 14064-2:2006 28 21930 (outside EU only).
OR
Transport of construction products to site
Green House Gas (GHG)
Protocol29
Construction activities on site (plant and One standard should be
machinery used on-site & staff selected.
accommodation)
On-site staff travel (to and from site)
Transport and disposal of waste from the

site
Land use change impact Land use, Land Use Change and LULUCF GHG Inventory data
Forestry (LULUCF) GHG Inventory
data
Where a standard or data source not listed above is proposed by the suitably qualified LCApractitioner BRE Global
should be contacted to confirm it can be used as a compliant standard or data source.
Table 36: Key elements of an infrastructure asset
Infrastructure asset type Key element types assessed
Bridge Foundations
Main supporting structure
Deck
Large-scale solar Foundations

Framing
Solar panels
Cabling and electrical equipment
Pipeline Pipe bedding

Pipe
Power stations Foundations

Primary structure
Ancillary structure
Pipe
M&E equipment
Infrastructure asset type Key element types assessed
Railway Foundations
Subbase
Base
Ballast
Sleeper
Track
Retaining wall or flood defence Supporting structure

Visible structure
Road Foundations
Subbase
Base course
Road base
Wearing course
Other Please contact BRE Global who can establish the key elements for assessment within
the proposed asset.
Transmission and distribution Foundations

projects Main supporting structure
M&E equipment (e.g. fittings and insulators)
Conductors
Underground structures (e.g. Primary structure

tunnels) Ancillary structure
M&E equipment
Water treatment Foundations

Primary structure
Ancillary structure
Pipe
M&E equipment
Wind turbine Foundations

Tower
Blades
Compliance notes
CN1 Key products within In order to determine the ten key products to assess, the suitably qualified carbon or
the elemental LCA LCA practitioner must consider as a minimum the key elements of the infrastructure
asset as shown in Table 36 and their component materials. A justification should be
provided as to how the key products were selected in order to make recommendations
that will have the largest positive impact.
CN2 Less than three Where there are less than three functionally appropriate options available, all of the
functionally available functionally appropriate equivalents are analysed.
appropriate
options available
CN3 Cut-off criteria for Where the carbon equivalent impact of an activity is estimated to account for no more
the carbon impact than 1% of the total impact of that module, that activity may be omitted from the
assessment assessment.
The proportion of total neglected activities within a module, e.g. per module A1-A3,
A4-A5, B1-B5, B6-B7, C1-4 and module D (where calculated) should not exceed 5% of
the total impact within that module.
This note cannot be applied in order to hide data. Any application of the cut-off criteria
should be documented.
Note: This compliance note is not relevant to projects undergoing the simplified or
complete LCA (criteria 4 16 ) - these projects should refer to EN 15978 and the EeB
Guidance Document (refer to CN6).
CN4 Expected lifetime of The impacts should be measured over the expected lifetime of the asset as indicated in
the asset the design specification. If the lifetime is not specified then the working lifetimes
detailed in national best practice standards for the asset type should be used (refer to
CN5 Total carbon The capacity measurement will vary depending on the type of asset. This allows the
equivalent and carbon equivalent emissions and primary energy consumption of the asset over its
primary energy expected lifetime to be compared with its functional requirements. The design team
consumption from should report on capacity as shown in CE 01 Carbon and energy strategy: Table 44 as
the asset over its appropriate to the infrastructure type assessed.
expected lifetime in For example, a bridge project should report on both:
reference to
Total carbon equivalent: kgCO2e/maximum axle weight of traffic volume (kg)
capacity
per km per annum
Primary energy consumption: kWh/maximum axle weight of traffic volume (kg)
per km per annum
CN6 Use of EN 15978 EN 15978 and the EeB Guidance document (refer to Other information) have both been
and the EeB written with a focus on buildings, however the principles and rules within these are
Guidance equally applicable to infrastructure projects.
document Dependent on the infrastructure type the suitably qualified LCA practitioner can modify
the requirements of these documents where justified as necessary and appropriate
and record the rationale for these decisions.
For projects outside of the European Union refer to CN7.
CN7 Assets outside of The standards EN 15978 and EeB Guidance documents are currently regarded as best
the European Union practice globally with respect to the sustainability of construction works, life cycle
assessments and environmental product declarations.
For the purposes of a BREEAM Infrastructure assessment BRE Global requires that the
principles of EN 15978 and EeB Guidance are followed in order to provide a consistent
approach to life cycle assessment. The suitably qualified LCA practitioner can modify the
requirements of these documents further to account for regional variations if necessary
for the assessment.
If an alternative national best practice standard for life cycle assessment of
infrastructure projects is commonly used, BRE Global should be contacted to confirm
whether these standards can be used in place of EN 15978 and the EeB Guidance
document.
Methodology
None.
Evidence
1 3 N/A Product LCAs including As interim design stage

recommendations and
justifications from the suitably
qualified carbon practitioner
4 8 N/A Complete carbon footprint As interim design stage

report including
recommendations and
qualified carbon practitioner
9 13 N/A Simplified life cycle assessment As interim design stage

report including
recommendations and
qualified LCA practitioner
14 N/A Complete life cycle assessment As interim design stage

16 report including
recommendations and
qualified LCA practitioner
17 N/A Refer to generic evidence Delivery receipts and EPD

19 requirement above certificates
Environmental Product Declarations (EPDs)

The ISO 14025:2006 defines an environmental label or environmental declaration as a claim which indicates the
environmental aspects of a product or service. ISO 14020:2012 goes on to state that environmental labels and
declarations provide information about a product or service concerning its overall environmental character, a specific
environmental aspect, or any number of aspects. BRE are an example of an EPD provider via the BRE Environmental
Profiles Scheme which is being replaced by the new EN 15804 compliant BRE EPD Verification scheme.
Independently verified third party Environmental Product Declarations (EPDs)

For this BREEAM issue, the independently verified third party EPDs can cover:
Partial life cycle (cradle to gate or cradle to gate with options*) OR
Whole life cycle (cradle to grave)
*Partial life cycle EPD can cover:
The product stage only: such an EPD covers raw material supply, transport, manufacturing and associated processes;
this EPD is said to be "cradle -to gate";
The product stage and selected further life cycle stages: such an EPD is said to be "cradle to gate with options".
In both cases, the EPD must be produced in accordance with the requirements within EN 15804, ISO 21930 or the ISO
14020 series, particularly ISO 14025 and ISO 14040 and 14044 (life cycle assessment).

The definition of key project gateways refers to project delivery phases, and this would include:
1. Concept design
2. Definition
3. Design
Products
For the purpose of BREEAM Infrastructure the term 'products' refers to all materials and products used over the
lifetime of the asset, i.e. its construction, operation and demolition.

BREEAM assessment:
14040 and ISO 14044 and use of carbon footprinting tools or other carbon life cycle assessment
methodologies
2. Has experience in undertaking assessments of the carbon and energy impact (or life cycle impacts for the suitably
qualified LCA practitioner - see below) of construction projects

Suitably qualified LCA practitioner

BREEAM assessment:
1. Meets the requirements 13 specified for a suitably qualified carbon practitioner PLUS
2. Their knowledge and experience includes preparation of Type III environmental declarations, including familiarity
and use of ISO 14025 and ISO 21930.
3. Their knowledge and experience includes application of Type III environmental declarations in the construction
context, specifically awareness of EN 15978:2011 and EN 15804:2012+A1: 2013. (Refer to CN7 for projects
outside of the EU.)

Other information
Link between ID 06 Whole life environmental impacts and Mat 01 Environmental life cycle impacts
The options available to the design team for assessment of this issue (Mat 01 Environmental life cycle impacts) is linked directly
to the work carried out at the strategic stage within the issue ID 06 Whole life environmental impacts. Figure 5 below details
this linkage and the associated credits available when selecting different options.
Figure 5 Assessment linkage between ID 06 Whole life environmental impacts and Mat 01 Environmental life cycle impacts
and available credits
EeBGuide Project
EeBGuide's Info Hub provides a wealth of information for LCA in the construction sector http://www.eebguide.eu/.
Mat 02 Responsible sourcing of materials Materials
Mat 02 Responsible sourcing of materials

available
0 5 Prerequisite - criterion 1 (Legal sourcing) - Pass
Aim
To recognise and encourage the efficient procurement and use of sustainably and responsibly sourced materials.

None.

Legal sourcing (prerequisite)

Sustainable procurement plan (one credit)
Responsible sourcing of permanent materials (up to three credits)
Responsible sourcing of temporary materials (one credit)
Prerequisite - Legal sourcing

1 All materials used on the project (permanent and temporary) are legally sourced (refer to Relevant definitions).
One credit - Sustainable procurement plan

3 The principal contractor develops and sources materials for the project in accordance with a documented sustainable
procurement plan (refer to Relevant definitions).
Up to three credits - Responsible sourcing of permanent materials (RSM)

5 The available RSM credits for permanent materials (refer to Table 37) can be awarded where the corresponding
percentage of materials for the asset are responsibly sourced in accordance with the BREEAM methodology, as defined
in Routes 1 or 2 in the Methodology section below.
6 Additionally, all materials not covered by a BREEAM recognised responsible sourcing certification scheme have been
subjected to a risk assessment by the supply chain organisations and demonstrate due diligence (refer to Relevant
definitions) in monitoring compliance with the ILO Declaration on Fundamental Principles and Rights at Work30.
One credit - Responsible sourcing of temporary materials (RSM)

8 The available RSM credit for temporary materials (refer to Table 37) can be awarded where the corresponding
percentage of temporary materials for the site are responsibly sourced in accordance with the BREEAM methodology, as
defined in Routes 1 or 2 in the Methodology section.
Exemplary level criteria

The following outlines the exemplary level criteria to achieve one innovation credit for this BREEAM issue:

10 The percentage of materials responsibly sourced for the project or subproject meet or exceeds the required level in
Table 37.
Table 37: Credits available based on percentage RSM points achieved
RSM Credits % of available RSM points achieved
1 - permanent materials 18%
Exemplary level - permanent materials 70%
1 - temporary materials 36%

Table 38: Components and material categories
Component categories for permanent materials
1. Earthworks, including landscaping

2. Subbase and ballast
3. Pavements and footways
4. Piling
5. Retaining walls
6. Tunnels
7. Primary structures
8. Ancillary structures
9. Drainage
10. Other.
Component categories for temporary materials
1. Formwork and falsework

2. Shoring and temporary bracing
3. Temporary fill and structures (crane foundations, temporary access roads, etc.)
4. Fencing and safety barriers
5. Temporary piping, electrical, mechanical and heating services
6. Other.
Component categories for permanent materials
Material categories
1. Timber or timber-based
2. Concrete or cementitious
3. Metal
4. Stone or aggregate
5. Clay based
6. Gypsum
7. Glass
8. Plastic, polymer, resin, paint, chemicals and bituminous
9. Animal fibre or skin or cellulose fibre
10. Other.
Compliance notes
CN1 BREEAM recognised Guidance Note 18 available in the BREEAM Assessor Guidance section of the BREEAM
responsible projects website provides a table of responsible sourcing certification schemes
sourcing recognised under BREEAM, their scope and associated point scores. This table is
certification reviewed on a regular basis and BREEAM Assessors must ensure they use the current
schemes and their table.
point scores Note: The responsible sourcing certification scheme point score is determined based
on the rigour of responsible sourcing demonstrated by the suppliers or manufacturers
of that material or product through the use of recognised responsible sourcing
certification schemes.
CN2 Checking Confirmation of manufacturers and suppliers claims should be sought from the
responsible relevant responsible sourcing scheme provider. Many of the organisations who
sourcing claims administer RSM certification schemes will, via their website, list companies and products
that have been certified against their standards, including the scope of any such
certification. Some schemes, including BES 6001 via www.greenbooklive.com, will
provide downloadable copies of the relevant certificate, which can in turn be used as
evidence of compliance for this BREEAM issue.
CN3 Other component Other components for infrastructure projects will vary dependent on the type of
categories for project. For example, rail projects may include railway sleepers and track, road projects
permanent may include surfacing materials, etc.
materials - See Refer to CN5 which details when materials do not need to be included within the
Table 38 assessment of this issue.
CN4 Scope of temporary The scope of temporary materials considered excludes scaffolding and portable
materials offices or cabins. These items are commonly reused and therefore they are excluded
considered - See from the assessment.
Table 38
CN5 Route 1 Cut- off See Materials that meet the cut-off criteria are those that are considered minor in terms of
step 1 in the the construction of the asset. Materials can therefore be excluded from assessment
Methodology where they meet any of the following three rules:
section. 1. Any material type within a component category which is approximately estimated
to account for less than 5% of the volume or mass of the whole component.
2. Any material type within a component category which is approximately estimated
to account for less than 1m3 per 1,000m2 of gross internal floor area for point
projects.
3. Any material type within a component category which is approximately estimated
to account for less than 1m3 per 1000m of linear length for linear projects.
Fixings, adhesives and ironmongery would normally fall below this threshold. Detailed
calculations will not normally be required to justify such exclusions, however a logical
approach to estimating the exclusions should be provided.
Methodology
There are two routes to demonstrating compliance with this issue. Either of the routes or a combination may be followed for
any situation:
Route 1 is intended for use in most situations where detailed information on quantities of materials is not readily
available.
Route 2 is intended for situations where a more detailed analysis is possible due to the availability of sufficient detail
on materials quantities and associated supply chains.
Route 1: Lowest responsible sourcing certification scheme point score

The following steps outline the methodology to be followed for this route to determine the number of credits achieved for
responsible sourcing. The calculations outlined below are undertaken using the BREEAM Infrastructure Mat 02 calculator and
the relevant project information collated by the project team.
Step 1: Confirm the presence of 'Component' categories and materials

Identify from the 'Component categories' list within Table 38 components relevant to the project. Allocate from the 'material
category' list all materials that make up each component category. Exclude all materials within a component category that
meet the cut-off criteria set out in CN5.
Note: The most appropriate category for each particular material type must be selected, where none of the categories are
appropriate use 'other.'
Products made up of constituent materials (such as a railway track) must be broken down into constituent materials and
assessed separately. For example constituent parts of a track may be rails, fasteners, sleepers and ballast or slab track.
Step 2: Confirm the responsible sourcing certification scheme point score achieved for each applicable
material
For each material type identified as applicable in step 1, determine whether or not it is covered by a BREEAM recognised
Responsible Sourcing Certification Scheme certificate (refer to Additional information).
Refer to Guidance Note GN18 available in the BREEAM Assessor Guidance section of the BREEAM Projects website for the
most up-to-date list of BREEAM recognised Responsible Sourcing Certification Schemes, their scope and corresponding point
score.
Step 3: Point allocation and award of credits

The data entered in steps 1 and 2 are used in the BREEAM Mat 02 tool to calculate the number of RSM points achieved and
the number of credits to be awarded accordingly. Credits are awarded as follows:
For materials that have been given the same material category (for this example Timber or timber-based products have been
used), the tool:
1. Finds the average responsible sourcing certification scheme point score for [Timber or timber-based materials] that
have the same 'component' category. This is repeated for every 'component' category present.
2. Selects the 'component' category with the lowest average responsible sourcing certification scheme point score for that
component.
The process (1 and 2 above) is repeated for each material category. The results for all material categories are summed and
the difference between the total and the maximum total possible is expressed as a percentage. The percentage is then
converted to a credit score according to the Table 38.
Example calculation for Route 1

Table 39: Credits available based on percentage RSM points achieved
Component Material category Responsible Average point Point score

category sourcing score (for a allocation
certification given material (lowest point
scheme point in that score for a
score component given material
category) category)
Earthworks Stone or aggregate product 1 10 10 5.5
Subbase or Stone or aggregate product 1 5 5.5

ballast
Subbase or Stone or aggregate product 2 6

ballast
Earthworks Concrete or cementitious product 1 3 3 3
Subbase or Concrete or cementitious product 1 4 4

ballast
Ancillary Concrete or cementitious product 1 6 6

structure
Sleepers & Timber or timber-based product 1 6 5 5

track
Sleepers & Timber or timber-based product 2 4

track
Component Material category Responsible Average point Point score

category sourcing score (for a allocation
certification given material (lowest point
scheme point in that score for a
score component given material
category) category)
Sleepers & Metal product 1 7 5 5

track
Sleepers & Metal product 2 3

track
Ancillary Metal product 1 5 5

structure
Table 40: Example calculation for Route 1 - point allocation and award of credits
Material Points score achieved Maximum point score % Credits

category available available achieved
points
achieved
Stone or 5.5 10 46.25% 2

aggregate
Concrete or 3 10
cementitious
Timber or 5 10
timber-
based
products
Metal 5 10
products
Total 18.5 40
Route 2: Proportion of materials responsibly sourced

This route allows for a more detailed calculation of the responsibly sourced materials used for constructing the final asset
where information on material quantities are available. It follows a similar methodology to that set out for Route 1 above but
allows for a detailed calculation of the impact of varying specifications and supply chains based on the relative quantity of
each material to weight the point scores thus influencing the final result. Following Route 2 leads to a more accurate final result
and could therefore lead to a higher score.
An example calculation for Route 2 is provided below. The example illustrates the calculation for a single material category
(stone or aggregate materials). This process would be repeated for each material category present in the infrastructure asset
to determine the final score.
Example calculation for Route 2

Table 41: Example calculation for Route 2 for permanent stone or aggregate materials
Compon RSC Quant Weight Max Total Total Total Avera Score
ent S ity ed weight score for max % ge % achiev
category poi (m3/k point ed compon score for score achiev ed for
nt g) (B) score point ent (E) compon achiev ed (H) materi
sco (C) =(A) score =sum of ent (F) = ed (G) = al =
re *(B) (D) = (C) sum of D = (E)/ avera 10*(H)
(A) 10*(B) (F) ge of
(G)
Earthwor 10 8500 85000 85000 85000 85000 100% 76.6 7.66

ks 6%
subbase 5 5000 25000 50000 40000 75000 53.3

or ballast 3%
subbase 6 2500 15000 25000

or ballast
Combination of routes
The following table illustrates the award of credits where a combination of routes is used. In the example below Route 2 has
been used to calculate the points for stone or aggregate based products. For all other materials present Route 1 has been
used to allocate points. The figures shown have been taken from the relevant tables under Route 1 and 2 example
calculations provided above.
Table 42: Example calculation for combining Route 1 & 2 - point allocation and award of credits
Material Points score achieved Maximum point % Credits

category score available available achieved
points
achieved
Stone OR 7.66 10 51.65% 2

aggregate
Concrete or 3 10
cementitious
Timber or 5 10
timber-
based
products
Metal 5 10
products
Total 20.66 40
Evidence
1 N/A A specification or letter Written confirmation that the

of intent from the design documentary evidence provided
team confirming that all at Design Stage, detailing the
timber will be procured timber specification have been
in accordance with the used as specified
definitions of legally A letter from the contractor
harvested and traded confirming other materials were
timber. legally sourced
5,8, N/A Completed BREEAM Copies of all relevant certificates

10 Infrastructure Mat 02 calculator and chain of custody evidence
Written confirmation from
supplier of materials that they
have a responsible sourcing
certificate and it is valid in line with
the responsible sourcing scheme
requirements
6 N/A Supply chain organisations risk As design stage

assessment and due diligence
reporting
BREEAM Infrastructure Mat 02 Calculator

A calculator tool used by the BREEAM Assessor to determine the number of BREEAM credits achieved for BREEAM
issue Mat 02.
BREEAM recognised responsible sourcing certification schemes

These are third party schemes evaluated and approved by BRE Global for recognition under BREEAM. Refer to
Guidance Note GN18 available in the Resources section of the BREEAM website for information on the evaluation
criteria and the process for the evaluation and acceptance of schemes, including application and appeals.
Chain of custody (CoC)

This is a process used to maintain and document the chronological history of the evidence or path for products from
forests to consumers. Timber must be tracked from the certified forest to the finished product. All the steps, from
the transport of timber from the forest to a sawmill until it reaches the customer, must maintain appropriate
inventory control systems that allow for separation and identification of the certified product. Chain of custody
certification ensures that a facility has procedures in place to track timber from certified forests and avoid confusion
with non-certified timber. Chain of custody is established and audited according to the rules of relevant forest
certification systems. See also definition of CITES below.
Convention on International Trade in Endangered Species (CITES)

The Convention on International Trade in Endangered Species of wild fauna and flora (CITES) works by subjecting
international trade in specimens of selected species to certain controls. All import, export, re-export and introduction
from the sea of species covered by the Convention has to be authorised through a licensing system. Each Party to the
Convention must designate one or more Management Authorities in charge of administering that licensing system
and one or more Scientific Authorities to advise them on the effects of trade on the status of the species. The species
covered by CITES are listed in three Appendices, according to the degree of protection they need:
1. Appendix I includes species threatened with extinction. Trade in specimens of these species is permitted only in
exceptional circumstances
2. Appendix II includes species not necessarily threatened with extinction but in which trade must be controlled to
avoid utilisation incompatible with their survival
3. Appendix III contains species that are protected in at least one country, which has asked other CITES Parties for
assistance in controlling the trade.
Appendices I and II of the CITES list illustrate species of timber that are protected outright. Appendix III of the CITES list
illustrates species that are protected in at least one country. If a timber species used in the development is on
Appendix III it can be included as part of the assessment as long as the timber is not obtained from the country or
countries seeking to protect this species.
Composite materials
Composite material can be defined as an engineered material made from two or more constituent materials with
significantly different physical or chemical properties and which remain separate and distinct on a macroscopic level
within the finished structure. Resin based composites such as glass reinforced plastic and polymeric render and
timber composites such as chipboard or particleboard, MDF, OSB, plywood, hardboard, laminated veneered lumber,
glulam and cement bonded particleboard are all required to be assessed for responsible sourcing.
Due diligence
The performance of relevant and appropriate investigations and monitoring of an organisation's supply chains so
that the actions of those supply chains do not compromise the organisation's commitments to responsible sourcing.
Criterion 6 is required to be met where supply chain organisations source constituent materials outside of the EU, or
from states that have not declared adherence to the OECD Guidelines for Multinational Enterprises. The following
established schemes shall be considered appropriate mechanisms for demonstrating due diligence:
1. Membership of the Ethical Trade Initiative
2. Membership of the United Nations Global Compact
3. Certification to the Social Accountability International SA8000 standard
Due diligence is required for the supply chain organisation that carries out the final processing or manufacturing of
the materials into a final product, i.e. it should cover at least the key process.
Legally harvested
Timber that has been harvested in accordance with the Applicable legislation in the country of harvest.
Legal timber
Timber that was legally harvested and legally traded.
Legally Traded
Legally traded means timber or products derived from legally harvested timber that were:
1. Exported in compliance with exporting country laws governing the import of timber and timber products,
including payment of any export taxes, duties or levies
2. Imported in compliance with importing country laws governing the import of timber and products, including
payment of any taxes, duties, levies, or not in contravention of exporting country laws governing the export of
timber and products, including payment of export taxes, duties and levies
3. Traded in compliance with legislation related to the convention on international trade in endangered species
(CITES), where applicable.
Legally sourced materials
Relevant documentation demonstrating legal sourcing must be provided or made available on request subject to the
availability of such materials in the country concerned. Specifically for timber, refer to the 'legal timber,' 'legally
harvested' and 'legally traded' definitions.
Permanent materials
Permanent materials are those used for construction of the asset or that will be retained on-site on completion of the
project. For the purpose of this issue, permanent materials must include semi-permanent materials, i.e. materials that
do not form part of the asset but will remain post construction. For example, roads that are built to facilitate
construction of the asset which will not be removed (due to providing local access) should be considered permanent
materials.
Pre-consumer waste stream

Waste material generated during manufacturing processes; this excludes reuse of materials such as rework, regrind
or scrap generated in a process and capable of being reclaimed within the same process that generated it.
Post-consumer waste stream

Waste material generated by households or by commercial, industrial and institutional facilities in their role as end
users of the product, which can no longer be used for its intended purpose. This includes returns of material from the
distribution chain.
Recycled material
Materials diverted from the pre-consumer or post-consumer waste streams that require significant processing
before they can be used again.
Responsible sourcing
The management and implementation of sustainable development principles in the provision, procurement and
traceability of construction materials and components. In BREEAM, this is demonstrated through auditable third party
certification schemes.
Responsible sourcing certification scheme point scores

A graded scale to reflect the rigour of the certification scheme used to demonstrate responsible sourcing, forming
the basis for awarding credits in the BREEAM issue Mat 02. Refer to Guidance Note GN18 available in the BREEAM
Assessor Guidance section of the BREEAM Projects website for an up-to-date table of responsible sourcing
certification schemes recognised by BRE Global Ltd for the purposes of a BREEAM assessment.
Reused materials
Materials that can be extracted from the waste stream and used again without further processing, or with only minor
processing, that does not alter the nature of the material (e.g. cleaning, cutting or fixing to other materials).
Sustainable procurement plan

A plan that sets out a clear framework for the responsible sourcing of materials to guide procurement throughout a
project and for all involved in the specification and procurement of construction materials. The plan may be prepared
and adopted at an organisational level or be project specific and for the purposes of BREEAM compliance, will cover
the following as a minimum:
1. Identification of risks and opportunities against a broad range of social, environmental and economic issues. BS
8902:2009 Responsible sourcing sector certification schemes for construction products- Specification can be
used as a guide to identify these issues
2. Aims, objectives and targets to guide sustainable procurement activities. BS 8903: 2010 Principles and
framework for procuring sustainably - Guide can be used to inform setting of aims, objectives and targets
3. The strategic assessment of responsibly sourced materials available locally and nationally. There should be a policy
to procure materials locally where appropriate and practical
4. Responsible sourcing policies that will be employed by the contractor and subcontractor
5. Procedures that are in place to check and verify that the sustainable procurement plan is being implemented and
adhered to on individual projects. These could include setting out measurement criteria, methodology and
performance indicators to assess progress and demonstrate success
6. Information on how the chain of custody of materials will be fully audited and evidenced.
Temporary materials
Temporary materials are those used for temporary works. Temporary works are installations required to provide
access, protection, support, or services for workers, equipment and materials during the construction, renovation,
retrofit, maintenance, or demolition of permanent works. Temporary works are also required to provide temporary
service, repair, or support for any part of permanent works, until the permanent works have achieved a state of
completion allowing temporary works to be removed. This includes (but is not limited to) temporary structural
support, formwork, site facilities, temporary parking, material or machinery storage.
Other information
BES 6001:2008 Framework Standard for Responsible Sourcing of Construction Products

This is a BRE Global standard that provides a framework for the assessment and certification of the responsible sourcing of
construction products. The Standard has been structured so that compliance can be demonstrated through a combination
of meeting the requirements of other recognised certification schemes, establishing written policies, setting objectives and
targets and engaging with relevant stakeholders.
To comply with the standard a product must meet a number of mandatory criteria. Where a product demonstrates
compliance beyond the mandatory levels, higher levels of performance can be achieved. The standard's performance ratings
range from Pass to Good, Very Good and Excellent.
The development of this standard and subsequent certification schemes will, it is envisaged, provide construction products,
not wholly covered under current recognised standards, a means for demonstrating their responsibly sourced credentials. In
turn this will allow clients, developers and design teams to specify responsibly sourced construction products with greater
assurance and provide a means of demonstrating compliance with the assessment criteria for this BREEAM issue.
To view a list of products approved to BES 6001 and additional information about the standard visit:
www.greenbooklive.com
Forest Stewardship Council (FSC) and Programme for the Endorsement of Forest Certification (PEFC)
validity
A CPET document may be helpful to assessors with respect to determining the validity of FSC and PEFC certificates. See
www.cpet.org.uk.
Mat 03 Materials efficiency

2 4 None
Aim
To recognise and encourage measures to optimise material efficiency and reduce virgin material consumption.

Material efficiency (one credit)

Design for deconstruction (one credit)
One credit Material efficiency
Resource management plan (RMP)

1 A Resource Management Plan (RMP) is developed for the project and records how material efficiency is being
considered (refer to Relevant definitions).
Lean tools and activities

2 A strategic level mapping exercise is completed to establish the type and sequence of design and construction
processes for the project.
3 Following findings of the strategic level mapping exercise key representatives of the project team (refer to Relevant
definitions) identify and assess:
3.a Processes and dependencies or links within this map that:
3.a.i Are traditionally inefficient
3.a.ii Have the potential to be inefficient, e.g. if poorly managed
3.a.iii Have the potential to be more efficient, e.g. if well managed
3.b Lean tools and activities, as shown in Figure 6, to determine:
3.b.i Their relevance to the project
3.b.ii Potential impacts of implementing identified tools or activities
3.b.iii How they could be incorporated during the design development and construction phases.
4.a To apply 'lean principles' established within the mapping to the identified processes.
4.b To monitor and report efficiencies in implementing aspects of 'lean' design and construction.
Material optimisation
5 Key representatives of the project team are involved in reviewing opportunities to optimise the use of materials, such as:
5.a Standardisation of permanent materials (refer to CN1) and components.
5.b Reduction in the overall material use within the project, including operation and maintenance replacement.
5.c Use of ground improvement techniques to avoid excavating soft foundations.
Mat 03 Materials efficiency Materials
6.a Recommend and implement opportunities to optimise material use (as detailed in 5.a 5.c)
6.b To undertake a study to investigate if off-site construction will offer material efficiency benefits to the project
and the environment
6.c Establish outcome focused specifications to ensure material optimisation.
One credit Design for deconstruction

7 Key representatives of the project team are involved in reviewing opportunities to reuse and recycle components of the
project at the end of their life.
8 A Design for Deconstruction (DfD) strategy is produced which includes:
8.a The strategy behind any 'designed to be reusable' elements
8.b Best practice measures to ensure the 'designed to be reusable' elements or components are handled in a way
which preserves maximum reusability.
9.a To apply the principles of the DfD strategy and evaluate further opportunities to reuse and recycle components
of the project
9.b To produce a DfD plan.

Implementation of lean tools and activities (one credit)

Enhanced materials efficiency (one credit)
Reuse and recycling of deconstruction materials (up to two credits)
One credit Implementation of lean tools and activities

10 The mapping exercise, associated processes and key lean tools and activities identified within the strategic stage
assessment are reviewed and updated as the design develops with input from key representatives of the project team.
11 For each of the processes where an improvement is deemed possible an appropriate lean construction tool or activity is
selected from Figure 6 and applied at each of the following stages:
11.a Design (e.g. definition and design)
11.b Mobilisation (e.g. build)
11.c Construction (e.g. build and commission).
12 As a minimum at least one appropriate lean construction tool or activity is selected from the following categories
(identified in Figure 6 ):
12.a General activities
12.b Process management
12.c Operations management.
13 The following are reported at regular project meetings and within the BREEAM Infrastructure Online Tool:
13.a Process and efficiency measures adopted
13.b Impact of measures adopted.
One credit Enhanced materials efficiency

See also CN3 where a complete LCA has been carried out.
Material optimisation
14 Opportunities recommended within the strategic stage assessment are re-evaluated with key representatives of the
project team (refer to Relevant definitions) and further opportunities identified (refer to criteria 5.a 5.c).
15 The design, programme of works and RMP are updated to support implementation of identified opportunities and
these opportunities are reported at regular project meetings.
16 Identified opportunities are implemented to optimise materials use and are reported within the BREEAM Infrastructure
Online Tool.
Off-site construction
17 An assessment is carried out to confirm if off-site construction is a viable alternative (refer to Relevant definitions) to
traditional construction for aspects of the project, this includes:
17.a Identification of parts of the asset that could be manufactured off site
17.b Identification of activities that could become assembly processes rather than construction processes.
17.c Liaison with all members of the project team including specialists affected by the identified off-site construction
opportunities.
18 For projects where off-site construction is considered a viable alternative to traditional construction, a verified study is
undertaken to compare the environmental impact of off-site construction with traditional on-site construction (refer to
19 Where the results of the study identify off-site construction would have a lower environmental impact than on-site
construction, these opportunities are implemented.
20 The results of the study are recorded within the RMP (refer to Wst 01 Construction waste management and the BREEAM
Infrastructure Online Tool.
Up to two credits Reuse and recycling of deconstruction materials

See also CN3 for where a complete LCA has been carried out.
One credit
21 A DfD plan is produced with key representatives of the project team (refer to Relevant definitions) building on the
content of DfD strategy (criterion 8 ). The DfD plan is kept up to date as the design and construction process progresses
and details are included within the RMP.
22 50% (by weight or volume) of components that can be easily dismantled can be reused or recycled at the end of the life
of the asset (refer to Relevant definitions).
23 The DfD plan is (re-)issued to all parties at the handover stage, so that there is maximum awareness of the DfD
requirements for the future. As a minimum this is distributed to the asset owner, operator, designer and contractor.
24 Copies of the revised DfD Plan are included within the Health and Safety file and the Operation and Maintenance files and
within the Building Information Modelling (BIM) process where present.
Two credits
26 75% (by weight or volume) of components that can be easily dismantled can be reused or recycled at the end of the life
of the asset.
Checklists and Tables
Figure 6 Examples of lean tools and activities and where they can add value
See Implementing Lean in Construction for further details31
Compliance notes
CN1 Permanent The permanent materials to be considered within the assessment of this issue can be
materials any element, component or material that forms part of the final asset. These include but
are not limited to:
2. Drainage
4. Piling, retaining walls and tunnels
5. Structures
7. Other.
Other elements are likely to be project specific, e.g. sleepers and track for railways,
surfacing for roads, etc.
CN2 Materials BRE has avoided being overly prescriptive with the evidence requirements for this issue,
optimisation recognising that this is a complex environmental and design issue, where solutions and
evidence approaches are largely influenced by project specific factors. The evidence required to
requirements - demonstrate compliance will vary according to the stage of the project. A few
criteria 14 16 examples have been provided below:
Reports outlining the activity relating to material efficiency (ideas discussed,

analysis and decisions taken)
Drawings or building information model (BIM), calculations showing reduction
of material use through design
Meeting notes, construction programme, responsibilities schedule (indicating
parties consulted).
The BREEAM Assessor should use their judgement in determining whether the aim and
intent of the credit has been met using appropriate project information to back their
judgement. BRE Global will endorse the BREEAM Assessor's judgement through the
Quality Assurance audit where a reasonable justification to award the credit on the
basis of project team actions and proposed design solutions is evident.
CN3 Use of LCA to The requirements for the project detail credits 'Enhanced materials efficiency' (criteria
demonstrate 14 20 ) and 'Design for deconstruction' (criteria 21 26 ) can be awarded without
materials efficiency meeting all of the specific requirements of these credits where a complete LCA has
been carried out and used to optimise materials efficiency for modules A-C and D.
Evidence will be required in the form of a report by a suitably qualified LCA practitioner
justifying how the biggest impacts identified in terms of materials efficiency were
identified and reduced as far as practicably possible. The client or contractor must also
demonstrate through appropriate evidence how the LCA practitioner's
recommendations were implemented in the fully constructed asset.
In regards to the specific criteria:
Materials optimisation: Criterion 14 can be achieved through the LCA, however criteria
15 16 should be implemented by the contractor to demonstrate how they have
improved the design.
Off-site construction: Criteria 17 18 can be achieved through the LCA, however the
data sources and results should be verified to confirm independence of the results.
Criteria 19 20 should be implemented by the contractor to demonstrate how they
have improved the design.
Design for deconstruction: Criteria 21 , 23 and 24 should be implemented by the
contractor allow for ease of deconstruction. Criteria 22 and 26 (i.e. % achieved) does
not need to be met, where the LCA has shown that inclusion of a higher percentage of
elements would result in a great environmental impact over the life of the asset.
Methodology
None.
Evidence
Ref Strategy stage Interim Design Final post-

Stage construction stage
ALL One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in the BREEAM evidential requirements
1 Resource management plan (RMP) As strategy stage As strategy stage
2 4 Lean tools and activities mapping exercise N/A N/A

and project delivery team or contractor's
brief
5 6 Materials optimisation strategy and project N/A N/A

delivery team or contractor's brief
8 Design for deconstruction strategy N/A N/A
Ref Strategy stage Interim Design Final post-

Stage construction stage
14 16 N/A Refer to CN2
18 N/A Off site construction As interim design

verified study stage
21 26 N/A DfD plans As interim design

Calculations stage
confirming %
materials easily
dismantled (or LCA
optimisation)
Design for Deconstruction (DfD) plan

A Design for Deconstruction plan supports the aim of material efficiency by reducing likely construction waste and
increasing construction efficiency. The plan should include a list of components and elements, as a minimum:
1. An inventory of all materials and components used in the project together with full specifications and all
warranties and details of manufacturers
2. The design life or service life of materials and components
3. A list of components and elements that can be reused or recycled at the end of the life of the asset
4. Best options for reuse, reclamation, recycling and waste to energy for all reusable or recoverable components
and materials
5. A list of hazardous materials that cannot be eliminated from the specification.
Instructions must also be included on how to deconstruct elements including;
1. up-to-date location plans
2. As built information, as recorded through the construction process, to demonstrate the optimum technique for
removal of specific elements
3. A description of the equipment required to dismantle the components, the sequential processes involved and the
implications for health and safety
4. Advice for the future demolition contractor on the best means of categorising, recording and storing dismantled
elements.
Easily dismantled
For the purposes of BREEAM easily dismantled components can be taken apart without destroying the component
pieces, e.g. those that do not require demolition.

This includes, but is not limited to:
1. Client or developer
2. Cost consultant
3. Structural or civil engineers
4. Mechanical or electrical engineers
5. Principal contractor
6. Demolition or strip-out contractor
7. Environmental consultant
8. Project management consultant
9. Materials and component manufacturers or suppliers.
The project team may also identify lessons learnt from other similar projects in order to map potentially inefficient
processes in the design and construction of the project.
Lean principles
Lean is a term that relates to a proven way of doing business, entirely focused on maximising customer value through
elimination of all forms of process waste and ensuring that value-adding activities are completed in the most efficient
and time-effective manner. Lean has been successfully applied in all sectors of business, service and project delivery,
resulting in improved performance in quality, time, cost and bottom line profit (CIRIA, 2013).
Regular project team meetings

This will vary depending on the scale of the project, but once a month as a minimum.

The aim of the RMP is to promote resource efficiency in the construction of the asset. Resource efficiency includes
optimising the use of materials and minimising waste through assessment of the use, reuse and recycling of materials
and products on and off the site. This should be considered across the project by the client, designers and principal
contractors. Best practice is a combination of commitments to:
1. Standardise materials and components
2. Reduce the overall material use and waste generated over the life cycle of the asset
3. Design out waste (materials optimisation)
4. Establish outcome focused specifications to ensure material optimisation and procedures to sort and reuse or
recycle construction and demolition waste.
5. Follows guidance from:
Government departments
BRE (Building Research Establishment Ltd)
WRAP (Waste and Resources Action Programme)
A BREEAM compliant RMP for this issue focuses on materials optimisation and how this can be achieved throughout
the design, construction and operation (i.e. maintenance and replacement) of the asset.
Viable alternative
For the purposes of this issue, off-site construction could be excluded as a viable alternative where the risks of
pursuing off-site construction outweigh the benefits. For example, risks may be introduced in regards to installation,
procurement, timing, safety, maintenance or fitness for purpose. This list is not exhaustive but the project team
should adequately justify their reasoning for not investigating further this option.
Verified report for off-site and on-site comparison

For the purposes of this issue, verified means that an independent person has checked the data gathering process
and content of the study to ensure that the results are not biased. This could be the BREEAM Assessor where they
have sufficient understanding of the issues included within the report.
The report must include a comparison of, as a minimum:
1. Potential waste generated during traditional on-site construction compared with waste generated in the off-site
facility plus any additional on-site waste.
2. Predicted volume of materials used in traditional on-site construction and volume of materials used in off-site
construction.
3. Predicted impact of the transport of materials for traditional on-site construction and the predicted impact of
the transport of materials for off-site construction, i.e. number of movements, distances travelled and where
appropriate vehicle types and fuel consumption.
4. Potential for reuse or recovery of the components at the end of the asset's life.
Other information
CIRIA 'Implementing lean in construction'

In 2013 CIRIA released 6 publications under the heading of 'Implementing lean in construction'. Included in the multiple issues
these publications address are the principles of lean construction, how lean can be implemented across the construction
sector and lean tools that are available. The six publications (and introductory note) are as follows:
1. CIRIA RP978: Overview of CIRIA's guides and a brief introduction to Lean

2. CIRIA C725: Lean construction and BIM
3. CIRIA C726: Lean and the sustainability agenda
4. CIRIA C727: Lean benefits realisation management
5. CIRIA C728: A Lean guide for client organisations
6. CIRIA C729: Selecting and working with a lean consultant
7. CIRIA C730: Lean tools and techniques - an introduction
More information and download of the publications can be found at: http://www.ciria.org/
Mat 04 Reuse and recycling Materials
Mat 04 Reuse and recycling

1 3 None
Aim
To recognise and encourage the specification of reused and recycled materials within the asset, reducing demand for virgin
material.

One credit - Reuse and recycling strategy

1 A review is undertaken to determine the feasibility of using reused and recycled materials or elements for permanent
components within the asset (refer to CN1). The review identifies:
1.a Existing buildings, structures and hard surfaces on site with materials and elements for potential reuse and
associated risk
1.b Facilities, depots (e.g. for railway track and ballast), dealers (e.g. for wind turbines) and other construction sites to
establish if existing infrastructure elements are available for reuse or recycling (refer to CN2 and CN3).
2 Where potential uses are identified for reused or recycled materials (including secondary aggregates) it is established
whether:
2.a Using the reused or recycled material would be detrimental to performance
2.b Materials can be reused rather than reprocessed especially if recycling is energy intensive or environmentally
damaging
2.c Using the reused or recycled material has a lower or equivalent environmental impact to the alternative, e.g.
considering transport costs, processing, pollution, etc. (refer to CN4).
3 The project delivery team or contractor's brief includes identified opportunities for recycling and reuse and requires that
these are explored further.

Reuse of existing infrastructure on site (one credit)

Reuse and recycling of materials and elements (one credit)
Recycled aggregates (one credit)
One credit - Reuse of existing infrastructure on site

4 A pre-demolition audit (refer to Relevant definitions) is completed by an independent and competent third party for any
existing buildings, structures or hard surfaces that require demolition on site.
5 The key findings of the audit are referenced within the Resource Management Plan (RMP) (refer to Wst 01 Construction
waste management) and includes potential applications and any related issues for the reuse and recycling of the
demolition materials in accordance with the waste hierarchy.
6 Targets for levels of reuse and recycling are set by the project delivery team.
7 Post construction, an evaluation of the differences between the actual and the predicted levels is carried out and these
figures are reported within the BREEAM Infrastructure online tool.
One credit - Reuse and recycling of materials and elements

See CN6 where a complete LCA has been carried out.
8 Opportunities recommended within the strategic stage assessment are re-evaluated with key representatives of the
project team through an iterative process and further opportunities for permanent and temporary materials (refer to
CN7) and elements are explored. This includes:
8.a Information identified at the strategic stage
8.b Confirmation of suitable depots (e.g. for railway track and ballast), dealers (e.g. for wind turbines) and other
construction sites to establish if existing infrastructure elements are available for reuse or recycling
8.c Confirmation of materials and elements suitable for reuse and recycling with justification for their inclusion or
exclusion
8.d A programme for updating design plans to incorporate suitable existing infrastructure elements.
9 Where excavated material is generated on site, national best practice guidance (refer to Appendix B - The Approved
Standards and Weightings List (ASWL)) is used to:
9.a Develop and implement a Materials Management Plan (MMP) covering the use of excavated materials based on
an appropriate risk assessment
9.b Treat and use materials as set out in the MMP. The MMP is referenced within the RMP (refer to Wst 01
Construction waste management) so that it can be actioned on site.
10 Component specifications and method statement documents and procurement plans are updated to include reused
and recycled materials for temporary construction works and permanent elements within the final asset.
11 If reuse and recycling has not been widely used for temporary and permanent materials, then compliance can be
demonstrated where:
11.a Confirmation is provided the review process was carried out iteratively between both the Strategic and project
detail stages
11.b Reuse and recycling of materials was deemed inappropriate because of one of the following:
11.b.i The components of the asset are all bespoke
11.b.ii Reused or recycled materials will not meet the required performance standards for the asset
11.b.iii The environmental cost of transporting the reused or recovered material is deemed to be greater
than the benefit of reusing the material
11.b.iv The environmental cost of reusing the material is deemed to be greater than the environmental cost
of using virgin material.
One credit - Recycled aggregates

See CN6 where a complete LCA has been carried out.
12 The percentage of high grade aggregate that is recycled or secondary aggregate, specified in each application (present)
must meet the minimum percentage levels (by weight or volume) of recycled of secondary aggregates, as specified in
Table 43. Where this minimum level is not met, all the aggregate in that application must be considered as primary
aggregate when calculating the total high grade aggregate specified.
13 The total amount of recycled or secondary aggregate specified, is greater than 25% (by weight or volume) of the total
high grade aggregate specified for the project.
14 The recycled or secondary aggregates are EITHER:
14.a Construction, demolition and excavation waste obtained on-site or off-site OR
14.b Secondary aggregates obtained from a non-construction or post-consumer or industrial by-product source
(refer to Relevant definitions section).

15 The percentage of high grade aggregate that is recycled or secondary aggregate, specified in each application (present)
must meet the exemplary minimum levels (by weight or volume), as specified in Table 43. Where this minimum level is not
met, all the aggregate in that application must be considered as primary aggregate when calculating the total high
grade aggregate specified.
16 Where the total amount of recycled or secondary aggregate specified is greater than 35% (by weight or volume) of the
total high grade aggregate specified for the project.
17 The contributing recycled or secondary aggregate must not be transported more than 30 km by road transport, or
equivalent (refer to CN11).

Table 43: Minimum levels (by weight and volume) of high grade aggregate specified per application (where present) that is
recycled or secondary aggregate
Application Min. % One credit Min. % Exemplary

performance
Bound
Structures 15% 30%
Erosion protection (e.g. sloping structures, revetments) 100% N/A
Bitumen or hydraulically bound base, binder and surface 30% 75%

courses for paved areas and roads
Hydraulically treated material as engineering fill 100% N/A
Foundations (shallow and deep)* 50% 100%
Concrete road surfaces 15% 45%
Concrete tunnel linings* 50% 100%
Unbound
New trenches (without concrete surround) 75% 100%
New trenches (with concrete surround)* 100% N/A
Trench reinstatement 100% N/A
Drainage and filter beds 100% N/A
Application Min. % One credit Min. % Exemplary

performance
Gabions 100% N/A
Embankments and cuttings 100% N/A
Ground improvements 100% N/A
Temporary works, e.g. working platforms 100% N/A
Pipe bedding 100% N/A
Granular fill and capping 100% N/A

(Refer to CN12)
*Based on the replacing the coarse aggregate
Compliance notes
Strategy criteria - General
CN1 Permanent The permanent materials to be considered within the assessment of this issue can be
components any element or component that forms part of the final asset. These include but are not
limited to:
2. Drainage
4. Piling, retaining walls and tunnels
5. Structures
7. Other.
Other elements are likely to be project specific, e.g. sleepers and track for railways,
surfacing for roads, etc.
CN2 Review of other The review of other construction sites for materials for reuse and recycling should
construction sites consider the following as a minimum:
for materials for 1. The construction programme for the assessed asset and alternative site
reuse and recycling 2. The transport implications of moving materials from an alternative site
- see criterion 1.b. 3. How to create linkages with these sites to promote reuse of materials between
projects.
CN3 Asbestos in reused Designers and contractors should be aware that made ground can potentially contain
or recycled asbestos, and therefore should be regarded as "suspect" in terms of the possible
materials presence of asbestos. Similarly, demolition material to be crushed and recycled may
contain small amounts of asbestos. Where either made ground, crushed demolition
material or both, is to be reused or recycled on or off-site, such material should be
monitored for the presence of asbestos. Where found, contractors must comply with
all relevant health and safety legislation within the country of assessment
Please also refer to the LUE 03 Remediation of land contamination where appropriate.
CN4 Assessing the It is recognised that it may be impractical to assess the environmental impact of all
environmental reused or recycled materials to the alternative at the strategic stage due to
impact of reused or assumptions that are made at this stage in regards to the materials specification.
recycled materials If it is unfeasible for the project team to meet this requirement at the strategy stage,
at the strategy the review must be carried out at the project detail stage to demonstrate compliance
stage with criterion 8 .
The strategic stage criteria could still be awarded where the remaining criteria are
achieved.
Project detail criteria - General
CN5 Reuse of existing This credit is only applicable to projects which have existing buildings or infrastructure
infrastructure on on site.
site credit
CN6 Use of LCA to The requirements for the project detail credits 'Reuse and recycling of materials and
demonstrate elements' (criteria 8 11 ) and 'Recycled aggregates' (criteria 13 14 ) can be
optimisation of awarded without meeting all of the specific requirements of these credits where a
reused and recycled complete LCA has been carried out and used to optimise reused and recycled content
materials for modules A-C and D.
Evidence will be required in the form of a report by a suitably qualified LCA practitioner
justifying how the environmental impact of the asset was reduced as far as practicably
possible through optimisation of reused and recycled materials.
The client or contractor must also demonstrate through appropriate evidence how
the LCA practitioner's recommendations were implemented in the fully constructed
asset.
In regards to the specific criteria:
Reuse and recycling of materials and elements: Criteria 8 and 11 can be

achieved through the LCA, however criteria 9 10 should be implemented
by the contractor to demonstrate how they have improved the design.
Recycled aggregates: Criteria 12 13 (i.e. percentage achieved) do not need

to be met, where the LCA has shown that inclusion of a higher percentage of
recycled aggregates would result in a great environmental impact over the life
of the asset. Criterion 14 should be achieved for all recycled aggregate
included in the final asset.
Project detail criteria - Reuse and recycling of components
CN7 Temporary The temporary materials to be considered within the assessment of this issue can be
materials any element or component that is used within the temporary construction works.
These include but are not limited to:
1. Formwork and falsework
2. Shoring and temporary bracing
3. Scaffolding
4. Temporary fill (crane foundations, temporary access roads etc.)
5. Portable offices and cabins
7. Temporary piping, electrical, mechanical and heating services.
Project detail criteria - Recycled aggregates
CN8 Unsuitable recycled The following aggregates cannot be deemed "recycled" or "secondary" to
aggregates demonstrate compliance with the recycled aggregate credit. Where any are specified
within the design of the final asset, they should not be included within the calculation:
1. Capping: Old bank slags and unburnt colliery spoil
2. Fill to substructures: Old bank slags
3. Pipe bedding and surround: Unburnt colliery spoil and burn colliery spoil
4. Concrete foundations and pavements: IBA, steel slag, unburnt colliery spoil and
burnt colliery spoil.
CN9 Off-site recycled Where off-site recycled aggregates from construction, demolition and excavation
aggregates waste are used, they should be produced according to the relevant quality protocol
(refer to Relevant definitions) where relevant.
CN10 Aggregates in off- Where any of the listed applications have been manufactured off site, the aggregate
site manufactured present in these applications should be included in the assessment of this issue.
applications
CN11 Transport of more Where recycled or secondary aggregate is transported by means other than road,
than 30 km by road, such as rail or river, the 30km distance may be increased, where it is demonstrated
or equivalent through calculation that the alternative mode of transport will have lower CO2
emissions than the equivalent road transport.
BRE does not specify the methodology for this calculation, however, conversion
factors and assumptions for typical construction transport just be documented and
justified.
CN12 Defining granular fill The materials used for granular fill and capping can only be considered 'high grade
and capping as a aggregate if they conform to specifications in national best practice standards (refer
high grade use to Appendix B - The Approved Standards and Weightings List (ASWL)). If not, they
should be considered low grade aggregate and excluded from the assessment of
the recycled aggregates credit.
Methodology
None.
Evidence
All One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in the BREEAM evidential requirements
1 3 Reuse and recycling strategy N/A N/A

and designer's or
contractor's brief
9 N/A Materials Management Plan As interim design stage

(MMP)
13 17 N/A Calculation confirming the Calculation confirming the

amount of recycled or amount of recycled or
secondary aggregate to be secondary aggregate used
used
Air-cooled blast furnace slag

Air-cooled blast furnace slag is classified as a by-product (rather than a waste) and can therefore be used as an
aggregate without the need for a quality protocol.

Refer to Mat 03 Materials efficiency.
Low grade aggregate uses

Crushed masonry used as fill material for general landscaping is not considered to be high grade. This practice is now
commonplace on construction sites due to increased landfill costs.
Materials optimisation
Refer to Mat 03 Materials efficiency
Post-consumer waste stream

Waste material generated by households or by commercial, industrial and institutional facilities in their role as end
users of the product, which can no longer be used for its intended purpose. This includes returns of material from the
distribution chain. Waste materials generated during manufacturing processes are pre-consumer waste streams and
are excluded. These streams include reutilisation of materials such as rework, regrind or scrap generated in a process
and capable of being reclaimed within the same process that generated it.
Pre-demolition audit
The aim of a pre-demolition audit is to determine if refurbishment or reuse of material is feasible where demolition is
required. If not, the intent is to maximise the recovery of material from demolition for subsequent high grade or high
value applications. A compliant pre-demolition audit must include:
1. Identification of the key refurbishment and demolition materials

2. Potential applications and any related issues for the reuse and recycling of the key refurbishment and demolition
materials
3. Completion of a standard template to record projected levels of demolition products and their recovery or
disposal route
4. Targets for reuse (on site and off site) and recycling of key products
5. An overall diversion of waste from landfill figure
6. A plan for monitoring demolition products and associated management routes to allow recording of actual
levels of recovery or disposal
Quality protocol
The purpose of a quality protocol is to provide a uniform control process for producers, from which they can
reasonably state and demonstrate that their product has been fully recovered and is no longer a waste. It also
provides purchasers with a product quality managed to common standards, which increases confidence in
performance. Aggregates that do not meet the requirements of a quality protocol or relevant aggregate standards
will still be considered waste. Protocols exist for aggregates produced from inert waste, use of pulverised fuel ash
(PFA) and furnace bottom ash (FBA) in bound applications.
Recycled aggregates
Recycled aggregates are those derived from reprocessing materials previously used in construction, e.g. crushed
concrete or masonry from construction and demolition waste material.
Secondary aggregates
Byproducts of industrial processes that can be processed to produce secondary aggregates. Secondary aggregates
are subdivided into manufactured and natural, depending on their source. Recognised non-construction post-
consumer or post-industrial byproducts include:
1. China clay waste
2. Slate overburden
3. Pulverised Fuel Ash (PFA)
4. Ground Granulated Blast Furnace Slag (GGBFS)
5. Air-cooled blast furnace slag
6. Steel slag
7. Furnace Bottom Ash (FBA)
8. Incinerator bottom ash (IBA)
9. Foundry sands
10. Recycled glass
11. Recycled plastic
12. Spent oil shale
13. Colliery spoil
14. Municipal solid waste treatment residues.
Other information
Further guidance on recycled and secondary aggregates

Details on the European Standards for Aggregates are available at aggregain.wrap.org.uk
WRAP has information, tools and guidance on the use of recycled and secondary aggregates, see
aggregain.wrap.org.uk/opportunities
Carbon and energy
Carbon and energy
Category overview
Refer to the country reference sheet in the ASWL None
Summary
This section encourages the specification and design of energy efficient and low carbon solutions for construction and
operation of the infrastructure asset. Issues in this section look to establish a carbon and energy strategy for the whole
project to identify key opportunities to reduce total carbon equivalent emissions and implementation of measures to reduce
carbon and energy during construction and operation are rewarded.

Issue Credits
CE 01 Carbon and energy strategy Strategy - 1

Project detail - 1
Review of whole life environmental impacts of the asset to inform a carbon and energy strategy
Setting of strategic objectives
CE 02 Construction site carbon and energy Strategy - 0

Project detail - 5
Investigation and implementation of measures that reduce construction site carbon and energy as
recommended by a suitably qualified carbon practitioner
Monitoring and reporting construction stage energy and carbon
CE 03 Operational carbon and energy Strategy - 0

Project detail - 4
Investigation and implementation of measures that reduce operational carbon and energy as recommended by
a suitably qualified carbon practitioner
Carbon and energy BREEAM New Construction: Infrastructure (International pilot)

Strategic credits available Project detail credits available Minimum
standards
1 1 None
Aim
To encourage analysis of the total carbon equivalent impact of the infrastructure asset over its lifetime and identify measures
that reduce carbon and energy from the asset.

One credit - Carbon and energy strategy

1 Based on the results of the screening carbon footprint or LCA within ID 06 Whole life environmental impacts, a carbon
and energy strategy is developed by a suitably qualified carbon practitioner (refer to Relevant definitions).
2 The strategy identifies opportunities for reducing the estimated total carbon equivalent over the expected lifetime of the
asset (refer to CN1 and CN2).
3 The strategy considers the following life cycle stages of the asset and prioritises reducing carbon equivalent from those
with the biggest impact and potential for reduction:
3.a Extraction and manufacturing of materials (Modules A1 to A3)
3.b Transport of materials from gate to site (Module A4)
3.c Construction processes and installation (Module A5) including use of plant and machinery, site accommodation
and facilities and transport and disposal of waste (site to grave)
3.d Operational processes (Module B1 and B6) as a result of the infrastructure design (refer to Relevant definitions)
3.e Maintenance, repair, replacement and refurbishment (Modules B2-B5)
3.f End of life (Modules C1-C4)
3.g Benefits and loads beyond the system boundary (Module D), such as land use changes (refer to Relevant
definitions) included if suitable scenarios can be developed and shown to be relevant and justified (i.e. optional
module).
4 Design choices are informed by the screening carbon footprint or LCA and recommendations from the suitably qualified
carbon practitioner. A series of solutions meeting the functional requirements of the asset are identified. Of these the
solution selected is that with the lowest total carbon equivalent over the expected lifetime of the asset.
5 The client, informed by the modelling and recommendations from the suitably qualified carbon practitioner, sets
objectives or targets for the life cycle stages with estimates of total carbon equivalent emissions (refer to CN3).
6 The project delivery team or contractor's brief includes:

6.a Applying the principles of the carbon and energy strategy and updating relevant objectives, targets or KPIs for
carbon and energy efficiency as the project progresses
6.b Details of who has responsibility to action the carbon and energy strategy
6.c A requirement to monitor and report on carbon and energy throughout the construction of the asset.
CE 01 Carbon and energy strategy Carbon and energy

One credit - Reporting total carbon and energy

7 The total carbon equivalent impact of the project is calculated for the final asset over its expected lifetime.
8 The total carbon equivalent and primary energy consumption of the project in reference to the asset's capacity (refer to
CN4) is reported as shown in Table 44 via the BREEAM Infrastructure online tool.

Table 44: Reporting total carbon equivalent and primary energy consumption in reference to the asset's capacity
Asset type Total carbon equivalent (kgCO 2e) and primary energy consumption (kWh)
reporting
Bridge, viaduct 1 /maximum passengers (kg) per km per annum OR /maximum axle weight of traffic
volume (kg) per km per annum.
Dam2 /maximum capacity to store water (million m3) per annum OR /maximum electricity
generated (MWh) per annum.
Flood defence, retaining wall /maximum capacity to retain water (million m3) or other solid material (million kg)
per annum.
Oil refineries /maximum petroleum products produced (MWh) per annum.
Pipeline, tunnels /maximum volume (million m3) transported (km) per annum OR maximum weight
(kg) of, i.e. transported (km) per annum.
Power stations including solar /maximum electricity generated (MWh) per annum.
and wind farms
Road, runway /maximum axle weight of traffic volume (kg) per km per annum.
Railway3 /maximum passengers (kg) per km per annum OR /maximum axle weight of traffic
volume (kg) per km per annum.
Water treatment, waste /maximum water treated (million m3) or weight of waste processed (kg) per
processing annum.
Other Please contact BRE Global for all other asset types and carbon capacity reporting.
All capacity measurement should be based on the ultimate design capacity (i.e. maximum capacity) of the asset, not a
typical year in operation.
Asset type Total carbon equivalent (kgCO 2e) and primary energy consumption (kWh)
reporting
1. The choice of indicator is dependent on whether the bridge is pedestrian, road or rail.
2. The choice of indicator is dependent on whether the dam is primary for water storage or designed to generated
electricity (e.g. hydroelectric).
3. The choice of indicator is dependent on whether the railway is predominantly a passenger or freight line. Where the is
no predominant use, the project should report against both indicators.
Compliance notes
the asset indicated within the design specification. If the lifetime of the asset is not specified then
the working lifetimes detailed in national best practice standards for the asset type
should be used (refer to Appendix B - The Approved Standards and Weightings List
(ASWL)).
CN2 Opportunities for Opportunities must be considered over the expected lifetime of the asset and include
reducing total the following as a minimum:
carbon equivalent
Choice of route or site and layout
emissions
Design features and technologies
Choice of materials and material optimisation, substitution or composition
Construction methods, processes and features that enable savings
Operational requirements and features that enable savings
Use of local (on site or near-site) low and zero carbon energy sources
Landscaping choices.
CN3 Setting of The setting of strategic objectives or targets is required at the strategic stage in order
objectives and to inform the design process and drive best practice.
targets for carbon It is not expected that these would be absolute targets but can be revisited and
and energy updated as the design process evolves. The process of reducing carbon and energy
efficiency across the life cycle of the asset should be an iterative process and as such objectives or
targets are likely to evolve throughout the design and construction process.
equivalent and carbon equivalent emissions and primary energy consumption of the asset over its
primary energy expected lifetime to be compared with its functional requirements. The design team
consumption from should report on capacity as shown in Table 44 as appropriate to the infrastructure
the asset over its type assessed.
expected lifetime in For example, a bridge project should report on both:
reference to
capacity
per km per annum
per km per annum.
CE 01 Carbon and energy strategy Carbon and energy
Methodology
None.
Evidence
1 6 Carbon and energy strategy N/A N/A
7 N/A Updated carbon footprint or Post-construction carbon

LCA report footprint or LCA report
Direct (Scope 1) and indirect (Scope 2) emissions

The GHG Protocol Corporate Standard 32classifies a company's GHG emissions into the following three 'scopes':
Scope 1 emissions - these are direct emissions from owned or controlled sources, e.g. emissions from
combustion in owned or controlled boilers, furnaces, vehicles, etc.
Scope 2 emissions - these are indirect (or 'out of scope') emissions from the generation of purchased
energy, e.g. electricity, imported heat that is purchased.
Scope 3 emissions - these are all indirect emissions that occur in the value chain of the reporting company,
including both upstream and downstream emissions.
Land use change


For the purpose of BREEAM Infrastructure operational carbon and energy savings refer to those savings that can be
attributed to the asset itself and not savings attributable to the way in which the asset is operated. For example,
smoother road surfaces and more gradually curved corners will lead to road traffic running more efficiently; gravity
drainage within a pipeline will reduce pumping capacity, etc.

BREEAM assessment:
methodologies
2. Has experience in undertaking assessments of the carbon and energy impact of construction projects

Other information
None.
CE 02 Construction site carbon and energy Carbon and energy

0 5 None
Aim
To construct the asset in a carbon and energy efficient manner.

None.

Construction carbon and energy performance (up to four credits)

Energy efficient construction activities (one credit)
Up to four credits - Construction carbon and energy performance

1 The opportunities identified within the strategic stage assessment of CE 01 Carbon and energy strategy criteria 2 3
for reducing carbon and energy consumption from construction activities are reviewed and updated throughout key
project gateways(refer to Relevant definitions) in line with the project details.
2 Key representatives of the project delivery team investigate energy saving opportunities, as a minimum those given in
Table 46. If any saving opportunities are not appropriate these should be identified and the reason for the exclusion
stated, e.g. technical or functional feasibility, regulatory requirements, etc.
3 The suitably qualified carbon practitioner prepares a list of recommendations that could be implemented by the project
with estimates of the anticipated level of savings. The recommendations are weighted by percentage in terms of the
impact of the recommendation on energy efficiency and carbon reduction (refer to CN1).
4 Prior to build and commission the carbon footprint developed within ID 06 Whole life environmental impacts is updated
for the construction stage with details of the proposed construction approach covering:
4.a Use of plant and machinery
4.b Site accommodation and facilities
4.c Transport and disposal of waste (site to grave).
5 Credits are awarded for the implementation of the suitably qualified carbon practitioner's weighted recommendations
that reduce energy consumption or carbon emissions from construction as shown in Table 45.
Table 45: Credits associated with energy and carbon savings from construction activities
Weighted recommendations implemented on site Associated credits
25% 1
50% 2
75% 3
95% 4
One credit - Monitoring construction stage carbon and energy

6 An individual is appointed to carry out on-site monitoring of carbon and energy (refer to CN3) and undertakes their role
7 The individual monitors and records data on contractor's and subcontractors' energy consumption in kWh and litres of
fuel used as a result of the use of construction plant, equipment (mobile and fixed) and site accommodation.
Note: Transport of materials to site and transport of waste from site is recorded and reported separately within the issue Tra
02 Travel and logistics plan.
8 The total carbon equivalent and primary energy consumption from the construction process in reference to the asset's
capacity (refer to CN5) is reported via the BREEAM Infrastructure online tool.

Table 46: Construction activities energy efficiency and carbon saving considerations
Ref Activity Saving opportunity
1a Asset design and Optimise earth movements required during the construction of the asset
siting and the surrounding site.
1b Reduce the amount of site clearance and demolition, e.g. by utilising

existing structures where possible.
1c Minimise the dimensions of the asset without impacting on capacity, e.g.

reducing length for a linear asset or overall dimensions for a point asset.
1d Site to avoid destruction of existing carbon sinks, e.g. woodland (refer to

LUE 07 Land use changes for further detail).
1e Minimise extent of temporary works, e.g. length of fencing or access

routes required.
2a Choice of Reduce overall construction time, e.g. to reduce the quantity of work
construction required and to reduce ancillary energy requirements such as lighting and
methods site accommodation.
2b Minimise use or design out high energy-consuming plant and machinery,

e.g. tunnel boring machines (TBMs), where feasible.
3a Choice of Select construction plant and machinery with a high efficiency (%), i.e. the
construction plant percentage of output rating achieved under typical operating conditions.
and machinery1
3b Select efficient ancillary equipment, e.g. accommodation, temporary
lighting (refer to CN2).
3c Select appropriately sized plant and machinery that will carry out the
necessary work in the most energy efficient manner.
3d Selecting plant, machinery and ancillary equipment with timers and other
automatic controls which:
Lead to efficiency gains by avoiding additional work being carried

out and reduction in the time taken to complete a task
Switch off the lighting during daylight or curfew hours in outdoor
areas.
4a Choice of fuels/ Use of on-site energy generation from renewable sources.

energy sources
4b Use of grid electricity over on-site generation.
4c Use alternatives to fossil fuels including diesel.
5a On site logistics and Work scheduling and sequencing to minimise overall construction time.
management
5b Work scheduling and sequencing to minimise distances travelled by
construction equipment on site.
5c Work scheduling and sequencing to minimise idling time for construction

equipment.
5d Campaigns or working practices that promote switching off machinery

and services promptly when they are no longer required.
6a Transport and Reduce the amount of waste generated in line with the principles of the
disposal of waste waste hierarchy.
6b Minimising distance travelled to disposal.
1. The following questions should be asked to assist in the selection of the most efficient equipment that is appropriate
for the task:
1. Is the size (output) of the equipment appropriate for the size of the task?
2. At what speed can the equipment perform the task?
3. Is the equipment available?
4. What are the transport costs and associated energy use (distance travelled and mode of use)?
5. How is the performance of the equipment affected by:
a. The soil characteristics on site?
b. The geometrical characteristics of the task?
6. Are there space and weight constraints on site?
7. What is the energy source used by the equipment?
Compliance notes
CN1 Suitably qualified The suitably qualified carbon practitioner must state the relative importance or
carbon weighting of each proposed carbon saving measure, based on the anticipated level of
practitioner's savings attributed to that recommendation, i.e. based on the energy profile during
weighted construction.
recommendations The practitioner must therefore confirm the ranking of the recommendations and
weight these appropriately, for example one measure could be twice or three times
more important in terms of total carbon equivalent saving as another, so this can hold
twice or three times as much weight in the percentage assessment.
This approach should be applied to all measures so that they are ranked in terms of
percentage contribution to total savings achievable.
CN2 Opportunities to In respect to temporary lighting the project team may wish to investigate:
reduce carbon and 1. The need for lighting on site during construction, including:
energy from a. Key locations on site where lighting is necessary, e.g. tunnels, and whether light
construction stage could be limited to these areas
lighting b. Whether it is feasible to limit construction to daylight hours for all or part of the
programme.
2. The applicability of curfews and automated controls to save higher levels of
lighting for when needed
3. Opportunities for energy efficient and low carbon lighting solutions (refer to Other
information).
CN3 Individual An individual with responsibility for monitoring, recording and reporting energy use
responsible for resulting from all on site construction processes (and dedicated off-site monitoring)
energy use through throughout the construction phase. The individual must have sufficient authority and
construction time on site to influence activities and request and access the data required.
CN4 Role of the Their role is to ensure that measures proposed to reduce energy consumption and
individual carbon emissions are implemented and that data are recorded and reported
responsible for site throughout the construction period.
monitoring For lighting specifically, the individual ensures construction light is:
1. Used only where necessary
2. Focused correctly (i.e. directed onto the work area)
3. Programmed with automatic controls that switch off or dim in accordance with
the need on site.
equivalent and carbon equivalent emissions and primary energy consumption of the asset during
primary energy construction to be compared with its functional requirements. The design team should
consumption from report on capacity as shown in CE 01 Carbon and energy strategy: Table 44, as
the asset over its appropriate to the infrastructure type assessed.
expected lifetime in For example, a road bridge project should report on both:
reference to
capacity
per km per annum
per km per annum.
Methodology
None.
Evidence
Construction specialist
An individual who has experience and knowledge in the selection of plant and machinery for infrastructure projects.

For the purpose of this issue, key representatives of the project delivery team include:
1. Suitably qualified carbon practitioner (refer to definition)
2. Contractor
3. Designer
4. Construction specialist (refer to definition).

1. Concept design
2. Definition
3. Design
4. Build and commission.

BREEAM assessment:
14040 and ISO 14044 and use of carbon footprinting tools or other carbon life cycle assessment methodologies
2. Has experience in undertaking assessments of the carbon and energy impact of construction projects

Other information
Tools for monitoring and targeting construction site impacts

BRE's online environmental reporting tool, SMARTWaste, enables users to capture, monitor and target a project's on-site
energy consumption and produce a CO2 footprint, water consumption and responsible sourcing of timber. Transport and
CCS data can also be collected. The system can be used as a tool to help meet the monitoring criteria within this issue and as a
source of evidence for demonstrating compliance. It is available through the SMARTWaste Membership scheme by
developing tailor-made versions of SMARTWaste. More details on the tool and membership are available at
www.smartwaste.co.uk.
Examples of energy and carbon saving opportunities

Some specific examples of energy and carbon savings opportunities on construction sites are identified below:
Hybrid construction equipment: This combines an energy storage system with an internal power producer such as a
combustion engine or an electric motor. They reduce the amount of fuel required, emit less CO2 and improve
operative controllability compared with the traditional combustion engine only equipment. Also hybrid technology
through their hybrid mobile elevated working platforms. For hydraulic equipment powered by combustion engines
only around 10% of the energy is translated into movement
Hydrogen fuel cells: These can be used to power monitoring equipment, particularly where access is limited and use
of generators would compromise the monitoring results and batteries did not have a long enough life span
Power correction (to increase the efficiency of power use): This is applicable to certain types of electrical equipment,
primarily induction loads
Solar panels: These can be used to power scanners and monitoring equipment and to power low energy lighting, e.g.
LED sign lighting.
Opportunities for energy efficient and low carbon temporary lighting solutions
Temporary lighting will, in most cases, contribute to the energy consumed during the construction period. Efficient lighting
solutions can reduce consumption and alternative fuel sources (to diesel generators) can save carbon. Table 47 provides
figures for 'best practice efficiencies' which may be implemented within the project (current at the time of writing). The suitably
qualified carbon practitioner may also investigate site lighting that is mains powered, provided by hybrid lighting towers or
uses low or zero carbon technologies.
Table 47: Construction stage light fitting efficiencies
Type of light fitting Energy efficiency measure Requirement
Integrated LED light sources Average initial luminous efficacy 60 luminaire lumens per circuit
of the light fittings watt
All other light sources Initial lamp efficacy of each light 80 lamp lumens per watt
fitting

0 4 None
Aim
To ensure that the asset is designed and constructed to minimise future operational energy demand, consumption and CO2
emissions.

None.

Up to four credits - Operational carbon and energy performance

1 The opportunities identified within the strategic stage assessment of CE 01 Carbon and energy strategy: criteria 2 3
for reducing operational carbon and energy are reviewed and updated throughout key project gateways (refer to
Relevant definitions) in line with the project details.
2 Consideration is given to reducing the following over the expected lifetime of the asset (refer to CN2 and relevant
definitions):
2.a Operational energy demand
2.b Operational primary energy consumption
2.c Operational carbon emissions.
3 Key representatives of the project delivery team investigate energy saving opportunities, as a minimum those given in
Table 49. If any saving opportunities are not appropriate these should be identified and the reason for the exclusion
stated, e.g. technical or functional feasibility, regulatory requirements etc.
4 The suitably qualified carbon practitioner prepares a list of recommendations that could be implemented by the project
with estimates of the anticipated level of savings. The recommendations are weighted by percentage in terms of the
impact of the recommendation on energy efficiency and carbon reduction (refer to CN3).
5 Prior to build and commission the carbon footprint developed within ID 06 Whole life environmental impacts is updated
for the operational stage with details of the proposed energy saving features.
6 Credits are awarded for the implementation of the suitably qualified carbon practitioner's weighted recommendations
that reduce energy consumption or carbon emissions from operation of the infrastructure asset as shown in Table 48.
7 The total carbon equivalent and primary energy consumption from operation in reference to the asset's capacity (refer
to CN4 and CN5) is reported via the BREEAM Infrastructure online tool.
CE 03 Operational carbon and energy Carbon and energy
Table 48: Credits associated with energy and carbon savings as a result of the operation of the asset
Weighted recommendations implemented on site Associated credits
25% 1
50% 2
75% 3
95% 4

Table 49: Operational energy saving considerations
1 Energy consumption and carbon emissions Design of asset to minimise demand, primary energy
associated with the end use of the asset. consumption and reduce associated carbon emissions
during operation, e.g. gradient, curvature, rolling resistance
of linear projects.
2a Energy consumption integral to the asset's Designing out energy-consuming components.

operation.
2b Selection of efficient equipment for the asset's operation,
e.g. efficient pumps, efficient transmission, efficient lighting
(refer to CN6), etc.
2c Use of automatic controls and timers so that energy

consuming equipment only runs when needed.
3a Energy sources for integral processes. Selection of components which use lower carbon fuels.
3b Use of low or zero carbon technologies for energy

consuming components (refer to CN7).
4 Operational carbon from maintenance or Design of asset to minimise the need for maintenance /
replacement. replacement or associated activities that are low carbon.
Compliance notes
CN1 Assets with no Infrastructure assets that do not require operational energy should not assess this issue,
operational energy e.g. retaining walls.
Where projects have designed out operational energy this issue should still be assessed
and credits awarded.
the asset indicated in the design specification which has received planning consent. If the lifetime is
not specified then the working lifetimes detailed in national best practice standards for
the asset type should be used (refer to Appendix B - The Approved Standards and
CN3 Suitably qualified The suitably qualified carbon practitioner must state the relevant importance or
carbon weighting of each proposed carbon saving measure, based on the anticipated level of
practitioner's savings attributed to that recommendation, i.e. based on the energy profile during
weighted operation.
recommendations The practitioner must therefore confirm the ranking of the recommendations and
weight these appropriately, for example one measure could be twice or three times
more important in terms of total carbon equivalent saving as another, so this can hold
twice or three times as much weight in the percentage assessment.
This approach should be applied to all measures so that they are ranked in terms of
percentage contribution to total savings achievable.
equivalent and carbon equivalent emissions and primary energy consumption of the asset during
primary energy operation to be compared with its functional requirements. The design team should
consumption from report on capacity as shown in CE 01 Carbon and energy strategy: Table 44 as
operation in appropriate to the infrastructure type assessed.
reference to the For example, a road bridge project should report on both:
asset's capacity
per km per annum AND
per km per annum.
CN5 Government's grid The suitably qualified carbon practitioner can include the national government's
decarbonisation projections on grid decarbonisation within the carbon and energy model for
projections establishing total carbon equivalent over the asset's operation, if available.
The latest figures can be used within the assessment, up to the year for which the
projections have been provided. For the operation of the asset beyond this time it
should be assumed that there is no further changes to grid (as these have not been
projected or quantified).
CN6 Opportunities to Due to the wide scope of infrastructure projects lighting, if required, and its impact over
reduce energy and the operational life of the asset can vary. The project team could investigate (to varying
carbon from degrees of detail based on the function of the asset):
operational lighting 1. Key locations on and around the asset and site where lighting is necessary, e.g.
tunnels, road lighting, runway lighting, etc.
2. The type of lighting that is required, e.g. safety, functional, decorative and whether
this can be designed out
3. Whether decorative lighting, including floodlighting of bridges or promenades, is
required, for example, if the asset is considered a focal point in the night time
scene
4. Appropriate lighting controls such as presence detectors, time switches and
curfews
5. Opportunities for energy efficient and low carbon lighting solutions (refer to Other
information).
CN7 Low or zero carbon The amount of energy or CO2 emissions reduction is not specified in the criteria in this
technologies for issue. However, it should not be a trivial amount. As a guide, the installation should
operational use contribute at least 5% of overall operational energy demand or CO2 emissions.
Methodology
None.
Evidence
Energy demand
The energy that needs to be provided in order to achieve operational capacity of the asset, i.e. energy provided for
end use of the asset such as lighting, fan power, pump power, etc. Energy demand, and opportunities for reducing
this, will vary depending on the type of infrastructure asset and its function.
The aim of considering energy demand is to reduce the demand while still meeting the functional capacity of the
asset.
For the purpose of this issue, key representatives of the project delivery team include:
1. Suitably qualified carbon practitioner
2. Contractor
3. Designer
4. Owner/operator.

1. Concept design
2. Definition
3. Design
4. Build and commission.
Low or zero carbon (LZC) technologies

A low or zero carbon technology provides a source of energy generation from renewable energy sources or from a
low carbon source such as combined heat and power (CHP) or ground source heat pumps (GSHP). Waste heat from
an operational process that takes place within the assessed asset (or on the assessed site) can be considered as 'low
carbon' where the generation of the heat from the process is integral to the assessed asset.

For the purpose of BREEAM Infrastructure operational carbon and energy savings refer to those savings that can be
attributed to the asset itself and not savings attributable to the way in which the asset is operated. For example,
smoother road surfaces and more gradually curved corners will lead to road traffic running more efficiently; gravity
drainage within a pipeline will reduce pumping capacity, etc.
Primary energy consumption

Primary energy is an energy from fossil fuel or renewable sources that has not been subjected to any conversion or
transformation process. Primary energy consumption is direct use at the source of generation, or supply to users
without transformation of crude energy, that is, energy that has not been subjected to any conversion or
transformation process.
The aim of considering primary energy consumption is to meet the energy demand in the most efficient way, i.e.
minimising losses from source through to consumption.

BREEAM assessment:
methodologies.
2. Has experience in undertaking assessments of the carbon and energy impact of construction projects.

Other information
Opportunities for energy efficient and low carbon permanent lighting solutions
The relative impact of permanent lighting on operational carbon and energy will vary based on the type of infrastructure
asset. For example, the energy profile for some road schemes could be greatly reduced through implementation of
measures to reduce operational lighting, however, for rail schemes this may only contribute a small amount to the energy
profile in relation to other energy consuming items, e.g. signalling energy, ventilation in tunnels and shafts and other elements
of the overhead line.
Table 50 provides figures for 'best practice efficiencies' which may be implemented within the project (current at the time of
writing). The suitably qualified carbon practitioner may also investigate options for using low or zero carbon sources of
energy.
Table 50: Operational light fitting efficiencies
Type of area to be lit Energy efficiency measure Requirement
Illuminance based area types: Maximum energy efficiency indicator, 0.044 W/lux m2 for a required
Road intersections or shopping streets, given by the average system power illuminance below or equal to 15
residential roads, pathways or cycle divided by the required horizontal lux
tracks (classes CE or S), outdoor work illuminance and the area to be lit OR
places or similar 0.034 W/lux m2 for required
illuminance above 15 lux
Luminance based area types: Maximum energy efficiency indicator, 0.524 W/cd/m2
Traffic routes (classes ME or MEW) given by the average system power
divided by the required surface
luminance and the area to be lit
Lighting of spaces with no Average initial luminous efficacy of the 60 luminaire lumens per circuit
recommended light level, including light fittings watt
floodlighting or lighting of vertical
surfaces1
Traffic signals2 Maximum operating wattage (at 25C) LED light sources must be used
of individual modules (including power as follows:
demand from the lamp power circuit)
300mm Red Ball: 8W
200mm Red Ball: 7.5W
300mm Red Arrow: 7W.
300mm Amber Ball: 9W
200mm Amber Ball: 8W
300mm Amber Arrow:
7W.
300mm Green Ball:
9.5W
200mm Green Ball: 8W
300mm Green Arrow:
7W.
1. Coloured lighting is exempt from meeting this requirement.

2. Railway signals are exempt from meeting this requirement.
Some lighting standards allow lower recommended illuminances if white light with good colour rendering index is used.
In these instances, the higher illuminance can be used.
Waste BREEAM New Construction: Infrastructure (International pilot)
Waste
Category overview
Refer to the country reference sheet in the ASWL Wst 01 Construction waste management
Summary
This category encourages the sustainable management of construction site waste through strategic planning, design and
construction. As a result, waste arising from construction activities should be reduced to best practice levels and waste
diverted from landfill.

Issue ID Credits
Wst 01 Construction waste management Strategy - 1

Project detail - 2
Exemplary - 1
Strategic evaluation of waste generated on-site considering excavation, demolition, construction and hazardous
waste
Development of a dynamic Resource Management Plan (RMP) and verification of how it is implemented
Reducing construction waste arising related to on-site construction and off-site manufacture and fabrication
Diverting non-hazardous construction and demolition waste (where relevant) from landfill
Wst 01 Construction waste management Waste

available available
1 2 Prerequisite - criteria 6 9 (Resource management plan) - Pass
One credit - criteria 13 17 (Diversion of non-hazardous

waste from landfill) - Outstanding
Aim
To promote resource efficiency via the effective management and reduction of construction waste.

One credit - Waste strategy

1 A strategic evaluation of the amount of waste likely to be generated during the construction of the asset is produced for
the project options. The estimated waste arisings are categorised as:
1.a Excavated waste
1.b Demolition waste
1.c Construction waste
1.d Hazardous waste.
2 The process records how waste arisings have been robustly determined (such as baseline data from previous or similar
projects) and justification given as to whether the waste is deemed to be a significant impact of the construction of the
asset.
3 If excavated waste is deemed significant (refer to CN1) an analysis following the waste hierarchy (refer to Relevant
definitions) is carried out including a review of potential receptor sites. As a minimum, the following are considered:
3.a The distance to the receptor sites and form of transport required
3.b The capacity
3.c The acceptability of materials
3.d Other local environmental impacts
3.e The impact of transporting excavated waste off site compared to treatment or use on site.
4 Representatives with experience or expertise in waste management, such as contractor and supply chain organisations,
have reviewed and commented on:
4.a The waste strategy
4.b Suggestions on resource efficiency and waste minimisation measures.
5.a Development of a Resource Management Plan (RMP) that promotes resource efficiency throughout the
project's lifetime
5.b Development of on-site features to minimise waste (refer to Table 52 for examples).
Please note that criteria 6 and 7 also require actions to be undertaken at the concept design stage, however as they are
linked to the detail design process, they are included in the project detail assessment criteria.

Resource management plan (prerequisite)

Construction resource efficiency and waste minimisation (one credit)
Diversion of non-hazardous waste from landfill (one credit)
Prerequisite - Resource management plan

6 A Resource Management Plan (RMP) (refer to Relevant definitions) is developed covering non-hazardous waste related
to on-site construction and dedicated off-site manufacture or fabrication (including demolition and excavation waste)
generated by the design and construction of the asset.
7 The RMP is based on an appropriate risk assessment and must be produced during the concept design stage and
reviewed and updated regularly (refer to CN2) through to handover.
8 If relevant, the results of the pre-demolition audit as required in Mat 04 Reuse and recycling: 4 and 5 are included in the
RMP.
9 A verification report is produced to demonstrate the implementation of the RMP and to feed back on lessons learnt
(refer to CN3).
One credit - Construction resource efficiency and waste minimisation

11 The checklist in Table 52 has been completed by the main contractor with details of waste minimising features
implemented on site (refer to CN4).
12 An appropriate target (refer to Relevant definitions) is set for construction waste arising related to on-site construction
and dedicated off-site manufacture or fabrication (excluding demolition and excavation waste). Actual waste arising is
recorded and reported in the BREEAMInfrastructure online tool along with the target for the asset.
One credit - Diversion of non-hazardous waste from landfill

14 The Construction waste data form or equivalent (refer to CN7) within the BREEAM Infrastructure online tool is completed
with data for all construction waste arising on site and dedicated off-site manufacture or fabrication.
15 The percentages shown in Table 51 for non-hazardous construction waste (related to on-site and off-site manufacture
or fabrication in a dedicated facility) and demolition waste (if relevant) have been met for diversion from landfill.
16 An appropriate target (refer to Relevant definitions) is set for diversion of excavated waste from landfill. The actual
diversion rate is recorded and reported in the BREEAM Infrastructure online tool along with the target for the asset.
17 Waste materials are sorted into separate key waste groups as per Table 53 (according to the waste streams generated
by the scope of the works) either on site or through a licensed contractor for recovery.


19 The percentage of non-hazardous construction (on site and dedicated off-site manufacture or fabrication), and
demolition waste (if relevant) diverted from landfill meets or exceeds the exemplary level percentage benchmarks shown
in Table 51.
20 All key waste groups are identified for diversion from landfill in the RMP.
21 All data from waste contractors used to demonstrate compliance with criterion 19 are data related to the actual
project, rather than the rate for the waste facility.

Table 51: Diversion of non-hazardous waste from landfill benchmarks
One Credit Exemplary Level
National recovery rates Type of waste BREEAMtarget rates for diversion from landfill
Where the national Construction 60% (by weight) or 75% (by weight) or
construction recovery rate 50% (by volume) 65% (by volume)
is < 50% (by weight)*
Where the national Demolition 70% (by weight) or 75% (by weight) or
demolition waste recovery 60% (by volume) 65% (by volume)
rate is < 60% (by weight)*
Where the national Construction 10% improvement over 35% improvement over
construction recovery rate national rate (up to where national rate (up to where
is 50% (by weight)* 95% of total waste 95% of total waste
created is diverted from created is diverted from
landfill) landfill)
Where the national Demolition 10% improvement over 35% improvement over
demolition waste recovery national rate (up to where national rate (up to where
rate is 60% (by weight)* 95% of total waste 95% of total waste
created is diverted from created is diverted from
landfill) landfill)
*Where the national waste recovery rate is reported for both construction and demolition waste together, the same
target should be used for both types of waste (refer to Appendix B - The Approved Standards and Weightings List
(ASWL)). For the project to achieve the credit, both construction and demolition waste (reported separately) must meet
the target.
Table 52: On-site waste minimisation features
Ref On-site feature description Addressed on Proposed evidence Ref to

site (Yes/No) evidence
1 Appropriate storage of materials Site plans

Materials logistics plan and
reporting
Material receipts
2 Use of best practice logistic techniques Site plans

Materials logistics plan and
reporting
Ref On-site feature description Addressed on Proposed evidence Ref to

site (Yes/No) evidence
3 Procedures to reduce waste from Construction programme and

construction materials details of suppliers
4 Procedures to reduce packaging Details of suppliers and

waste packaging procedures
5 Appropriate training and Training content and

communication on waste minimisation attendance sheets
6 Waste minimisation incentives Contracts
Table 53: Construction waste groups
Key group Examples
Bricks Bricks
Concrete Pipes, kerb stones, paving slabs, concrete rubble, precast and in situ
Insulation Glass fibre, mineral wool, foamed plastic
Packaging Paint pots, pallets, cardboard, cable drums, wrapping bands, polythene sheets
Timber Softwood, hardwood, board products such as plywood, chipboard, medium density
fibreboard (MDF)
Electrical and electronic Electrical and electronic TVs, fridges, air-conditioning units, lamps, equipment
equipment
Canteen or office Office waste, canteen waste, vegetation
Oils Hydraulic oil, engine oil, lubricating oil
Asphalt and tar Bitumen, coal tars, asphalt
Tiles and ceramics Ceramic tiles, clay roof tiles, ceramic, sanitary ware
Inert Mixed rubble, excavation material, glass
Metals Radiators, cables, wires, bars, sheet
Gypsum Plasterboard, plaster, fibre cement sheets
Binders Render, cement, mortar
Key group Examples
Plastics Pipes, cladding, frames, non-packaging sheet
Furniture Tables, chairs, desks, sofas
Soils Soils, clays, sand, gravel, natural stone
Liquids Non-hazardous paints, thinners, timber treatments
Hazardous Defined in the Hazardous Waste List (HWL) of the European Waste Catalogue (EWC)
Floor coverings (soft) Carpets, vinyl flooring
Architectural features Roof tiles, reclaimed bricks, fireplaces
Mixed, other Efforts should be made to categorise waste into the above categories wherever
possible.
Compliance notes
CN1 Significant amount If over 1,000 tonnes of excavation waste is predicted then criterion 3 will apply to
of excavated waste the project.
- criterion 2 .
CN2 Updating the The Resource Management Plan (RMP) should be updated regularly throughout the
Resource design and construction stage to ensure effective management of waste arisings
Management Plan and effective minimisation. 'Updated regularly' in this context can be defined as
(RMP) - criterion 7 once every two months or when there is a change in the design or construction plan
that will effect resource management.
CN3 Contents of the The verification report should summarise how the RMP was implemented and
verification report whether it was successful.
For example, it could cover what worked well (or less well) from the plan, whether
waste minimisation actions actually made waste (or cost) savings and what lessons
have been learnt for future projects.
CN4 Table 52 On-site All features within Table 52 must be considered within the design and planning
waste minimisation stages to optimise waste minimisation on site. Where opportunities are not
present to implement all features listed, this will be acceptable for compliance
where this is documented and justified.
CN5 Beneficial reuse of Although beneficial reuse of material or waste at landfill sites should be separately
material or waste at recorded within the BREEAM Construction waste data form, this should not be
landfill included as a contribution towards overall recycling figures.
CN6 Waste from Any waste generated on-site for the purposes of the development (excluding
temporary support demolition and excavation waste) must be taken account of in the assessment of
structures this issue. If temporary support structures, or any other materials or system
brought on site to facilitate construction of a building, enter the waste stream
(albeit for recycling), then they will need to be classified as construction waste and
therefore contribute to the construction waste benchmark necessary to facilitate
assessment with this issue.
If the support structure is reused by the contractor (or by another contractor) on
other sites, then it has not been discarded and therefore does not enter the waste
stream. Thus it would not be included in the waste generated and hence the
benchmark figures for this issue. The same would apply to timber form work where
reused.
CN7 Construction waste An equivalent to the construction-waste data form can be used by the project
data form or team, as long as it records the same information required. Where the project team
equivalent use their own tool to record their waste arisings; the assessor must ensure that the
tool is robust in providing the relevant information required for the assessment.
Alternatively, if the client or contractor confirms that the BRE's SMARTWaste system
has been used for planning and monitoring, the data can be used for reporting
within the online tool.
Methodology
Construction waste data form
The construction-waste data form has been developed to collate key information on waste arising at construction and how it
is being minimised following the waste hierarchy. The form can be used by projects to monitor and track their targets for
waste arising and diversion from landfill. It will also be used by BRE to inform future benchmarking and drive best practice in
the infrastructure sector.
The form records the following data:
1. Materials and waste arisings

2. Key waste groups and whether these are considered hazardous
3. Reuse of materials (where not defined as a waste) and reuse location
4. Reuse of waste
5. Direct recycling of waste
6. Waste sent to a transfer station
7. Recycling rates of the transfer station (and source of data)
8. Energy recovery of waste
9. Waste landfilled (and landfilled beneficially)
10. Overall diversion from landfill.
Evidence
1 5 Waste strategy and designer's or N/A N/A

contractor's brief
6 9 N/A Resource Management Plan RMPVerification report
Appropriate training and communication on waste minimisation

Appropriate training and communication should include developing a programme to ensure all site staff are aware
of features employed on-site to reduce waste, e.g. those covered in Table 52. This should include how individuals are
expected to report on materials logistics and waste arisings. Training can be delivered via bespoke courses or
incorporated into existing training sessions such as induction and tool box training.
Appropriate storage of materials

Appropriate storage of materials should include (but is not limited to):
1. Clearly demarcated material storage and lay down areas
2. Suitable storage areas for the type and amount of materials being stored
3. Secure areas for storage of materials
4. Receipt and storage process appropriate to the project phase to allow organisation of similar materials
(electronic or paper system)
5. Use of quality control systems to inspect materials delivered to site for damage before acceptance
6. Suitable equipment and workforce to handle unloading and movement of material around site.
Appropriate targets
These can be set according to best practice (where available) and will depend on the type of waste and the
opportunities available to the project team. Targets could also be set to improve on data from similar past projects
or which are working towards a company target. The design team should justify why the targets are deemed
appropriate. A target is not deemed to be an 'appropriate target' within this issue solely because it is achievable.
Best practice logistics techniques

Best practice logistics techniques are those that allow for optimised ordering and minimise storage of materials on-
site, which can ultimately reduce waste. This includes techniques such as:
1. Just-In-Time delivery (JIT)
2. Demand smoothing
3. On-site Marketplaces (MP)
4. Pre-assembled and off-site fabrication
5. Information and Communication Technology (ICT) Systems used to tag and track materials ("Tag systems")
6. Inventory Management Optimisation (IMO) software systems
7. Construction Consolidation Centres (CCC).
Dedicated off-site manufacturing or fabrication
Production of a component or material carried out in an off-site manufacturing or processing facility specifically set
up for a development project.
Diversion from landfill

Actions to avoid waste being disposed of in landfill include:
1. Reusing the material on-site (in situ or for new applications)
2. Reusing the material on other sites
3. Community reuse and recycling
4. Salvaging or reclaiming the material for reuse
5. Returning material to the supplier via a 'take back' scheme
6. Recovery of the material from site by an approved waste management contractor and recycled or sent for
energy recovery.
Procedures to reduce waste from construction materials

A review of materials required on-site and procedures put in place to reduce the amount of construction materials
becoming waste. This may include:
1. Programming for contingency of over ordered materials with short lives, e.g. concrete
2. Use of take back schemes for over ordered materials or offcuts.
Procedures to reduce packaging waste

A review of likely packaging on-site and procedures put in place to reduce the amount of packaging becoming a
waste. This may include:
1. Selection of suppliers who have measures to reduce or reuse packaging
2. Procurement of products with recyclable packaging
3. Efficient use of packaging
4. Use of take back schemes for packaging.

The aim of the RMP is to promote resource efficiency in the construction of the asset. Resource efficiency includes
optimising the use of materials and minimising waste through assessment of the use, reuse and recycling of materials
and products on and off site. This should be considered across the project by the client, designers and principal
contractors. Best practice is a combination of commitments to:
1. Standardise materials and components
2. Reduce the overall material use and waste generated over the life cycle of the asset
3. Design out waste (materials optimisation)
4. Reduce waste generated on site
5. Establish outcome focused specifications to ensure material optimisation and implement procedures to sort and
reuse or recycle construction and demolition waste.
6. Follow guidance from (as appropriate):
Government departments
BRE
Local or national best practice
WRAP
A BREEAM compliant RMP is one that defines:
1. A target benchmark for waste minimisation and resource efficiency, i.e. m3 of waste per 100,000 project value
or tonnes of waste per 100,000 project value
2. Procedures and commitments for minimising non-hazardous waste in line with the benchmark
3. Procedures for minimising hazardous waste
4. Details of waste minimisation actions to be undertaken, including designing out waste principles
5. Procedures for estimating, monitoring, measuring and reporting hazardous and non-hazardous site waste. If
waste data are obtained from licensed external waste contractors, the data needs to be reliable and verifiable,
e.g. by using data from national regulatory bodies
6. Procedures for sorting, reusing and recycling waste into defined waste groups, either on site or through a
licensed external contractor
7. Procedures for reviewing and updating the plan
8. The name or job title of the individual responsible for implementing the above.
Waste minimisation incentives
To ensure waste reduction is achieved, every party in the supply chain should be committed to waste reduction and
the setting of targets can be used to encourage or incentivise the supply. Where waste reduction targets are set it
may be appropriate to provide a reward where feedback is given on how decisions have been made to reduce
waste.
Waste arising benchmark

The waste arising benchmark should only include waste arising on-site and off-site from manufacture or fabrication
in a dedicated facility as defined by national regulation. The national regulatory body's definition of waste can be
used to define whether a material has avoided being waste, i.e. it is being reused rather than entering a waste stream.
Waste hierarchy
The order of priority for the management of waste where waste generation could or does occur. This is listed in
descending order of environmental preference as:
Prevention
Reuse
Recycle
Recover
Dispose.
Other information
WRAP's Designing out Waste: a design team guide for Civil Engineering
WRAP's Designing out waste tool provides a practical approach to successfully implementing the Designing out Waste
principles in civil engineering projects. The guide is presented in two parts:
Part 1 - Design Guide Provides the case for action, details the principles of Designing out Waste, and offers a
structured approach to implementation in civil engineering projects
Part 2 - Technical Solutions Provides technical summary sheets on a range of design solutions for civil engineering
projects.
WRAP also provide information on addressing resource efficiency through the design and construction process (refer to
www.wrap.org.uk) including WRAP's Resource Management Planning tool.
Water BREEAM New Construction: Infrastructure (International pilot)
Water
Category overview
Refer to the country reference sheet in the ASWL Wat 01 Water efficiency planning and implementation
Summary
This category encourages efficient use of water during the construction and operation stages of the project. Issues in this
section focus on developing a water strategy, appraising water demand and opportunities for efficiencies, implementing a
water efficiency plan including measures to monitor and reduce water consumption to meet water consumption targets.
Category summary
Issue Credits
Wat 01 Water efficiency planning and implementation Strategy - 1

Project detail - 5
Developing a water strategy and undertaking an appraisal of water uses compared with supply
Appointing a water champion and providing staff training
The implementation of measures to reduce water consumption on site and during operation
Wat 02 Water monitoring Strategy - 0

Project detail - 3
Metering and monitoring water consumption

Benchmarking water consumption against industry targets
Wat 01 Water efficiency planning and implementation Water
Wat 01 Water efficiency planning and
implementation
available available
1 5 One credit - criteria 4 6 and 10 16 (Site welfare facilities)

- Good
One credit - criteria 4 6 and 19 25 (Construction
processes) - Very good
Aim
To recognise, encourage and enforce measures to minimise water consumption through appropriate planning, training and
the use of water efficient fittings, equipment and processes.

One credit - Water strategy

1 A water strategy for the project is developed (refer to CN1) and includes:
1.a All identified water demands over the life of the asset and how this may be influenced by changes in climate,
population and future demand (refer to Res 03 Designing for future needs)
1.b Existing water supplies and how these may be affected by changes in climate, population and future demand
(refer to Res 03 Designing for future needs)
1.c Identification of water stressed areas within the geographic location of the asset, by reviewing the water
management plans of the local water company
1.d The potential for and risks associated with excessive or uncontrolled water usage and leakage from fittings,
fixtures, processes etc.
1.e Opportunities for implementing water efficient measures and features within the current design and, where
appropriate, additions or alterations to meet future needs (refer to Res 03 Designing for future needs)
1.f Opportunities for water reuse and rainwater or grey water recycling during construction and operation
1.g Potential water savings available at the construction stage (and where relevant operational stage) from a
combination of the following measures:
1.g.i Water efficient fittings
1.g.ii Water efficiency measures and processes
1.g.iii Reusing and recycling water.
2 The water company is offered the opportunity to review and comment on the water strategy (refer to CN2).
3 The project delivery team or contractor's brief includes a requirement to further explore the opportunities identified for
water savings.

This stage of the issue is split into five parts:
Water efficiency plan (prerequisite)

Construction site staff training (one credit)
Site welfare facilities (up to two credits)
Construction processes (one credit)
Welfare facilities for the asset in operation (one credit)
Prerequisite - Water efficiency plan

4 A Water champion is appointed for the construction stage (refer to CN1) and is responsible for:
4.a Writing or reviewing the water efficiency plan
4.b Setting and achieving performance targets for the project (refer to CN3)
4.c Reporting on the progress of meeting targets
4.d Implementing and managing improvements to water efficiency
4.e Raising staff awareness of the importance of water efficiency and implementing the necessary training.
5 A water efficiency plan is developed (or reviewed) and implemented by the water champion based on the water
strategy (refer to criterion 1 ) and influenced by any feedback from the water company. The plan includes the following
for the construction stage and, where present, for any operational water consumption (refer to CN1):
5.a Schematic drawings showing the water supply network and metering
5.b Water efficiency measures
5.c Operation and maintenance requirements for water-consuming devices and fittings
5.d Requirements for inspecting water-consuming devices and fittings
5.e Water consumption targets (refer to CN3)
5.f The process and frequency of monitoring and recording water consumption data.
6 A representative from the local water company is invited to carry out a site visit to review the water efficiency measures
installed on site (refer to CN2).
One credit - Construction site staff training

8 Construction stage project managers are required to complete training which demonstrates that they understand the
need for water efficiency on construction sites (refer to CN1).
9 Training is provided to construction site staff to undertake their role in a water efficient manner (refer to CN1).
Up to two credits - Site welfare facilities
One credit
11 WCs have an effective flush volume of 4.5 litres or less.
12 Wash-hand basin taps have a flow rate of 5L/minute or less and have a self-closing mechanism.
13 Either urinals have a flow rate of 3 litres/bowl/hour or less, hydraulic valves are fitted to each urinal or both, to manage
water consumption based on occupancy.
14 Showers have a flow rate of 8L/minute or less.
15 Kitchen taps have a flow rate of 5L/minute or less and trigger control is fitted to any pre-rinsing facilities.
16
One credit
17 Criteria 4 6 and 11 16 are achieved.
18 The use of rainwater recycling or grey water recycling is installed on all welfare blocks.
One credit - Construction processes

20 For dust suppression on roads one of the following measures is adopted:
20.a Dust suppression vehicles are fitted with hydraulic spinning systems
20.b The use of a road sweeper with an on board water recycling system
20.c Dust suppression vehicles with a high water pressure, a low water flow and fitted with splash plates.
21 For dust suppression of stockpiles one of the following measures is adopted:
21.a The use of fan misting systems which atomise and discharge water
21.b The application of an admixture to increase the surface tension of the water to create a thicker barrier
21.c Rain guns located adjacent to the stockpile.
22 All hose pipes are fitted with trigger nozzles with the ability to vary flow and pressure.
23 Where wheel washing systems are in place:
23.a They use reclaimed or recycled water
23.b Signs indicate which parts of the vehicle require washing (to prevent 'over washing')
23.c Any manual hose pipes are fitted with a trigger or similar (refer to criterion 22 ).
24 All temporary water uses have identification plates for ease of monitoring and maintenance.
25 Isolation valves are installed on the temporary water supply system where water-consuming devices or activities are
deemed (by the water champion) as having a high risk of leaking.
26 For projects pouring concrete measures are used to minimise the use of water for concrete wash-out (refer to CN4).
One credit - Welfare facilities for the asset in operation

28 Criteria 11 16 are achieved for any welfare facilities that form part of the final asset once operational. This credit will
be scoped out where these are not present.

None.
Compliance notes
CN1 Water strategy and For those involved in writing and implementing the water strategy and water efficiency
plan plan, e.g. a Water champion, project managers, water efficiency training includes as a
minimum:
The importance of water efficiency

Techniques for reducing water demand
Rainwater and grey water recycling technology
Meter and automatic metering reading technology
Water use audit techniques
Examples of current or innovative technologies.
Any internal company training must be at a level appropriate to project managers

taking responsibility for water efficiency on site (refer to Other information).
For construction site staff, the training can be in the form of a tool box talk and must
include items of water efficiency that are relevant to the project.
An operational stage water efficiency plan is only required where operational water is
present, and is produced and included as part of the handover documentation.
CN2 Contact with a For this requirement it is not enough to send an invitation by post, the contractor should
water company ensure that the invitation for the review or site visit has been received by the
representative appropriate person and that they are aware of the invitation, e.g. through a phone call.
CN3 Water consumption The targets are established through consultation with local water companies, water
targets for the authorities and other appropriate bodies, taking into account the current water
construction stage demands and supply in the area. They are also influenced by the water consumption
(criterion 5 benchmarks outlined in Wat 02 Water monitoring. The extent and detail of the
consultation are dependent upon the water consumption demands of the project.
CN4 Minimising water Measures to minimise the use of water should demonstrate a saving in water use on
for concrete and off site in comparison to traditional wash out. Compliant measures include: the use
washout of a concrete sock or reuse of 'wash water'. Use of rain or grey water may also be used
as an alternative to potable water.
Methodology
None.
Evidence
1 Water strategy N/A N/A
Admixture
This is a material which is added to a mixture to give the mixture a certain property, e.g. chlorides are added to
unsealed roads as they draw moisture from the air and keep the road surface damp.
Effective flush volume

Effective flush volume is the volume of water needed to clear the toilet pan and transport any contents far enough to
avoid blocking the drain. The effective flush volume of a single flush WC is the volume of water used for one flush. The
effective flush volume of a dual flush WC is calculated using the ratio of full flush to reduced flush. The ratio is taken to
be one full flush for every three reduced flushes for non-domestic buildings and this is what is assumed for
construction sites. The effective flush volume can therefore be calculated as follows, using a 6/4 litre dual flush volume
WC as an example in the work place: {(6 litre x 1) + (4 litre x 3)}/4 = 4.5 litre effective flushing volume (for a 6/4 dual
flush WC).
Grey water recycling

The appropriate collection, treatment and storage of domestic waste water (which is defined as that discharged
from kitchens, baths or showers, laundry rooms and similar) to meet a non-potable water demand in the building,
e.g. WC flushing, or other permissible non-potable use on the site of the assessed building.
Non-potable water
Any water other than potable water.
Rainwater recycling
The appropriate collection and storage of rainwater run-off from hard outdoor surfaces to meet a non-potable
water demand on the site, e.g. WC flushing or other permissible non-potable use on site.
Potable water
Water suitable for human consumption that does not contain any micro-organism, parasite or substance at a
concentration or value which would constitute a potential danger to human health.
Other information
Water champion training

WRAP's ripple-effect guidance provides information on how to determine:
How much water a business uses

Simple ways to start saving water and money
Ways to measure water and cost savings and
Learn about the benefits of some water saving devices.
The information may support training of staff in water efficiency measures. Refer to www.wrap.org.uk/content/rippleffect.
Wat 02 Water monitoring

0 3 None
Aim
To ensure water consumption can be monitored and effectively managed.

None.

Water metering for the construction stage (one credit)

Water monitoring for the construction stage (one credit)
Construction stage water efficiency targets (one credit)
One credit - Water metering for the construction stage

1 The main water meter supplying the site is accessible for reading the meter.
2 Sub-meters are installed on:
2.a Each water zone (refer to CN1)
2.b Water discharge points which have the potential for uncontrolled flow because of human behaviour, e.g. leaving
a tap running
2.c Water discharge points considered to have the highest estimated daily volumetric use within each zone (refer to
CN2)
2.d Rainwater recycling technologies
2.e Grey water recycling technologies.
One credit - Water monitoring for the construction stage

3 Water consumption is recorded weekly for the items mentioned in criteria 2.a 2.e and an assessment made of
erroneous consumption, e.g. high or low water demands to identify leaks or maintenance requirements (refer to CN3).
4 A monthly site inspection is carried out to identify:
4.a Inefficiencies in water devices and water discharge points including leaks and overflows
4.b Actions needed because of the inspection including relevant operation, maintenance or replacement
information
4.c Out-of-hours assessment of base load water consumption.
5 Total and net water consumption is recorded at the end of the project or yearly and compared with the target (refer to
CN4). The end of project figures are reported via the BREEAM Infrastructure Online tool.
Wat 02 Water monitoring Water
One credit - Construction stage water efficiency targets

6 The main contractors construction stage water consumption is less than or equal to a national best practice target (refer
to Appendix B - The Approved Standards and Weightings List (ASWL)) for either:
6.a The infrastructure asset type OR
6.b Contractor organisations

None.
Compliance notes
CN1 Water zone For the purposes of water metering, the contractor establishes a number of zones. A
(criterion 2 zone is defined as an area of the site where there is a specific use of water, e.g. the area
where vehicles are washed, the location of water suppression units (fan misting). It is the
contractor's responsibility to determine the zones based on a logical rationale.
CN2 Highest estimated This is applicable to zones with more than one water discharge point. For zones with
daily volumetric use more than one high use, discharge points should be metered separately or be easily
(criterion 2 calculated using the meters available.
CN3 Weekly audits and These are carried out by a designated person, e.g. a site worker or project manager.
monthly site This person can change during the course of the development; however they must have
inspection (criteria 3 appropriate authority and responsibility to request and access the data required to
and 4 perform the role.
CN4 Total net water The total net water consumption (m3) is recorded as the total water consumption
consumption minus any recycled water use.
(criterion 5
Methodology
None.
Evidence
Grey water recycling

The appropriate collection, treatment and storage of domestic waste water (which is defined as that discharged
from kitchens, baths or showers, laundry rooms and similar) to meet a non-potable water demand in the building, e.g.
WC flushing, or other permissible non-potable use on the site of the assessed building.
Rainwater recycling
The appropriate collection and storage of rainwater run-off from hard outdoor surfaces to meet a non-potable
water demand on the site, e.g. WC flushing or other permissible non-potable use on site.
Other information
None.
Integrated design
Innovation
0 Up to 10 None
Aim
To support innovation within the construction industry through the recognition of sustainability related benefits which are not
rewarded by standard BREEAM issues.

None.

Up to a maximum of 10 credits are available in aggregate from a combination of the following:
Exemplary level of performance in existing BREEAM issues

1 Where the asset demonstrates exemplary performance by meeting defined exemplary level performance criteria in one
or more of following BREEAM assessment issues:
1.a ST 03 Responsible construction practices
1.b Mat 02 Responsible sourcing of materials
1.c Mat 04 Reuse and recycling
1.d Wst 01 Construction waste management
2 Please refer to the relevant BREEAM issue within this scheme document for details of the exemplary level performance
assessment criteria.
Approved innovations
3 One innovation credit can be awarded for each innovation application approved by BRE Global, where the asset complies
with the criteria defined within an Approved Innovation Application Form.

None.
Compliance notes
CN1 Exemplary level of Refer to the compliance notes within the individual assessment issues that contain
performance exemplary performance levels.
Methodology
Exemplary level of performance in existing BREEAM issues
For information on the methodology for exemplary level credits refer to the Methodology section of the relevant BREEAM
issues.
Approved innovations
Innovation applications can be submitted to BRE Global by a licensed BREEAM Assessor using the formal Approved Innovation
Application Form (available from BREEAM Projects).
Evidence
1 N/A As defined within existing BREEAM issues.
3 N/A A copy of the Approved As per interim design stage

Innovation Application Form AND
AND Relevant documentary evidence
A copy of the Innovation confirming that the project has
Application Report stating the achieved or installed the
application outcome as approved innovation as
'approved' described and quantified within
AND the approved innovation
Relevant documentary evidence application form.
demonstrating specification of
the approved innovation.
None.
Appendices
Appendices
Appendices BREEAM New Construction: Infrastructure (International pilot)
Appendix A - Strategic and project detail stages links

The BREEAM Infrastructure assessment includes criteria to be assessed at the strategic stage (DPoW Stage 0-2) to ensure
opportunities are identified at the early stages of a project to increase the sustainable credentials of the asset. Ideally, these
opportunities are then taken forward to the detail stages of the design and construction process.
If an assessor initiates a BREEAM assessment after DPoW Stage 2 (Concept), the strategic stage credits are either
retrospectively assessed based on what has been undertaken by the project team already, or they are withheld. If the
strategic credits are withheld, the approach to assessing the project detail credits then varies, dependent on the issue, as
detailed below:
Option 1: There are no strategic requirements for the issue. In these cases, the project detail credits can be targeted
independently.
Option 2: The strategic requirements for the issue are not directly linked to the project detail requirements. In these cases, the
project detail credits can be targeted independently.
Option 3: The strategic requirements for the issue must be updated as stated within the project detail requirements. In these
cases, the strategic stage requirements must be carried out in full prior to the end of DPoW Stage 3 (Definition) to inform and
allow the project detail credits to be awarded.
Please note that although this option requires the strategic requirements to be achieved post DPoW Stage 2 (Concept), the
strategic credits will still be unavailable to the project. Only the project detail credits can be awarded. This is to recognise that
some, but not all, opportunities will have been lost due to a later consideration of these issues.
Option 4: There is no benefit of updating the strategic requirements for the issue after DPoW Stage 2. In these cases, the
project detail credits are unavailable.
Table 54 details which option applies for each issue. For option 3 it also references the relevant criteria to refer to within the
issue.
Table 54: Strategy and project detail links
Options
Issue 1 2 3 4
Integrated Design

(Targets and objectives) Criterion
10
ID 02 Project team collaboration

(All project detail credits)
ID 03 Handover and aftercare

(Detailed ecosystem services assessment) Criterion 6
ID 05 Whole life costing

(Component level LCC Plan)
Appendix A - Strategic and project detail stages links Appendices
ID 06 Whole life environmental impacts No project detail assessment criteria. There are links to Mat
01 and CE 01. (See below.)
Resilience
Res 01 Business continuity No project detail assessment criteria. This issue is assessed
at the strategic level only.

(All project detail credits) Criterion
16 33

(Designing in capacity for future needs) Criterion 5
Res 04 Surface water run-off

Res 05 Durability
Stakeholders
ST 01 Consultation plan
(All project detail credits) Criterion 4
ST 02 Consultation and engagement

(Continued engagement and implementation) Criteria 12
14 and
16

(National health and safety legislation) Criterion 1

(All remaining project detail credits)

(Operational performance)
Local wellbeing
LW 01 Economic impact
LW 02 Social impact
Transport
Tra 01 Transport impact assessment


(Travel and logistics plan for the construction stage, Criterion
Success of the construction stage travel and logistics 4.a.i
plan and Travel and logistics plan for the operational
stage)

(monitoring the transport of construction materials and
waste)

(Enhanced connectivity) Criterion 4
Land use and ecology

(Use of low value land) Criterion 5

(Local land value, Efficient use of temporary land)
LUE 02 Soil and vegetation management


LUE 04 Ecological impact assessment and action plan

(Site specific biodiversity action plan) Criterion 7
34
LUE 05 Protection of biodiversity

35
LUE 06 Enhancement of biodiversity

36
LUE 07 Land use changes

Landscape and heritage

(Enhancing and protecting landscape character and Criterion 5
visual impact)
Appendix A - Strategic and project detail stages links Appendices

(Planning protection and mitigation measures) Criterion 1

(Implementation, reporting and disseminating
information)
Pollution
Pol 01 Air quality

(Minimising construction and operational stage air Criterion 6
pollution, Monitoring construction stage air quality)
Pol 01 Air quality

(Reduction in pollutants from non-road mobile
machinery)

(All project detail credits) Criteria 5
and 7

(All project detail credits) Criteria 7.a
and 14.a
Pol 04 Light pollution

Materials

(Option 1 - Product life cycle assessments) Option 1 37

(Option 2 - Asset level life cycle impact assessment) Option 2:
Criteria 4 ,
9 or 14
Mat 02 Responsible sourcing of materials

(All project detail criteria)
Mat 03 Materials efficiency

(All project detail criteria) Criteria 10 ,
14 & 21

(Reuse and recycling of materials and elements) Criterion 8

(Reuse of existing infrastructure on site and recycled
aggregates)
Carbon and energy

38
(Reporting total carbon and energy)

(Construction carbon and energy performance) Criterion 1
39

(Monitoring construction stage carbon and energy)

(Operational carbon and energy performance) Criterion 1
8
Waste

Water
Wat 01 Water efficiency planning and implementation

Wat 02 Water monitoring

Appendix B - The Approved Standards and Weightings List (ASWL) Appendices
Appendix B - The Approved Standards and
Weightings List (ASWL)
Purpose
The purpose of the approved standards and weightings list (ASWL) is to allow project teams designing and constructing
infrastructure assets to use local or national best practice standards to demonstrate compliance with certain BREEAM
Infrastructure criteria. To ensure the robustness of the local or national standards, the ASWL includes individual requirements
for a particular local or national standard to meet in order to be approved by BRE Global for use by the project team.
Every BREEAM International assessment must include a completed (project specific) version of the approved standards and
weightings list to inform BRE Global which standards the project team have worked to and complied with. This may require
the use of a new country reference sheet or, where assessments have already been undertaken in that country, an existing
country-specific reference sheet that is amended to suit the specific project. Submission of the ASWL is confirmation from the
assessor that the previously approved standards remain valid and up to date.
Types of documents that can be approved by BRE Global

Throughout the BREEAM Infrastructure manual there are specific criteria that reference this appendix to highlight that either
international, European or local documentation is required to be used to inform the design and construction of the asset. The
type of documentation can be:
Best practice guidance

Best practice standards
Regulation or legislation (where this forms the baseline to show an improvement beyond regulation or legislation).
The approved standards and weightings list confirms which issues this applies to, the document type required and the
specific requirements the documentation must cover in order to be approved.
For example, issue Pol 02 Water pollution states:
"To apply the principles of the water pollution strategy to the project and implement measures appropriate
to the project in line with national best practice guidance (refer to Appendix B - The Approved Standards and
Weightings List (ASWL))."
The project team could then use an international, European or UK equivalent as detailed in the ASWL to demonstrate
compliance with this criteria. However, in some countries there may be local equivalents of these standards or best practice
guidance and in these cases the ASWL process allows BRE staff, with support from assessors and the project team, to review
the local standards against BREEAM specified requirements and confirm their equivalence.
Standards Compliance
For each BREEAM criterion requiring compliance with specified standards or best practice documentation one of the
following three situations will arise, dependent on the country of assessment:
1. There are no specific local standards specifiedin these cases the project team uses the ASWL to inform BRE Global that it
will be working to the existing BREEAM approved international, European or UK standards detailed in the ASWL for use in any
country.
2. The approved local standard is specifiedthe project team uses the approved standards and weightings list to inform BRE
Global that it will be using the approved local standards detailed in the existing country-specific reference sheet. The project
team also need to confirm that the standards being used are current.
3. An unapproved local standard is proposedthe project team uses the ASWL to inform BRE Global that they will be working
to (as yet unapproved) local standards.
Proposal of new standards

Where there are no specific approved local standards, the project team (led by the assessor) can provide standards that meet
the requirements for proposed standards within the Approved standards and weightings list.
The relevant extracts of the proposed standards must be provided to BRE Global, both in the local language and translated
into English, with justification of the robustness of the document. The approvals process for local standards should happen at
the very early stages of an assessment, i.e. well before a report is submitted for certification so that:
1. Certification is not delayed

2. The project team or client has certainty over the use of approved standards against which their assets performance is
being assessed.
Outcomes of proposing a new standard

One of the following outcomes will arise following submission of the project specific version of the Approved standards and
weightings list:
1. BRE Global approves the local equivalent, it is added to the approved standards for that country or region.
2. If the local equivalent does not meet the requirements for the standard, it is added to the unapproved standards
sheetthis is included as information for all assessors with justification of why it was rejected to prevent duplication of
effort.
In order to determine if the country of assessment has approved standards and weightings, download the latest version of
the ASWL, found within the Documents and Tools section of the BREEAM Projects website www.breeam.org
At the time of writing, BRE Global are updating the ASWL to form part of the BREEAM Projects online system. Assessors will be
notified when this is available.
For further information on the procedure for submitting standards for inclusion in the ASWL, refer to the BREEAM Operational
Guidance available on the BREEAM Projects website.
International Environment Weightings

The BREEAM Infrastructure International weightings are also found within the ASWL. For further information on how the
weightings are locally adapted refer to the Scoring and rating BREEAM assessed infrastructure section of this manual.
Appendix C Appendices
Appendix C
Considerate and responsible construction practices

1 Safe and adequate access
This section is intended to demonstrate that the constructor operates the site in a manner that guarantees a safe and
appropriate access to, around and on the site. The following items demonstrate compliance with this section:
Table 55: Safe and adequate access requirements
REF Criteria Y Evidence or reference Validation or justification

required
a Appropriate and safe access to the site is See copy of parking plan
provided. This must include as a minimum: and check transport and
dedicated service
Provision of parking on or near site
timetables and view other
OR a public transport node with an
facilities are on site.
average frequency under 30
minutes within 500m OR a
dedicated transport service to a
major public transport node
provided by the contractor.
Good lighting and Adequate
barriers and uniform surfaces, i.e. no
trip hazards outside the site
boundary
All accesses to be clean and mud
free
Hoarding or scaffolding to be well lit
at night and scaffold netting is in
place and well maintained
b Appropriate and safe access on site is View on site and check

provided. This must include as a minimum: that list of hazards is
complete
Footpaths marked with ramps and
signs Pathways wide enough for
wheelchairs
Accessibility of all areas by visually or
hearing impaired visitors
All site hazards advertised at the site
entrance
c Site entrances and exits are clearly marked View on site

for visitors and delivery drivers to see.
d Site reception is clearly signposted or all Check on arrival for the

visitors are escorted to the reception signs or see a copy of the
induction procedure.

required
e The post box has been placed on the View on site

pavement to avoid the postman from
entering the site.
f Where there are minority communities Check the area and the
speaking a different language in the area or staff register for a
working on site, notices are printed in the minority culture
common local language community. Where this is
present on or off site,
check for signs in the
community's language.
g All road signs and names can be seen or View on site

when a road sign or name is obstructed a
replacement has been erected
h Where a site with severe congestion has a View procedures on site.

delivery point remote from a site, deliveries
can then be made in smaller vehicles at times
to cause the least inconvenience.
2 Good Neighbour
This section is intended to demonstrate that the constructor operates the site in a manner that is considerate to the
surrounding neighbours. The following items demonstrate compliance with this section:
Table 56: Good neighbour requirements

required
a Introductory letters have been or will be sent See copies of letters with
to all neighbours and there is a commitment list of addresses.
to write and thank neighbours at the end of A copy of this
the contract for their patience and provide commitment should be
feedback form provided or a copy of a
standard letter that is
always sent at the end of
a project.
A copy of the feedback
form must be provided
along a procedure to
monitor the results and
implement changes for
future work.

required
b Site hours and noisy work restrictions are Copy of statement of

appropriate to the area, in particular when intent, policy, agreement
the site is located near: etc. to be provided
Houses
Schools
Hospitals
Industrial Units
Major public Transport Nodes
City centres
Shopping facilities.
c The site boundary (which includes all areas Ask site manager if any
affected by the works) is clearly and safely thought was given to the
marked and appropriate to the hoarding and the location
environment: of the site. Is the hoarding
clearly and safely marked,
The colour of the hoarding has been
clean, neat and well
considered in terms of the
maintained?
surrounding environment. Ensure that there are no
Pedestrians have a suitable, safe and
complaints about the site
protected passage around the site
being untidy or that if
boundary
there were this was
There are well lit warning signs for
quickly rectified and not
the benefit of the pedestrian and
repeated.
road user
The sites surroundings are seen by
the public as tidy and clean.
d There is a complaints book available AND Inspect the complaints

evidence that complaints are being dealt book and check
with immediately responses for timeliness
e Local people are appropriately informed by View on site

the use of a notice board:
Of the site progress

Of the company contact details
(telephone number, web site, email
address)
f Light is shielded from the neighbours Copy of the temporary

works indicating light
shielding or the site
manager must
demonstrate how the
light shielding works or is
not applicable.

required
g Site personnel are discouraged from using View on site.

local facilities in their site clothes. Examples of Check procedures with
how this might be achieved include: the Site Manager.
A canteen
Staggered breaks for different
gangs.
Provision of showers or wash
rooms.
Provision of lockers.
A request to leave personal
protective equipment (PPE) on site.
h There is a volume restriction on radio use or Check if a restriction or

there is a radio ban ban is in place and how
this is enforced
3 Environmentally Aware
This section is intended to demonstrate that the constructor has considered the impact of the site on the environment and
has implemented measures to mitigate this impact. The following items demonstrate compliance with this section:
Table 57: Environmentally aware requirements

required
a There are restrictions on the effects of light View on site.

pollution and all lights are directional and
non-polluting. If there is a site specific
environmental policy which sets restrictions
on lighting, this point can be awarded.
b Energy saving measures are implemented View on site.

on site. Examples of this include:
Low energy lighting

Switching off equipment when not
in use
Installing thermostats
Installing timers
Choosing energy efficient
equipment.
If there is a site specific environmental policy

which defines energy saving measures, this
point can be awarded.

required
c An impact minimisation strategy review is in View impact minimisation

place for the site. The review should consider strategy.
the impact of the site in environmental terms
and how any adverse effects are being
minimised, e.g. protection of ecological
features, pollution control.
d Water saving measures are implemented on View procedures on site.

site and monitored. If there is a site specific
environmental policy which indicates how
water saving measures are managed and
monitored on site, this point can be
awarded.
e Alternative energy sources have been View on site.

considered.
f Fuel oil spillage equipment is available. View on site. Ensure the

spillage equipment is
located where spillages
may occur to ensure a
rapid response time.
g Sumps are provided in cases of heavy water View on site.

run-off. If there is a site specific
environmental policy which indicates how
heavy water run-off will be minimised and
dealt with on site, this point can be awarded.
h Materials and equipment are tidily stacked View on site. Ensure that
and protected and covered where where the space has been
necessary AND there is adequate space for provided, it is being used
new materials to be stored in secured correctly
covered areas to avoid damage, theft and
to protect from weather.
4 Safe and considerate working environment

This section is intended to demonstrate that the constructor is operating the site in a clean and safe manner in order to ensure
the wellbeing of its workers and to minimise the risk to their health and safety. The following items demonstrate compliance
with this section:
Table 58: Safe and considerate working environment requirements

required
a Adequate facilities are provided on-site for View on site

workers and visitors. These must include as a
minimum:
Separate male, female and disabled

toilets
Working usable showers AND
suitable changing areas
Lockers in the drying room
Dedicated smoking area
Suitable and safe accommodation
(where provided).
b Site facilities are well maintained and clean. View on site.

This must cover as a minimum:
Areas around the canteen, offices

and skips
Site welfare facilities (including toilets
and changing areas)
Dedicated smoking area.
c Private or visually-impacting areas are View on site.

screened. These must include as a minimum:
Areas around the canteen, offices

and skips where necessary.
Toilets
Dedicated smoking area.
d Clean PPE is available for use by visitors Check company policy

and procedure and if it is
being implemented on
site

required
e Health and Safety procedures are in place for Check company policy
the following issues: and procedures and how
these are enforced
Appropriate training of all staff Check first aid book in
including non-native operatives to particular for minor
understand health and safety (H&S) accidents.
best practices and information Check the first aiders list
displayed on site and their qualifications
Operatives exposure to the sun (must be less than three
Operatives identification; all
years old). Check that each
operatives to be provided with a
first aiders have a box
photo identification clip card
with basic equipment and
Reporting of all incidents (minor and
that they have access to
serious) and near misses
more equipment if
Ensuring that an appropriate
necessary and that they
number of first aiders and first aid
know where to find it.
equipment are available for the site.
f There is posted material indicating nearest Spot check managers,

police station and hospital (with accident & operatives, reception
emergency facilities) in the following areas as staff to check they know
a minimum: this information or at least
where they would find it.
Site reception
Check induction talk.
Site canteen
Main site office.
g An inspection has been carried out by a View on site.

health and safety inspector or equivalent.
h Emergency escape routes well identified and View on site. Written

clear emergency evacuation procedure AND proof of fire drill
drills carried out. procedure.
Signed by:
Appendix D
Considerate and responsible fleet operations

The purpose of this appendix is to provide the requirements for considerate and responsible fleet operations, for the
purpose of awarding the associated BREEAM credit in ST 03 Responsible construction practices.
Management
This section is intended to demonstrate the requirements for the management of the fleet operators. The following items
demonstrate compliance with this section:
Table 59: Fleet operator management requirements

required
a Policies and procedures Manuals or other

Ensure that all policies and processes documents containing the
covering the requirements listed in this mandatory requirements
Appendix are: Staff and driver
handbooks containing the
Documented
manuals or documents
Communicated to staff
Review meeting minutes,
Reviewed by senior management at
indicating
least every 12 months
recommendations and
Proven to result in positive changes
actions to be taken
to the business.
Signed and dated review
pages for the manuals or
documents, indicating
recommendations that
have been actioned
Staff training schedule
with training content and
lists of attendees
b Responsibilities and accountabilities Organisational chart

Letter of appointment of
An organisational chart showing the the responsible person
responsibilities and accountabilities
of, and links between, senior
management and daily operations
personnel
An appointed responsible person to
run daily transport operations
Appendix D Appendices

required
c Regulatory licensing and taxes Display of appropriate

Ensure all regulatory requirements regarding operation licenses
the following are met: Display of valid tax discs in
vehicles
Fleet operator licences Register of fleet vehicles
Payment of the appropriate vehicle
taxation requirements
and road tax for all applicable Log with driver's licence or
vehicles certificate type and expiry
Licenses and qualifications of all
date, including penalty
drivers are checked by the
points and
appointed responsible person prior
disqualifications
to driving, and then at least every six Driving infringement
months to confirm vehicle category policy document
licensing
A policy is in place to ensure drivers
report all professional or personal
driving infringements to the
responsible person.
d Complaints Written record of all legal

A complaints system is provided that: and non-legal action
against the fleet
Feeds into decision-making
operators or the drivers,
Records legal and non-legal action
indicating the operators
against the fleet operator, to be
response.
reviewed and reacted to.
Vehicles
This sections is intended to demonstrate the requirements regarding the vehicles of the fleet. The following items
Table 60: Fleet operator vehicle requirements

required
a Inspection and maintenance plan Manufacturers

An equipment inspection and maintenance maintenance plan
plan is required, which is followed and Maintenance records
recorded for all vehicles and specialist (kept for at least 15
equipment (refer to Relevant definitions). months)
This shall include
Any statutory legal check

requirements
Safety inspections
The plan should:
Schedule maintenance at least 6

months in advance
Indicate vehicles and equipment that
have not been inspected
Be reviewed regularly and when
vehicles are changed.
b First use checks Completed vehicle defect

Ensure that vehicles are inspected before forms (kept for at least 15
each shift for: months)
Safety by drivers that have
undergone training as outlined
below in the training section
Defects rectified by an appointed
responsible person.
The inspection is documented and recorded

even if no defects are found.
c Fuel and tyre usage Fuel and tyre

A fuel and tyre management policy is management policy
required that ensures: documents
Documentation of actions
Recording of fuel and tyre usage
taken to reduce fuel and
data by the drivers
tyre usage
Monitoring and reviewing of the
Documentation of tyre
data
disposal and recycling
Action is taken to improve fuel and
system
tyre usage (e.g. efficient driving
techniques training, upgrading
vehicles, target setting)
A documented system for tyre disposal and

recycling is required.

required
d Insurance and claims Insurance documents

covering the fleet vehicles
A minimum of third party insurance
and their drivers
for the whole fleet is required Minutes from review
Other forms of insurance specific to
meetings with brokers
the actual operation is required,
and insurers to
where applicable
demonstrate
All insurance claims are required to
consideration of non-
be recorded, reviewed and
obligatory insurance and
actioned. The reviews should include:
other improvements
Records of claims
Risk assessments
Review process
Management of drivers
documents (risk
Post-incident processes
Driver behavioural training. assessments, training
content and attendance)
e Fines and charges Record of transport-

All transport-related fines and charges need related fines and charges
to be investigated and analysed. The Investigation report
investigation should: showing the
circumstances leading to
Confirm the authority and
a fine and the
competencies of the individual
recommendations and
carrying out the investigation
remedial actions
Identify the root causes of the fines
and charges
Outline the recommendations for
implementing interventions to
reduce their occurrence.
Drivers
This sections is intended to demonstrate the requirements regarding the drivers of the fleet. The following items
Table 61: Fleet operator driver requirements

required
a Driving standards Policy document on

A company policy on driving standards is company driving
required. Anyone driving on business shall standards covering
drive within the highway code of the
respective country and company policy at all
times. This shall cover:
Driver responsibilities
Safety of vulnerable road users
(refer to Relevant definitions)
Actions following breakdowns and
collisions
Safety equipment
Fatigue.
The policy will ban:
The use of mobile phones and other

in-vehicle technology
Drinking and drugs
Exceeding speed limits.
b Staff training Development plan

Drivers and line managers are required to identifying training needs
undergo approved progressive training and of staff
continued professional development with Training events schedule
particular attention to the: Training content
documents
Safety of vulnerable road users Training attendance lists
(including cycle hazard awareness)
Use of supplementary vehicle safety
equipment and its limitations
Highway code of the respective
country
Company policy.
The training needs to be refreshed annually

and the needs of all relevant staff are
required to be identified, including:
Driving assessment prior to

employment
Induction to the company
Induction to new contracts
Operational compliance and safety
of vulnerable users
Vehicle safety inspections
Refresher training
Remedial training.

required
c Incidents and collisions Log of incidents, collisions

Incidents, traffic collisions and reported near- and near misses and
misses are required to be: actions taken against
them.
Recorded
Review reports showing
Investigated
root cause and
Analysed to identify trends
contributory factors
addressed by implementing actions.
A documented
All driving infractions that would result in investigation procedure
endorsable points, both at work and showing:
privately, are required to be recorded,
Root cause
monitored and remedial action shall be
Contributory
taken. This can include:
factor
Training Recommendatio
Disciplinary action for persistent ns
offenders. Remedial actions
Review document
showing trend
and cost analysis
of insurance
claims and post-
incident
processes (e.g.
driver
management,
behavioural
training).
Health, safety and wellbeing

This section is intended to demonstrate the requirements regarding the health, safety and wellbeing of the drivers and
vehicles. The following items demonstrate compliance with this section:
Table 62: Fleet operator health, safety and wellbeing requirements

required
a Safe loading Completed risk

Ensure that vehicles are safely loaded and assessment forms
that appropriate load restraints are used by: Documentation of
records of dimensions
Completing a risk assessment of
and loads of vehicles
each type of load carried by each Training material,
vehicle schedule and attendance
Providing suitable equipment
documents.
Training personnel
Recording the dimensions and
weights of vehicles before using the
road.

required
b Vulnerable road user safety Photos or view on site of

All vehicles over 3.5 tonnes gross vehicle safety equipment
weight are required to be fitted with safety Informed health and
equipment to help protect vulnerable road safety policy
users. This shall include:
Prominent signage to the rear of the

vehicle to visually warn other road
users not to get too close to the
vehicle.
Side under-run protection, or
equivalent, to all vehicles
Class VI mirrors (refer to Relevant
definitions) to be fitted to all vehicles,
where they can be mounted, with no
part of the mirror being less than
two metres from the ground.
c Working at height and the prevention of falls Completed risk

from vehicles assessment forms
Ensuring the safety of persons around the Informed health and
vehicle working at height, including: safety policy
Drivers
People assisting them in loading
activities
Passengers in passenger-carrying
vehicles.
This includes risk assessments for the

potential of persons falling off vehicles or
gaining unauthorised access to vehicles.
d Vehicle manoeuvring Completed risk

Ensure risks from vehicle manoeuvring are assessment forms
identified, mitigated and controlled, through Informed policy on vehicle
risk assessments. This includes the following movements
movements on and off site:
Driving forward
Reversing
Towing
Uncoupling
Parking.

required
e Vehicle warning equipment Policy showing

All vehicles over 3.5 tonnes gross vehicle requirement
weight are required to: On-site vehicle equipment
checks
Be equipped with audible means to
warn other road users of a vehicles
left manoeuvre (for left hand drive
countries) and right manoeuvre (for
right hand drive countries)
Have front, side and rear blind-spots
completely eliminated or minimised
as far as is practical and possible
through a combination of fully
operational direct and indirect vision
aids and driver audible alerts.
All rigid vehicles over 7.5 tonnes gross vehicle

weight are required to:
Have indirect vision aids fitted to

their rear.
f Health and safety policy Health and safety policy

Ensure that road driving risks and workplace covering at least vehicles
transport safety are controlled via a working on the road and
health and safety policy and that vehicle- workplace transport
specific driver health and safety advice is safety
given to drivers. Review sheet of policy and
minutes of management
review meetings
Risk assessment for each
vehicle type health and
safety issue

required
g Driver health and wellbeing Record of drivers

Fleet operators shall ensure that driver health eyesight checks every six
and wellbeing is managed, including policies months
and procedures to manage both drivers Procedure documents for
hours and total working time for all. This shall drivers to notify the fleet
include: operator of any health or
wellbeing issues affecting
Driver eyesight checks prior to
their entitlement and
starting work and at least every six
ability to drive
months Plans of shifts and general
Checking that drivers meet either
work showing drivers
driving licence or medical
hours and working time
requirements, or both, and are not
regulations for applicable
impaired through drink, drugs or
vehicle times are not
fatigue
infringed
A process for checking drivers
Evidence of recording and
ailments that may affect their
examining driver hours, via
entitlement and ability to drive and
tachographs or other
reporting them to a trained medical
means
professional
Maximum working and driving hours
should not be exceeded (refer to
Operations
This section is intended to demonstrate the requirements regarding the operation of the fleet. The following items
Table 63: Fleet operator operation requirements

required
a Routing and scheduling Policy document

Ensure that: demonstrating how
routes have been
The most efficient, safe, and
selected
appropriate vehicles and routes are
Driver training documents
used to minimise the potential for
and attendance sheets
interaction with vulnerable road
users
Any vehicle routes to sites or
premises are adhered to unless
directed otherwise
Drivers are informed regarding
parking restrictions and charges, toll
payment methods and special
access requirements and routing.

required
b Specialist goods List of appropriate best

Specialist goods such as waste, dangerous practice, permissions and
goods, and abnormal loads are required to licensing for specialist
be handled and transported in compliance goods
with national regulations. Driver qualifications for
carrying dangerous
goods
c Performance measurement Baseline data report for a

Baseline data and active monitoring of the 12-month period
following performance indicators are covering the entire fleet
required: and the required
performance indicators
Total fuel usage and distances
Active monitoring
travelled
demonstrated through
Transport-related CO2 as outlined in
the use of data capture
methods, e.g. fleet
Methodology
performance tools,
Total incident and collision data and
spreadsheets or
costs involving personal injury, vehicle
benchmarking systems,
or property damage
Total transport-related fines and telematics, insurance
charges reports or fuel card
reports
Signed by:
Class VI mirrors
A Class VI front mirror or Cyclops mirror, is a front mounted wide view mirror that helps provide a view of the blind
spot situated at the front of the drivers cab.
Maximum working and driving hours

The limits for working hours for mobile workers are set at:
an average of 48 hours per week for a specified reference period
a maximum of 60 hours in any single week, as long as the 48-hour average is maintained
10 hours per night for night work.
Break duration must last:
at least 15 minutes per break
30 minutes in total if working between 6 and 9 hours per day
45 minutes in total if working more than 9 hours per day
National requirements for working hours must be followed if they are more stringent than the above.
Specialist equipment
Specialist equipment can include the following:
speed limiters
tachographs
tanks
lifting equipment
cranes
hoppers
fork-lifts
tail-lifts.
Vulnerable road users

These are defined as non-motorised road users, such as pedestrians and cyclists as well as motor-cyclists and
persons with disabilities or reduced mobility and orientation.
Endnotes
Endnotes
1 For some assessment issues the number of credits available will vary by asset type. Furthermore, some issues may not be
applicable to certain assets that do not contain a particular feature, e.g. operational water use.
2 The pre-assessment is only an indication of what can be achieved by the project team. If carrying out a pre-assessment
before bespoke criteria have been developed for the project, the assessor will need to make their own assumptions of the
credits and criteria that will apply to the project.
3 For the purpose of BREEAM the specific clause of the specification must be referenced within the report.
4 Evidence in the form of design drawings must be presented in a clear, professional working format with clearly identified
legends indicating revision number, date, title, owner etc. (where appropriate).
5 ISO 15686 Buildings and constructed assets - Service life planning Part 1 General principles and framework, 2011.
6 ISO 15686-5:2008. Buildings and constructed assets. Service life planning - Part 5: Life cycle costing.
7 . BSI. BS EN 15978:2011 Sustainability of construction works. Assessment of environmental performance of buildings.
Calculation method. BSI; 2011.
8 ISO 14064-2:2006 Greenhouse gases Part 2: Specification with guidance at the project level for quantification,
monitoring and reporting of greenhouse gas emission reductions or removal enhancements.
9 The Green House Gas Protocol, A corporate accounting and reporting standard, Revised Edition. www.ghgprotocol.org
10 The Green House Gas Protocol, A corporate accounting and reporting standard, Revised Edition.
11 ISO 14025:2006, Environmental labels and declarations - Type III environmental declarations - Principles and procedures;
ISO 2006.
12 BSI. Societal security. Business continuity management systems. Requirements. BS EN ISO 22301:2014. London, BSI, 2012.
13 ISO 31000:2009, Risk management Principles and guidelines, International Standards Organisation, 2009.
14 ISO 26000:2010. Guidance on Social Responsibility. International Standards Association, 2010.
15 Natural England 2012: http://publications.naturalengland.org.uk/publication/32031
16 Design Principle Connectivity and Permeability, Healthy spaces and places, 2009. www.healthyplaces.org.au
17 1. Hill D. Handbook of Biodiversity Methods, Survey, Evaluation and Monitoring [Internet]. Cambridge University Press;
2005. Available from: http://sunsetridgemsbiology.wikispaces.com/file/view/Biodiversity+Handbook.pdf
18 The Chartered Institute of Ecology and Environmental Management (CIEEM), Guidelines for Ecological Impact
Assessment in the United Kingdom, 2006. http://www.cieem.net/
19 Greenhalgh S, Daviet F, Weninger E. The Land Use, Land-Use Change, and Forestry Guidance for GHG Project Accounting
[Internet]. World Resources Institute; Available from: http://ghgprotocol.org/files/ghgp/lulucf-final.pdf
20 Ricardo-AEA. Land Use, Land Use Change and Forestry (LULUCF), GHG Inventory summary Factsheet, Ricardo AEA
[Internet]. Department of Energy & Climate Change; Available from:
https://www.gov.uk/government/uploads/system/uploads/attachment_data/file/441378/LULUCF_2013_Issue1.2.pdf
2013.
21 Air quality guidelines. Global update 2005. Particulate matter, ozone, nitrogen dioxide and sulfur dioxide
(http://www.euro.who.int/_data/assets/pdf_file/0005/78638/E90038.pdf).
22 CIRIA C693, Noise and vibration from road and rail, T Lawrence, J Dakin, P Norris, M Forni, 2011
23 Basic Analytical Toxicology, World Health Organisation 1995
24 Commission Internationale d'Eclairage (CIE) 150 Guide on the Limitation of the Effects of Obtrusive Light from Outdoor
Lighting Installations, 2003.
25 Commission Internationale d'Eclairage (CIE) 126 Guidelines for minimizing sky glow, 1997.
26 CIE Technical Report 150. 'Guide on the limitation of the effects of obtrusive light from outdoor lighting installations'
Vienna, CIE, 2003.
27 BS EN 15978:2011 Sustainability of construction works. Assessment of environmental performance of buildings.
Calculation method
28 ISO 14064-2:2006 Greenhouse gases Part 2: Specification with guidance at the project level for quantification,
monitoring and reporting of greenhouse gas emission reductions or removal enhancements
http://www.ghgprotocol.org
30 The International Labour Organisation (ILO) Declaration on Fundamental Principles and Rights at Work
http://www.ilo.org/declaration/lang--en/index.htm
31 CIRIA, 2013, Implementing Lean in construction: Lean tools and techniques an introduction, CIRIA, London
Endnotes BREEAM New Construction: Infrastructure (International pilot)
33 Only the strategic requirements associated with the prerequisite for 'Project risk assessment' (criteria 4 7) need to be
updated.
34 This criterion only requires the biodiversity action plan to be updated prior to construction (DPoW Stage 5).
35 This criterion refers to strategic requirements (criteria 1 2) within LUE 04 Ecological impact assessment and action plan.
LUE 05 Protection of biodiversity does not have separate strategic requirements.
36 This criterion refers to project detail requirements (criteria 1 5) within LUE 05 Protection of biodiversity. As LUE 05 is
linked to the strategic requirements(criteria 1 2) within LUE 04 Ecological impact assessment and action plan., option 4 also
applies to these criteria only. LUE 06 Enhancement of biodiversity does not have separate strategic requirements.
37 If assessing Mat 01 Environmental life cycle impacts, Option 1 (criteria 1 3 ) there are no strategic requirements. If
assessing Mat 01, Option 2 (criteria 4 16 ) the criteria refer to strategic requirements (criteria 1 5 or 6 10) in ID 06 Whole
life environmental impacts. Please see Mat 01 Environmental life cycle impacts: Figure 1: for further detail.
38 The strategy stage credit for having a Carbon and energy strategy requires a screening carbon footprint or LCA, as
detailed within ID 06 Whole life environmental impacts
39 These criteria refer to strategic requirements (criteria 1 2 ) within CE 01 Carbon and energy strategy. CE 02 and CE 03
do not have separate strategic requirements.
Index
Index F
Flood defences 88
3 Flood event 88
3rd. party evaluation 112 Flood probability 88
Flood risk 88
A Flood risk assessment 88
Appropriate consultant 101 Flood storage 88
Appropriate statutory body 87, 101 Formally agreed 47
B G
Baseline transport data 152 Greenfield 102

BREEAM related performance targets 47 Greenfield run-off rate 102
Greywater recycling 315

C
Catchment 101 H
Compliant organisation 123 Hard surfaces 102

Component level LCC plan 61 health 120
Connectivity 161 Heritage asset 207
Construction Logistics Plan 158 Heritage specialist 207
Construction workforce travel plan 158
Control devices 101 I
Current 152 Inclusive design 117
Independent party evaluation 112

D Independent third party 52
Design flood event 88 Independently verified third party EPD 68, 251
Design flood level 88, 102
Design storm event 88 K
Development evaluation 112 Key design team meetings 47
Discharge point 102 Key phases 47
Key representatives of the project delivery team 47

E
Effective flush volume 315 L
Elemental LCC plan 61 Life cycle cost 61
Environmental Product Declarations 68, 251

N
EPD 68, 251
Non-potable water 315
Technical Manual: Version: SD219-A1 Issue: 2.0 Issue Date: 12/11/2015 349
Index Infrastructure (United Kingdom)
Potable water 315
Previously developed land 168
Project execution plan 48
Rainwater recycling 315
Severance 152
Site staff
facilities 124
health and wellbeing 123
Stakeholder champion 118
SuDS management train 102
SuDS Techniques 102
Surface Water Run-off 103
Sustainability Champion 48
Sustainable working practices 123
Team Communication Strategy 48
Tidal estuary 103
Transport network 161
Transport plan 158
Travel and logistics plan 158
Volume of run-off 103
Watercourses and sewers 103
Wholesome water 315
Workforce
facilities 120, 124
350 Technical Manual: Version: SD219-A1 Issue: 2.0 Issue Date: 12/11/2015
Glossary
Glossary CIC
Construction Industry Council
CIEEM
A Chartered Institute of Ecology and
Environmental Management
ADMS
Atmospheric Dispersion Modelling System CIRIA
Construction Industry Research and Information
ADPE Association
abiotic depletion eotential elements;
CITES
AONB Convention on International Trade in
Area of Outstanding Natural Beauty Endangered Species
AP CMLI
Accredited Professional chartered member of the Landscape Institute
AQA CoCP
air quality assessment Code of Construction Practice
ASWL CPET
Approved Standards and Weightings List Central Point of Expertise on Timber
CSH
B Code for Sustainable Homes
BAP
Biodiversity action plan D
BIM DBE
Building Information Model Design Basis Events
BPM DBT
best practicable means Design Basis Threats
BS DEFRA
British Standard Department for Environment, Food and Rural
Affairs
C
DfD
Design for Deconstruction
CCS
Considerate Constructors Scheme
DPoW
Digital Plan of Work
CDM
Construction (Design and Management)
DS
Regulations
Design Stage
CE
Undefined E
CHP EcIA
Combined heat and power Ecological Impact Assessments
Glossary Infrastructure (United Kingdom)
EclA
ecological impact assessment I
EeB IAQM
European Environmental Bureau Institute of Air Quality Management
EIA IBA
ecological impact assessment Incinerator bottom ash
EMS ICE
Environmental Management System Institute of Civil Engineers
EP ICT
eutrophication potential Information Communication Technology
EPD ID
Environmental Product Declaration Integrated design
EST IEEM
Energy Saving Trust Ecology and Environmental Management
EU IES
Europe Institution of Environmental Sciences
IH
F Institute of Hydrology
FBA ILCD
Furnace bottom ash international life cycle data
FORS ILE
Fleet Operators Recognition scheme Institution of Lighting Engineers
FRA ILO
Flood Risk Assessment International Labour Organization
FSC ILP
Forest Stewardship Council Institution of Lighting Professionals
G IMechE
Institution of Mechanical Engineers
GHG
Greenhouse gas IPCC
Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change
GI
Green Infrastructure
K
H KPI
key performance indicator
HWD
hazardous waste disposed
Glossary
L N
LA NERC
Local authority Natural Environment Research Council
LAQM NGO
Local Air Quality Management non-governmental organisations
LCA NHWD
Life Cycle Assessment non-hazardous waste disposed
LCC NPPF
Life Cycle Cost National Planning Policy Framework
LED NRMM
Light-emitting diode non-road mobile machinery
LEP NSO
Local Enterprise Partnerships National Scheme Operator
LLFA
Lead Local Flood Authorities O
ODP
LOAEL
Ozone Depleting Potential
lowest observed adverse effect level
OPI
LRF
Operational Performance Indicators
Local Resilience Forums
LULUCF P
Land Use Change and Forestry
PAH
LVIA polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons
landscape and visual impact assessment
PCS
LZC Post-Construction Stage
Low or zero carbon
PFA
Pulverised Fuel Ash
M
POCP
ME
photochemical ozone creation
a class of traffic route
POE
MEICA
Post Occupancy Evaluation
mechanical, electrical, instrumentation, control,
automation
PRP
project resilience plan
MMP
Materials Management Plan
MW
megawatt
Glossary Infrastructure (United Kingdom)
STEM
Q science, technology engineering and maths
QA SuDS
Quality Assurance Sustainable Drainage system
QMLC SuRF
Quality Mark Scheme for Land affected by Sustainable Remediaton Forum
Contamination
T
R
TSO
RMP The Stationery Office
Resource Management Plan
RSM U
Responsible sourcing of materials
UKCIP
UKCIP
S
SAS W
strategic assessment stage
WebTAG
Web-based Transport Analysis Guidance
SC
Security Check
WHO
World Health Organisation
SHW
Specification for Highway Works
WLC
Whole life cost
SIA
Security Industry Authority or social impact
WRAP
assessment
Waste Resources Action Programme
SMLCC
Standardised method for life cycle costing
SOAEL
significant observed adverse effect level
SPZ
source protection zones
SQA
Suitably Qualified Acoustician
SQE
Suitably qualified ecologist
SQLA
suitably qualified landscape architect
SSSI
Site of Special Scientific Interest
355
Cover
blank page

Sustainability Guide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Sustainability Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

blank page

Terms and conditions

Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only.

BRE Global Ltd Pilot.

Technical Manual: Version: SD219 Issue: 2.0 Issue Date: 12/11/2015 i

List of figures vii

About BRE Global Limited 1

About this scheme document 2

Scope of BREEAM New Construction Infrastructure (pilot) scheme 12

Scoring and rating BREEAM assessed infrastructure 19

BREEAM evidential requirements 26

ID 01 Option appraisal and objectives 36

ID 02 Project team collaboration 44

ID 03 Handover and aftercare 49

ID 05 Whole life costing 58

ID 06 Whole life environmental impacts 64

Res 01 Business continuity 76

Res 02 Risk assessment and mitigation 79

Res 03 Designing for future needs 93

Res 04 Surface water run-off 98

Res 05 Durability 104

ST 01 Consultation plan 109

ST 02 Consultation and engagement 114

ST 03 Responsible construction practices 120

ST 04 Owner operator requirements 125

Local wellbeing 128

LW 01 Economic impact 129

LW 02 Social impact 137

Tra 01 Transport impact assessment 147

Tra 02 Travel and logistics plan 153

ii Technical Manual: Version: SD219 Issue: 2.0 Issue Date: 12/11/2015

Tra 03 Transport connectivity 159

Land use and ecology 162

LUE 01 Land use and value 164

LUE 02 Soil and vegetation management 169

LUE 03 Remediation of land contamination 172

LUE 04 Ecological impact assessment and action plan 177

LUE 05 Protection of biodiversity 183

LUE 06 Enhancement of biodiversity 187

LUE 07 Land use changes 192

Landscape and heritage 197

LSH 01 Landscape and visual impact 198

LSH 02 Heritage assets 204

Pol 01 Air quality 211

Pol 02 Water pollution 218

Pol 03 Noise and vibration 228

Pol 04 Light pollution 237

Mat 01 Environmental life cycle impacts 244

Mat 02 Responsible sourcing of materials 253

Mat 03 Materials efficiency 264

Mat 04 Reuse and recycling 273

Carbon and energy 281

CE 01 Carbon and energy strategy 282

CE 02 Construction site carbon and energy 287

CE 03 Operational carbon and energy 294

Wst 01 Construction waste management 301

Wat 01 Water efficiency planning and implementation 311

Wat 02 Water monitoring 316

Appendix A - Strategic and project detail stages links 322

Appendix B - The Approved Standards and Weightings List (ASWL) 327

iv Technical Manual: Version: SD219 Issue: 2.0 Issue Date: 12/11/2015

Table 3: BREEAM rating benchmarks 19

Table 4: Minimum standards for BREEAM in Infrastructure 20

Table 5: Example calculation for BREEAM Infrastructure rating 23